14912842-RHDCPSRM-Riso Hc5500 Digital Color Printer Service Repair Manual.desbloqueado (1)

7/24/2019 14912842-RHDCPSRM-Riso Hc5500 Digital Color Printer Service Repair Manual.desbloqueado (1)

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/14912842-rhdcpsrm-riso-hc5500-digital-color-printer-service-repair-manualdesbloqueado 1/496

Front Cover

HC5500

T E C H N I C A L M A N U A L

REVISION 2.1

SEPTEMBER 2006

RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN)RISO, INC. (U.S.A.)RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.)RISO HONG KONG LIMITED (HONG KONG)RISO U.K. (U.K.)RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND)RISO KOREA LIMITED (KOREA)

RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY)RISO FRANCE (FRANCE)RISO IBERICA (SPAIN)RISO CANADA (CANADA)ZHUHAI RISO TECHNOLOGY (CHINA)RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA)RISOGRAPH ITALIA (ITALY)





CONTENTS

Maintenance Notes

1.Precautions.....................................................................................................4

1-1.General precautions...........................................................................4

1-2.Special precautions for color inkjet printers .......................................4

1-3.Other precautions for inspection and maintenance............................6

1-4.Sensors..............................................................................................6

2.Tools...............................................................................................................7

2-1.List of general tools ............................................................................7

2-2.List of special tools for servicing HC5500 ..........................................9

2-3.Periodical Maintenance....................................................................12

3.Printer setup procedure ................................................................................13

3-1.Confirmations to be performed during printer setup.........................13

4.Other precautions .........................................................................................14

4-1.Precautions for machine setup.........................................................14

4-2.Precautions for use ..........................................................................14

4-3.Printing precautions .........................................................................15

Removal of Covers

Disassembly 2

1.Removal of covers..........................................................................................2

Device overview

1.HC5500 Machine Specification.......................................................................2

2.Overview of Mechanisms................................................................................3

2-1.Structural blocks.................................................................................3

2-2.Overview of paper transport...............................................................4

2-3.Ink flow passages...............................................................................6

First paper feed section

Mechanisms 2

1.Standard paper feed tray mechanism.............................................................2

1-1.Basic mechanism...............................................................................2

1-2.Paper size detection mechanism .......................................................3

2.Standard paper feed tray elevating mechanism .............................................4

2-1.Basic mechanism...............................................................................42-2.Feed tray button .................................................................................4

2 3 St d d f d t ti f t h i 6



3.Remaining paper volume detection mechanism ............................................ 7

4.First paper feed mechanism...........................................................................8

4-1.Paper transport mechanism...............................................................8

4-2.Paper stripper mechanism...............................................................10

4-3.Paper feed pressure adjustment mechanism ..................................10Disassembly 11

1.Standard paper feed tray unit.......................................................................11

1-1.Removal of standard paper feed tray unit........................................11

1-2.Removal of paper width VR, paper detection sensor, and paper sizedetection sensor...............................................................................13

2.Pickup roller shaft.........................................................................................14

2-1.Removal of pickup roller shaft (pickup roller, scraper)..................... 14

2-2.Removal of first paper feed stay assembly......................................15

2-3.Removal of paper feed clutch and paper feed shaft ........................ 16

3.Elevator mechanism & bottom guide plate...................................................17

3-1.Removal of elevator motor...............................................................17

3-2.Removal of bottom guide plate ........................................................ 19

3-3.Removal of standard paper feed tray lower limit switch................... 20Adjustment 21

1.Adjustment of the upper limit sensor position...............................................21

2.Adjustment of stripper pressure ................................................................... 22

3.Paper width VR correction............................................................................22

4.Other adjustments........................................................................................23

4-1.Standard paper feed tray upper limit position ..................................23

4-2.Standard paper feed tray postfeed .................................................. 234-3.Paper feed start from standard paper feed tray...............................23

4-4.Assist for standard paper feed tray..................................................23

4-5.Multiple feed detection for standard paper feed tray........................ 23

4-6.Gap between the papers..................................................................23

Multi-tray paper feed section

Mechanisms 2

1.Machine configuration .................................................................................... 2

1-1.Basic structure ................................................................................... 2

1-2.Paper transport path .......................................................................... 3

2.Paper transport section in the MTPF Unit ...................................................... 4

2-1.Paper feed tray .................................................................................. 4

2-2.Feed tray elevating mechanism.........................................................4

2-3.Paper transport mechanism...............................................................6

2-4.Vertical transfer unit...........................................................................8Disassembly 10

1.Paper feed trays...........................................................................................101-1.Removal of paper feed trays............................................................10



1-2.Removal of paper width VR (potentiometer) ....................................11

2.Paper transport unit in the MTPF Unit. .........................................................12

2-1.Removal of paper transport unit.......................................................12

3.Vertical transfer unit......................................................................................14

3-1.Removal of vertical transfer unit.......................................................14

4.Disassembly of other parts ...........................................................................18Adjustment 19

1.Adjustment of upper limit sensor position.....................................................19

2.Stripper adjustment.......................................................................................20

3.Paper width VR correction............................................................................21

4.Multiple feed sensor (feed sensor 3) adjustment..........................................21

5.Other adjustments ........................................................................................21

5-1.Amount of postfeed..........................................................................21

5-2.Assist................................................................................................21

5-3.Double-feed detection timing. ..........................................................21

Second paper feed section

Mechanisms 2

1.Mechanism of the second paper feed section ................................................2

1-1.Paper transport path ..........................................................................2

1-2.Drive system for paper transport......................................................11Disassembly 13

1.Registration roller upper ...............................................................................13

2.Registration roller lower................................................................................163.Side registration unit.....................................................................................20

4.Transfer unit..................................................................................................23

5.Transfer belt..................................................................................................25

6.Belt encoder..................................................................................................27

7.Transfer belt motor .......................................................................................28

8.Suction fan....................................................................................................29

9.Cleaning roller...............................................................................................30

10.BP Spacer, Gear and BP spacer motor......................................................31

11.Exit unit.......................................................................................................3311-1.Exit motor unit ................................................................................34

11-2.Wing motor.....................................................................................34

12.Sponge roller ..............................................................................................35

13.Flipper unit..................................................................................................36

14.Flipper roller upper / Flipper roller lower.....................................................37

15.Duplex entrance roller.................................................................................38

16.Duplex unit..................................................................................................40

17.Duplex belt upper........................................................................................41

18.Duplex belt lower ........................................................................................4319.Switchback unit upper.................................................................................44

20 Switchback unit lower 45



21.Switchback drive roller ...............................................................................47

22.Switchback unit .......................................................................................... 48

23.Main motor ................................................................................................. 49

24.Registration clutch......................................................................................50

25.Paper feed clutch ....................................................................................... 52

26.Duplex clutch unit.......................................................................................53

27.Multiple feed sensor (receive) ....................................................................54

28.Lift gear unit................................................................................................55

29.Multiple feed sensor (send)........................................................................57Adjustment 58

1.Adjusting the skew of the transfer unit belt...................................................59

1-1.< Overview of adjustment > ............................................................. 59

1-2.< Adjustment method >....................................................................59

2.Adjustment to position the transfer unit parallel to registration rollers.......... 62

3.Transfer belt speed adjustment....................................................................65

4.Initial paper feed motor adjustment..............................................................665.Adjustment of backup roller position ............................................................ 68

6.Adjustment mechanism of registration roller paper guide ............................ 69

7.Adjustment of the Registration roller upper..................................................70

8.Adjustment mechanism of registration roller guide ...................................... 72

9.Adjustment of frame distortion compensation .............................................. 73

10.Adjustment of CCD gain on the side registration unit.................................74

11.Adjustment of the Flipper Gate position ..................................................... 76Cleaning method 78

1.Removal of paper dust ................................................................................. 782.Cleaning the rollers ...................................................................................... 80

Ink supply passages

Mechanisms 2

1.Mechanism of ink supply passages................................................................2

1-1.Ink supply passages ..........................................................................2

1-2.Main parts of the ink feed passages .................................................. 5

1-3.Main parts in the waste ink passage................................................161-4.Mechanisms common to the ink feed and waste ink passages.......21

1-5.Operations of ink supply passages..................................................22Disassembly 25

1.Bottle joint (K, C, M, Y).................................................................................25

2.Receiver PCB...............................................................................................29

3.Ink Reservoir K / C / M / Y............................................................................31

4.Overflow tank ............................................................................................... 35

5.Pressure pump unit ...................................................................................... 36

6.Pressure chamber........................................................................................37

7.ID unit / ID solenoid valve.............................................................................38

7-1.ID unit...............................................................................................38



7-2. <Removing ID solenoid valve > ......................................................41

8.Print head .....................................................................................................42

9.Head drive PCB............................................................................................46

10.Cleaning unit...............................................................................................47

11.Suction head...............................................................................................50

12.Cap (exists on HC5000 only)......................................................................51

13.Suction chamber.........................................................................................52

14.Ink catch pan ..............................................................................................54

15.Waste ink tank ............................................................................................55

16.Waste ink tank holder .................................................................................56

17.Suction pump unit, pump filter, pump sponge ............................................57Adjustment 59

1.Adjustment after print head replacement......................................................59

1-1.Parameter setting.............................................................................59

1-2.Preparation for the image adjustment ..............................................60

1-3. Connection of USB cable from the HC printer to Laptop PC. .........601-4.Installation method of the USB driver...............................................61

1-5.Set up method of auto image adjustment software..........................61

1-6.Set up method of Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner driver................61

1-7.Set up method of manual image adjustment software .....................61

1-8.Auto image adjustment procedure ...................................................61

1-9.Warm-up operation for the transfer belt ...........................................62

1-10.Setting adjustment patterns on the flatbed scanner.......................62

1-11.Placing the Matte Papers correctly on the feed tray ......................63

1-12.Preparation of the Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner.......................64

1-13.Executing the auto image adjustment. ...........................................67

1-14.Execution of Manual Image Adjustment.........................................89

2.Adjustments on the Cleaning Unit. ...............................................................95

2-1.Cleaning start position......................................................................95

2-2.Cleaning position..............................................................................96

2-3.Cleaning finish position ....................................................................97

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting for printing problems 2

1.Causes of main printing problems and corrective measures..........................2

1-1.Procedure for responding to printing problems..................................2

2.Explanation of automatic image adjustment and adjusted image quality .......5

2-1.Overview of automatic image adjustment ..........................................5

2-2.Overview of test patterns for image adjustment.................................5

2-3.Parameters and image quality ...........................................................5

2-4.Image defects caused by erroneous image adjustment performed byservice personnel ...............................................................................6

2-5 Effects of parameters and image characteristics 9



Paper receiving section

Mechanisms 2

1.Basic mechanism........................................................................................... 2

1-1.Overview of mechanism.....................................................................2

2. Fence sliding mechanism..............................................................................42-1.Fence sliding mechanism .................................................................. 4

2-2.Sliding operations at the beginning of the print operation.................. 6

2-3.Other..................................................................................................6Disassembly 7

1.Paper receiving tray ....................................................................................... 7

1-1.Removing the paper receiving tray < disassembly > ......................... 7

2.The parts in the paper receiving tray..............................................................8

2-1.Removing of the side fence belt.........................................................8

2-2.Removing the side fence pulse motor................................................92-3.Removing the end fence belt ........................................................... 10

2-4.Removing the end fence pulse motor .............................................. 11

Controller & power supply unit

Specification 2

1.PS7R-9000.....................................................................................................2

2.HC3R-5000 .................................................................................................... 3

3Mechanism 4

1.Controller (PS7R-9000 & HC3R-5000) .......................................................... 4

1-1.Front panel of the controller...............................................................4

1-2. Back panel of the controller .............................................................. 6Disassembly 8

1.PS7R for HC5000...........................................................................................8

2.PS7R-9000, PS7R-9000(G2) & HC3R-5000..................................................9

3.Power supply unit.........................................................................................10

Test mode

Test mode (SE-Mode) 2

1.Operation method...........................................................................................2

1-1.Startup and shutdown of the Test mode............................................2

1-2.Operations in Test mode....................................................................2

2.List of menu items .......................................................................................... 3

2-1.Menu items in Normal SE mode ........................................................ 3

2-2.Menu items related to Finisher.........................................................22

1.List of HS2000 scanner menu items ............................................................ 36

1-1 Getting into and getting out of the Test mode 36



1-2.Test Mode Menu List for HS2000 Scanner......................................37

Panel messages

Overview of panel messages 2

1.Overview of panel...........................................................................................22.Basic structure of panel ..................................................................................2

2-1.LED-1.................................................................................................2

2-2.Power key ..........................................................................................3

2-3.Print mode key ...................................................................................3

3.Error indication by LEDs.................................................................................4

3-1.Outline diagram..................................................................................4

3-2.Consumable information ....................................................................4

3-3.Error types..........................................................................................4

4.Panel messages .............................................................................................54-1.Overview of messages.......................................................................5

5.Types of errors................................................................................................6

5-1.Error type ...........................................................................................6

5-2.Explanation of panel messages .......................................................13

6.Panel messages for FB and AF area............................................................33

6-1.Overview of messages.....................................................................33

6-2.Error type .........................................................................................33

6-3.Error reset method ...........................................................................34

6-4.Explanation of panel messages .......................................................34

PCBs and Schematic diagrams

1.Role of PCB....................................................................................................2

2.Power Supply Unit ..........................................................................................4

3.Notes at the time of ORIP PCB exchange......................................................5

4.Downloading/Upgrading the machine program firmware................................7

5.Exchange of ORMC (mechanical control) PCB..............................................8

6.Schematic.....................................................................................................10

Scanner

Mechanism 2

1.RISO Scanner HS2000...................................................................................2

1-1.Specification.......................................................................................2

2.FB Unit............................................................................................................3

2-1.Original Set Section ...........................................................................3

2-2.Original Scanning...............................................................................42-3.Functional positions of the scanner....................................................5



3-1.Original Set Section ...........................................................................6

3-2.Original Path ...................................................................................... 7

3-3.Roller Rotations ................................................................................. 9Disassembly 11

1.FB unit..........................................................................................................11

1-1.Covers..............................................................................................11

1-2.Stage Glass ..................................................................................... 12

1-3.Original Detection Sensor and Original Size Detection Sensors ..... 12

1-4.Lamp................................................................................................13

1-5.CCD Unit..........................................................................................13

1-6.Cooling Fan......................................................................................14

1-7.Stage Cover Sensor and Stage Cover Angle Sensor......................14

1-8.Read Motor ...................................................................................... 14

2.AF Unit ......................................................................................................... 15

2-1.Stripper Area....................................................................................152-2.Parts around the Feed Roller...........................................................16

2-3........................................................Parts on the Original Feed Tray18

2-4...............................................................Parts on the AF Drive Area19

3. ..................................................................AF & FB Firmware Downloading22Adjustment 24

1.Adjustments on the AF Unit..........................................................................24

1-1.AF Tray VR Sensor..........................................................................24

1-2.AF Original IN Sensor......................................................................24

1-3.Other Adjustments ........................................................................... 24



Maintenance Notes

CHAPTER 1: Maintenance Notes

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

CAUTION

[ Handling of Lithium Battery ]

-Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used lithiumbattery.

1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the batterywill be short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly orone upon another, the above-mentioned case will occur.

- DANGER -If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some casesexplode into fire.

2. Never heat up the battery.

- DANGER -

If you heat the battery up to more than 100 degrees Celsius or put it into thefire, it may burn dangerously or explode.

3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.

- DANGER -

If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurtyour throat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire.

If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out ofthe sealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.

4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.

If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.

Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.

[ Replacement of the Lithium Battery ]

1) The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized servicetechnician.

2) The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type recom-mended by the manufacturer.

3) Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer instructions.



Maintenance Notes

!! WARNING !!

Important Safety Precautions

(1) Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine.

1) To avoid injuries:

Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling,

or when making adjustments on the machine.

2) Protection of the machine:

Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplug-

ging the electrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.

(2) WARNING:

The back light tube of LCD of the Control Panel on this Model contains mercury

which must be recycled or disposed of as hazardous waste.

(3) Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

1) To avoid electrical failure:

The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm

fit.

2) Protection of the electrical components:

The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a

loose connector.

FIRST

THEN

Press the ends.

Press the center, firmly.

Wire harness connector



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1.Precautions

1-1.General precautions

* Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet before performing maintenance.

* Be careful to avoid gett ing neckties, clothing, or long hair tangled in

moving parts.

* I f you must perform work while the machine power is on, exercise the

utmost caution.

* Never perform maintenance while the machine is operating.

* Be caution about the automatic descent operation of the transfer unit.

* After predetermined time, the descent operation of the transfer unit to the standby position and thesliding operation of the cleaning unit to ink heads position are automatically performed.

* Be caution not to turn ON the machine and be injured by pinching hands or arms when covers areremoved for maintenance work.

* Work careful ly to avoid injuring yourself on the sharp edges of metal sheets

or springs.

* When a wrist watch, a r ing, etc. become the obstacle of work, work by

removing i t .

1-2.Special precautions for color inkjet printers

* Maintain the device to keep i t free of dust ( including paper dust) .

Dust and paper dust adhering to the nozzles of the print heads may result in a misfire.

Clean internal paper paths with a vacuum cleaner to remove dust (including paper dust) at peri-odic intervals - for example, when replacing waste ink tanks (periodic inspections). Clean moreor less frequently, depending on your specific operating conditions. The amount of paper dust

that accumulates in the machine will depend on the type of paper used. Never use an air duster, since doing so will raise paper dust and causes misfires.

* Ink storage

Store ink cartridges in the specified conditions. Follow the [first in, first out] principle whenremoving ink cartridges from storage, and use ink promptly.

Do not store ink cartridges in environments that may degrade the ink. Degraded ink is morelikely to cause nozzle misfires and other problems.

* Precautions for use of inks

Do not shake the ink bottles before using. Shaking the bottle will generate air bubbles and mix sediment into the ink solution, making noz-zle misfires more likely.

Do not refill with ink. Check ink left unused for extended periods after ink cartridges are unsealed to make sure it

remains usable. Ink left in ink cartridges for extended periods after the cartridges are unsealed will oxidize anddegrade. Try to use up ink as quickly as possible after ink cartridges are unsealed. Using degraded ink may result in problems that require the replacement of the print heads orother ink-handling parts (misfiring nozzles).

* Precautions for anticipated periods of extended disuse

Ink in the internal ink passages may degrade or dry out over time, resulting in nozzle misfiresand other problems. In the worst cases, misfiring nozzles will require replacing the print heads.

To avoid these problems, we recommend operating the printer now and then.

* Precautions for use of the printer after long storage



Maintenance Notes

If print head cleaning is not performed before use, misfiring nozzles or other printing problemsmay occur. Start by checking for any misfiring nozzles.

If the nozzles are misfiring, perform head cleaning. In some cases, the head cleaning procedure will need to be repeated several times to clear theprint head nozzles.

If the nozzle condition does not improve after the nozzles are checked for misfiring and strong

cleaning (conducted for each color) is repeated several times, the print heads may need to bereplaced.

* Differences between display and print colors

The colors on prints may differ slightly from the colors seen on your display device.

The difference in the colors may be attributable to various factors, including differences betweenRGB and CMYK color systems, the RIP color system, display device settings, etc.

* Never touch the surfaces of the print head nozzles.

Scratching the print head nozzle surface or dust adhering to the print head nozzle surface maycause printing problems. Never wipe the print head nozzle surface.

In the worst cases (misfiring nozzles), such problems may require replacement of the print

heads. To prevent problems, avoid touching print head nozzle surfaces during machine mainte-nance. Be careful to avoid scratching print head nozzle surfaces with tools or parts when work-ing near the print heads.

* Protect the print heads from any physical shock.

The print heads are extremely fragile. Handle them carefully, and avoid dropping or strikingthem.

* Selection of paper type

Use only the specified paper type. Using the wrong paper may result in poor adhesion of ink tothe paper.

If you choose to use a paper product not specifically recommended by the manufacturer, firstperform a printing test. Papers producing paper dust will cause misfires.

Ink that fails to adhere to the paper may be left on the transport roller or transfer belt, smudgingsubsequent prints.

Internal parts contaminated by ink may require more frequent maintenance. To avoid theseproblems, select your paper carefully.

* Maintenance of proper operating condit ions

Ink viscosity affects the ink ejecting performance of inkjet printers.

Ink viscosity increases with lower temperatures, making ejection problems like nozzle misfiresmore likely. Use the printer only under the specified operating conditions.

* Cleaning wipe

To wipe off ink from the printer, use the Kimtech or Kimwipe products manufactured by CRECIA

Corp. or similar dust- and fiber-free materials. Never use ordinary tissue paper. Fibers and paper dust from cleaning materials may cause nozzle misfires and other problems.

• Never wipe the print head (the head surface). Let the machine clean the head by itself.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-3.Other precautions for inspection and maintenance

Precautions for inspections

If a defect or abnormality is found during inspections, correct the problem and replace parts, ifnecessary.

Precautions for parts removal

When ascertaining the location of a problem, also determine the cause of the problem. Afterdetermining whether it is necessary to remove parts or disassemble the machine, perform therequired repairs according to the procedures given in the technical manual.

Watch for ink leaks when disassembling ink-handling components.

Don't apply power beyond necessity with the ink tube junction. Moreover, work, being careful forthe ink tube junction not to disconnect accidentally.

When disassembling a component consisting of many parts, similar parts or symmetrical rightand left parts, organize the removed parts to ensure proper reassembly.

1) Set aside and arrange removed parts.

2) Clearly identify which parts are to be replaced and which parts are to be reused.

3) When replacing screws or other fasteners, use only parts of the specified size.

Precautions for reinstal lat ion and reassembly To reassemble or reinstall parts, follow the disassem-

bly or removal sequence in reverse, unless otherwisespecified.

If parts have protrusions and indentations for position-ing (half pierced), align them carefully to ensureproper installation.

When you attach the ink tube, attach after wiping offfinely, when the inner side of the ink tube or ink tube junction is dirty in ink.

Precautions for electrical work

If bundled wires have come loose, use a cable tie orband to hold them together after finishing the work.

When installing parts, be careful to avoid pinching or damaging electrical wires.

Replace blown or defective fuses with fuses of the specified capacity rating. In addition to equipment damage, using a fuse with a rating above the specified value may resultin fire.

Others.

In making the adjustment by SE mode, No.8.5.6.1 must be activated to save the changed dataonto both the NVRAM on the ORIP PCB and FlashMemory. Otherwise the change is down-loaded onto the NVRAM only with no backup.

If this process is omitted, restoring the data will take time when a parameter error occurs on the

NVRAM. If the updated information is always stored in the FlashMemory, No.8.5.6.2 by the SE-mode eas-ily restores the data back onto the NVRAM.

1-4.Sensors

Be sure to turn off power before disconnecting or connecting sensors.

Photosensor types

half pierced



Maintenance Notes

In general, photo sensors can be divided into four types: the interrupt type (U-shaped), the actu-ator type, the reflection type, and the transmission type.

Magnetic sensor types

Some magnetic sensors use Hall ICs, while others use magnetic reed switches.

Switch types

Microswitches use either N.O. (NormallyOpen) contact or N.C. (Normally Closed)

contact. The N.O. contact closes when the switch

actuator is pressed.

The N.C. contact opens when the switchactuator is pressed.

2.Tools

Using tools other than those specified may result in damage to screws or other parts, or result inpersonal injury. Be sure to have all the necessary tools on hand before beginning work.

2-1.List of general tools

interrupt type (U-shaped) actuator type

reflection type transmission type

send

receive

send

sendsend

receive

receive

receive

COM COM

N.C. N.C.

N.O. N.O.

Type Size Shaft length, etc.

Phillips screwdriver No. 2 250 mm

No. 2 100 to 150 mm

No. 2 Stubby type

No. 1 75 to 100 mm

Flathead screwdriver 6 mm 100 to 150 mm

3 mm 100 to 150 mm

1.8 mm Precision type



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Box driver 8 mm 100 to 150 mm

7 mm 100 to 150 mm

5.5 mm 100 to 159 mm

Spanner 5 mm, 5.5 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm, 13 mm, adjustable

Allen wrench 6.0mm, 5.0 mm, 4.0 mm, 3.0 mm, 2.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 1.5 mm

Steel measure 150 mm, 300 mm

Long-nose pliers

Pliers

Snap-ring pliers

Nipper

Penlight

Tester

Soldering iron 20 to 30 W

File Flat, rounded

Type Size Shaft length, etc.



Maintenance Notes

2-2.List of special tools for servicing HC5500

HEAD ANGLE JIG

For adjustment of print head position after replacement.

5.5-mm box driver with adjustment scale (8 equally

spaced marks around the periphery).

Transfer unit support jig

For removal of belt-drive transport unit.

Provided inside the machine.

Interlock switch jig

Jig for temporarily deactivating the interlock switch so

that the right/left front door remain open during operation

checks.

Jig 1 : Top photo (2 pcs) - right hand door removed.

Jig 2 : Center photo (1 pc) - left hand door removed.

Jig 3 & 4 : Bottom photo for - inner cover removed.

Printer unit lifting jig

Used to raise and move the machine for equipment

setup.

Image adjustment utility software:



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Notebook PC (commercially available)

Used to run image adjustment utility software and perform

image adjustment and other tasks.

The following are the minimum hardware requirements:

OS: Windows 2000 or XP

CPU: OS-compatibleHDD: Minimum free space of 500 MB

USB 2.0 (2 or more ports)

A4 size flatbed scanner (commercially available)

Used for Image adjustments after print head replace-

ment.

[ CANON CanoScan Lide 35, 40, 50 or 60 ]

REFERENCE CHART

Reference chart used for scanner calibration during

image adjustment.

[When using A4 scanner, the chart must be cut to the A4-

size line before use if not precut to that size when sup-

plied.]

USB 2.0 cables: 2 types of cables (commercially available)

One normal type USB 2.0 cable and one USB 2.0 extension

cable.

Used for image adjustment

Printer unit - PC [extension USB 2.0 cable]

PC - Scanner [normal USB 2.0 cable]

Cleaning wipes (commercially available)

For cleaning inside the device.Kimtech, Kimwipe (manufactured by CRECIA Corp.), or

similar product. Use a wiper that leaves no fiber or paper

residue. Never use ordinary tissue paper.



Maintenance Notes

Gloves (commercially available)

To be worn when replacing ink-handling parts.

Use powder-free gloves, such as the Cleanoir nitrile

gloves manufactured by [As One Corporation]. Do not

use gloves coated internally with lubricating powder,

since powder from the gloves may enter ink passages

and cause nozzle misfires. Gloves of any type are suit-

able for handling waste liquid. Use gloves to protect

hands from ink and waste liquid.

Vacuum cleaner (commercially available)

Used to remove paper dust from inside the machine.

Binder clip (commercially available)

Used to clamp tubes containing ink to prevent ink from

leaking out when the tubes are disconnected and

removed. [Not recommended if the clips tend to deform

the ink tubes.]

IPA (isopropyl alcohol) or equivalentUsed for cleaning rollers.

A4-size coated paper

Used in image adjustment.

Loupe (magnifier)

For inspection of printing problems, such as color shifts.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-3.Periodical Maintenance

Parts in which without a periodical maintenance cannot keep the good operation of the machine.

Torque driver

Used to tighten replaced print heads to the specified

torque of 9.0 kfg-cm.

Syringe of about 20 ml in size (commercially available)

For removing ink from the Overflow Tank or from the ID

Unit.

(New unused syringe should be used when removing ink

from the ID Unit.)

Air FilterManufacturer: SARTORIUS

Type: Minisart 17594-K 5.0 micrometer

Needed when sending air to the ID Unit using the

Syringe to remove ink from the ID Unit.

(This is to prevent dust from getting into the ID Unit.)

Part Name Maintenance Interval Reference

Pump sponge in Suction UnitPump filter in Suction UnitWaste ink tankCleaning roller (HC5000 only)

Replacement Approx. 300,000printing.

Transfer unit (Belt & Plate) Cleaning Approx. 300,000printing.

Chapter 6

Switchback roller Cleaning Approx. 300,000printing.

Chapter 6

CCD on Side registration unit Cleaning Approx. 300,000printing.

Chapter 6

Top edge sensors Cleaning Approx. 300,000printing.

Chapter 6



Maintenance Notes

3.Printer setup procedure

3-1.Confirmations to be performed during printer setup

After opening the packages, install and connect the HC5000 main unit, HC control PCB, HCmulti-tray paper feed base, controller, and ink cartridges.

The device will not function correctly if you install an incorrect (incompatible) component in theHC5500 main unit (MC board), HC control PCB, or ink cartridges, due to a delivery error or otherreason.

If you discover an incompatibility among components, return the incorrect component for anexchange. A [Temporary Registration Period] is provided to allow temporary use of the printerduring this time.

Notes regarding temporary registrat ion status

After the package is opened and the machine set up, [Temporary Registration Status] becomeseffective when the machine is turned on for the first time. After seven days, the status changesautomatically to [Official Registration Status].

When in temporary registration status, the [Maintenance Call] LED remains lit. Since the

machine can still operate in this condition, exercise all of the precautions normally required. Therefore, it is necessary to check all the components and consumables for the compatibilityduring the installation, or on the 8th day from the installation the error will show.

During the tentative-registration period, No.5.13.1 by the SE mode will turn off the Maintenancecall LED , but it only erases the LED and the tentative-registration still remains.

SE mode No.5.13.2 cancels No.5.13.1 of the above and lights the Maintenance call LED again.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4.Other precautions

4-1.Precautions for machine setup

For detai led information, refer to the Users Manual for the HC5500 Series.

Discuss with the user to determine where the product is to be installed upon delivery.

To minimize the possibility of malfunctions, equipment problems, and accidents, do not install inany of the following locations:

1) Places exposed to direct sunlight, or bright locations by windows. (If the machine must be installed by a window, install a curtain or shade on the window.)

2) Places subject to significant temperature fluctuations.

3) Places subject to extremes of temperatures or humidity.

Appropriate temperature range: 15 to 30 degrees Celsius

Appropriate humidity range: 40 to 70% (no condensation permitted)

4) Places close to flames or heat sources, close to cold air sources such as air conditioners,or close to hot air sources such as heaters or direct radiation heat sources.

5) Places without adequate ventilation.

6) Places that are excessively dusty.7) Places subject to vibrations.

8) Places with uneven or tilting floors. (Requirements for floor levelness: Max. 10 mm vertical deviation front to back or left toright)

Connection of power supply

When unplugging the power cord, grasp the cord by the plug. Never pull on the cord itself. Pull-ing on the cord directly may damage the cord and lead to fire or electric shock. Be sure to holdthe plug when unplugging the power cord.

Use an exclusive AC outlet. Do not share the AC outlet with other electrical devices.

When using an extension cord, limit the cord length to 5 m. Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not attempt to modify the power cord. Avoid placing heavyitems on the cord, or bending the cord sharply. Damaged cords may result in fire or electricshock.

Connection of ground wire

To prevent a fire or electric shock in the event of electrical leakage, be sure to connect theground wire.

Observe the following when connecting the ground wire:

Ground terminal of AC outlet

Copper rod inserted 65 cm or deeper into the ground

Ground terminal in compliance with grounding standards

Water supply pipe approved for grounding purpose by the waterworks department Do not connect the ground wire to any of the following locations:

Gas pipes

Ground wires designated exclusively for telephones

Lightning conductors

Water supply pipes or faucets connected to a pipeline consisting even partially of plastic

4-2.Precautions for use

Operations

Do not turn off the main power or unplug the power cord while the machine is operating.

Do not open the cover or move the machine while the machine is operating. Open or close covers gently.

Never place heavy items on the machine. Protect it from sudden and powerful shocks or impact.



Maintenance Notes

After the main power is turned off, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it back on.

After an extended period of disuse, perform maintenance (normal cleaning) for the print headsto guard against degraded or dried ink in the ink passages that could clog the print heads. Toavoid such problems, use the machine at regular intervals.

To safeguard against equipment malfunctions and poor print quality, avoid touching the printheads.

Make sure that the ink cartridges (4 colors) are installed at all times, even if it will not be used for

a certain period of time.

Handling and storage of ink cartr idges

Do not shake the ink bottle before use. Shaking the bottle generates air bubbles and can causeprinting problems.

Do not refill with ink.

Ink left in the ink cartridges for an extended period after the cartridges are unsealed maydegrade from exposure to air. In turn, using degraded ink may cause problems with print headsand ink passages.

The viscosity of the ink directly affects the ink-ejecting performance of inkjet printers. Viscosityincreases with lower temperatures, potentially clogging print heads. Be sure to observe thespecified operating conditions and storage temperatures. Check the manufacturing date of the

ink to ensure that it is fresh and use it as soon as possible. The permissible operating temperature range is 15 to 30 degrees Celsius. Using the machine

outside this temperature range may result in printing problems (e.g., reduced volume of ink ejec-tion).

Do not dispose of ink from an ink cartridge into municipal sewers.

Keep the side with the opening face-up during storage.

Do not allow ink to freeze. Keep ink out of direct sunlight. Store ink cartridges in areas where thetemperature does not drop below 5 or exceed 35 degrees Celsius. Check the manufacturingdate before use, and use ink as soon as possible.

The ink used in the device is a flammable liquid. In the event of fire, use a pressurized water and alkali salt mist, foam, powder or carbon dioxidefire extinguisher.

Paper handling and storage

Do not use warped paper.

Printed images will gradually fade (discolor) due to the effects of various elements in the air andlight. To minimize fading and discoloration during storage, allow prints to dry thoroughly, thenlaminate, or place in frames under glass.

If prints are placed in clear folders for storage, use folders made of PET (polyethylene tereph-thalate).

Printed images will discolor if prints are subjected to any moisture (e.g., water or perspiration).Do not store prints in areas where water may splash on them.Do not use oil-base marker pens.Ink from these pens may blotch.

Print density 24 hours after output will differ from the print density immediately after output. Keepin mind that print density decreases over time.

Do not place prints produced by this machine on top of prints produced by a laser printer or pho-tocopier.The toner-printed section of the other print may stick to the print surface, or the tonermay transfer to the print surface.

Store unused paper by covering with the wrapping sheet.

Do not store paper in areas of high temperatures or humidity. Keep out of direct sunlight. Storepaper on a flat surface. Note that warped paper cannot be used in the machine.

4-3.Printing precautions

It is illegal to make duplicates of certain printed materials, even for personal use. Note that possession of duplicates of certain printed materials constitutes a legal violation.

Printing of the following printed materials is illegal:



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Bank notes, coins, government securities, government bond certificates, or local bond cer-tificates (Any copying of such material is illegal, even if the printed matter is clearly markedas SPECIMEN or similar indication.)

Bank notes, coins, bond certificates, etc. circulated in foreign countries.

Unused postal stamps, postcards, etc.

Government-issued revenue stamps, certificate stamps specified in the Liquor Tax Law,etc.

Do not make copies of the following printed materials: Privately issued marketable securities (stock certificates, promissory notes, checks, etc.),

commuter passes, commuter tickets, etc. in numbers exceeding the minimum quantitiesrequired for business.

Government-issued passports and licenses, permits, identification cards, admission tick-ets, meal tickets, etc. issued by public or private organizations

Copyrighted materials such as books, sheet music, paintings, block prints, maps, drawings,photographs, etc.

Relevant laws

Counterfeit Currency and Securities Control Law

Law Concerning Counterfeiting, Alteration, or Forgery of Coins, Paper Currency, Bank

Notes, or Securities Circulated in Foreign Countries Law Concerning Forging of Stamps or Other Postal Materials

Revenue Stamp Counterfeit Control Law

Law Concerning Regulation of Securities Resembling Paper Currency



Removal of Covers

CHAPTER 2: Removal of Covers

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Disassembly

1.Removal of covers

CAUTION : Be careful not to drop washers when removing the screws.

< Top cover >

1) Remove the four M4x12 screws with washers. (HC5000:M4x8 screws)

2) Open the Ink cover and remove the two M4x12 screws with washers. (HC5000:M4x8 screws)

3) Open the front door and loosen a M4x8 IT screw through the hole.* Loosen the screw approximately two turns.

* Take care not to drop the screw inside the cover.

4) Lift the top cover to remove.* Take care not to drop the cover, as injury may result.

* When the Top Cover is removed from the machine, the Ink Cartridge Cover must be kept open, orotherwise the plastic lock-hook on the Ink Cartridge cover will break off.

* While mounting the Top Cover back on the machine, pay caution not to pinch the wire harness on theleft, right and at the bottom.



Removal of Covers

< Ink cover >

1) Open the ink cover.

2) Remove the two M4x10 tapping screws on each side that are used to mount the opening/closing mechanisms.

3) Lift the ink cover to remove.

< Rear cover >

1) Remove the five M4x8 screws with washers.

2) Undo the top center hook to the top cover and slide the rear cover toward the back toremove.

* Take care not to drop the cover, as injury may result.

* Pay caution not to pinch the wire harness when mounting the Rear Cover.

Remove the cover pushing little upside of the cover.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< MTPF rear cover >

1) Remove the seven M4x8 binding screws.

2) Slide the MTPF rear cover toward the back to remove.

< MTPF right cover >

1) Remove the five M4x8 binding screws.2) Remove the MTPF right cover.

< MTPF left cover >

1) Open the MTPF left door and remove the door by taking off two screws on the top.

2) Remove the four M4x8 binding screws from the MTPF left cover

3) Remove the MTPF left cover.

MTPF left door

MTPF left cover

(This door has to be removed first)



Removal of Covers

< Right cover / Left cover >

1) Remove the two M4x8 screws with washers.

2) Pull the cover down to remove.

< Front door R / Front door L >

1) Remove the right / left covers.2) Remove the four M4x8 screws with washers from the hinges.

3) Open and remove the door.* With the screws removed from the hinges, the cover is held in place only by magnetic catchers. Since

opening the cover will free it from any support, exercise caution while performing the work.

* To operate the machine without the front door R / front door L in place, set the dedicated safetyswitch activating jigs at the safety switches (three locations on the inner cover).

* Remove the front door R / front door L. Check to make sure that the duplex unit and vertical transferunit are set if duplex print and MTPF paper supply is used. The setting of the two units can bechecked by closing the door (the door will not close if these two units are not correctly set). Hence,confirmation is not possible without the door.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< Inner cover 1 >

1) Open the front door R / front door L.

2) Remove the three M4x8 screws with washers.

< Inner cover 4 >

1) Open the front door R / front door L.2) Remove the two M4x8 screws with washers.

3) Lift inner cover 4 to remove. (The bottom portion has hooks.).

< Inner cover 3 >


2) Remove the three M4x8 screws and two M4x12 screws with washers. (HC5000 : two M4x12 screws and two M4x8 screws with washers.)

3) Remove the two connectors for the interlock switches (located inside the cover). Detachinner cover 3.

M4x8 screwsM4x12 screws



Removal of Covers

< Inner cover 2 >


2) Remove the Inner cover 3.

3) Remove the knob and lever.

4) Remove a M4x8 screw with washer. Detach inner cover 2.

Cautions in installing the inner cover 2 back on the machine.* In mounting the lever back on the machine, match the D-shaped hole on the lever with the D-shaped

cut on the shaft. If the D-shaped hole is deformed, correct lever position cannot be achieved.

* Set the Lever to the original default position. The center position is the default.

* Pay caution that the wire harness does not come out.

* Pay caution not to pinch the wire harness.

* Depending on how the cover is mounted back on the machine will change the lever position. Theinner cover 2 should be put back by pushing it to the right and to the bottom, as shown on the lastphotograph on this page.

*

Watch out for the wire coming out.

Put the cover back in correct position.

(Push to the right and to the bottom.)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< MTPF molding >

1) Open the front door R/front door L.

2) Detach inner cover 4.

3) Detach inner cover 1.


5) Remove the MTPF molding.



Removal of Covers

< Exit unit cover >

1) Remove the paper receiving tray.


3) Lift the exit unit cover to remove. (The bottom portion has hooks.).

< PCB box cover >

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Loosen the two M3x6 IT screws.

3) Remove the five M3x6 IT screws. (HC5000 : 17 pcs of M3x6 IT screws.)

4) Remove the PCB box cover.* Take care not to drop the cover, as injury may result.

These two screws are

to be loosened only.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< How to set the PCB box to the service posit ion >

1) Remove the right and left screws. Lift the PCB box.

2) Using the removed screws, hold the PCB box in the raised position (right and left).

* Loosen a screw and position the stays out of the way to keep from striking your head against them.

* The dust fan rotates when a print operation is made. Be careful not to touch it and avoid clothing fromgetting tangled in the rotating fan.

* Return the PCB box back to the normal position from the service position before closing the PCB boxcover with the screws. Otherwise the PCB box twists and the screw holes for the stay will not align.

* After returning the PCB box to its original position, be sure to engage the tube to the retaining hooks(at 2 locations.)

Remove screw

REAR RIGHT

Fix the PCB box in raised position by the screw, both on the left and on the right.

Remove screw

REAR LEFT

REAR LEFT

Stay

the retaining hook



Removal of Covers

< Right carriage cover/ left carriage cover >

1) Remove the top cover.

2) Loosen the four IT screws holding the ink cartridge holder unit in place.

3) Slide the entire unit toward the left, looking from the operator’s side.(This step is required only when removing the left carriage cover).

4) Remove the control panel together with the bracket.

5) Unhook the Flat cable of the operation panel out from the two flat cable saddles and lift theFlat cable to access to the holes for the screw driver to go in.

6) Open the front door R/front door L.

7) Lift the knob on the switchback unit U, secure in place, then pull out the duplex unit.

the Flat cable

the operation panel



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8) Loosen the two M4x8 IT screws at the back on each carriage cover.Remove the two M4x8 IT screws at the center. The two screws at the front on each carriage cover need not be removed.

* The screws at the front, which need not be removed contains spacers. If these front screws need tobe removed, make sure not to drop the spacers.

9) Remove each carriage cover through the gap in the frame.

* When removing or reinstalling carriage covers, be careful to avoid catching and pulling the ribboncables connected to the print heads.

* The ink cartridges do not need to be removed when moving the ink cartridge holder unit to the serviceposition. However, if you remove the ink cartridges for any reason, take care to keep foreign particles

off the joint sections on which the ink cartridges mount. (Additionally, keep the joint sections of the inkcartridges clean.)

No need to remove the

screws in the front.

M4x8 IT screws(loosen)

M4x8 IT screws(remove)



Device overview

CHAPTER 3: Device overv iew

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1.HC5500 Machine Specification

HC5500 Main Unit



Device overview

2.Overview of Mechanisms

2-1.Structural blocks

The HC5000 consists of the following six main blocks:

1) First paper feed section:

This section feeds a single sheet of paper from paper stacked in the standard paperfeed tray, sending it to the second paper feed section.

2) Multi-tray paper feed section:

This section feeds a single sheet of paper from the paper stacked in the two front

paper feed trays, sending it to the second paper feed section.

3) Second paper feed section:

This section transports the papers toward the exit tray as printing is done at the print

head section.

In the case of duplex printing, paper is sent to the switchback section for printing on

the other side.

4) Exit section:This section transfers printed paper onto the paper receiving tray.

5) Ink supply section:

This section feeds ink from the ink cartridges to the print heads for printing.

Waste ink generated during cleaning is collected in the waste ink tank.

6) Controller section:

The controller controls operations such as execution of print jobs, touch panel opera-

tions, and scanner operations.

* The controller of HC5000 (except PS7R9000) is installed within the multi-tray paper feed section.

* On HC5500, although the row of the ink cartridges is the order of KCMY, the tubes of K and C cross

before arriving to the ink reservoirs, and the row of the print heads is in order of CKMY.* The row of the print head of HC5000 is in the order of KCMY as with the ink cartridges.

Standard paper feed tray

Paper feed tray (MTPF)

Ink cartridge

Waste ink tank Controller

Switchback section

Print head

Paper receiving tray



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-2.Overview of paper transport

Paper transport

Paper is supplied from the standard paper feed tray to registration rollers by two rollers: scraperand pickup roller.

From paper feed tray 1, paper is sent by the scraper and pickup roller to the registration rollersvia paper feed rollers 3 and 4.

In the same way, paper is sent from paper feed tray 2 by the scraper and pickup roller to the reg-istration rollers via paper feed rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4.

With a suction fan keeping the paper firmly on the transfer belt, the registration rollers transportthe paper under the print heads for printing.

After one side of paper is printed, the paper transport direction is selected by the flipper unit flip-per gate. For simplex printing, paper is transported to the exit tray via the sponge roller. For duplex printing, paper is transported to the switchback unit via the flipper unit and duplexunit.

Paper is then reversed by the switchback unit, and the separation claws send the paper to theregistration rollers once again.

Pickup roller

Scraper


Registration roller

Paper feed roller 1

Paper feed roller 2

Paper feed roller 3

Paper feed roller 4

Paper feed tray 1

Paper feed tray 2

Transfer belt

Suction fan

Sponge roller

Paper receiving tray

Flipper unit

Flipper gate

Duplex unit

Switchback unit

Separation claw



Device overview

Paper transport sensors

The status of paper transported from the paper feed tray is checked by FL feed sensors 1through 4.

A multiple feed can result when A3-size paper is fed from paper feed tray 1, with the secondsheet feeding immediately after the first sheet. To prevent this, paper feed tray 1 is equipped with Multi-tray 1 pickup sensor.

FL feed sensor 3 detects the paper transport status and senses multiple paper feeds from the

paper feed tray. Multiple paper feeds from the standard paper feed tray are detected by the multiple feed sensor.

The status of the paper transported to the registration rollers is detected by the registration sen-sor.

The top edge sensor 1 & 2 detect the leading edge of the paper being transported from the reg-istration rollers and adjust the print start position.

* Although HC5500 is equipped with two sensors 1 & 2, HC5000 is equipped with only one top edgesensor (the location of the top edge sensor on HC5000 is in the same location as the top edge sensor1 of HC5500).

The CCD detects both side edges of the paper being transported from the registration sensorand controls the side printing positions.

If paper is transported with its leading edge lifted, it may collide against the print heads, damag-ing the nozzle surfaces. To prevent this, the paper lift detection sensor detects the lifting of thepaper.

The paper ejection sensor detects the status of the paper transported toward the paper receiv-ing tray.

The flipper sensor detects the status of the paper transported through the flipper unit.

The duplex IN and OUT sensors detect the status of the paper transported through the duplexunit.

The switchback sensor detects the paper entering or exiting the switchback unit.

FL feed sensor 1

FL feed sensor 2

FL feed sensor 3

FL feed sensor 4

FL multi-tray 1 pickup sensor

Multiple feed sensor

Registration sensor Top edge sensor 1 CCD

Paper ejection sensor

Flipper sensor

Duplex belt IN sensor

Duplex belt OUT sensor

Switchback sensor

Paper lift detection sensor

Top edge sensor 2



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-3.Ink flow passages

Overview of ink passages

Ink passages can be categorized into two main types: passages for supplying the ink requiredfor printing, and a waste ink passage for carrying ink used in print head cleaning.

Ink from the ink cartridges is held temporarily in the reservoirs and supplied to the print headsvia ID units (distributors).

The supply of ink is regulated by the opening/closing of solenoid valves installed in the ink pas-sages, and by the solenoid valves for the air passage on each ink chamber. An air open filter isinstalled to prevent paper dust and other particles from entering the ink passages.

During cleaning, a pressure pump forcibly expels ink from the print heads. The dischargedwaste ink is drained into the waste ink tank by the suction pump.

If ink overflows from the air open filter, ink cartridges, reservoirs, ID units, or print heads for anyreason, it is sent to the overflow tank and waste ink tank via the ink pan and ink draining tubes.

Ink cartridgeID unitPrint head

Suction pump

Waste ink tank Pressure pump

Overflow tank

Air open filter

Reservoir

Ink pan

Ink pan



Device overview

Ink supply passages

Each ink flows from the ink cartridge to the reservoir, to the ID unit (distributor), and then to theprint head.

The tip of each ink cartridge is equipped with a TAG. When an ink cartridge is set in position, theTAG communicates with the HC unit to determine the suitability of the ink. If the ink is appropri-ate, the ink fuse solenoid valves are activated to open the ink passage to the reservoirs.

The solenoid valves (ink fuse valves) opens or closes to regulate the flow of ink to the reser-

voirs. The ID units and reservoirs must contain certain amounts of ink at all times. Ink sensors are

used to detect ink levels.

If the ink level in the reservoir falls, the ink fuse valve will be opened and ink will be supplied tothe reservoir from the ink cartridge.

Ink is supplied from the reservoirs to the ID units and to the print heads automatically due to dif-ferences in the heights of liquid heads. Solenoid valves are not used for this ink supply control.

The ink cartridges are opened to the atmosphere via a filter (to prevent entry of paper dust andother particles).

Although the ID units and reservoirs are open to the atmosphere via the overflow tank and filter,open/close control must be provided in certain cases. Air open valves are provided for this pur-

pose. The ID units are not open to the atmosphere under normal conditions. However, they areopen to the atmosphere while ink is being supplied.

The reservoirs are open to the atmosphere under normal conditions, but close when ink issupplied to the ID units and during cleaning operations.

During cleaning operations, air pressure inside each reservoir is increased to expel ink from theprint head. The pressure chamber stores air compressed by the pressure pump. The pressure valves opento send compressed air to the reservoirs.

* On HC5000, the ink fuse valves are located on each reservoir and control the ink supply to the reservoirfrom the ink cartridges.

* On HC5000, one ink fuse solenoid is separately located in the position equivalent to the ink fuse valves onthe HC5500, and when ink suitability is checked by RF-Tag, the ink passages to the reservoirs are opened.

* On HC5000, even if the machine main power is switched OFF, once the ink passages are opened by inkfuse solenoid, the ink passages stays opened until the black ink cartridge cover on the machine is opened.

Print head ID unit

Ink Cartridge Air open filter

Reservoir

Pressure pump

Press chamber

Ink fuse solenoid valve

Overflow tank

Air open valve

Ink sensor

Pressure valve



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Waste ink passage

During cleaning, ink forcibly discharged from the print heads is drawn forward by the suctionnozzles for collection in the waste ink tank via the suction chamber. (The suction pump drawsink, while the suction chamber separates the liquid and the air.)

The waste ink sensor detects the level of waste ink in the waste ink tank.

If ink overflows from an ID unit or reservoir for some reason, it flows to the overflow tank via theair open valve.

If the waste ink level in the overflow tank exceeds the preset level, the overflow tank sensordetects this condition and stops the machine operation. Ink overflowing from the overflow tankflows into the waste ink tank through the waste ink collecting pipe.

Ink that overflows through the air open filter and ink flowing out of ink cartridges and print headsinto the ink pan are also collected in the waste ink tank.

Air open filter Ink Cartridge

Air open valve

ID unitPrint head

Ink pan

Ink pan

Reservoir

Suction pump

Waste ink tank

Overflow tank sensor

Overflow tank

Waste ink sensor

Suction chamber

Suction nozzle




CHAPTER 4: First paper feed sect ion

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanisms

1.Standard paper feed tray mechanism

1-1.Basic mechanism

The paper detection sensor (reflection type) detects the presence/absence of paper in the stan-dard paper feed tray.

Since the last sheet of paper in the standard paper feed tray tends to cause multiple feeds, afinal-sheet multiple feed prevention rubber is provided.

In addition to centering the paper on the tray, the paper guides set on either side of the paperdetects the paper size (paper width).

To adjust paper feed performance to match the paper size, a special mechanism holds the stan-dard paper feed tray at a tilted angle. When the standard paper feed tray is lifted slightly, itremains tilted. When lifted again, it returns to the horizontal position.

Final sheet multiple feed prevention rubber Paper guide

Paper detection sensor

Standard paper feed trayPaper size detection sensor

Paper width potentiometer




1-2.Paper size detection mechanism

< Basic information regarding paper size >

The size of paper loaded in the standard paper feed tray is set manually through the menuscreen. The menus are 4.1.1 for standard feed tray, 4.2.1 for Tray 1, and 4.3.1 for Tray 2.

The following paper sizes can be set:

1) Auto (Initial factory setting)

* When [Auto] is selected, the paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor mounted inthe standard paper feed tray automatically detect the size of the paper in the standard paper feedtray.

2) Standard paper sizes to be registered manually.

3) Custom user paper sizes (up to 5 sizes can be registered) by menu 5.1* While HC5000 does not support printing of the envelopes, HC5500 does.

< Auto detection of paper size >

The paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor detect the size of paper loadedon the paper feed trays.

The paper width potentiometer measures the paper width (in practice, it measures the width ofthe paper guides set on either side of the paper), while the paper size detection sensor detects

paper length (portrait or landscape orientation). The detected paper size is categorized as one of the following standard paper sizes in the chart

below:

* Although HC5500 does support printing on the envelopes, the envelope sizes cannot be detectedautomatically by the paper width potentiometer and paper size detection sensor. Therefore the enve-lope sizes must be selected manually after registering the envelope sizes (custom paper sizes).

< Custom size paper detection >

In the following condition, the paper size cannot be detected. Therefore, the paper size is dis-played as [CUSTOM].

<AUTO> is selected while the paper size is out of above chart.

The paper on the tray does not match with the registered paper size. (The actual paper sizeis detected by the paper width potentiometer and paper size sensor.)

The [CUSTOM] papers are divided into following two categories according to the paper lengthdetected by the paper size sensor.

Customs size L : Long paper. Custom size S : Short paper.

The location of the paper size sensor is at 320mm position on the Standard feed tray, and316mm position on the Tray 1 and Tray 2.

Detected paper width

(mm)

Paper size detec-

tion sensor

Paper size

302 - 292 Paper detected A3

No detection A4-R

262 - 252 Paper detected B4

No detection B5-R

215 - 205 No detection A4

187 - 177 No detection B5

105 - 95 No detection Post Card



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Standard paper feed tray elevating mechanism

2-1.Basic mechanism

The standard paper feed tray is raised and lowered by the elevator motor.

The upper limit position (top stop position) of the standard paper feed tray is detected by the

upper limit sensor. The lower limit position (bottom stop position) is detected by the lower limitsensor.

If the standard paper feed tray is at the lowered position when printing begins, the standardpaper feed tray is raised to the upper limit position. To ensure accurate positioning during thisoperation, the standard paper feed tray is lowered after stopping at the upper limit position, thenraised once again to the upper limit position.

If the standard paper feed tray runs out of paper (as detected by the paper detection sensor),printing halts and the standard paper feed tray descends to the lower limit position.

Since the top sheet of paper on the standard paper feed tray must be kept at the same height,when the upper limit sensor turns Off as the paper is fed, the standard paper feed tray elevatesuntil the upper limit sensor activates.

The detecting conditions of the two Upper limit sensors, A and B, gives three upper limit position

selections. Which one of the three upper limit position is applied depends on the type of the paper on thetray.

* Use SE Modes 5.9.1.1 - 5.9.13.1 to set the stop position for each paper type.

2-2.Feed tray button

Use the feed tray button to raise or lower the standard paper feed tray manually.

The tray descends for the period the button is pressed.

When the standard paper feed tray is at the lower limit position, and if paper is present, the LEDfor the feed tray button will light. Pressing the feed tray button in this condition will raise thestandard paper feed tray to the upper limit position.

•@•@•@•@ãŒ À̂Ê’u

‹‹Ž†ãŒ ÀƒZƒ“ƒT‚̀ ‰ºŒ ÀûŒü

‹‹Ž†ãŒ ÀƒZƒ“ƒT‚a

ã ’† •@‰º

Upper limit sensors AUpper limit sensors B

High Middle Low

Upper limit position

To the lower position




Feed tray button

Elevator motor Elevator lower limit sensor

Elevator upper limit sensor AElevator upper limit sensor B

Detection platePressure adjust lever sensor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-3.Standard paper feed tray operation safety mechanism

Safety switches are installed at two locations to prevent fingers or other body parts from beingcaught by the moving standard paper feed tray. When the safety switch is triggered, the stan-dard paper feed tray Elevator motor halts the operation and a message is displayed.

Paper feed tray upper safety SW: When the scraper cover is pushed up, the switch is triggered.

Paper feed tray lower safety SW: When the lower limit frame is pushed up, the switch is trig-

gered.

Paper feed cover

Scraper cover

Paper feed tray upper safety SW

Lower limit frame

Paper feed tray lower safety SW




3.Remaining paper volume detection mechanism

The volume of remaining paper in the standard paper feed tray is determined by the conditionsdetected by tray volume sensors A and B, and the remaining paper volume is displayed.

The actual position of the standard paper feed tray at the upper limit position is checked by theabove two sensors, and the remaining paper volume is detected. If the standard paper feed

tray is not at the upper limit position, the [Non-standard Status] indication is displayed. However, if the paper detection sensor detects [No Paper], the remaining paper volume is deter-mined to be 0%.

When the remaining paper volume drops to 30% or less, the LED on the main unit panel willlight. If monitored from a PC, the paper remaining volume is detected in four levels.

Level Sensor status Determined

Remaining

paper volumeSensor A Sensor B

Level 0 OFF OFF 100 to 50%

Level 1 ON OFF 50 to 30%Level 2 ON ON 30 to 10%

Level 3 OFF ON 10% or less

Remaining paper volume indication LED for standard paper feed tray

PC Monitoring screen

Detection plate (slides up/down)Interrupt type sensor (fixed)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4.First paper feed mechanism

4-1.Paper transport mechanism

The first paper feed mechanism supplies the top sheet from paper stacked in the standard paperfeed tray to the second paper feed section using the rotating scraper and pickup roller.

The scraper and pickup roller are driven by the main motor, whose rotation is controlled by theOn/Off of the Paper feed clutch.

To prevent the first paper feed section from holding the paper once the paper is supplied to thesecond paper feed section, the scraper and pickup roller contain one way cores to let the papertravel through freely.

Paper feed clutch On/Off t iming

The paper feed clutch activates to rotate the pickup and scraper rollers at a timing determinedby the paper size and simplex/duplex printing selection.

Since actual paper length is measured by the top edge sensor, the feed timing for the first andsecond sheets will differ from the feed timing for the subsequent sheets.

When the registration sensor located before the registration rollers detects paper, the paper feed

clutch turns off after a preset time and ends the first paper feed operation.Pickup rol ler shaft reverse rotat ion prevention mechanism

Paper supplied from the first paper feed section stops after its leading edge is clamped by theregistration rollers (upper and lower) in the second paper feed section, creating a buckle at thetip of the paper. The reverse rotation prevention mechanism prevents reversal of the pickuproller shaft from the stiffer papers kicking back after a buckle is made.

The reverse rotation prevention mechanism consists of a one-way core and paper release lever.The one-way core permits the pickup roller shaft to rotate only in the paper transport direction.

When the reverse rotation prevention mechanism is engaged, jammed paper cannot be pulledtoward the standard paper feed tray side. To release jammed paper, the paper release levermust be pulled toward the rear side to disengage the teeth of the two ratchets.

One way core

Paper release lever

Pickup roller Scraper




Pickup roller

Registration roller Upper

Registration roller Lower Transfer belt

Top edge sensor 1

Registration sensor

Paper feed clutch

Paper feed clutch

Scraper



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4-2.Paper stripper mechanism

This mechanism is located under the pickup roller. This mechanism allows only one sheet tofeed at a time from the standard paper feed tray by the first paper feed operation.

Paper transported by the scraper moves between the pickup roller and stripper pad, after whichthe rotating pickup roller feeds the paper through the pickup roller and stripper roller. The frictionprovided by these parts ensures that only one sheet of paper is fed to the machine.

The stripper pressure adjust knob allows adjustment of pre-stripper pressure to prevent multiplefeeds and paper feed failures.

4-3.Paper feed pressure adjustment mechanism The pressure adjust lever allows adjustment of the spring pressure applied to the paper by the

scraper to two levels, High (thick paper) or Low (standard) selection.

The lever position is detected by the paper feed pressure sensor.

Stripper pressure adjust knob

Stripper pad Stripper roller

Pressure adjust lever

Paper feed pressure sensor Pressure adjust lever spring




Disassembly

1.Standard paper feed tray unit

1-1.Removal of standard paper feed tray unit

< Pre-removal >

(1) Lower the standard paper feed tray to the lower limit position and turn off the main power.

(2) Remove the top cover and remove the rear cover.

(3) Raise the PCB box and keep at the raised position.

< Removal >

(1) Remove the press chamber. (two M3x6 IT screws)

(2) Cut the band binding the wires from the standard paper feed tray and disconnect the two relayconnectors and the ground wire (attached to the relay PCB on the paper feed side).

Relay connector

Ground wire

Fastened to PCB

Press chamber



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(3) Remove the damper covers (two M4x8 screws with washers) from the right and left sides of the standard paper feed tray, damper R (front side, white) (two M3x6 IT screws), and damper L (rear side, black) (two M3x6 IT screws).

(4) Remove the standard paper feed tray unit along the grooves on the shaft hook section, takingcare to avoid damaging the wires.

<< Precautions for reassembly >>

Route the wires as shown in the diagram. Remember to attach a wire band.

Install the right and left dampers correctly. When reinstalling the dampers, lift the standard paper feed tray slightly and align the screw posi-

tions.

Damper L

Damper cover

Attach a band here.




1-2.Removal of paper width VR, paper detection sensor, and paper sizedetection sensor

< Pre-removal >


< Removal of paper size detection sensor >

(1) Remove the standard paper feed tray face plate. (four M3x6 binding screws)(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the paper size detection sensor.

< Removal of paper width VR and paper detection sensor >

(1) Remove the paper guides from the right and left sides (two M3x8 screws with washers each).

(2) Remove the lock levers on the right and left fences (one E-ring each).

(3) Remove the fence cover (four M3x6 binding screws).

(4) Remove the paper detection sensor (one connector).

(5) Remove the paper width sensor (VR) together with the mounting plate (one connector, 2 M3x8P-tight screws).The following paper sizes can be set:4


When reinstalling the paper width sensor (VR) to the plate, keep the red lead wire about 1 mmfrom the plate while tightening the nut. (Be careful to avoid damaging the sensor by excessive

tightening.)

Standard paper feed tray face

Paper size detection sensor

Fence cover

Face plates

Lock lever


Paper width sensor

Engagement of paper widthsensor gear with rack



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

For proper engagement of the paper width sensor gear with the rack during reassembly, mini-mize the distance of the fences, turn the VR fully in the direction of the arrow shown in the dia-gram, and then back off one crest from the lock position.

* After installing the paper width sensor, be sure to conduct paper width VR correction (8.4.1) in Test Mode.

2.Pickup roller shaft

2-1.Removal of pickup roller shaft (pickup roller, scraper)

< Pre-removal >


(2) Remove the paper feed cover.

< Removal of pickup rol ler shaft >

(1) Release the lock and remove the stripper unit.

(2) Detach the scraper spring.

(3) Remove the two retaining rings from both ends of the shaft and move the two metal piecestoward the center of the shaft.

(4) Remove the pickup roller shaft by moving it to the right, making sure that it does not hit the upperlimit sensor.

< Removal of pickup rol ler and scraper >

(1) Remove one retaining ring and dismount the pickup roller from the pickup roller shaft.

(2) Remove the E-rings from both ends of the scraper shaft, remove the two metal pieces, and dis-mount the scraper shaft.

Stripper unit

Scraper spring

Retaining ring

Metal

Pickup roller shaft




(3) Pay close attention to the collar and pulley when removing the scraper.


Note the rotating direction of the pickup roller and scraper.

When reinstalling the pickup roller shaft, be careful to avoid striking the upper limit sensor withthe detection plate.

2-2.Removal of f irst paper feed stay assembly

< Pre-removal >

(1) Remove the pickup roller shaft.< Removal >

(1) Remove the first paper feed stay assembly. (three M4x8 RS-tight screws). (Be careful of bundled wires.)

(2) Disconnect the connectors of the upper limit sensors A/B, standard paper feed tray up/downswitches, paper feed pressure sensor, and standard paper feed tray upper limit switch.Removethe wire bands, then dismount the first paper feed stay Assy.

Paper feed tray upper safety SW connector

Standard paper feed tray up/down SW

Paper feed pressure sensor Elevator upper limit sensor B Elevator upper limit sensor A

First sheet feed stay assembly



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-3.Removal of paper feed clutch and paper feed shaft

< Pre-removal >


(2) Remove the top cover, then the rear cover.

(3) Raise the PCB box and keep at the raised position.

(4) Remove the pickup roller shaft.

< Removal of paper feed clutch >

(1) Remove the snap ring, disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch.

Rotation stopper stay

Snap ring

Paper feed clutch

Paper feed clutch

Registration brake

Registration clutch




< Removal of paper feed shaft >

* After removing the pickup clutch, remove the paper feed shaft.

(1) Remove the shaft stay and paper feed shaft from the standard paper feed tray side (two M4x8RS-tight screws). (Be careful to avoid dropping the bearing.)

3.Elevator mechanism & bottom guide plate

3-1.Removal of elevator motor

< Pre-removal >

(1)Raise the standard paper feed tray to the upper limit positionand turn off the main power.

(2)Remove inner cover 1.< Removal >

(1)Detach the right and left elevator springs.(Raise the standard paper feed tray to facilitate removal.)

(2)Remove the elevator motor unit fastening screws.(two M4x8 RS-tight screws)

(3)Remove the elevator motor holder fastening screw. (one M4x8 RS-tight screw)

(4)Disconnect the motor connector.

(5)Hold the standard paper feed tray with one hand and removethe elevator motor.

(Be careful of the metal pieces and shaft since they will bedetached from their installation positions.) (Be careful to avoid dropping the standard paper feed tray.)

Bearing

Paper feed shaft

Inner cover 1



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Elevator spring

Elevator motor holder Elevator motor




3-2.Removal of bottom guide plate

< Pre-removal >

(1) Dismount the elevator motor.

(2) Remove the standard paper feed tray unit.

(3) Remove the pickup roller shaft, pickup clutch, and paper feed shaft.

(4) Remove the first paper feed stay assembly.

< Removal >

(1) Remove the lower limit frame and lower limit frame holder. (one M3x6 RS-tight screw)

(2) Remove the spring hook R (metal sheet located on the E side plate) from the R side. (Raise theshaft position to facilitate removal.)(one E-ring, one M4x8 RS-tight screw)

(3) Remove the two screws from the E reinforcing plate. (M4x8 RS-tight screws)

Lower limit frame

Lower limit frame holder

Spring hook R

screw

E-ring

screw

E reinforcing plate Elevator shaft

E side plate on R sideE side plate on F side

Bottom guide plate



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(4) Lift the R side. Remove the E reinforce plate and the E side plate on the R side.

(5) Remove the bottom guide plate. (six M4x8 RS-tight screws)

<< Precautions in reassembly >>

Confirm that the flange of the bearing on the E side plate is properly positioned in the hole in theframe.

3-3.Removal of standard paper feed tray lower limit switch

< Pre-removal >


< Removal >(1) Remove the lower limit frame and lower limit frame holder. (one M3x6 RS-tight screw)

(2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the paper feed tray lower safety switch together with themounting plate. (two M3x6 RS-tight screws)

Lower limit frame holder

Lower limit frame

Lower limit SW




Adjustment

1.Adjustment of the upper l imit sensor position

< Adjustment >

(1) Set the pressure adjust lever to the standard position.

(2) Remove paper from the standard paper feed tray.

(3) Execute Test Mode No. 8.1.1.1 (Elevator motor) to raise and stop the standard paper feed trayat the [Middle] position. (upper limit sensors 1 and 2 turned on)

(4) After the standard paper feed tray stops, confirm that the gap between the pickup roller andstandard paper feed tray is 1.5 to 2.0 mm.

(5) If the gap lies outside this range, turn the upper limit adjustment screw to move the upper limitsensor assembly up or down to adjust. (Turning clockwise will lower the upper limit sensorassembly.)

(6) After the adjustment, confirm that paper feeds correctly with the standard paper feed tray at the

top, middle, and bottom positions.< Signs of faulty adjustment >

If the upper limit sensor is positioned too high, increased paper feed pressure will tend to resultin multiple feeds.

In contrast, if the sensor is positioned too low, the paper feeding process may fail to feed paper.

Regarding Test Mode No.8.1.1.3 [Servo Action]:

This test mode elevates the paper feed tray to the MIDDLE position (sensors 1 & 2 turned ON),

so this test mode can also be used in adjusting the upper limit sensor position. Since this test mode always tries to keep the paper feed tray at that position, placing a piece of

paper on the tray and adjusting the tray height from the lower position to higher position will

Upper limit adjustment screw

Pickup roller

Scraper


1.5 to 2.0 mm



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Adjustment of stripper pressure

< Adjustment >

According to the type of paper used, change the pressure adjustment lever position for printing.

If multiple feeds or paper supply failures occur, adjust the paper stripper pressure.

1) If multiple feeds occur

Turn the stripper pressure adjust knob clockwise to increase stripper pressure.

2) If paper slips and does not feed

Turn the stripper pressure adjust knob counterclockwise to reduce stripper pressure.

3.Paper width VR correction

< Adjustment >

Perform Test Mode No. 8.4.1 (Paper width sensor adjustment - Standard paper feed tray).

Set the fence width to 297 mm (A3). Enter the 297 mm setting. Set the fence width to 105 mm (A6). Enter the 105 mm setting.

After adjustment, perform Test Mode No. 8.2.2.7 (Paper). Confirm that each paper size is cor-rectly registered.

Stripper pressure adjust knob




4.Other adjustments

The following adjustments and settings can be performed for each type of paper used:

4-1.Standard paper feed tray upper limit position

Test Mode No. 5.9.*.1 The [Upper limit sensor position adjustment] sets the top, middle, and bottom stop positions ofthe standard paper feed tray. The tray upper limit position from these three can be selected foreach type of paper registered.

4-2.Standard paper feed tray postfeed

Test Mode No. 5.9.*.2

This setting varies the pickup clutch Off timing and adjusts the amount of paper buckle producedbefore the registration rollers.

Equivalent test mode in different numbers exist for Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.)

4-3.Paper feed start from standard paper feed tray


This setting varies the pickup clutch On timing.

This test mode feature is not available for the Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.

4-4.Assist for standard paper feed tray


This setting varies the paper transfer assist action on the first paper feed during the transport ofpaper by the registration rollers.

Equivalent test mode in different numbers exist for Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.

4-5.Multiple feed detection for standard paper feed tray


This setting is used to enable or disable multiple feed detection.

The sensor sensitivity adjustment is not available.

Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit use different sensor for the multiple feed detection, and that sen-sor can be adjusted on its sensitivity

4-6.Gap between the papers

Test Mode No. 5.9.*.30 varies the gap between the papers for simplex printing.

Test Mode No. 5.9.*.31 varies the gap between the papers for duplex printing.

These two test modes are applied not only for the paper feeding from standard paper feed tray,but also applies to the paper feeding from the Trays 1 and 2 of the MTPF unit.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)



Multi - tray paper feed section

CHAPTER 5: Mult i - t ray paper feed sect ion

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanisms

1.Machine configuration

1-1.Basic structure

The multi-tray paper feed section is comprised of the transfer unit installed in the MTPF unit andthe vertical transfer unit in the HC5000 main unit. These are two separate units.

The MTPF unit is provided with two paper feed trays. Paper from these trays is fed by the pickuproller, scraper, and stripper unit through the path shown in the diagram. The paper reaches thevertical transfer unit, and is then transported to the registration roller section.

From the registration roller section, paper is fed through the same path as when paper is sup-plied from the standard paper feed tray.

If paper jam occurs, the printer halts, and an error indication is displayed in accordance with thelocation of the paper jam. Jammed paper can be removed through the feed tray section, MTPF left cover, or vertical trans-

fer unit located at a lower section inside the main unit left door (gray areas shown in the diagrambelow).

Vertical transfer unit

Paper transport unit

Registration roller sectionTransport of paper from standard

Paper feed tray No.1

Paper feed tray No.2

Stripper unit

Pickup roller

Scraper

HC5500 main unit

MTPF unit




1-2.Paper transport path

The rollers (pickup roller, paper feed rollers 1 through 3) in the paper transport section inside thebase are driven by the FL transfer motor.

The roller (paper feed roller 4) in the vertical transfer unit is driven by the FL multi feed traypickup motor.

The rotation timing of each roller is controlled by a clutch. (The rollers indicated by black circles

are driven via a clutch.) Paper transport status is detected by FL feed sensors 1 through 4.

The multi-tray 1 pickup sensor is provided in the paper transport path immediately after thepickup roller for feed tray 1 only. When A3 paper is supplied from the feed tray 1, a minor multiple feed condition may result in theoverlapping of the end section of a sheet with the leading edge of the following sheet. The multi-tray 1 pickup sensor detects this condition. (Sensor detection is made regardless of paper size.)

Feed sensor 3 detects the presence/absence of paper at its position and also detects multiplefeeds. (The sensor used for the detection of multiple feeds from the standard paper feed tray dif-fers from this sensor.)

FL transfer motor

FL multi feed tray pickup motor

FL feed sensor 3

FL feed sensor 2

FL feed sensor 1

FL feed sensor 4

FL multi-tray 1 pickup sensor

Paper feed roller 4

Paper feed roller 3

Paper feed roller 2

Paper feed roller 1

FL feed sensor 3

FL feed sensor 2

FL feed sensor 1

Paper feed roller 3

Paper feed roller 2

Paper feed roller 1



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Paper transport section in the MTPF Unit

2-1.Paper feed tray

The upper tray (paper feed tray 1) can hold 1,000 sheets of paper. The lower tray (paper feedtray 2) can hold 500 sheets.

The two feed trays have identical structures, but different paper capacities. The right and left paper guides on each feed tray are moved simultaneously by a connectingbelt, and also have a lock mechanism.

The paper stopper is set manually according to the paper size.

As with the standard paper feed tray, each feed tray is equipped with a paper width potentiome-ter and a paper size detection sensor for automatic detection of paper size.

Similarly with the standard paper feed tray, each feed tray uses a paper detection sensor and apaper volume sensor for detection.

2-2.Feed tray elevating mechanism

The paper feed tray features a double plate structure. Only the bottom plate is raised by the ele-

vator motor. Each feed tray is equipped with one upper limit sensor. The upper limit position cannot beadjusted as in the case of the standard paper feed tray system.

As soon as the feed tray with paper is set in the machine, the corresponding FL elevator motoractivates, and its rotary force is transmitted to the joint and to the pulley shaft to wind a wire. Asa result, the bottom plate in the feed tray rises.

The detection of the upper limit sensor halts the rising operation, thereby maintaining a constantheight during printing.

When the feed tray is pulled out, the joint disengages. The bottom plate of the feed tray dropsdue to its own weight.

The tray set detection is made by the electrical connection and by the Safety switch.



Paper guide

Paper guide lock mechanism

Insert the paper stopper here.




Paper volume sensor

FL safety switch

Wire winding pulleyEngaged with motor joint

FL feed tray Elevator motor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-3.Paper transport mechanism

The transport unit is driven by the FL transfer motor via a belt.

The transport unit has two pickup clutches that transmit drive power to the upper and lowerpickup roller shafts, and three transfer clutches that transmit drive power to paper feed rollers 1through 3.

FL transfer motor

Clutch for paper feed roller 3



Clutch for Tray 1 pickup roller

Clutch for Tray 2 pickup roller




Paper feed roller 3 are operated by two nip release solenoids on the R and L sides to preventback tension on paper during printing.

The height of the upper limit sensor can be adjusted by turning the dial on the front side of themain unit.

The angle and pressure of the stripper pad can be adjusted from the front of the machine.

The stripper pad retracts when the feed tray is pulled out, thereby preventing crumpling of paperclamped by the stripper pad and pickup roller.

Nip release solenoid

Paper feed roller 3

Upper limit sensor

Upper limit sensor height adjustment dial

Stripper pad pressure adjustment mechanism

Stripper pad retracting mechanism

Stripper pad angle adjustment mechanism

(The color and the shape of the dial may differ)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-4.Vertical transfer unit

The knob can be used to open the paper transport path and clear jammed paper.

The paper transport path is provided with a unit comprising paper feed roller 4 and feed sensor4 as well as two nip release solenoids.

Paper feed roller 4 transmits the rotary force of the multi-feed tray pickup motor to transfer clutch4.

In addition to transport completion and nip release operation, the vertical transfer unit also oper-ates with the registration rollers and BP to assist paper transport operations during printing.

Paper transport path open/close lever

Multi feed tray pickup motor




Paper feed roller 4

Transfer clutch 4


Feed sensor 4



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Disassembly

1.Paper feed trays

1-1.Removal of paper feed trays

* The disassembly procedure is the same for the upper tray (paper feed tray 1) and the lower tray (paperfeed tray 2).

< Removal >

(1) Remove the cover (two M4x8 RS-Tight screws on the right side) (two P-Tight M4x8 screws onthe left side).

(2) Remove the paper feed tray from the rail (two M4x6 binding screws on the right, and three onthe left).

<< Precautions for reassembly

While holding the feed tray on the rail to keep it from falling, lift it slightly and align the projec-tions with the indentations.

Do not over tighten the tapping screws on the cover.




1-2.Removal of paper width VR (potentiometer)

< Pre-removal

(1) Remove the feed tray.

< Removal >

(1) Remove the four wire hanging fixtures from the bottom plate of the feed tray (two M4x6 bindingscrews each).

(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the paper volume sensor.

(3) Lift the bottom plate and remove the plate.

(4) Remove the VR cover (one RS-Tight M4x8 screw).(5) Remove the Paper width VR (potentiometer).

Wire hanging fixtureTray volume sensor

Bottom plate

VR cover



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)


When attaching the belt, secure the right and left fences with the 6mm jig. Set the VR to the nar-rowest width.

The VR correction must be performed using Test Mode in the final stage of reassembly.

Make sure that the fence cover for the bottom plate slides smoothly.

2.Paper transport unit in the MTPF Unit.

2-1.Removal of paper transport unit

< Pre-removal >

(1) Remove the MTPF rear cover.

(2) Remove the door cover from the paper transport section.

(3) Remove the MTPF left cover.

< Removal >

(1) Pull out the upper and lower paper feed trays.(2) Remove the four stripper adjustment knobs (one binding screw M3x8 each).

(3) Remove the upper and lower knob cover plates (three binding screws M4x6 for upper plate, twobinding screws M4x6 for lower plate).

Stripper adjustment knob

Knob cover plate




(4) Pull out the four adjustment shafts (identical parts).

(5) Disconnect the two connectors and remove the transfer motor (five M4x8 RS-tight screws).

(6) Disconnect the six connectors for the wires from the paper transport unit. Arrange the wiresneatly to avoid tangles.

Adjustment shafts

FL transfer motor

Wires



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(7) Remove the paper transport unit (four M4x8 RS-tight screws). (Be careful to avoid damaging theMylar sheets on the paper transport section.)


Insert the stripper adjustment shaft, confirming that the knob aligns with the scale.

When detaching or attaching the paper transport unit, slightly tilt the bottom section first andthen tilt the top section to avoid damaging the upper Mylar sheet.

3.Vertical transfer unit

3-1.Removal of vertical transfer unit

< Pre-removal >


(2) Remove the bottom paper guide plate.

< Removal >

(1) Disconnect the connector and remove the Multi feed tray pickup motor (four M4x8 RS-tightscrews). (Handle the hook on the metal plate with care.)

When installing the Multi feed tray pickup motor back on the machine, adjust its position sothat adequate backlash is given between the gears.

Paper transport unit mounting screw




(2) Disconnect the three connectors for the wires from the rear side to the Vertical Transfer Unit.

(3) Disconnect the release lever shaft from the joint (two IT M3x6 screws). (Be careful not to mis-place the metal.)

Multi feed tray pickup motor

Mounting screws on the shaft joint



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(4) Remove the swing plate by unscrewing the shoulder screw.

(5) Remove the two vertical transfer unit retaining pins on the front side (one M4x8 RS-tight screweach).

(6) Remove the two screws from the vertical transfer unit support shaft on the rear side (M4x8 RS-tight screws).

Swing plate mounting screw

Vertical transfer unit retain-ing pins

Remove these two screws.




(7) Remove the two vertical transfer guide plate fastening screws on the left (M4x8 RS-tightscrews).

(8) Remove the screw (M4x8 RS-tight screw) from the front, then remove the Vertical transfer unitby sliding it out of the machine through the opening from which the Standard paper feed traywas removed.

<< Precautions for work >

Keep in mind that once all the screws from either the Front or the Rear of the machine areremoved, the unit is supported only by the screws on the other side, potentially resulting in dis-tortion of the unit shape.

Since the vertical transfer guide plate is located in the paper transport path, work carefully toavoid distorting its shape.

The Swing plate must open when removing jammed paper. Make sure to install it in a positionwhere it can swing smoothly (it should hang freely).

Remove the two screws

Remove this screw.

Do not pinch and lock the Swing plate by the special shoulder screw.

The Swing plate

Slide plate



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4.Disassembly of other parts

Removal of transfer clutches

To remove transfer clutches 1 through 3, remove the MTPF paper transfer unit first. (Duringreassembly, pay close attention to the connectors, since they are identical in the size and-shape.)

To remove transfer clutch 4, remove the chamber while the vertical transfer unit is still installedon the machine.

Removal of feed sensors and mult i - tray 1 pickup sensor

To remove feed sensors 1 through 3 and the multi-tray 1 pickup sensor, remove the MTPFpaper transport unit.

To remove feed sensor 2 and the multi-tray 1 pickup sensor, the paper transport path must beremoved from the detached MTPF paper transport unit.

When feed sensor 3 is replaced, the sensor sensitivity must be adjusted.

To remove feed sensor 4, remove the vertical transfer unit from the main unit first.

Removal of MTPF elevator motor

Remove the MTPF rear cover, and remove the three mounting screws from each elevator motorunit to dismount motor unit.




Adjustment

1.Adjustment of upper l imit sensor position

< Adjustment >

(1) Open the applicable feed tray and remove the feed tray cover.

(2) Place one sheet of paper on the feed tray. With the machine power ON, close the feed tray. (Thetable will rise to the upper limit position.)

(3) Check that the gap between the pickup roller and table is 0 to 1 mm.

(4) If the gap falls beyond the specified range, turn the upper limit sensor height adjustment dial toadjust the upper limit position.

< Signs of faulty adjustment >

If the upper limit sensor is positioned too high, increased paper feed pressure will tend to resultin multiple feeds.

In contrast, if the sensor is positioned too low, the paper feeding process may fail to feed paper.

Upper limit sensor

Upper limit sensor height adjustment dial

Pickup roller

Table

Scraper

0 to 1 mm gap.

(The color and the shape of the dial may differ)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Stripper adjustment

< Adjustment >

(1) Turn the adjustment lever to make the adjustment.

Stripper pad pressure adjustment mechanism

Stripper pad angle adjustment mechanism




3.Paper width VR correction

< Adjustment method - Feed tray 1 >

Perform Test Mode No. 8.4.2 (Paper width sensor adjustment - Feed tray 1).

Set the fence width to 297 mm (A3). Enter the 297 mm setting.


After adjustment, perform Test Mode No. 8.2.3.11 (Paper width) and check to confirm that thewidth of each paper size is correctly registered.

< Adjustment method - Feed tray 2 >

Perform Test Mode No. 8.4.3 (Paper width sensor adjustment - Feed tray 1).



After adjustment, perform Test Mode No. 8.2.3.18 (Paper width) and check to confirm that thewidth of each paper size is correctly registered.

4.Multiple feed sensor (feed sensor 3) adjustment

< Adjustment >

Check the adjustment method.

Perform Test Mode No. 8.8.2 (Multiple feeds light intensity setting). (The test mode automatically feeds the specified paper over the sensor. Then remove thepaper manually by hand and then press the key on the right to register the setting.)

5.Other adjustments

The following adjustments and settings can be performed for each paper type:

5-1.Amount of postfeed

Test Mode No. 5.9.1.10 (Feed tray 1), No. 5.9.1.20 (Feed tray 2)

Adjustment of paper buckle amount in front of the registration rollers.

5-2.Assist

Test Mode No. 5.9.1.11 (Feed tray 1), No. 5.9.1.21 (Feed tray 2)

This test mode activates or deactivates the paper feed assisting action by the first paper feedmechanism when the tip of the paper is already gripped and being transported by the Registra-tion rollers.

5-3.Double-feed detection timing.

Double-feed detection timing can be adjusted by Test Mode No.4.2.4 (Tray-1) and No.4.3.4(Tray-2).

Selection of the detection method for the Double-Feed, either from the 1st paper (compari-

son of the light militance value through the paper against the data pre-registered in the

machine) or from the 2nd paper (use the light militance value taken from the first sheet of

paper fed through as the data to compare the value against the succeeding papers).

The Dragged-Feed check is selected by SE mode No.4.2.5 (Tray-1) and No.4.3.5 (Tray-2).The Dragged-Feed is a type of double-feed in which the top-end of the succeeding paper



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Normally, double-feed and dragged-feed detections are selected ON/OFF in combination

by User Mode, but a selection from the operation panel using above Test Mode can be

made to activate only the dragged-feed detection when the double-feed detection is turned

OFF by the User Mode.




CHAPTER 6: Second paper feed sect ion

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanisms

1.Mechanism of the second paper feed section

1-1.Paper transport path

This section briefly halts paper sent from the first paper feed section and from the multi-tray paper

feed section at the registration rollers, then feeds it to the transfer belt unit at the appropriate time for

printing. Then either discharges the paper immediately or after duplex printing. This section is called

the second paper feed section.

The second paper feed section has the following functions:

(1) Mechanism for multiple feed detection for paper fed from the standard paper feed tray (MultipleFeed sensor ; transmission type sensor)

(2) Sensor for detecting paper supplied to the registration rollers (Registration sensor ; reflectivesensor)

(3) Registration rollers(4) Sensor to detect the leading edge of the paper (Top edge sensor 1 ; transmission type senso

(5) Top edge sensor 2 (Reflective sensor. HC5000 is not quipped with this sensor.)

(6) Side registration unit to center the image on each paper (CCD unit)

(7) Transfer unit for moving paper under the heads.

(8) Sensor for detecting paper moved toward the exit (Exit sensor ; reflective sensor, wider detec-tion range than other reflective sensors)

(9) Exit unit for transport of paper for discharge

(10) Flipper unit used to move paper for duplex printing

(11) Sensor for detecting paper entering the flipper unit (Flipper sensor ; reflective sensor)

(12) Sensor for detecting paper arriving at the entrance to the duplex unit (Duplex belt IN sensor ;

reflective sensor)(13) Duplex unit

(14) Sensor for detecting paper leaving the duplex unit (Duplex belt OUT sensor ; reflective sensor)

(15) Switchback unit to re-feed paper for duplex printing.

(16) Sensor for detecting paper entering and leaving the switchback unit (Switchback sensor ; reflec-tive sensor)

Schematic diagram of paper transport paths, as viewed from the front of the machine

(14)

(1)

(6)

(3)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(10)(5)

(4)

(2)

(15)

(16)




Paper transport from the Registrat ion rol lers to the Paper receiving tray.

(1) The paper is fed from the standard feed tray or the multi-tray paper feeding unit and arrives atthe registration rollers. The paper is detected by the registration sensor and makes a buckle atthe registration rollers. The buckle is required to ensure correct print registration at the top.

(2) Registration clutch then activates and transfer the main motor drive to the lower registrationroller via timing belt and pulley. The paper proceeds to the next area.

(3) The top edge sensor and top edge sensor 2 detect the leading edge of the paper coming out

through the registration rollers. These two top edge sensors trigger the print head operation,and also have a function to detect paper jams.

Because HC5000 is not equipped with the top edge sensor 2, the leading edge of the paper is

detected only with the top edge sensor 1 on HC5000.

(4) The paper proceeds onto the transfer unit. The transfer unit is equipped with the suction fans tosuck the paper onto the transfer belt. The suction fans keep paper firmly on the transfer beltwhile the printing is in process and the paper is transported to the exit area. The transfer belt isdriven by the transfer belt motor in the transfer unit. The print head for each color is mounted above the transfer unit and performs the printing. The CCD installed at the entrance to the transfer unit detects the width of each paper. The valuedetected by the CCD is reflected in the lateral printing position for each print head.

While HC5000 is equipped with only 4 suction fans, HC5500 is equipped with 6 suction fans.(5) Exit sensor is installed at the very end of the transfer unit, just before the exit unit. This sensor

detects paper coming from the transfer unit and checks whether the paper is ejected out fromthe exit unit.

(6) Paper transported to the exit unit is discharged from the exit unit by a sponge roller driven by theexit motor. To ensure a smooth paper discharge from the exit unit, a paper ejection wing unit is installed atthe very end of the exit unit to let the paper fly out. The wing motor changes the wing positionaccording to the size of the paper being printed.

Paper transport from the f l ipper unit , back to the registrat ion rol lers (Duplex

printing).(1) For the duplex printing, Gate solenoid changes the position of the flipper gate at the tip of the

flipper unit, so that paper is guided into the flipper unit instead of being ejected straight outthrough the exit unit.

(2) Before the paper reaches the duplex unit, it passes two types of sensors (Flipper sensor andDuplex belt IN sensor), which detect paper entering and leaving the flipper unit, respectively. The paper feed roller inside the flipper unit is driven by the main motor via pulley, timing belt andgears.

(3) The duplex unit holds and transports the paper by its upper and lower belts. The upper andlower belts of the duplex unit are driven by the main motor via pulley, timing belt and gears.

(4) Paper discharged from the duplex unit is sent to the switchback unit. Switchback sensor detects paper discharged from the duplex unit. Paper from the duplex unit istransported by the paper feed roller operated by the main motor via pulley, timing belt and gears.It is then carried to the switchback standby position after passing over the separation claws andcarried further out by another paper transfer roller (driven by an exclusive drive motor).

(5) Paper arriving at the standby position is ready for the printing on the reverse side.

The paper is switched back under the separation claws and sent towards the registration roller.

From the registration roller, the paper goes through the same path as the simplex printing and

ejected out from the exit unit after the duplex side of the paper is printed.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Multiple feed detection

During the transport of paper for printing, the multiple feed sensor measures the amount oftransmitted light to check for multiple feeds. If a multiple feed occurs, printing is halted and anerror message is displayed.

The amount of transmitted light is measured during the feeding of the first sheet, then recordedas reference data. The amounts of transmitted light for the second and subsequent sheets arecompared to this reference data. If the amount of transmitted light differs significantly from the

reference data, a multiple feed condition is determined. (Multiple feed detection positions are dif-ferent for the papers from the standard paper feed tray and multi-tray paper feed section.)

Multiple feed detection can be turned On/Off separately for the standard paper feed tray andMTPF trays 1 & 2 using [Menu 4: Function setting] on the control panel (default: On).

Multiple feed detection timing (from the first sheet or from the second sheet) can be selected forthe MTPF trays 1 & 2. (Default: detection from the first sheet.)

Multi-drag feed detection can be turned On or Off for the MTPF trays 1 & 2. (Default: On).




Mechanism of the side registrat ion unit

The side registration unit is equipped with CCD unit (2 pieces) to detect the lateral position of thepaper, and controls the printing positions by the print heads.

The side registration unit is also equipped with a detection mechanism (jam detector and sen-sor) to prevent paper from contacting the print heads and damaging the print head surfaces bycurled or dog-eared sheets. If paper contacts the jam detector bracket, due to dog-ear fold,paper curling, etc., a sensor detects the jam and immediately stops the printing operation.

There is a metal roller at the exit of the side registration unit for the purpose to press down onthe papers to help prevent paper from lifting up and hitting the print head surface.

* The function itself is the same although the structure of the side registration unit has some differencebetween HC5500 and HC5000.

Side registration unit of HC5500

CCD unitJam detector

CCD unit

When paper contacts the jam detector,

the sensor detection plate escapes out from

the sensor. (The sensor is blocked by the sensordetection plate in the normal condition).

Side registration unit of HC5000

Jam detection sensor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanism of transfer unit

The paper transfer belt is driven by the transfer belt motor.

The roller on the unit is equipped with an encoder sensor to monitor the transfer belt drive.

There are the suction fans (HC5500:six fans, HC5000:four fans) installed in the unit.

A belt tension adjustment mechanism is provided. Operating this adjustment mechanism movesthe roller that applies belt tension to adjust belt skew. The adjustment method is described in alater section.

Only HC5000 is provided with the cleaning roller on the main unit, above the end of the transferunit. This roller contacts the belt surface and removes ink mist which lands on the belt. (Thecleaning roller must be replaced at regular interval.) Though cleaning roller is provided, the ink mist does build up between the under-surface of thebelt and the top-surface of the belt pate, and cause belt slippage. Periodical cleaning is needed.

Paper feed direction

Belt tension adjustment mechanism

Transfer belt motor

Paper transfer belt

Encoder

Belt plate

This photograph is the transfer unit of HC5000.

This photograph shows removing the cleaning roller of HC5000.




Transfer unit elevating mechanism

The power of the main motor is transmitted to the elevating mechanism via a worm gear whenthe lift gear unit clutch activates. Rotary power is transmitted directly to the drive mechanism bythe gear on one side (left side as viewed from the front) of the elevating mechanism. This drivepower is transmitted to the other side by a wire assisted by plates.

The upper limit position (printing position) and lower limit position (position for removal of jammed paper) are detected by separate sensors.(Transfer unit upper / lower position sensor)

The Transfer unit is fixed in the upper limit position (printing position) by four BP spacers ontothe four mounting shafts on the print head carriage.

Depending on the paper type selected by the menu and the position of the paper feed pressurelever, the position of the four BP spacers are automatically selected in hooking the transwer unitto give appropriate gap between the print head and the paper.

* As descrived above, the HC5500 supports the transfer unit onto the head carriage by the BP spacers onthe mounting shafts. Therefore the gap between the print head and the paper depends on the thickness ofthe BP spacers.

* The BP spacers have 3-step thickness. How far the BP spacers slide against the mounting shafts deter-mine the gap between the print head and paper in 3-steps. These three steps are named as, [Normal],

[Card] and [Envelope]. The [Normal] has the smallest gap while the [Envelope] has the largest gap.* The HC5000 does not have the mounting shafts and BP spacers. The printing height position of the trans-fer unit on HC5000 is controlled by the amount of main motor rotation from the detection of the upper limitsensor to swing up the lift arms.

* Therefore, on HC5000, the gap between the print head and the paper is adjusted by SE-Mode No.5.9.x.32[gap adjustment] in units of 0.1mm for each paper type. On HC5500, the gap is selected by the operatorin 3-steps, [Normal], [Card] and [Envelope] for each paper type.

BP spacers

BP spacer Mounting shaft

The 4 BP spacers hook onto the 4 mountingshafts to support the maintenace unit.

Enlarged view of

BP spacer.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanism of f l ipper unit

The flipper unit is equipped with a flipper gate function to send paper to either the exit unit orduplex unit.

The flipper gate is operated by Gate solenoid in the flipper unit.

Two rollers send paper to the duplex unit. The upper roller receives the drive from the duplexentrance roller via gear. The upper and lower rollers are synchronized by timing belt.

Flipper sensor is mounted on the machine to confirm entry and exit of paper into and out of theflipper unit.

Flipper cover SW is provided on the machine to monitor the open/close condition of the flipperunit.

Paper feed roller

Flipper gate solenoid

Flipper gate

Flipper unit




Mechanism of duplex unit

The duplex unit uses the upper and lower belts to hold and transport paper.

The upper and lower belts are driven by gears located on the rear of the unit.

The lower section of the duplex unit is provided with a roller to prevent the lower belt from sag-ging due to environmental fluctuations (particularly high temperatures) that might lead to inter-ference with other parts.

Belt slack prevention roller

Duplex unit in overturned posit ion

Drive gear



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanism of exit unit

Paper is discharged by the sponge roller and star wheel (mounted on the flipper unit).

The sponge roller is driven by the exit motor on the exit unit. The rotation speed of the exit motoris detected by an encoder sensor.

Ejection wing is provided to give rigidity to paper during discharge. The wing slightly curves thepaper during ejection to give rigidity. The position of the wing is moved by the wing pulse motor.The wing home position is detected by wing HP sensor.

Sponge roller

Wing (front)

Wing (rear)

Antistatic brush

Wing motor unit

Exit motor encoder sensor Exit motor unit

Wing HP sensor




1-2.Drive system for paper transport

Schematic diagram of the paper transport drive power transmission system,

viewed from the rear of the machine.

Drive power from the main motor is transmitted to the paper feed rollers via timing belts. Since a single main motor is used to drive a number of rollers, a clutch is provided for eachroller, either to engage or disengage the drive to the rollers.

The switchback drive roll of the switchback unit is driven by a dedicated switchback motor. Each timing belt is provided with a tensioner to maintain proper timing belt tension. These are

self tensioners operated by spring.

A: Timing belt DPX (duplex belt)

B: Timing belt C-D (from clutch to duplex belt)

C: Timing belt M-C (from main motor to clutch)

D: Timing belt M-R (from main motor to registration roller)

E: Timing belt R-P (from registration roller to first paper feed)

A

B

C

D E

Duplex roller gear Switchback motor

Duplex clutch unit

Duplex drive gear

Main motor

Registration roller clutch unit

Idler pulley

Pickup clutch



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Schematic diagram of correspondence between paper transport path and

paper transport drive power transmission system

The following diagram illustrates the correspondence between the rotating rollers in the sche-

matic diagram of the paper transport paths (viewed from the rear of the machine) and their drive

power transmitting systems.

A

B

C

D

E

F

A

B

C D

E

F

Schematic diagram of paper transport paths as viewed from the rear

Schematic diagram of the paper transport drive power trans-

mission system as viewed from the rear




Disassembly

1.Registration rol ler upper

(1) Open front door left and right.(2) Remove the rear cover.

(3) Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper and lift the unit up.

(4) Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2 (three M4x8 binding screws).

(5) Lift the PCB box. Loosen the right and left screws and lift the PCB box. Using the removed screws, hold the PCB box in the raised position (right and left).

(6) Remove screws and hang loose the connector bracket from the rear side (two M3x6 screws). Disconnect the connector for the multiple feed sensor (receive). Release the sensor wire harness from the harness clamps (4 locations).

(7) Remove a screw from the rear side (M4x8 screw).

Harness clamp

Two M3x6 screws

Connector for multi feedsensor (receive)

M4x8 screw

Connector for multi feedsensor (receive)

Harness clamps

Connector bracket



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(8) From the front of the machine, remove the spring hooked onto the registration roller unit upper inthe front and the rear.

(9) Remove the mounting screw of the registration roller unit upper on the rear of the machine(HC5500:one M4x8 IT screw) (HC5000:one M4x5 IT screw - a short screw).

(10) Before removing the registration roller unit upper from the machine, remove the bracket of themultiple feed sensor (receive). (One M4x8 IT screw in the front. The rear is hooded onto a pin.)The registration sensor is also attached onto the same bracket.

* Note: Work carefully to avoid damaging the paper dust cover on the multiple feed sensor (receive).

Spring on front side

M4x5 IT screw Registration roller upper

Spring on rear side

Multiple feed sensor (receive) bracket

This is the correct direction for the spring. This is incorrect direction for the spring.If the spring is hooked in the incorrect direction as shown on the photograph on the right,

the white colored roller with the green knob in which the two springs rub against will make asqueaky noise during the printing operation.

Photograph of HC5000

Photograph of HC5500

Spring on front side Spring on rear side

Multiple feed sensor (receive) bracketRegistration roller upper M4x8 IT screw




(11) Remove registration roller unit upper from the machine.

Caution in Assembly

Confirm that the metal on the registration roller upper is correctly positioned in the U-shaped cut-out on the machine frame on the front and rear.

* Registration roller unit upper is equipped with an adjustment mechanism. For the adjustment method, referto the [Adjustment] in this chapter.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Registration roller lower

(1) Remove registration roller upper before performing the work.

(2) Disconnect the two connectors for the registration clutches (one is used as clutch, another is abrake).

* Note: When reconnecting, check the identification marks (color-coded cable bands) to prevent wrong con-

nections (brake: blue; clutch: white).(3) Remove the snap pin from the shaft of the registration roller lower which holds the clutches.

(4) Remove the clutch in the front, which is used as the registration brake.

(5) Remove the idler pulley assembly (one M4x8 IT screw).

(6) Remove the clutch on the back, which is used as registration clutch.

Registration clutch snap pin

Registration clutch connectors

Registration brake

Registration clutch

Rotation prevention bracket

Idler pulley assembly

M4x8 IT screw




(7) Remove the lift gear unit.* Note: For the instruction on the removal of the lift gear unit, refer to the page on item: 27. Lift gear unit.

(8) Remove registration roller L pulley.

(9) Remove the knob from the registration roller at the front of the machine (one M3x12 IT screw).

Registration roller L pulleyLift gear unit

M3x12 IT screw

Knob



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(10) Remove the green plastic plate with the multiple feed sensor (send) attached.

(11) Remove the bearing from the front side (one E-ring, one M4x8 IT screw). If the bearing is difficult to remove, insert a flathead screwdriver to pry it loose.

(12) Remove the bearing from the rear side (one M4x8 IT screw) - no E-ring on the rear.

(13) Push registration roller lower toward the rear and pull out from underneath to remove.




(14) Precautions in assembly:

(15) Make sure that belt 1 and belt 2 on the rear of the machine are hooked onto the shaft of registra-tion roller lower. * In the photograph below, belt 2 is not hooked onto the shaft of the registration roller lower.Make sure that this type of mistake does not occur during the installation.

When reinstalling the registration clutch on the rear of the machine against the registration rollerL pulley, be sure to align the projection and indentation and ensure proper attachment of the reg-istration roller L pulley.

Match the hole in the registration clutch to the D-shaped section on the shaft of registration roller

lower. When reinstalling the idler pulley assembly back on the machine, fit the rotation prevention

bracket section against the registration clutch.

Belt 1

Belt 2



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

3.Side registration unit

(1) Open the left and right cover and check the position of the transfer unit.* Jumpt to step (5) for HC5000.

(2) Go to step (3) if the transfer unit is hanging on the print head carriage. Go to step (5) if it is not.

(3) Use SE-Mode [8.1.4.2] to raise the transfer unit lift arms to the maximum up position.

(4) Use SE-Mode [8.1.4.3] to slide the PB spacers to the HP (unhooked) position.(5) Use SE-Mode [8.1.4.2] to lower the transfer unit down to maximum down position.

* Make sure to turn OFF the machine power after lowering the transfer unit.

(6) Remove the top cover from the machine.

(7) Remove the Operation panel together with the bracket (two M4x8 IT screws).

(8) Loosen the four screws (M4x8 IT screws) on the ink bottle unit. Slide the ink bottle unit all theway to the left.

(9) Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper and lift the unit up.

Loosen M4x8 IT screws, two in the front and two in the rear.

Ink bottle unit

Control panel

Control panel bracket

Remove M4x8 IT screws, one on the left and one on the right.

Switchback unitlever




(10) Pull out the duplex unit.

(11) Remove the print head carriage covers L and R.

(12) Remove the print head drive PCB for the black ink.* Note: During reassembly, make sure that the flexible hose from the head is not inserted slanted nor loosely

connected.

(13) Disconnect the connectors P151 and P154. (HC5000:P151,155)

Duplex unit

a en cover a en cover

P154

P151



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(14) Loosen two screws and lift the side registration unit.

* The height positioning blocks will not function properly if the two screws pointed out are loosened exces-sively. If the screws are over-loosened, tighten slightly before reinstallation.

(15) Remove the side registration unit.

* CCD gain adjustment must be made after the side registration unit is replaced. For the details on theadjustment method, refer to [item 10: CCD gain adjustment] in the adjustment section on this chapter.

* Image adjustment must also be made after replacing the side registration unit. Refer to the chapter onwhich the adjustment procedure is given.

* Since external light entering into the CCD may cause error results, be sure to keep the cover in place whenchecking machine operations and making adjustments on the side registration unit.

Loosen.

These two screws holding the height posi-tioning blocks should never be loosened.

Loosen.

The upper photograph shows the screwsfrom the paper feeding side.

Side registration unit




4.Transfer unit

(1) If the transfer unit is hanging on the print head carriage, refer to the page on the Side registrationunit removal to lower the transfer unit. Make sure to turn OFF the machine power.

(2) Remove the rear cover.

(3) Open front door L / front door R.

(4) Lift the PCB box.* Note: For steps (1) through (3) above, refer to [item 1. Registration roller upper].

(5) Remove the mounting screws of the ground wire and remove the wire.

(6) Lift the transfer unit manually by hand and insert the support bar jigs.

(7) Remove the mounting screw of the connector cover bracket and remove the cover bracket.

(8) Free the wire harness from the wire saddle.

(9) Disconnect the five connectors of the transfer unit.

( HC5000 : four connectors )

(10) Lower the transfer unit manually by hand.

Ground wire

Insert the support bar jigs in these holes ofthe rear frame.

Connector cover bracket

Wire saddle



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(11) Pull out the transfer unit.

* Caution: The transfer unit is heavy (approx. 15 kg). Dropping it may result in injury.

* Caution: The encoder installed in the transfer unit is a precision component. A strong blow or shock maycause centering deviations and result in irregular paper feed speeds.

* Caution: When reinstalling the transfer unit, make sure that the transfer unit rests securely on the frontroller in the correct position, or the transfer unit may lift the maintenance unit up too high and cause the beltto hit the print head during printing and damage the print head.

* When the transfer unit is replaced, check the belt tension and adjust if necessary. The adjustment methodis described in a later section.

* When replaced with a new the transfer unit, the unit may need to be adjusted so that the unit is parallel tothe registration rollers. The adjustment method is described in a later section.

* Transfer belt speed adjustment and initial paper feed motor adjustment must be performed after transferunit replacement. The adjustment method is described in a later section.

* Image adjustment may be required after replacing the transfer unit. Refer to the image adjustment proce-dures in the separate chapter.

Front roller




5.Transfer belt

(1) Remove the transfer unit.* The encoder unit mounted on the transter unit is a very fragile component. Handle the trasfer unit

with care. Hitting the encoder unit may result in deformation of the encoder unit, leading to an incor-rect belt speed control affecting the print results, including 130mm pitch image distortion.

(2) Remove the four small belt retaining plates on the front and rear (four M4x8 IT screws).* In putting back the 4 belt retaining plates, mount the 2 rear ones first.

* HC5000 has only 2 belt retaining plates on the paper ejection side of the transfer unit.

* On HC5000, after removing the 2 belt retaining screws, remove four M4x8 IT screws from the top of

the belt base plate on the operator side of the unit, and jump to step (11).

(3) Unhook the springs, one each from the front and rear.

(4) Remove the gear cover.

(5) Remove E-ring on the rear.

(6) Remove the gear on the rear and remove pin from the shaft.* Pay caution, as the pin, if faced down, may drop off from the unit.

(7) Remove the gear from the front by removing a pin. Then remove the spacer.* Pay caution not to drop the pin, which may fall off if faced down.

(8) Remove the shasft from the rear.

(9) Remove the hook unit from the front by removing 2 E-rings.* Pay caution, as the white colored space on the shaft may fall off.

(10) Set the transfer unit, motor down, on the transfer belt stand jig and lock the unit on the jig.(11) Remove the bearing retaining plate (two M3x6 IT screws).

(12) Remove the bearing.

(13) Remove the side bracket (10 M4x8 IT screws and three M3x8 screws).* In mounting back the side bracket, the paper-feed side of the side bracket should hit against the belt

base plate.

(14) Pull out the transfer belt.* Check the suction fan positions. The positions of the suction fans may shift during transfer belt

removal/attachment. Refer to [item 8: Suction fan].

* When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure it is positioned left and right in parallel.

M3x6 IT screws (2 pcs)M4x8 IT screw

Belt retaining plates

M4x8 IT screw



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

* When the transfer belt is replaced, check the belt tension and adjust if necessary. The adjustment methodis described in a later section.

* When replaced with a new the transfer belt, the unit may need to be adjusted so that the unit is parallel tothe registration rollers. The adjustment method is described in a later section.

* Image adjustment may be required after replacing the transfer unit. Refer to the image adjustment proce-dures in the separate chapter.

* Working on HC5000, if the trasfer belt is replaced, Transfer belt speed adjustment and Initial paper feed

motor adjustment becomes necessary.

In mounting back the side bracket, the paper-feed side of the side

bracket should hit against the belt base palte.




6.Belt encoder

(1) Remove the transfer unit.

(2) Remove the belt encoder (two M3x6 IT screws).* Caution: The encoder installed in the transfer unit is a precision component. A strong blow or shock may

cause centering deviations and result in irregular paper feed speeds.

* In certain cases, image adjustment will need to be performed after the belt encoder has been replaced.Check by printing out test print images of the image adjustment software and perform image adjustment ifcolor shifts or other abnormalities are noted. Refer to the separate chapter on the image adjustment for thedetails on the adjustment.

M3x6 IT screw

Belt encoder



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

7.Transfer belt motor

(1) Remove the transfer unit from the machine.

(2) Remove the bracket.* HC5000 is not equipped with this bracket.

(3) Disconnect all connectors except for the transfer belt motor connector (P532, P722, P750).

(4) Remove the binders which are fixing harness.(5) Remove the transfer belt motor (three M4x8 IT screws).

* Caution: Hook the timing belt correctly when reinstalling the transfer belt motor back on the Transfer unit.

* Caution: Since the exterior cover of the transfer belt motor rotates during the motor operation, make surethat the moving part does not interfere with the cables of the belt encoder or suction fan.

* Following the replacement of the transfer belt motor, transfer belt speed adjustment and initial paper feedmotor adjustment must be performed. The adjustment method is described in a later section.

* In certain cases, image adjustment is necessary following the transfer belt motor replacement. Check thetest print pattern using the print adjustment software and perform the image adjustment if color shifts orother abnormalities are noted. Refer to the chapter on the image adjustment for the details on the adjust-ment.

Transfer belt motor

connectors

Bracket

Tension roller




8.Suction fan


(2) Remove the transfer belt.* Note: Refer to [item 5: Transfer belt].

(3) Disconnect the suction fan connector.

(4) Pull out the suction fan unit.(5) Remove the cover from the suction fan unit.

(6) Remove the suction fan.

* Note: Be careful to prevent interference from the suction fan cables during reinstallation.

* Note: Check through the window to make sure that the blower fans are at the specified positions duringreinstallation.

* Belt tension must be adjusted following replacement of the transfer belt. The adjustment method isdescribed in a later section.

* When blower fans have been replaced, the transfer unit position must be adjusted so that it is parallel to theregistration rollers. The adjustment method is described in a later section.

* In certain cases, image adjustment is necessary following blower fan replacement. Check the test patternand perform image adjustment if you note color shifts or other abnormalities. For a discussion of the adjust-ment method, refer to [Adjustment] in [Ink supply passages].

Suction fan

Top view of the suction fan unit (HC5000).

Top view of the suction fan unit (HC5500).



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

9.Cleaning roller

* Only HC5000 is equipped with the cleaning roller.

(1) Lower the transfer unit all the way down using Test mode on the operation panel. Select [Down] in [8.1.4.2 Lowering operation] to lower the transfer unit.

Switch off the main power.(2) Open front door L / front door R.

(3) Lift the cleaning unit, push down the cleaning roller, and pull out the cleaning roller from under-neath the cleaning unit.

* Note: Before lifting the cleaning unit, confirm that the ink pan is not positioned under the print heads. If theink pan is positioned under the print heads, it may strike and damage the print heads.

* The cleaning roller needs to be replaced periodically.

Cleaning unit

Cleaning roller

Cleaning roller




10.BP Spacer, Gear and BP s pacer motor

* These items are equipped on HC5500 only.

< Gear (Front) and BP spacers (Front) >


(2) Remove the gear cover.(3) Remove two E-rings on the rear, one is in front of the gear and the the other against the machine

frame on the same shaft.

(4) Remove the gear on the rear and remove the pin from the shaft.* Pay caution not to drop the pin, which may fall off if faced down.

(5) Remove the gear on the front by removing a pin.* Pay caution not to drop the pin, which may fall off if faced down.

(6) Remove the BP sapcer unit by removing 2 E-rings.

(7) Remove the BP spacers.

< Gear (Rear) , BP spacer motor and BP spacers ( Rear) >


(2) Remove E-ring from the gear on the rear and remove the gear.* Pay caution not to drop the pin, which may fall off if faced down.

Follow down to step (3) for removing the PB spacer motor. Jump to step (4) for removing the

BP spacers.

(3) Remove the BP spacer motor by removing 2 screws and 1 connector.

(4) Remove the BP spacer unit by removing 2 E-rings.

(5) Remove the BP spacers.

BP spacer unit

Gear cover

BP spacer

BP spacer

Gear

BP spacer motor The transfer belt motor on the far left of thetransfer unit needs to be detached (loos-ened) away from the transfer unit frame toallow the BP spacer unit to come out.

Transfer belt motor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

* In mounting the gears on the front and rear, slide the BP spacer units (front & rear) all the way toward thepaper ejection side.

Gear

BP spacer unit

Slide the BP spacerunits (front & rear) allthe way to the paperejection side when

mounting the reargear back on theunit.

When putting the gear in the frontand rear, back on the machinewith the BP spacer unit pushedall the way to the paper ejectionside, both of the gears should beput back in the position shown onthe photograph.

Any other position is not

acceptable.

Home Position

Envelope Position (two views)

Card Position

Normal Position

Activate SE-Mode No. [8.1.4.3 BP Spacer] and check the PB Spacer stop positions.




11.Exit un it

(1) Remove the paper receiving tray from the machine.

(2) Remove the exit unit cover (two M4x8 binding screws).

(3) Disconnect the connectors for the wing motor, exit motor, exit motor encoder, and wing HP sen-sor.

(4) Remove the exit unit (four M4x8 IT screws).

Exit unit cover

M4x8 IT screw

Wing Wing motor

M4x8 IT screw

connector

Wing

Exit motor unit

connector

M3x5 RS-tight screw

M4x8 IT screw



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

11-1.Exit motor unit

(1) Remove the exit motor unit (two M3x5 RS-tight screws).* Note: When reinstalling the exit motor unit, let the weight of the exit motor unit apply tension to the belt.

11-2.Wing motor

(1) Remove the roller motor unit.

(2) Remove the wing motor. (HC5500:two M3x3 RS-tight screws) (HC5500:two M3x3 RS-tight screws).

* Note: When reinstalling the exit motor unit, keep the wings on the front and rear to the fully opened posi-tion.

M3x3 RS-tight screw

Wing motor

M3x3 RS-tight screw




12.Sponge roller

(1) Remove the exit unit.* Note: Refer to [item 11: Exit unit].

(2) Remove the wings from the front and rear (two M3x10 tapping screws). (Screws are found from the bottom of the unit, with the wings opened to the widest position.)

(3) Remove the cover.* Note: When the cover is being removed, burring of the anti-static brush will interfere with the cover. To pre-

vent this, open the exit unit slightly by hand during removal.

(4) Remove the pulley.(one E-ring)* The pulley of HC5000 is mounted with set screw.

(5) Remove the bearing. (two E-rings)

(6) Remove the sponge roller (two bracket screws).

E-ring Bearing

Sponge roller Screw

E-ring

pulley



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

13.Flipper unit

(1) Remove the paper receiving tray.

(2) Remove the exit tray unit cover.* Note: Refer to [item 11: Exit unit].

(3) Remove the exit unit.

(4) Disconnect the connector.(5) Open the flipper unit.

(6) Remove the E-rings from the front and rear, and release the link-arms from the shafts.* In HC5500, since it does not have the mechanism of a link arm, this work is unnecessary.

(7) Push the lower plates on the front and rear toward the inside and release the shafts.

(8) Pull and remove the flipper unit from the machine.

Flipper unit

E-ring

Link-arm

Lever




14.Flipper roller upper / Fl ipper roller lower

(1) Remove the flipper unit.* Note: Refer to [item 13: Flipper unit].

(2) Remove the cover (four M4x8 binding screws).* Note: Use a workbench to keep from applying excessive load onto the fragile flipper gate. Excessive

loads may result in shape distortions.

(3) Remove the flipper gate unit (three M4x8 IT screws).

(4) Remove the side lever (two M4x8 IT screws).* Note: When reinstalling, be careful to avoid interference with the cables.

(5) Remove the timing belt and other parts and dismount the Flipper rollers Upper and Lower. (E-rings)

Flipper roller upper

Binding screw

M4x8

Side lever

Binding screw

M4x8

Bottom roller

Binding screw

M4x8

Binding screw

M4x8



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

15.Duplex entrance rol ler

(1) Remove inner cover 3.

(2) Remove the top cover.


(4) Lift the PCB box.


(6) Remove the E-ring from the front side.

(7) Remove the pin from the pulley on the rear, remove the belt, and dismount the pulley.* Caution: Keep in mind that the straight pin may fall out if positioned facing down.

-rng

Straight pin

Belt

ear




(8) Remove the spacer and bearing.

(9) Remove the duplex entrance roller.

BearingSpacer



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

16.Duplex unit


(2) Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper and lift switchback unit upper.

(3) Pull the duplex unit to the front (forward).

(4) Open up the upper duplex belt to access to the mounting screws.

(5) Remove the duplex unit by gently pushing the duplex unit toward the rear a little bit to disengageit from the hook pins (two M4x4 IT screws).

Duplex unit

M4x4 IT screw




17.Duplex belt upper

(1) Remove the duplex unit.* Note: Refer to [item 16: Duplex unit].

(2) Remove the hinges (four M4x8 RS-tight screws).

(3) Pull the lever forward with a finger and separate the upper belt unit from the lower belt unit.

Duplex belt upper

Duplex belt lower

Hinge

M4x8 RS-tight screw (2 pcs)

M4x8 RS-tight screws (2 pcs)

[ The duplex unit turned up-side-down ]

Lever



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(4) Remove the side covers (four M4x8 RS-tight screws).* Caution: When reinstalling, be sure to install the right and left side covers in their original positions.

(5) Pull the belt out in the direction of the arrow.

M4x8 RS-tight screw

Side cover

M4x8 RS-tight screw

Side cover M4x8 RS-tight screw




18.Duplex belt lower

(1) Remove the duplex unit.* Refer to [item 16: Duplex unit].

(2) Remove the hinges (four M4x8 RS-tight screws).

(3) Pull the lever forward with a finger and separate the upper belt unit from the lower belt unit.

(4) Remove the side covers. (four M4x8 RS-tight screws)* Caution: When reinstalling, do not interchange the covers for the left and right.

* Note: For steps (1) through (4), refer to [item 17: Duplex belt upper].

(5) Remove the center screw (M4x8 IT screw) and rotate the bracket 180 degrees.

(6) Pull the belt out towards the front.

M4x8 RS-tight screw

M4x8 IT screw (1 pc)

M4x8 RS-tight screw

Cover

M4x8 RS-tight screw

Cover

Bracket






20.Switchback unit lower


(2) Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2 (three M4x8 binding screws).


(4) Lift (unlock) the lever of switchback unit upper, then lift switchback unit upper.

(5) Pull the duplex unit to the front (forward).

(6) Remove the re-feed sensor bracket (one M4x8 IT screw).* Note: Disconnect the connector first.

Duplex unit

M4x8 IT screw

Re-feed sensor bracket

connector



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(7) Remove the re-feed paper guide (two M3x6 IT screws).

(8) Remove the re-feed paper guide bracket (one M4x8 RS-tight screw).

(9) Remove the pin (one M4x8 IT screw).

(10) Remove switchback unit lower (two M4x8 IT screws).

* Note: Before pulling out switchback unit lower, disconnect the connector on the rear.

* Note: When reinstalling, make sure to connect to the correct pin.

x screws

Re-feed sensor bracket

Pin

M4x8 IT screw

Re-feed guideRe-feed guide bracket

M4x8 RS-tight screw

Switchback unit lower

M4x8 IT screws (2)




21.Switchback drive roller

* Caution: Nip pressure is applied to the switchback drive roller. Be sure to open the switchback door torelease the nip pressure before working.

* Caution: Lower the standard paper feed tray to the lowest position to prevent interference.


(2) Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2.(3) Remove the bearing (one M4x8 IT screw).

* Note: If the bearing is difficult to remove, insert a flathead screwdriver to pry it loose.

(4) Pull the switchback drive roller toward the front to remove.* Caution: Pull the roller straight out to prevent bending of the roller shaft.

* Note: When reinstalling, match the hole on the rear side to the D-shaped section on the shaft of the switch-

back drive roller.

w c ac r ve ro er

Flathead screwdriver Bearing

Bearing M4x8 IT screw (1 pc)

D-shaped section



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

22.Switchback unit

(1) Remove the two IT screws (M4x8).

(2) To remove the switchback unit, open it and lift it out.

M4x8 IT screw

Switchback unit

M4x8 IT screw




23.Main motor


(2) Lift the PCB box.

(3) Disconnect the connector.

(4) Remove the main motor (four M4x8 IT screws).

* Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the belt separator is positioned between the two belts.

Tighten the main motor mounting screws (4 pcs) with the locating pin on the machine frame positioned at

the center of the elongated hole of the motor bracket.

Loosen the screw of the belt tensioner pulley and let the tensioner work by the pull of the spring. Thentighten the belt tensioner screw. (Do not push the pulley against the belt when tightening the tensioner

screw, as that would put too much tension on the belt.)

connector

M4x8 IT screw

M4x8 IT screw Main motor

M4x8 IT screw

Belt separator The elongated hole of the main motor bracket

Spring

Screw of the belt tensioner pulley



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

24.Registration clutch


(2) Disconnect the two connectors.* Note: When reconnecting, check the identification marks (color-coded cable bands) to prevent wrong con-

nections. (brake: blue; clutch: white)

(3) Remove the snap pin.(4) Remove the registration brake located on the front.

(5) Remove the idler pulley (one M4x8 RS-tight screw).

(6) Remove the registration clutch on the back.

* For steps (1) through (5), refer to steps (2) through (6) in [item 2: Registration roller lower].* Note: When reinstalling, align the projections and indentations on the clutch and brake.

Registration clutch snap pin

Registration clutch connectors

Registration brake

Paper feed clutch

Connect the clutch wires to

the correct connectors

according to the coloring.

Registration clutch

Registration brake




* The clutch in the back: Registration clutch ........Connector with white colored marking.

* The clutch in the front: Registration brake..........Connector with blue colored marking.

Registration clutch

Bracket in which the clutcheshooks on to stay stationary.

Idler pulley

M4x8 RS-tight screw



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

25.Paper feed clutch


(2) Disconnect the connector of the paper feed clutch.

(3) Remove the pressure chamber.(4) Remove the snap pin of the paper feed clutch.

(5) Remove the paper feed clutch.* Note: When reinstalling the paper feed clutch, match the hole in the pickup clutch to the D-shaped section

on the shaft.

Paper feed clutch

Connect the clutch wires to

the correct connectors

according to the coloring.

Registration clutch

Registration brake

Snap pin

connector

D-shaped section




26.Duplex clutch unit



(3) Remove the duplex clutch unit. (four M4x8 IT screws)

* Note: When reinstalling the duplex clutch unit, be sure to install the belt first.

* Note: When reinstalling the duplex clutch unit, engage its gear teeth to that of the paper re-feed roller.

M4x8 IT screw (2 pcs)connector

M4x8 IT screw (2 pcs)

Belt



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

27.Multiple feed sensor (receive)



(3) Lift the PCB box.* Loosen the right and left screws and lift the PCB box.

* Using the removed screws, hold the PCB box in the raised position (right and left).

(4) Remove the connector for the multiple feed sensor (receive).

(5) Remove the bracket for the multiple feed sensor (receive) (one M4x8 IT screw) (front).* Note: Work carefully to avoid damaging the paper dust cover on the sensor.

(6) Cut the cable bands.* Note: Use new cable bands to tie the wire in reassembly.

(7) Remove the multiple feed sensor (receive) from the bracket (two M3x6 RS-tight screws).

Connector for multi feed sensor(receive)




28.Lift gear unit



(3) Insert the support bar jigs from the front.* Note: After inserting the support bar jig, rotate the shaft jigs and confirm that the jigs are locked in position.

(4) Insert an Allen wrench in the shaft of the lift gear unit on the rear of the machine and turn clock-wise to lower the transfer unit down until the unit sits completely on the support bar jigs.

* Note: The rotation of the shaft becomes lighter when the transport unit sits on the jigs. Make sure that theunit is sitting firmly on the support bar jigs.

(5) Disconnect the connector from the sensor at the bottom.

(6) Remove the sensor detection plate (one M3x6 IT screw).

(7) Remove the sensor bracket with the sensor attached (one M4x8 IT screw).

down

Lift gear unit

M4x8 IT screw

Lift gear unit

connector

M4x8 IT screw

M3x6 IT screw

Sensor detection plate

M4x8 IT screw

Sensor bracket

M4x8 IT screw

M4x4 IT screw



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(8) Remove the gear.* Note: Loosen the set screw of the gear ( M6x20 ) using an Allen wrench.

* Before removing the gear, remove the plastic sensor detection actuator which is screwed onto thegear. This actuator has a play in mounting. Remove the play by rotating the actuator all the way inCounter-Clockwise direction when mounting it back onto the gear.

* If the set screw (M6 x 20) is not in a good position to fit the Allen wrench, rotate the shaft of the liftgear in the clockwise direction to shift the position of the set screw.

(9) Remove the lift gear unit (four M4x8 IT screws).* Note: Pay caution not to drop the small rectangular key.

* Caution: Do not forget to mount the key in reassembly.

* Caution: Position the set screw, so it can be tightened at the flat portion of the D-shaped shaft.

* Caution: There is a play between the teeth of the gear removed and the teeth on the gear threaded on theshaft. To reduce the play, push the lift gear unit diagonally down in the direction shown on the photographby the arrow mark. (Temporary tighten the set screw, push the lift gear unit diagonally down and tighten theset screw.

* If the gear starts to wear out, remove the set screw, removed the gear and rotate it 180 degrees, and thentighten the set screw back. The unused portion of the screw then can be used.

Set screw

Key

Push down in thedirection of thearrow.




29.Multiple feed sensor (send)


(2) Remove inner cover 1 and inner cover 2.

(3) Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

(4) Push up the green plastic sensor plate, and then pull it diagonally down against the plate spring.

(5) Pull out the multiple feed sensor (send) to the front.

* The green plastic plate and the sensor is in one piece.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Adjustment

List of adjustments to be made when the parts described in this chapter are replaced

A : Need to check and then make the adjustment if needed.B : Basically the adjustment is not required, but do so if in need.

C : Print the test pattern using the image adjustment software and make the adjustment if required.

As can be seen from above chart, replacing the listed parts may require the image adjustment.

Therefore, complete all the mechanical adjustments before doing the image adjustment.

The image adjustment should be done at the very last.

< Adjustments that must be performed in a specific sequence >

Transfer bel t speed adjustment -> In i t ia l paper feed motor adjustment -> Imageadjustment.

Adjusting the transfer unit parallel to registration rollers -> Image adjustment.

Adjusting the frame distortion compensation -> Image adjustment.

List of adjustments to

follow from next page

Transfer

unit (Sec-

tion 4)

Transfer

belt

(Section 5)

Belt

encoder

(Section 6)

Transfer

belt motor

(Section 7)

Suction fan

(Section 8)

Machine

Setup work

1.Adjusting the skew oft ransfer belt

A A A B

2.Adjust ing the t ransfer unitparal le l to the registrat ionrol lers

A A A B

3.Transfer belt speed adjust-ment

A

4.Init ial paper feed motoradjustment

A A

5.Backup roller height

6.Adjusting the height of the

paper guide p late in f rontof the registrat ion ro l lers

7.Adjusting the posit ion ofregistrat ion ro l ler upper

8.Adjustment mechanism ofregistrat ion ro l ler guide

9.Compensation for thetwist ing on the machineframe

A

Image adjustment (Chapter [Inksupply passages])

C C C C C B




1.Adjusting the skew of the transfer unit belt

1-1.< Overview of adjustment >

The belt may skew due to improper tensioning of the transfer unit belt.

To prevent this, the belt skew must be properly adjusted.

Using the [8.1.3.1 Transfer Motor] function of [Drive check 8.1.3 BP Unit], operate the transfer unitbelt for about 3 minutes. Check to make sure that the edge of the belt is touching lightly against the

belt retaining plate on the operation side of the machine. The belt should not be hitting too hard

against the belt retaining plate and making a buckle. Always perform this check after replacing the

transfer unit, transfer belt, or suction fan.

Before doing the check and the adjustment, remove three of the four belt guide plates. The one belt

guide plate to stay on the unit is the one in the front, located on the paper ejection side.

1-2.< Adjustment method >

< Check for belt skew and buckl ing >

(1) Raise the transfer unit to the printing position.

1) Open front door L / front door R and check the position of the transfer unit.

2) If the transfer unit is in the down position, follow the instruction below to bring the transferunit up and hang it onto the print head carriage. If the transfer unit is already hanging onthe print head carriage, jump to step (2). If the transfer unit is in the up and hung position, go to (2):operation of the transfer unit belt.

3) Using Test Mode [8.1.5.1], slide the ink catch pan to the right..

4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the transfer unit to the upper limit position.

5) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], slide the BP spacer to the NORMAL position.

6) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], swing down the lift arms to the lower limit position.

(2) Using Test Mode No. 8.1.3.1, operate the transfer unit belt in [300-3] mode for about 3 minutes. While rotating the belt, look though from the exit end of the machine and confirm followingthings.

The belt does not slide gradually toward front or rear side of the machine.

The belt is touching lightly against the belt retaining plate on the front side of the machine.

The belt is not skewing too far to one end so much as a buckle is made on the belt.* The belt does move up and down 0.1 to 0.2 mm in normal conditions due to the belt joint.

If any condition of above is not correct, make adjustment at that time.

Refer to the following pages for the method to check and to adjust.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< Adjustment method >

* The adjustment procedure given below is for HC5500, butthe same procedure applies on HC5000 also.The difference between HC5500 and HC5000 is that the belt guide plates do not need to be removed on

HC5000. Therefore, the transfer unit on HC5000 need not be pulled out.

(1) Pull out the transfer unit and remove three belt guides. (Refer the next page photograph)

1) Insert the jig shafts under the transfer unit.

2) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the lift arms to the upper limit position.

3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the BP spacers to the HP position.

4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], lower the transfer unit down to the lower limit position.

5) Turn OFF the machine power and pull out the transfer unit.

6) Remove three belt guides.

7) Return the transfer unit into the machine.

Check to make sure that the belt does not skew or lift on one side.

The belt should be touching lightly against the belt retaining plate on the operator’s side of the machine.

Wing

View from the exit end of

the machine.

REARFRONT

The belt should be touching lightly on the operator’s side (front).

The belt contacts the guidetoo hard and lifts (make buckle).Guide Belt

GOOD NO GOOD

The belt is not touching theguide on the operator’s side.

NO GOOD




(2) To check the belt skew, use Test Mode No. 8.1.3.1 and run the belt at the seed of 300 -3 dropsfor at least 3 minutes with the transfer unit raised to the highest (printing) position.

(3) If the belt starts to slide too much to the either side, the following adjustment is performed.

1) Loosen the two IT screws which locks the adjusting unit. Then rotate the adjusting screwuntil the edge of the belt on the operation side of the machine lightly touches the belt guideunder the belt retaining plate. The belt should not hit the belt guide too hard as to lift. The

belt should only lightly touch the guide on the operation side (front) of the machine. Theadjustment should be made while the belt is running with above test mode.

2) When the indicator is moved toward the left on the scale (clockwise turn of the adjustmentscrew), the belt will move toward the front. When the indicator is moved toward the right(counterclockwise turn of the adjustment screw), the belt will move toward the rear.

3) After the adjustment, check the belt for skew by running the belt for at least another 3 min-utes. If the belt stays at the good position, tighten the two loosened IT screws.

4) After tightening the two screws, make a final check by running the belt for at least another 3minutes. If the belt stays at the good position, stop the belt rotation.

5) Turn the adjustment screw 1/8 turn toward left (counterclockwise).

6) Pull out the transfer unit again and mount back the three belt guides.

7) Make a final check by running the belt for at least another 3 minutes.

8) The adjustment is completed. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the jig shafts.

< Symptom of faulty adjustment >

Improper adjustment will result in belt skew. This can cause the belt to lift, causing the paper to

scrape against the printing head and cause smudged prints.

In a worst case, the printing head may be damaged. The corner of the belt may start to tear.

Belt guide

Scale

Screws which locks theadjusting unit.

Adjusting screw



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Adjustment to position the trans fer unit parallel to regis-

tration rol lers

< Overview of adjustment >

If the transfer unit is not parallel to the registration rollers, the paper sheet whose leading edge is

aligned by the registration rollers may not run straight when transferred onto the transfer unit. As theprinting process moves to K, to C, to M, and to Y, the positions at which ink is dropped will begin to

skew (vertical skew). The adjustment described here will make the correction. This must be checked

after the transfer unit, suction fan or transfer belt is replaced, and the correction should be made

when necessary.


(1) Check to see if adjustment is necessary.

1) Select [-M-K 1_6] in [9.2 Pattern selector] and output a test pattern from the standard paperfeed tray.(The speed should be 300-7 drops and printed in simplex). In this pattern, K andM vertical lines are printed vertically straight. To see the condition better, A3 size matt

paper should be used. Smaller papers do not have enough distance to show the result sogood. This inspection is to see if the K and M colors are printed vertically straight or not.There is no need for the two colors to be on top of each other. Also, there is not need tocompare the color or the darkness between the 4 vertical large strips. Looking at theprinted sheet about 60 centimeters away from the eye, if the coloring within each large stripstays constant from top to bottom, the adjustment is good. If the coloring changes inbetween, from top to bottom, the adjustment is not good.

2) If the K and M lines are parallel on the pattern output in step 1), no adjustment is needed.

* The four vertical image group can differ in color between the each. If the printing of the K and M are

made in a straight line, the color within each block should stay constantly the same.

Enlarged view of printed pattern

K and M parallel to each other

Adjustment not necessaryK and M not parallel to each other

Adjustment is necessary




(2) Method of adjusting to correct defects

1) Check the output pattern and determine how the adjustment mechanism should be moved.




5) Measure the space using thickness gauge (feeler gauge), and memo down.

6) Using a 2.5-mm Allen wrench, loosen the two cap screws securing the adjustment mecha-nism in place.

7) Using thickness gauge (feeler gauge), adjust the gap wider or narrower, according to whichway the transfer unit should be shifted, referring to the previous sketch A or B.

8) Using a 2.5-mm Allen wrench, tighten the two cap screws securing the adjustment mecha-nism in place with the gap adjusted with the correct thickness gauge (feeler gauge).

9) Output the adjustment pattern again. Check the result. If the K and M lines are not parallel,repeat the adjustment process until they are parallel.

Not parallel

The space should be made smaller in

the instruction which follows.


The space should be made larger

in the instruction which follows.

Registration roller and transfer unit as viewed from the top

Parallel Not parallel


Enlarged view of printed pattern

A B

Widen the gap for A

Narrow the gap for B

GAP

Insert the thickness gauge here

Cap screws

Cap screws

< HC5500> < HC5000>



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< Using sol id K color print pattern for the checking purpose >

Solid black color print pattern can also be used for the checking purpose. Use HC paper IJ (nor-

mal paper) for this purpose. Refer below for the instruction.

< Symptoms of incorrect adjustment >

An error is generated during image adjustment.

The vertical lines printed by the four colors cross each other.

* This check is required if the transfer unit, suction fan, or transfer belt is replaced. Adjustment needs to bemade according to the result of the check. After this adjustment is performed, image adjustment must beperformed. Even if the parts are not replaced, image adjustment may be necessary after this adjustment.Check the test pattern and perform image adjustment if you note color shifts or other abnormalities. For thedetailed steps on the image adjustment, refer to the separate Chapter on the image adjustment.

* After the adjustment is made, check for the transfer belt skew by running the transfer belt for at least 3 min-utes at the speed of 300 - 3 drops with the transfer unit raised to the highest position (printing position).

* Check that the transfer belt is not hitting the ejection guides and flipper gate. If needed, make mechanicaladjustment in those area to make the correction.

NO GOOD 1 NO GOOD 2

The area after the registration

roller becomes all whiter in color.

[ Make the gap smaller ]

The area only just after the registration

roller becomes whiter in color.

[ Make the gap larger ]

GOOD




3.Transfer belt speed adjustment


This adjustment process monitors the transfer belt motor speed by detecting the belt encoder signal,

then automatically adjusts the speed based on a reference value. This adjustment must be performed

after the transfer unit is replaced.


(1) Select Test Mode No. [8.3.1 Belt motor speed adjustment].

(2) Select [Enter]. Entering the selection starts the transfer belt motor and initiates automaticadjustment.

(3) The adjustment will stop automatically when completed.

* Be sure to make this adjustment before performing the [Initial paper feed motor adjustment] described next.

* After this adjustment, the image adjustment, described on another chapter, may become necessary.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4.Initial paper feed motor adjustment


This adjustment synchronizes the main motor rotation speed and that of the transfer belt motor. This

adjustment should be made by observing the paper loop formed immediately after the registration

rollers.

Since an actual sheet of paper is used for this adjustment, avoid using paper with extremely high or

low rigidity. This adjustment must be performed after the transfer unit or transfer belt motor is

replaced.


* Before performing this adjustment, be sure to perform the [Transfer belt speed adjustment] described in theprevious section.

(1) Adjustment using large volumes of paper (confirmation of loop amount by continuous feeding),* The Test Mode feeds 100 sheets of paper continuously without printing. Placing about 50 sheets on the

standard paper feed tray should be enough to complete the adjustment.1) Select Test Mode [8.3.2 Paper feed motor initial adjustment] and activate the test mode.

2) Press the Right key to feed the paper continuously.

3) While observing the paper for the amount of loop, use the Up/Down keys to change thevalue.

4) When the loop disappears, press the Enter key to register the new value setting.

If the loop is large, reduce the value.

If the loop disappears, increase the value one step or two to make the loop again. Thenreduce the value again to make no loop.

* Since this adjustment is made while observing the loop in actual paper sheets, this method is unsuitable forthick paper that does not produce loops, or thin paper that does not remain stable during transport. Toconfirm the best result, use A3 or Ledger size papers.

* No loop could mean that the transfer belt could be rotating at a slower speed than the registration rollers.Since that is unacceptable, always make the loop and reduce the value to make the loop disappear. Thiswill ensure that the speed of the main motor and the transfer belt motor is synchronized.

* By the eye, it may be difficult to judge that the loop is gone or not, as to judge No Loop is difficult.* Print test pattern _CK4L at speed of 300 x 3 drops to confirm. This test pattern prints C and K colors in hor-

izontal lines. If the paper transfer speed changes after the registration rollers, the horizontal pitches

Check the size of the loop at the position indicatedby the red border.

Large loop: Unacceptable

Small loop: Still unacceptable

No loop: OK




does not change, the adjustment is made correctly. If color changes can be seen within each block, theadjustment still needs to be done.

(2) Adjustment using smaller volumes of paper (confirmation of loop amount in single paper feed.)* Set one sheet of paper at a time on the standard paper feed tray for this adjustment.

1) Select the same Test Mode [8.3.2 Paper feed motor initial adjustment] and activate.

2) Set one sheet of paper on the standard paper feed tray and press the key on the right tofeed the paper.

3) While observing the paper for the amount of loop, use the Up/Down keys to change thevalue as you place one sheet of paper at a time on the standard paper feed tray and feed.

4) Check the amount of loop during the paper feeding operation in step 3) and adjust thevalue setting until the loop disappears.

If the loop is excessive, reduce the value.

If no loop is found, increase the value slightly make the loop and, gradually reduce thevalue to eliminate the loop.

5) Press the Enter key to register the new value setting when the loop is eliminated.

* By feeding one sheet of paper at a time from the standard paper feed tray, No Paper error messageappears after the sheet is fed. When the loop is eliminated and ready to press the Enter key to register the

new value setting, the Enter key is active even though the No Paper error message is displayed.

* Since this adjustment is made while observing the loop in actual paper sheets, this method is unsuitable forthick paper that does not produce loops, or thin paper that does not remain stable during transport. Toconfirm the best result, use A3 or Ledger size papers.

< Signs of faulty adjustment >

Horizontal color banding occurs if the adjustment is incorrect.

Print test pattern _CK4L at speed of 300 x 3 drops to confirm. This test pattern prints C and Kcolors in horizontal lines. If the paper transfer speed changes after the registration rollers, thehorizontal pitches printed on the paper changes, making the colors within each block change. Ifthe colors in each block does not change, the adjustment is made correctly. If color changescan be seen within each block, the adjustment still needs to be done.

* This adjustment is required after replacing the transfer unit or transfer belt motor. After this adjustment isperformed, image adjustment, which is described on another chapter, may need to be performed. Even ifthe above parts are not replaced, image adjustment may be necessary after making this adjustment. Checkby printing the test pattern prints included in the image adjustment software, and perform image adjust-ments if color shifts or other abnormalities are noted.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.Adjustment of backup roller position


Adjust the height position of the backup roller according to the type of paper used.

< Adjustment method >Move the adjustment lever. Set the lever to one of the three setting positions on the inner cover.

Adjusting position is changed according to a paper kind. (Normal paper : center position)

The lever position adjustment may be needed for feeding different papers.

Backup roller at the center position --- Normal paper, premium paper, thin paper (lever : center)

Backup roller at the lower position --- thick paper, postcard (lever : right)

Backup roller at the upper position --- According to the state and kind of use paper (lever : left)

Inner cover installation position (2 locations)

Backup roller: Up position Backup roller: Down position Adjustment lever in the

Standard center position.




6.Adjustment mechanism of registratio n roller paper guide


Certain types of paper may cause paper jams at the transfer unit entrance guide.


This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment.

Therefore, this adjustment is normally not required in the field.

* The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of how to do the adjustment.

(1) Loosen the two RS-tight screws securing the entrance guide in place.

(2) Insert a thickness gauge of the desired thickness(1mm to 1.5mm) between the guide and topsurface of the Transfer unit. Adjust the gap by turning the Screw No.1 in the front and rear.

(3) After completing the adjustment, tighten the two loosened RS-tight screws.

(4) Tighten the Screw No.1 in the front and back to complete the adjustment.

* Make sure the amount of adjustment made on the front and the back is the same. If the adjustment isincorrect, paper jamming will occur.

* Image adjustment may be necessary after this adjustment. Check the test pattern print using the imageadjustment software and perform image adjustment if judged required.

This paper guide

Screw to be loosened before rotatingScrew No.1. (Do the same to the

screw on the back.)

Screw No.1

(View from the top)

Factory default setting1.3mm

Screw No.1



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

7.Adjustment of the Registration rol ler upper


Certain types of paper may cause problems at the registration roller section.

< Adjustment method (HC5500) >This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment.


* The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of how to do the adjustment.

Remove Inner cover 1 and front spring from the registration roller upper.

Remove the adjustment screw from the machine frame and very loosely screw it into the adjust-ing position screw hole on far right. Then loosen the fixed-position screw.

Adjust the position of the adjustment screw up or down to the desired position. Then tighten theadjustment screw. The adjustment screw now stays on this new screw hole.

Finally tighten the fixed-position screw.

* If wrongly adjusted, wrinkles may appear on printed papers.

* This adjustment may affect the printed image Print out the test pattern and check the image. Refer to thechapter on the image adjustment to make necessary adjustment(s).

Adjustment screw

Fixed-positionscrew

Adjusting positionscrew hole

Spring




< Adjustment method (HC5000) >

This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment/


* The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of what this adjustment is.

(5) Remove registration roller upper from the machine.

(6) Loosen the front and rear screws (IT screws) securing the adjustment mechanism in place.

(7) While observing the scale, make the necessary adjustments and tighten the loosened screws.* Make sure the amount of adjustment is the same in the front and rear. If not, paper skewing may occur.

* This adjustment is to make the registration rollers upper and lower parallel positioning and the nippingpressure.

* The factory uses special jig to make the adjustment. Each machine is adjusted to the best condition, thusthe default positioning (scale reading) is different for each machine.

* Before starting the adjustment, check and record the original positions on the scales of the adjust-

ment mechanisms at the front and back. If the scale positions are not recorded, the roller cannot be

returned back to its original position when required.

* Image adjustment may become necessary after this adjustment. Check by using the test pattern printsincluded in the image adjustment software to determine whether the image adjustment is required or not.

Adjustment mechanism

The screw to make the adjustment

Before the adjustment, record the scale position.

If this is not recorded, the part cannot be returned tothe original position.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8.Adjustment mechanism of registration roller guide


How the leading edge of the paper arrive at the registration rollers may affect the paper skew.

The registration roller guide height position changes where the leading edge of the paper hits against

the registration roller when the paper is fed through. The factory uses a special jig to set the heightof the registration roller guide to the best paper feeding position, which is where the registration roller

lower is 1mm plus/minus 0.1mm above the top surface of the guide.


This adjustment is done at the factory using jigs before the machine shipment/


The adjustment is described below just to give the idea of what this adjustment is.

(1) Check and record the default position of the eccentric Hexagon plate.

(2) If the Hexagon plate is turned clockwise, the guide will come to a higher position and less of the

registration roller lower will show above the guide.(3) If the Hexagon plate is turned counter-clockwise, the guide will come to a lower position and

more of the registration roller lower will show above the guide.

Hexagon plate

counter-clockwise

clockwise




9.Adjustment of frame distortion compensation


Due the unlevel surface of the installation site, the frame of the machine may distort. If the distortion

on the machine frame exceeds to certain level, it may affect the image adjustment made at the factory

with the machine in a flat level condition.

Use the following procedure to compensate for frame distortion caused by the floor condition.

This adjustment may be needed when the machine is installed or relocated.


The machine leveling using the four legs to the floor should be done before this adjustment.

(1) Remove paper from the standard paper feed tray and exit tray.




(5) Using a 6-mm Allen wrench, loosen the cap screws on the adjustment mechanisms (on the rightand left of the front of the machine).

(6) Tighten the two loosened cap screws (turn clockwise) until the tip of each screw just touches thebase (right and left). Then look the gap between the bottom unit of the machine and the top unit.Excluding the three anchor plates, there should be a gap between the top unit and the bottomunit, from the paper feed side to the paper receiving side. The gap need not be even.

* Image adjustment may become necessary after this adjustment. Check by using the test pattern prints

included in the image adjustment software to determine whether the image adjustment is required or not.

Tip of cap screw

Base surface on which equipment sup-port sections (3 points) rest



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

10.Adjustment of CCD gain on the side registration unit


This adjustment must be performed after the exchanging of the side registration unit or the CCD unit.

When the gain value of CCD is unsuitable, the abnormalities in a image of a side mask portion may

occur.* Close all the doors and covers to prevent the CCD to catch the external light. If the CCD catches external

light, it will result in abnormal printing on the side mask area.


(1) Start test mode.

(2) Lower the transfer unit to the lower limit position.

1) Open front door L / front door R and check the up-down position of the transfer unit.

2) If the transfer unit is in the up and hanging position, go to the next step 3).If the transfer unit is not in the hanging position, jump to step 5).

3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the lift arms to the upper limit position.4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], slide the BP spacers to the HP position.


(3) Set a white clean A3 paper, with no curl, on the transfer unit. (Paper with curl is unacceptable).RISO HC Matt Paper is too white and RISO HC IJ Paper is not white enough, so these are not fitfor use. Use RISO Risograph Paper or normal copy paper which is normal white in color.

* Use a paper with no curl.

* Any paper, when placed on a flat surface, with 1mm or so lifted portion is considered to have curl, and can-not be used for this adjustment purpose.

abnormalities in a image

Set a A3 paper on the center of the

3rd hold on the transfer belt.To identify the hole positions, theholes are colored on the photo.

Set with the center axis of the roller




(4) Raise the transfer unit to the print position.

1) Open front door L / front door R and check the up-down position of the transfer unit.

2) If the transfer unit is not in the hanging position, go to next step 3). If the transfer unit is in the hanging position, jump to setp 6).

3) Using Test Mode [8.1.5.1], slide the ink pan to the right.

4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the transfer unit to the upper limit position.

5) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the transfer unit to the NORMAL position.

6) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], bring down the lift arms to the lower limit position.

(5) Turn the backup roller lever (orange colored lever) to the right, so the paper is pinched by thebackup roller.

(6) Using the CCD gain adjustment Test Mode No. 8.5.2.4.1 (left) and No.8.5.2.4.2 (right), check thepresent value setting. After getting into each of these two test modes, wait at least 30 secondsfor the value reading to stabilize.

* After the value reading stabilizes in about 30 seconds, check to see that 3-digit value is between 240 to250. Below or above that is no good. If the value does not stabilize within the value of 240 to 250, changethe 2-digit adjustment value (displayed above the 3-digit value). Making the 2-digit value smaller will makethe 3-digit value smaller. Making the 2-digit value larger will make the 3-digit value larger

(7) When the 3-digit value is adjusted to within 240 to 250, register the newly adjusted value byusing Test Mode No. 8.5.6.1.

(8) Using Test Mode, lower the transfer unit down.



3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], bring down the transfer unit to the lower limit position.

(9) Return the backup roller lever to the center.

(10) Remove the piece of paper from the transfer unit.

(11) Using Test Mode, raise the transfer unit to the print position.

1) Using Test Mode [8.1.5.1], slide the ink pan to the right.

2) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], raise the transfer unit to the upper limit position.3) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.3], move the transfer unit to the NORMAL position.

4) Using Test Mode [8.1.4.2], bring down the lift arms to the lower limit position.* Right after completion of above adjustment, if the CCS (A/D) figure is re-checked by SE-Mode (8.2.4.21),

the figures shown for the left and right may differ. If the number displayed is below 220, the adjustmentmust be done over again. If the displayed number exceeds 255, it is still considered acceptable.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

11.Adjustment of the Flipper Gate position


If the flipper gate is not correctly adjusted in its position, the parts around the flipper gate, including

the gate may hit against the transfer belt when the flipper gate is activated by the solenoid.

If any of the parts hit the transfer belt, the position of the flipper gate must be adjusted.The adjustment may also become necessary when the flipper unit or the flipper gate is replaced.


< Init ial adjustment >

(1) Loosen the three mounting screws (a,b,c).

(2) Set the height of the two screws (a and c) 4mm.

(3) Set the height of the screw (b) 3.5mm.

(4) Loosen the three mounting screws (d-1,d-2,d-3).

(5) Close the flipper unit in this state and confirm whether there is any trouble in the following item,if there is no above, adjustment will be completed, and if there is trouble, the following fine

adjustment should be performed.1) Confirm that neither the exit sensor nor the exit sensor bracket hit the flipper gate when the

flipper door is opened or closed.

d-1

d-2

d-3

a

b

c

Height adjustment position

Frame




2) Confirm that the flipper gate does not touch the transfer belt when the flipper gate solenoidactivates to move the gate down toward the transfer belt in duplex printing.

3) When the transfer elevates all the way up to the printing position, the wheels on the clean-ing unit should not hit the flipper gate.

After above three items to confirm are finished, make both the simplex and duplex printing to

confirm that the paper jamming problem does not occur at the flipper gate area.

< Fine adjustment (1) >

This adjustment should be done if the exit sensor or the exit sensor bracket hit the flipper gate when

the flipper door is opened or closed.

1) Loosen the screw (b).

2) Loosen the screw (d-2) 1/2 turn.

3) Tighten the screws (b).


This adjustment should be done if the flipper gate touches the transfer belt when the flipper gate sole-

noid activates to move the gate down toward the transfer belt in duplex printing.1) Loosen the screw (b).

2) Tighten the screw (d-2) 1/2 turn.



This adjustment should be done if the wheels on the cleaning unit hits the flipper gate when the trans-

fer elevates all the way up to the printing position.

1) Loosen the two screws (a,c).

2) Tighten the two screws (d-1,d-3) 1/2 turn.

3) Tighten the screws (a,c).

4) Loosen the screw (b).

5) Tighten the screw (d-2) 1/2 turn.


Even if these above-mentioned fine adjustments are done repeatedly, some troubles occur, it should

be done from initial adjustment.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Cleaning method

1.Removal of paper dust

Paper dust may cause printing problems such as misfires. Clean the internal mechanisms regularly toeliminate possible causes of printing problems.

Use a vacuum cleaner to remove paper dust.

<< Precautions in cleaning >>

Never use an air duster, since doing so will raise paper dust, which may settle and adhere to thenozzle surfaces of the print heads and lower the printing quality.

Be sure to turn OFF the printer power before cleaning.

Paper dust tends to collect in the area (indicated

by arrow marks) close to where the corners of the

leading edge of paper are set on the standard

paper feed tray. Clean these area using a vac-

uum cleaner.

Paper dust also collects around registration roll-

ers. Dust accumulates especially where the side

edges of the papers transfer through. Use a vac-

uum cleaner to remove paper dust.

* Use a vacuum cleaner to remove accumulated paperdust.

< PAPER FEED TRAY >

< REGISTRATION ROLLER AREA >




* Cleaning is recommended every 300,000. prints.

Lower the transfer belt all the way down.

Remove one RS-Tight screw M4 x 8 and detach

top edge sensor, together with its bracket, from

the machine frame.

Using a cleaning paper, wipe off the dust from the

clear plastic sensor cover, especially where the

sensor receives the light.

* When the sensor is covered with dust, error messageNo. X02-212 may occur.

* Cleaning is recommended every 300,000. prints.

The photograph is of a CCD on the side registra-

tion unit (the unit is removed to give a clear view.

There is no need to remove the side registration

unit when cleaning).

The white area is the CCD which detects the

paper width. If this portion is dirty with paper dustor ink residue, the side masking will become

abnormal. Wipe clean when dirty.

The CCD can be cleaned without the side regis-

tration unit removed from the machine, but for a

thorough cleaning, removing the unit from the

machine is recommended.

< EXIT SENSOR > If the exit sensor is covered with paper dust, wipe clean the sensor.

* If there are any other area of the machine found with paper dust, clean the area.

Mounting screw

Light receiving area

< TOP EDGE SENSOR >

< CCD area of the SIDE REGISTRATION UNIT >



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Cleaning the rollers

Stained rollers may cause printing problems such as dirty prints. Clean the rollers to eliminate possi-

ble causes of printing problems.

<< Precautions for cleaning >> Wipe with a micro-fiber cloth moistened with IPA (isopropyl alcohol).

Do not use tissue that sheds paper dust or fibers.

Wipe off ink from the rollers.

Wipe off ink from the center portion of the

switchback roller.

* The switchback roller needs to be cleaned every300,000. sheet printing.

Wipe off ink from the nip rollers on the machine.

* Clean other rollers that are stained with ink.

Nip roller of the flipper unit on the machine

Switchback section

Switchback door

(opened)

Nip rollers




After repeated printing, the ink tends to build

up on the transfer belt surface & reverse side

and the large black metal plate under the belt

on the transfer unit.

* Cleaning the ink off is required after every 300,000prints.

If the ink build up becomes bad, the ink trans-

fers on the reverse side of the printing paper.

On the cleaning jig, wrap cleaning wiper clotharound the jig for the length of about 357mm of

the jig (equals to the width of the transfer belt).

* The cloth should be a micro-fiber type which doesnot shed fiber.

Moisten the cloth with IPA (isopropyl alcohol)

on the both surfaces of the cleaning jig.

< Transfer Unit and Transfer Belt >

Wrap cleaning wiper around the teeth

Reverse side of the printed paper

Enlargement of the ink stain on the reverseside of the printed paper.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Making sure that the power is OFF, slide the trans-

fer unit out of the machine.

* Refer to the section on the transfer unit removal forabove procedure.

Insert the cleaning jig, wrapped with IPA (isopropyl

alcohol) moistened micro-fiber type cloth, between

the transfer belt and the black metal guide plate.

Slide the cleaning jig back-and-forth for about 5

times.

Then rotate the transfer belt by hand and repeat

until the built up ink is removed.

If the cleaning cloth becomes dirty, replace with

new cloth, moisten with IPA (isopropyl alcohol),

and repeat.

* Depending on how much the ink is built up, the clean-ing should be repeated about 2 to 3 times to get the inkoff the under-surface of the transfer belt and the metalbase plate.




After the under-surface of the transfer belt is

cleaned, clean the top surface of the transfer

belt using micro-fiber type cloth moistened with

IPA (isopropyl alcohol).

* Do not use cloth which shed fiber.

Rotate the transfer belt by hand (rotate the pul-

ley by hand in the correct paper transfer direc-

tion) and continue with the cleaning of the top

surface of the transfer belt.

* After the under-surface and the top surface of the transfer belt is cleaned, mount the transfer unitback in the machine.

* Mount the covers back on the machine.

* Turn ON the power.

* Using Test Mode, elevate the transfer unit to the upper most position (printing position).

* Use Test Mode No. 8.1.3.1 to run the transfer belt at speed of 300 x 3 drops for about 3 minutes andconfirm that the belt does not skew. If the belt skews, make adjustment as described earlier on thischapter.

* Make prints and confirm that the papers are not stained by ink residue.

* If the papers get ink stain, repeat the cleaning of the belt. If no ink stain appear, the cleaning job iscompleted.

Belt rotating direction



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)



Ink supply passages

CHAPTER 7:Ink supply passages

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanisms

1.Mechanism of ink supply passages

1-1.Ink supply passages

Ink passages can be categorized into two main categries: passages for supplying the ink required for

printing, and a waste ink passage for carrying ink used from print head cleaning.

Ink feed passages

Ink from the ink cartridges is supplied to the print heads via reservoirs and ID units (distributors).

Ink cartridge holder unit is equipped with independent ink solenoid valve for each color to openand close the ink passage. An open air is supplied to the ink cartridges at all time via an air filter.

* On HC5000, one large ink fuse solenoid is equipped on the ink cartridge holder unit to open andclose the ink passage with an independent solenoid valve on each ink reservoir.

Each reservoir is equipped with two solenoid valves to open the reservoir to the atmosphere(valve between reservoir and overflow tank), pressurizing (valve between reservoir and pres-sure pump). The reservoir is provided with a sensor to detect the presence of ink.

* The reservoir on HC5000 is equipped with three solenoid valves with the third one as ink supply valvefrom the ink cartridge (refer to the previous paragraph).

The ID units distribute ink to print heads (6 print heads for each color). Two sets of ink distribu-tors are equipped on the machine. One set of ink distributor contains two colors ink, with eachink separated by a wall within the distributor. One set is for C and K color ink. The other set isfor M and Y color ink. The distributor for each color is equipped with a solenoid valve for the airand a sensor to detect the ink presence. Each set of ink distributor is equipped with a heater.

* HC5500 has ink reservoir, ID units and print heads in the order of CKMY, while HC5000 has them inthe order of KCMY. The ink cartridges on both HC5000 and HC5500 are aligned in the order ofKCMY.

6 pieces of print heads exist for each color in horizontal layout. There are total of 24 print headsfor the 4 colors.

The overflow tank has a function to supply air passage for the ink reservoirs and ink distributors.The solenoid valves open or close the air passage for each ink distribution method, such as innormal ink distribution, compressed air ink distribution in head cleaning, etc.

In the case when the print head is replaced or worked on during the machine setup procedure inwhich the print head is not filled with ink, compressed air is needed to force the ink through theprint head.

The YELLOW ink uses a different material for the tubing from the other color inks.

Waste ink passage

The ink sucked by the suction pump during the head cleaning is drawn into the waste ink tankvia suction chamber. The suction chamber separates the air and the ink and only the ink goesinto the waste ink tank.

The ink dripped into ink pan during the head cleaning goes into the waste ink tank by the gravitythrough a dedicated ink tube.

The ink which drips out from the ink cartridge from the top and bottom nozzle, during the ink car-tridge insertion into the machine, is gathered in a pan and drawn out into the waste ink tank bythe gravity through a dedicated ink tube.

If a problem occurs in a reservoir or ID unit and ink overflow from these units, the ink flows intothe overflow tank. In these cases, the ink flows into the overflow tank via the tube which is nor-

mally used as air passage. The overflow tank is equipped with a sensor for an ink full detection.When this sensor detects the ink, and error message is displayed and stops the machine until a



Ink supply passages

serviceman drains the ink from the overflow tank. The ink which fills over this sensor is drawninto the waste ink tank by gravity via dedicated ink tube.

As described above, all waste ink collects into the waste ink tank. The full level of the waste inktank is detected by the full detection sensor, triggered by the weight of the waste tank and theink accumulated in the tank. The cleaning ink tank must be replaced periodically. The printingcondition and how often the head is cleaned will determine how often the waste ink tank has tobe replaced.

Air open filter

Ink solenoid valves

Solenoid valve

Overflow tank

ID unit

Cleaning unit

Reservoir

(x4)

Print head (x24)

Suction chamber

Solenoid valves

Suctionpump

Waste ink tank

Pressure chamber

Pressure pump

Ink pan

Ink cartridge

(x4)

Schematic diagram of ink supply passages for HC5500



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Air open filter

Ink fuse solenoid

Solenoid valve

Overflow tank

ID unit

Reservoir

(x4)

Print head (x24)

Suction chamber

Solenoid valves

Suctionpump

Waste ink tank

Pressure chamber

Pressure pump

Ink pan

Ink cartridge

(x4)

Schematic diagram of ink supply passages for HC5000

Cleaning unit



Ink supply passages

1-2.Main parts of the ink feed passages

(1) Ink fuse solenoid* This Ink fuse solenoid is used only on HC5000. It is not used on HC5500.

The ink fuse solenoid opens the ink passage valve at the ink cartridge joints when the ink car-

tridge cover is closed.

The ink fuse solenoid opens the valve only when the ink cartridge cover is closed, and when cor-

rect ink is detected by the tag the ink flows out from the cartridge.

* If for some reason the machine operation needs to be check with the top cover of the machine removed,the ink fuse solenoid must be manually activated to open the ink supply valve. Use plastic band or alike tosimulate the normal condition equivalent to the existence of the top cover. (Refer to the photograph.)

* Pay caution not to insert wrong color ink cartridge in wrong slot when the valve is manually opened, as theink immediately flows down the tube with the valve opened. The plastic band must be pulled tightly.

Ink fuse solenoid

The lock which opens theink flow valve.

Pushed by the cover

Operation of solenoidSolenoid

Photo sensor

Unlock

Schematic diagram of mechanism that opens the ink flow path

Example of manually pressing the lock release mechanism

Cable binder



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(2) Open air filter

This air passage vents the ink cartridges set in the holder to the atmosphere.

The air open passage is provided with a filter to keep dust and other particles out of the ink car-tridges.

The air open filter is connected to the overflow tank and opens the overflow tank to the atmo-sphere.

Ink that flows from the ink cartridges into the air vent tube is discharged (by gravity) into the

waste ink tank.

(3) Ink reservoir

Air open filter

To each ink cartridge

Filter Opens to atmosphere

Accumulated oven flown ink

Opens to atmosphere

The tube connects to waste ink tank (The tube connected to overflow tank)

Schematic diagram of air open filter

Overflown ink in the filter assemblyflows down into the waste tank.



Ink supply passages

The following diagram shows reservoir pipes and tubing for the ink and air passage. There aretotal of 4 reservoirs, 1 reservoir for each color.

The ink drain port is used to drain ink from the inside and is normally not used. It is sealed with acap under normal conditions. To drain ink, remove the cap and connect a tube to the port andattach a syringe to the tube and pump the ink out. The port is an extension of a pipe that extendsdown close to the bottom of the reservoir. The following page shows the internal view.

The reservoir provides functions that opens or closes the passage to send ink to the ID unit

using compressed air from the pressure chamber, opens or closes the ink passage from the inkcartridge and opens or closes the air vent passage.

Air open solenoid valve

Ink supply solenoid valve

Magnetic reed switch

To ID unit

To ink cartridge

To overflow tank

Air passageOverflow ink passage

Ink flow

Ink flow

Pressure solenoid valve To pressure chamber

Ink drain port

(Not used under normal condi-tion)

Compressed air flow

Compressed air flow

Air passage

Overflow ink passage

Ink drain port

(Not used under normal con-

dition)


Pressure solenoid valve

Compressed air flow

To pressure chamber To ink cartridge

Ink flow

Air open solenoid valve

To overflow tank

Air passage

Overflow ink passage

To ID unit HC5500 INK RESERVOIR

HC5000 INK RESERVOIR



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

The presence of ink in the reservoir is detected by a magnet attached to the float and a magnetic reed

switch mounted outside the reservoir. Details of the float operation are given further below.

To overflow tank

To ink cartridge

Internally connectedTip is located here.

Float Magnetic reed switch

To ID unit

For ink drainage

To pressure chamber

Ink drain port



Ink supply passages

Detection of ink cartridge replacement indication (No ink error)

The timing for the ink cartridge replacement message is determined by the ink detection mechanism

on the ink reservoir (magnet attached to a float and magnetic reed switch mounted outside the reser-

voir). The detection timing is described below.

< During printing >

During the printing, if the reservoir ink detection mechanism status changes from ink detection to no

detection, and if no ink detection status does not change for 4 seconds, the ink cartridge is deter-

mined to be empty and the ink not coming down into the reservoir. Then, the number of drops (not

dots) ejected from the print heads for each colors is counted. When the count exceeds a value of [A4

size x 30% dot density x 500 sheets], the printing operation is forcibly stopped, and an Ink cartridge

empty error is displayed. If a print job is completed before this value is reached, the Ink cartridge

empty error message is displayed when the job is finished.

< In standby mode >

If the reservoir ink detection mechanism detects no ink for 30 seconds, the Ink cartridge empty error

message is displayed.

< During head cleaning >

In startup cleaning

If the reservoir ink detection mechanism detects no ink for 3 minutes, the Ink cartridge empty

error message is displayed.

During other head cleaning menu

If the reservoir ink detection mechanism detects no ink for 30 seconds, the Ink cartridge empty

error message is displayed.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(4) ID unit

Each ID unit contains two colors (K&C / M&Y), separated by an internal wall.

Ink is distributed from ID unit to the printing heads, 6 heads to a color.

The presence of ink in the ID unit is detected by internal float and magnetic reed switch mountedoutside the ID unit. Details of the float operation is described later on this chapter.

Solenoid valve opens the passage to the atmosphere when ink is drawn into the ID unit. Ink viscosity increases at low temperatures which may cause ink misfires. As a preventive mea-sure, the ID unit is provided with a heater. The heater warms the ID unit and the ink within theunit. Thermistor is provided for temperature monitoring.

Thermistor


Thermistor

Heater

ID solenoid valve

Tube to overflow tank (for air vent)

Tube to reservoir (for ink supply)


Tubes which connect to heads

(6 tubes arranged in the same layout configu-ration on the opposite side)



Ink supply passages

(5) Print head

The machine is equipped with piezoelectric type inkjet heads. When a voltage is applied, thepiezoelectric element changes shape and causes a change in the volume of the ink pressurechamber, resulting in ink ejection.

The machine is provided with six modules, each of which is formed by joining two 8-gradation318-nozzle piezoelectric type heads.

The following shows how the nozzles are positioned in the two bonded heads.

The two heads must be joined with high precision. The head bonding process can be performedonly at the factory. When one of the two heads in a module becomes defective, the whole mod-ule (two bonded heads) must be exchanged.

* Never touch the nozzle surfaces of the print heads.

* Dust or scratches in the nozzle surfaces of the print heads may result in printing problems.

* In the worst case, dust and scratches on the head nozzle surfaces may result in problems (such asmisfires) that require print head replacement. To prevent such problems, avoid touching the printhead nozzle surfaces during machine maintenance. Work carefully to avoid scratching print headswith tools or parts when working near them. Never touch or wipe the nozzle surface.

* Protect the print heads from sudden impact or shock.

* The print heads are extremely delicate components. Handle carefully and avoid dropping or hittingthem.

* If print heads are replaced, they must be adjusted.

* Adjust the physical position (mechanical adjustment) and parameters that vary among individualheads.

Never apply impact or shock to

this area.

Print head

Avoid dust and scratches.

Nozzle surface

Schematic diagram showing nozzle positions

Head unit Nozzle

150 dpi pitch

300 dpi pitch

< PRINT HEAD MODULE >



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Print head position adjustment mechanism

To adjust the head module angle, turn the adjustment knob in 1/8-turn increments, monitor-

ing the output result of the image adjustment software. (For more details, refer to the sec-

tion describing the image adjustment procedure.)

Each head module is secured to a head base as shown below. The head angle adjustment

mechanism mounted on the cast aluminum carriage allows the head module to swivel with

one end of the module as a pivot.One full turn of the adjustment knob swivels the print head module about 0.03 degrees.

The various print modes are listed below. Print modes change automatically according to theprint setting by the printer driver.

Horizontal resolution --- Paper width-wise direction

Vertical resolution ------ Paper feed direction

Number of drops --- 0 (no ejection) to 7 drops (maximum drops)

Print modecode

HorizontalResolution

VerticalResolution

MaximumNumber of

drops

300-7 300dpi 300dpi 7

300-6 300dpi 300dpi 6

300-5 300dpi 300dpi 5

300-4 300dpi 300dpi 4

300-3 300dpi 300dpi 3

600-7 300dpi 600dpi 7

600-6 300dpi 600dpi 6

600-5 300dpi 600dpi 5

600-4 300dpi 600dpi 4

600-3 300dpi 600dpi 3

600-2 300dpi 600dpi 2

600-1 300dpi 600dpi 1

Pivot of rotationHead

Head module Plate spring

head angle adjustment mechanism Adjustment knob

Plate spring

Base Base



Ink supply passages

(6) Overflow tank

The pipes to the reservoirs of individual color inks are arranged as shown below.

The overflow tank collects excess ink resulting from a problem on the reservoir, ID unit, etc.

The air vent tubes for various components in the ink supply passages are connected to the over-flow tank and open to the external atmosphere via the overflow tank.

The presence of waste ink in the overflow tank is detected by the internal float and the reedswitch mounted outside the overflow tank. Details of the float operation is given later.

The overflow tank has a waste ink drain plug. If the overflow tank becomes full, waste ink can bedrained from the tank by removing the plug and using a syringe and a tube.

To waste ink tank

To ID solenoid valve (Y)(for air vent and overflow)


To ID solenoid valve (M)(for air vent and overflow)

Waste ink drain plug (plug is installed under normal conditions)

To reservoir M(for air vent and overflow)

To reservoir C

(for air vent and overflow)

To reservoir K(for air vent and overflow)

To reservoir Y(for air vent and overflow)

To air open filter

To ID solenoid valve (C)(for air vent and overflow)

To ID solenoid valve (K)(for air vent and overflow)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(7) Pressure pump

The pressure pump uses one-way valves mounted on the two tubes connected to the pump.

The one-way valve allows air to flow in only one direction.

The pressure pump motor moves the piston inside the pressure pump up and down via the link-age.

When the piston is pushed up, air inside the pump is sent to the pressure chamber (air dis-charge) through the one-way valve (the other valve prevents air from escaping through the

intake side). When the piston moves down, air is drawn into the pump through the other one-way valve,

which is open to the external atmosphere (the other valve prevents air from returning back fromthe pressure chamber).

These steps are repeated to allow the pressure pump to send air to the pressure chamber.

The pressure pump has a photo-sensor to monitor the piston operations.

The system is also equipped with a torque limiter to keep the pressure chamber pressure fromexceeding the preset level due to pump malfunctions.

Schematic diagram of pump operation

Air intake

(external atmosphere) Air discharge

(To the press chamber)

Piston up/down motion

One-way valve(Contains air filter)

One-way valve



Ink supply passages

(8) Pressure chamber

The pressure chamber stores compressed air to be sent to the reservoirs.

The pressure chamber cannot detect pressure levels. Instead, pressure levels are controlled bythe number of rotations that the piston motor makes.

The tubes from the pressure chamber are connected to the compressed air intake solenoidvalves for the K, C, M, Y reservoirs.

The supply of compressed air from the pressure chamber to each reservoir is controlled by thecompressed air intake solenoid valves installed on each reservoir. The solenoid valves open orclose to send compressed air according to the machine operating conditions - for example,sending compressed air to all reservoirs at the same time (the resulting air pressure will be rela-tively low, since air is distributed among all colors) or sending compressed air to one specificcolor (air pressure is much higher when supplying compressed air to one single reservoir).These operations are controlled by each type of head cleaning operations.

M

Y

Sends compressed air to theintake solenoid valves oneach reservoir

K

C



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-3.Main parts in the waste ink passage

(1) Cleaning unit

Six wiper-equipped suction nozzles for vacuum operation and wiping in head cleaning operationare provided for each color, totaling 24 units (same number as the print heads) for all colors.

During head cleaning, the suction nozzles apply vacuum suction as they sweep over the head

nozzle surfaces. A motor (cleaning motor) is provided for this sweeping operation. The ink pan keeps ink from the print heads from dropping onto the transfer unit. The ink pan

moves away from the location under the print heads during printing operation, then returns tothe location under the print heads after a preset time elapses after completion of a printing oper-ation. A motor (ink pan motor) is provided for this operation.

The cleaning unit is positioned over the transfer unit. During the head cleaning operation, thetransfer unit pushes the cleaning unit up against the printing heads. A sensor detects the heightof the cleaning unit during the head cleaning operation.

One photo-sensor is equipped on the cleaning unit to detect the front-back movement of theunit, and two photo-sensors are equipped on the unit to detect the side way movement.

Two torque limiters prevent ink pan motor damage when an excessive load is applied and pre-vents side way movement of the ink pan (photograph on next page).

< CLEANING UNIT >

Torque limiter

Suction head

Photo-sensors to detect inkpan slide position.

Cleaning motor

Photo-sensor to detect clean-ing head sliding position.

Torque limiter

FRONT OF THE MACHIINE

Ink pan motor



Ink supply passages

Photo-sensor for detecting the height position of the cleaning unit during the cleaning operation(ink pan sliding height & head cleaning height).



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(2) Suction pump unit

This pump generates a vacuum pressure to draw ink from the print heads through the suctionheads (24 unit in total) during the head cleaning.

The unit has two types of sponge filters, round and rectangular in shape, to prevent ink mist fromentering the pump. In addition, an absorption sponge (pump sponge) is also installed to preventink mist that enters the suction pump unit from blowing out. These filters and sponge must bereplaced periodically. (The replacement interval depends on the printing conditions, cleaning

cycle settings, head cleaning operations conducted from the panel, etc.)

Suction pump unit

Suction pump

Filter (small)

Filter (large)

Pump sponge



Ink supply passages

(3) Suction chamber

The suction chamber separates the waste ink drawn by the suction pump unit into ink and air.

Ink separated from air is sent to the waste ink tank (by gravity via dedicated waste ink tube).

The presence of waste ink in the suction chamber is detected by internal float and magneticreed switch mounted outside the suction chamber. The detail on the float operation is givenlater on this chapter.

In normal operations, waste ink will not cause the float to rise so far as to activate the reed

switch. In such cases as when the waste ink drain tube is bent by an operational error, the floatwill rise and displays an error to indicate irregular waste ink discharge.

From cleaning unit

To suction pump

Schematic diagram showing discharge of vacuumed ink

Waste ink

Plate spring

In vacuum operation

Waste ink

In normal condition

Plate spring

Discharge hole

To waste ink tank

In normal condition, the plate spring hangs down to drain the collected in out from the suction

chamber. During the vaccum operation, the plate spring is pulled up by the vaccum forceand the plate spring serves as a lid to plug the ink discharge hole.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(4) Waste ink tank

The waste ink tank receives the ink, which is accumulated in the suction chamber and ink pan ofthe cleaning unit during the head cleaning.

The waste ink tank capacity is about 6.5 liters.

The waste ink tank holder detects when the waste ink tank reaches its maximum level.

The ink tank holder, on which the waste ink tank is installed, is pulled up by a spring. Whenwaste ink accumulates into the tank, the ink tank holder starts to sink down from the weight of

the waste ink collected. Two photo-sensors monitor the position of the tank holder and detectfour conditions: No tank, Normal, Near full, and Full.

The waste ink tank must be replaced periodically before the Full error message is displayed.(Replacement interval depends on the printing conditions, cleaning cycle settings, head mainte-nance operations conducted from the panel, etc.).

Waste ink tank

Joint cap

Photo sensors

Waste ink tank is notdetected. Machine cannotoperate.

Normal condition.Machine operates.

Near-full detectionMachine operates.

FULL detection.Machine cannot operate.

Spring



Ink supply passages

1-4.Mechanisms common to the ink feed and waste ink passages

(1) Mechanisms for detecting the presence of ink or waste ink.

The basic mechanism for detecting the presence of ink or waste ink is the same, despite some

minor differences due to the shapes of the containers such as the ink reservoir, ID unit, overflow

tank and suction chamber.

These containers each contain a float (a hollow resin object containing air) with a magnet, as

shown in the diagram below. The float elevates with the increase in the amount of the ink accu-

mulated in the container. The reed switch mounted on the exterior of these containers activate

when the switch detects the magnet, and the FULL detection is made.

Reservoir

Detects the presence of ink inside the reservoir. (When the reed switch remains OFF for a pre-set duration, the ink cartridge is determined to be empty.)

ID unit

The presence of ink inside the ID unit is detected.

Overflow tank

Detects the overflow tank full condition.

Suction chamber

Detects the suction chamber full condition when the waste ink within the suction chamber is notdraining out.

ON

Magnet

Reed switch

Pivot of the float

Float

Clean ink or waste ink (depends on the container)

Float rises due to ink or waste ink.

Schematic diagram of mechanism that detects presence of ink or waste ink

OFF

Ink or waste ink





Ink supply passages

(3) Overview of operations for initial ink supply to print heads* This operation supplies ink to the internal of each print head and must be performed when the print heads

are not filled with ink (after replacement of print heads, ID units or reservoirs). When this operation is exe-cuted from the operation panel, the following movements are performed automatically.

* The following operations must be performed for each color. (They cannot be performed simultaneously forall four colors at one time.)

* This is the Start-Up Cleaning.

1) The pressure pump operates and pressurizes the pressure chamber. (Pressure levels arecontrolled by how many rotations the motor operates.)

2) The pressurized air solenoid valves on the reservoirs open.

3) The pressurized air forces ink to be ejected out from the print head nozzles.

4) Both the air vent solenoid valves and pressurized air solenoid valves on the reservoirsopen to bring ink pressure within the print heads down to appropriate level.

5) The suction pump performs a vacuum operation. (The suction heads sweep the print headnozzle surfaces.)

Initial ink supply operation to the Print Heads

Solenoidvalves at

ink car-

tridge

Solenoid valves onink reservoirs

Solenoidvalves on

ID units

Pressurepump

Reedswitch on

reservoir

Reedswitch on

ID unit

Suctionpump

Suction nozzles(Cleaning unit)

Ink pas-

sage

valve

Air vent

valve

Com-

pressed

air pas-

sage

valve

Air vent

valve

Lifts to

the head

cleaning

position

Head

cleaning

action

opened closed closed closed - detected detected - - -

closed

pumping

Operation of pressure motor for preset duration (pressure controlled by pump operating time)

opened

Compressed air ejects ink in the reservoirs and ID units from the print heads toward the ink pan of the cleaning unit.

closed

opened opened

Solenoid valves open to reduce internal head pressure to appropriate level.

closed

opened opened (Solenoid valves open to reduce internal head pressure to appropriate level).

Vacuumoperation

starts

Lifts toposition

Vacuum

operationcontinues

Wipes

headsfrom frontto rear.

Suction nozzles move from the front to the rear while drawing ink from print heads using vacuum force provided

by the suction pump. This completes the initial ink supply operation for the print heads.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(4) Head maintenance operation

There are six cleaning modes for head cleaning operations, depending on the purpose of clean-

ing.

* The processing time given on the chart below is for reference only. The Startup cleaning K/C/M/Y andKCMY may take longer or less time depending on how much of the ink supply route on the machine is filledwith ink before the cleaning operation is started.

Cleaning mode Operation Process-

ing time

Note

Normal cleaning (5.5.5)

Automatically operate forevery fixed printing num-ber of sheets, preset byuser mode 5.5.6 Also can be operatedfrom operation panel.(All colors at one time)

Normal cleaning About 1minute

For recovering frommisfire.

Hyper cleaning(5.5.4)

Operates only by paneloperation (selected coloronly).

Hyper cleaningonce and thenNormal cleaningonce.The wiper cleansthe heads onlyonce.

About 1minute

For recovering misfire.More powerful than Nor-mal.

Extra cleaning(5.5.3)


More powerfulthan Hyper x 2times.The wiper cleansthe heads twice.

About 2.6minute

For recovering misfire.More powerful thanHyper.

Startup cleaning

K/C/M/Y (5.5.1.1 - 5.5.1.4)

Operates only by panel

operation (selected coloronly).

One time Hyper

cleaning aftergiving extra timefor Reservoir andID unit to fill withink.

About 1

minute

Cleaning menu to use

after replacing reservoir,ID unit, print head ortubes.

Startup cleaningKCMY

(5.5.1.5)

Operates only by paneloperation (All color opera-tion: one by one).

Twelve timesHyper cleaning(3 times per color= 3 times x 4 col-ors = 12 times.)

About12.5 min-utes

The first head cleaningmenu to be used inmachine setup.

Flush cleaningK/C/M/Y (5.5.2)


Extra cleaningtwice with piezomovement on the

Yellow heads,allowing moretime for ink todrip for the Yel-low heads.

About 3.5minutes

The cleaning menu touse after the machinehas been left unused for

a long period of time.



Ink supply passages

Disassembly

1.Bottle joint (K, C, M, Y)

In principal, the removal procedure is the same for all the colors.The Yellow Ink uses different tube material in certain places.


(2) Pull out the cartridge of the ink color for which the bottle joint is to be replaced.* Work carefully to avoid dripping ink.

(3) Remove the RD/WR PCB bracket (one M3x6 IT screw).* The RD/WR PCB barcket needs to be detached only when removing the bottle joints K or C.

* The PCB is located on the other side of the wire harness core. It is best to undo the wire from the wire har-ness clamp.

* Let the removed PCB hang loose, out of the way.

RD/WR PCB bracket

Cable clamp

RD/WR PCB

Core



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

* The following steps from (4) to (8) are for HC5000.

* For HC5500, jump to step (9).

(4) Remove two springs.

(5) Remove the solenoid lever.

Remove the split pin from the solenoid.

Remove the solenoid lever (two M3x6 IT screws).

(6) Remove 5mm diameter E-ring from the shaft of the Ink release bracket (on the K ink side).* Depending on the machine, plastic damper is attached on the K ink side. For the machines with the

damper attached on the K ink side, remove the damper by removing two screws.(7) Remove 5mm diameter E-ring from the shaft of the Ink release bracket (on the Y ink side).

(8) Remove the Ink release bracket.

Solenoid lever

Ink release bracket

(5) Split pin

(7) 5mm diameter E-ring

(4) Spring

(4) Spring(5) Two M3x6 IT screws

(8) Ink release bracket

(6) 5mm diameter E-ring



Ink supply passages

(9) Disconnect the connector from the solenoid valve.* This step is only for HC5500.

(10) Remove two ink tubes.

[One ink tube is at the ink bottle joint, which leads to the ink reservoir. The other ink tube is from

the ink tray.]

* Watch out for the ink leakage.

(11) Remove the ink bottle joint (two M3x6 IT screws.)

The two ink tubes to be removed

IT screws M3x6

Disconnecting of ink joint How the clips should be positioned

[ HC5000 only ]

Mounting screws of the inkbottle joint.

Ink bottle joinit



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

In mounting back the ink joint, face the clip of the ink joint should face to the left.

In mounting back the ink tubes, never bend the tubes. Make loose loops on the tubes whendirecting the tubes in different direction.

If working on the tubes other than the Yellow Ink, make sure to hook the O-ring attached portionof the tube onto the tube bracket. If working on the Yellow Ink tube, position the tube so thatthe tube stays close to the ink catch pan, next to other tubes. Instead of the O-ring, the Yellow

Ink tube has a clip which should be hooked onto the hook. Make sure that the ink tubes do not tangle with each other whensetting the tubes in position.

The photograph below shows the layout of the tubes when correctly positioned.

Make loose loops on the tubesin this area when changing thedirection on the tubes.

The O-rings on the tubesshould hook onto the tubebracket (excludes the Ytube).

Let the yellowink tube settlein position byits pre-shapedcurve.

The clip on the yellow ink tube shouldhook onto the hook.

Hook the tubes onto thehooks.

Enlarged top view ofthe air open filter area

These two thin tubes shouldgo under the larger tubes.



Ink supply passages

2.Receiver PCB


(2) Remove the ink cartridge from the ink cartridge holder from which the receiver PCB is to beremoved.

(3) Pull the ink cartridge holder slightly forward (two M3x6 IT screws).

* If the ink cartridge holder is pulled too much forward, the tubes from the ink pan may disconnect andmay result in ink leakage. Pay caution when pulling the ink cartridge holder forward.

(4) Disconnect the special cable from the Receiver PCB connection.

(5) Pinch the Receiver PCB holder in the direction of the arrow and pull out the PCB holder with theReceiver PCB attached.

M4x5 IT screw

Ink cartridge holder

M4x5 IT screw

Special cable



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(6) Detach the Receiver PCB from the PCB holder.* When reinstalling the PCB holder unit, pay close attention not to touch hard against the ink tubes

nearby, as that may cause the tubes to partially disconnect, or in worst cases the ink tubes may comeloose and spill the ink.

* Make sure that the PCB is firmly inserted into the PCB holder and the PCB holder secured firmly ontothe ink cartridge holder.

Receiver PCB



Ink supply passages

3.Ink Reservoir K / C / M / Y

The removal method is practically the same for all the colors.

The tube material for the Yellow Ink is different from the other colors.

(1) Confirm that the ink pan is positioned under the heads (if not, move the ink pan to the left, underthe heads).


(3) Disconnect the chamber tube from the pressure chamber for the reservoir to be removed (thetube that leads from the pressure chamber to the ink reservoir).

* Plug the removed end of the air tube onto the nipple on the ink reservoir to prevent dust from getting intothe tube.

- Refer to the photographs on the next page for the following instructions -

(4) Disconnect the connector for the reservoir to be removed.

(5) Disconnect the tube joint (rotate and pull).

unhook the tube joint, located between the ink cartridge and ink reservoir, from the bracket

Watch out for the ink dripping.

(6) Disconnect the air vent hose from the overflow tank for the reservoir to be removed.* Plug the removed end of the air tube onto the nipple on the ink reservoir to prevent dust from getting into

the tube.

Reservoir C

Pressure chamber

Reservoir M

Reservoir K

Chamber tubes

Reservoir Y

The nipples onto which the unplugged ends of the air tubes should be attached to preventdust from entering into the tubes. One nipple is for the chamber tube.

The other is for the air vent tube to be unplugged from the overflow tank.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(7) Remove the ink reservoir (two M3x6 IT screws).* Although the tube joint is provided with a self sealing valve, watch for ink leaks.

* Plug the ends of the unplugged air vent tube and tube from the pressure chamber into the nipples onthe reservoir to prevent dust from entering into the tubes.

* In putting back the tube joints on the brackets, make sure to position the metal clips so that the grip ofthe clips face to the right, as shown on the photograph on the right, below.

Tube joint

Tube joint

M3x6 IT screw

Reservoir (Cyan) Connector Unplug this air vent tube from the overflow tankand plug the removed end onto the nipple on theink reservloir.

Plug the ends of the two unpluggedtubes, one from the overflow tankand the other from the pressurechamber into the nipples on the ink

reservoir. (The photograph showsthat of the tube from the overflowtank.

The grips on the tube clips should faceto theright, as shown on the photograph.

Unplug the air vent tube from the overflow tank.



Ink supply passages

< Tube layout in assembly >

* Tubes to the pressure chamber.

* The tubes should be laid out so they do not touch any shafts, belts or any other moving objects.

The view of the ink joint at ink reservoir and tubes around the ink reservoir.

The tubes to the pressure chamber should not be tangled.

Port

Tube

Gap less than 2 mm

Tube layout

GOOD: Tubes not tangled.

NO GOOD: Tubes tangled.

HC5500

HC5000

The tubes should be laid out so that they do not tangle with each other.

The photograph shows that of the tube around the Yellow Ink reservoir.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

* Where the tubes must curve, make the loops in large diameters, so the tubes do not bend and stop the inkflow.

* After the ink reservoir is replaced, use Test Mode 5.5.1 Start Up Cleaning for the color of the ink of

which the ink reservoir was replaced.

Enlarged view of the ink reservoirs of all four colors.



Ink supply passages

4.Overflow tank


(2) If the overflow tank is filled with overflown ink, empty the overflow tank of the overflown inkbefore the removal by unplugging the plug on the ink draining port and connect a syringe with atube connected at the tip to draw the ink out of the overflow tank from the port.

(3) Disconnect the reed switch connector from the overflow tank.(4) Disconnect the drain tube.

* Work carefully to avoid dripping ink.

(5) Disconnect all the tubes from the overflow tank (9 tubes).

(6) Slide the overflow tank toward the right and lift to remove (two M3x6 IT screws).* If the overflow tank contains waste ink, watch for ink leaks.

* Keep the overflow tank in level state all through the removal procedure to prevent ink from leaking.

* The end of the tube connected to the overflow tank may stretch wide with the time. If the end openingis stretched wide, cut off the widened end portion before reconnecting.

* The plug for the ink draining port is the 4th port form the left. Do not connect hose to this port by mis-take.

* Whenever the overflow tank is filled with overflown ink and error message displayed, use a syringewith a tube attached on the tip.

Two M3x6 IT screws

Drain tube

Connector

Overflow tank

Plug for the ink drainage when using syringe.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.Pressure pump unit


(2) Disconnect the tube connector (1 location) by pulling it off from the other end gently.

(3) Disconnect the sensor connector.

(4) Remove the Pressure pump unit. (two M3x6 IT screws)

(5) Disconnect the motor connector.

Tube connector

M3x6 IT screwSensor connector

M3x6 IT screw

Pressure pump unit

Motor connector Sensor connector



Ink supply passages

6.Pressure chamber


(2) Disconnect the four tubes.

(3) Disconnect the tube connector by pulling it gently.

(4) Remove the press chamber (two M3x6 IT screws).* Connect the tubes in the sequence C, K, M, Y.

* For HC5000, it is in the sequence K, C, M, Y.

* The end of the tube connected to the press chamber may stretch and become larger in the diameterwith the time. If the diameter is enlarged, trim the tip end of the tube before reconnecting.

Tube

Pressure chamber

M3x6 IT screw

Tube connector

Tube connector



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

7.ID unit / ID solenoid valve

7-1.ID unit

(1) Confirm that the ink pan is positioned under the heads (if not, slide the ink pan to left, under theheads, using the test mode).

* Ink will drip from the print head nozzles, so the ink pan must be positioned under the heads.(2) Place paper on top of the transfer belt to catch any ink that may land on the belt.



(5) Remove the PCB cover and raise the PCB box to the maintenance position.

(6) Remove the control panel together with the bracket, and place the control panel aside.

(7) Remove the control panel cable guide (center stay).


(9) Pull out the duplex unit from the machine and remove.

(10) Slide the ink cartridge holder to the side by loosening 4 screws.

(11) Remove one of the carriage cover of which is located over the ID unit to be removed

(12) Empty the ID unit of the ink (2 colors).* If the ID unit is being replaced due to problem with the ink, such as ink separation or ink viscosity becoming

too thick, do not remove the ink from the ID unit in the steps described below. Removing faulty ink in the

steps described may damage (clog) the print heads. In those cases, remove the ID unit with the ink

filled, but special caution must be paid in preventing ink spillage.

* Use the filter, described below, to prevent foreign object from entering into the heads.

1) Disconnect the tube joint between the ink reservoir and the ID unit to be removed.* If not disconnected, the ink in the ID unit will fall back into ink reservoir and the reservoir will overflow.

2) Of the air vent tube connected between the ID solenoid valve and ID unit, unplug the tubefrom the solenoid valve.

3) Connect the air filter onto the tip of the unplugged air vent hose, and connect a syringe

onto the other end of the air filter, using a tube in between.4) Using the syringe, force the ink within the ID unit out through the print heads.

5) Unplug the syringe tube from the filter, put air in the syringe again, and connect the syringeback onto the filter and pump the ink out from the ID unit again.

6) Repeat the process until the tubes between the ID unit and print heads become empty,checking with the eye.

* The syringe to use should be of about 20 milliliters in size. A syringe of too big of a volume may dam-age the print heads due to too much pressure produced by the syringe.

unplug the tube from the ID solenoid valve and con-

nect it to an air filter.

connect a syringe onto the other end of the air filter,

using a tube in between

From the syringe, with the filter between the syringe

and the ID unit, force the air out from the syringe into

the ID unit. The ink is forced out from the ID unit

out through the print head nozzles.

ID solenoid valve

Filter



Ink supply passages

(13) From the overflow tank, disconnect the tube which leads to the ID unit (2 colors).

(14) Disconnect the connectors to the ID solenoid valves (5 connectors).

(15) Disconnect the head ribbon cables.* Make sure that main power for the machine is turned off.

* Disconnect all 24 ribbon cables from the Ink drive PCBs for the two colors.

Tube ID solenoid valve

ID unit ID unit Tube

Overflow tank

Ink joint

Connector

ID magnet valve

ID unittube



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(16) Close the valves on the printing heads (12 valves)

(17) Disconnect the tubes from the print heads.

(18) Remove the screw from the front side of the ID unit and remove the ID unit (one M3x6 IT screw). There is a hook underneath the ID unit. Slide to the front to disengagethe hook.

Caution in reinstalling:

* Make sure that the valve is open after reinstalling.

* Refer to the instructions given under the Print Head removals for the cautions in connecting the Valveonto the print head.

* The end of the tube connected to the ID solenoid valve may stretch over the time. If the end openinghas over-stretched, trim the end section before reconnecting.

* Be sure to remove paper placed on the transfer unit in the previous step before turning the machinepower ON.

* After completing the work, select the colors (2 colors) for the replaced ID unit and perform [5.5.1 Star-tup cleaning].

NOTE: Specification on the Filter suggested for use.

Manufacturer: Sartorius Model Name: Minisart 17594-K 5.00 micrometer

ID unit

Print head

Head drive PCB

Head ribbon cable

Valve opened

Valve closed

tube





HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8.Print head

The print heads are very fragile and vulnerable to impact and shock. Pay attention to the following

when handing the print head.

* Do not drop the print head. The print head surface will be damaged, and the piezo mechanism will also bedamaged.

* Prevent the print head surface (the nozzle portion) from touching any surface after taking the head out ofthe machine.

* Never lay anything on top of the print head.

* When transporting the print head, use the special print head shipment container in which a print head is putin when ordered as a spare part, and place it in the container correctly.

* Avoid from hitting the nozzle surface against the print head carriage when installing the print head on themachine.

* To prevent print head damage from static electricity, be sure to wear an antistatic wrist band when touchingprint heads. If antistatic wrist band is not available, touch the machine metal frames firmly with both handsbefore working to let the static electricity escape from the body.

(1) Confirm that the ink pan is positioned under the heads (if not, slide the ink pan under the headsusing Test Mode). Place paper on top of the belt to catch any ink that may drip from the heads.

(2) Remove the rear cover and disconnect the tube joint, located between the ink reservoir and theI.D. Unit, to prevent the ink from draining into the overflow tank due to the air getting into the sys-tem through the print head area.

* The disconnected tube joint should be re-joined after all the components are reassembled back onthe machine, the power to the machine is turned ON and the Startup Cleaning is started by the SE-Mode. As soon as the Startup Cleaning is executed by pressing the Start button, re-join the discon-nected tube joint.


(4) Remove the control panel together with the bracket and put the panel aside.

(5) Remove the control panel cable guide (beam).

(6) Pull out the duplex unit and detach it from the machine.

(7) Remove the carriage cover.* Depending on the ink color, the Ink cartridge holder unit may have to be slid toward the paper feeding

side to access to the screws to remove the carriage cover.

(8) Remove the head ribbon cables from the head drive PCB for the print head to remove.

(9) Disconnect print head tube from the print head to remove.* Be sure to close the valve before disconnecting the print head tube.

* Disconnect other print head tubes if they interfere.

Disconnect the tube joint atthe ink reservoir for the colorof the head to be replaced.

Watch out for some ink which

may spill out from the tube

joint when disconnected.

Valve openedValve closed



Ink supply passages

(10) After removing the screws with washers, lift the head straight up (two M3x23 screws with wash-ers).

* The print head is a precision device. Avoid impact or shock on the head.

* Do not disconnect the ribbon cables which are connected the print head.

* Be careful to avoid scratching the nozzle surfaces.

* To prevent print head damage from static electricity, be sure to wear an antistatic wrist band whentouching print heads. If antistatic wrist band is not available, touch the machine metal frames firmlywith both hands before working to let the static electricity escape from the body.

The two screws to remove.

Do not touch this screw.

The screw to be removed the first in removal.

The screw to be tightened the last in mounting.

The screw to be removed the last in removal.

The screw to be tightened the first in mounting.

M3x23 screw with washer

Print head


Ribbon cable

Lift the printhead straightup, and be care-ful to avoid acci-dentally pullingthe other ribboncables.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Caution in assembly:

* Clean the print head and the surroundings free of spilled ink. But never wipe the nozzle surface.Use lint-free/dust-free cloth or paper. Never use cloth or paper which emits lint or dust.

Uncleaned dripped ink will eventually drop down onto the transfer belt and get on the printing papers.

* Use a torque driver to tighten the screws (two M3x23 screws with washers) securing the head inplace to ensure the correct tightening force and to minimize the possibility of damaging the screwslots. The tightening force differs depending on the ink color on HC5500.The tightening torque

is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m).* The tightening torque for for HC5500 is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m) for both the front and rear

screws on all the C and K heads. For M and Y heads, the front screw for all the heads is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m), and for the rear screws the torque is 3.0 kgf-cm (0.3 N-m or 30 cN-m).

* The tightening torque for for HC5000 is 9.0 kgf-cm (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m) for both the front and rearscrews on all the K, C, M, Y heads.

* Make sure that the print head is correctly fit on the carriage before screwing it firmly on the carriage.Otherwise the head will be mounted raised on the carriage and will not print correctly.

* Before inserting the valve back on the print head, check that the O-ring on the valve is in good cond-tion. Worn or broken O-ring will cause ink leakage, or lets air in and cause ink to drop back into theink reservoir and cause ink overflow.

* The valve should be pushed gently but firmly and into the print head by rotating it slightly back andforth as pushed in. When correctly inserted back on the print head, the valve should rotate freely onthe head. If incorrectly inserted, the valve will not rotate as freely. If incorrectly inserted, pull thevalve out again and check for any damage on the O-ring. If no damage on the O-ring, try putting itback on the head again.

Example of setting the torque driver

to 9.0 kgf-m (0.9 N-m or 90 cN-m)

The setting method varies depending on the manufacturer and model. Refer to the

instructions provided with the torque driver.



Ink supply passages

* Make sure that all the ribbon cables are connected back in the correct slot on the head drive PCB,firmly and straight. The head drive PCB and/or print head may be damaged by short-circuit if the rib-bon cable connection is not done correctly.

* Mount back the carriage covers back on the machine, paying attention not to jam on the ribboncables and pull the cables out.

* Make sure that the carriage covers are mounted before putting the duplex unit back on the machine.Otherwise the duplex unit will catch the ribbon cables and rip the cables.

* Remove the papers from the transfer belt before turning the machine power back ON.

* After the print head is replaced, use Test Mode 5.5.1 [Start Up Cleaning] and select the ink color ofthe print head and activate to clean the head.

* Print the test pattern using print adjustment software to check to see if print adjustment is necessaryor not. Refer to the print adjustment procedure to follow on this chapter if adjustment is necessary.

Example of ribbon cable not inserted straight

Example of ribbon cable not fully inserted



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

9.Head drive PCB



(3) Pull out the duplex unit and remove from the machine.

(4) Remove the carriage cover.

(5) Disconnect the connectors (2 locations) on the rear end of the head drive PCB.

(6) Disconnect the head ribbon cables (12 locations).

(7) Remove the screws from the head drive PCB bracket and dismount the PCB together with thebracket (two M3x6 IT screws).

(8) Remove the screws from the Head driver PCB bracket (two M3x6 IT screws), and dismount thePCB from the bracket.

* Check carefully to make sure that the ribbon cables from the heads are not inserted loosely or at anangle. Improper insertion of the ribbon cables will result in short-circuit and damage the PCB.

* Be careful not to pull the ribbon cables when putting the carriage cover back on.

* While working on the head drive PCB, hands will touch on the print head tubes. Touching the tubes

will result in misfires in printing (white lines). After all the parts are mounted back on, do NormalHead Cleaning once.

M3x6 IT screws

REAR FRONTConnectors

M3x6 IT screwsHead drive PCB bracket

Head drive PCB



Ink supply passages

10.Cleaning unit

(1) Lower the transfer unit all the way down and turn OFF the machine power. If the power isalready off with the transfer unit not all the way down, rotate the lift gear unit shaft to lower thetransfer unit.


(3) Remove inner cover 3 to access to the cleaning unit.(4) Put papers on top of the transfer belt to protect the belt from the ink which may drip.

(5) Disconnect the cleaning unit connector from the transfer belt drive PCB at rear left of themachine (HC5500).

* On HC5000, the connector is located at rear left of the machine, just next to the cleaning unit.

Tube

BracketM4x8 IT screw

M4x8 IT screwBracket

Lift gear unit shaft

Connector Cleaning unit

Tube

Tube

Bracket

M4x8 IT screwM4x8 IT screw

Bracket

Cleaning motor Connector on

HC5000Cleaning unit

Connector onHC5500 is onthe transferbelt drive PCB.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(6) Disconnect the two tubes, one from the ink pan and the other from the suction chamber, on therear of the machine. The one from the ink pan should be unplugged from the Y shaped connec-tor located close to the C ink reservoir (near K ink reservoir on HC5000). Work carefully to avoid dripping ink. Insert the tube from the ink pan into the bracket (indented section) on the cleaning unit to securethe tube in place.

(7) Remove the 4 brackets, 2 in front and 2 in rear, by removing one IT screw M4x8 from the each.* On HC5500, remove the two brackets in the rear first. Then remove the bracket on the front right. The

bracket on the front left should be removed the last.

* On HC5000, remove the two brackets in the front first. Then remove the bracket on the rear left. Thebracket on the rear right should be removed the last.

(8) Pull the cleaning unit out along the railing.* Be careful to avoid the disconnected drain tube from falling off from the bracket on which it is hooked onto,

or the ink will start to spill out from the tube.

This bracket on

the front left of

the machin

should be

removed the

last.

M4x8 IT screwM4x8 IT screw

BracketCleaning unit < FRONT >



Ink supply passages

Cautions in assembly:

* Due to a lack of grease on the shaft, shown on the photograph, too much load is put on the ink panmotor, and may display error message [S04-300: Ink pan motor time-out]. To prevent this problem,apply grease on the shafts as judged necessary. Make sure that the grease does not get on the suc-tion heads or the print heads when applying.

* As it was when removing the unit out, also watch out during the assembly to avoid the drain tube fromfalling off from the bracket on which it is hooked onto, or the ink will start to spill out from the tube.

* When connecting the bellow-shaped large black tube onto the left rear side of the maintenance unit,wipe clean the surface of the nozzle on the maintenance unit and inner surface of the tube. If a filmof ink is present on either of the two pieces, that makes it very easy for the tube to come off from themaintenance unit during machine operations. That will cause ink to spill out of the machine from themaintenance unit. The same with the other tube from the ink pan which is disconnected from the Y-shaped tube connector.

* Do not forget to remove the papers from the transfer belt before turning ON the machine power.

Lack of grease on these shafts (for thefour colors) may cause the error displayS-04-300 to occur.

Wipe clean the inner surface ofthe hose and the outer surfaceof the plastic tubing. (The sameis for the other tube from the inkpan discunnected from the Y-shaped tube connector.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

11.Suction head

(1) Remove the cleaning unit.

(2) To remove the suction head, push it down gently and open the hook that holds it in place.* Take care to prevent the spring from springing out.

* Do not widen the hook too much, as that may crack the hook.

* After attaching the suction head, check that the suction head does not lean.If the suction head leans, remove it once and attach it back on again. If attached on correctly, thesuction head should elevate up-and-down freely when pushed down by finger.

* If the suction head leans, poor suction of ink is caused and ink may drip and fall from the print head,and the suction head may fall off after hitting the print head.

Suction head

Spring



Ink supply passages

12.Cap (exists on HC5000 only)

(1) Remove the cleaning unit.

(2) To remove the rectangular rubber cap, push it down and open the hook securing it.* Take care to prevent the spring from springing out.

* Do not widen the hook too much, as the hook may break off.

Note:

The cap has no function. It was originally designed for a purpose, which later wasdecided not to

use.

Cap

Spring



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

13.Suction chamber



(3) Remove the IT screw (one M3x6 IT screw).

(4) Disconnect tube 1.

(5) Disconnect tube 2 and plug it to where tube 1 was plugged in, to prevent ink leakage from the

tube.(6) Disconnect tube 3 from the ST. TANK and connect it to the tube connector nipple on the suctionchamber to prevent ink from leaking out the tube.


Tube 2

Connector

M3x6 IT screw

Suction chamber

Tube 1

Tube 3

Tube 2

Tube 3

Tube connector nipple

ST.TANK

Wipe the inside of the tube and outer rim of the plastic pipewhen reconnecting, as film of ink on those surfaces will makethe pipe to come off easily during machine operation.



Ink supply passages

(7) Remove the suction chamber by pulling it forward and lifting.* Be careful to avoid bending the drain tube during reassembly. Bending the tube will stop the waste ink

flow.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

14.Ink catch pan

* On HC5000, remove the ink release bracket first (refer to page 7-26).

(1) Unplug the four ink drain tubes from the ink catch pan under the ink tray (one tube per color).

(2) Wipe clean the ink on the ink catch pan.

(3) Disconnect the drain tube from the bottom of the ink catch pan.* Watch out for the ink dripping.

(4) Unhook the tubes from the tube bracket and remove the clear plastic sheet.* The removed clear plastic sheet needs to be placed on the new ink catch pan.

(5) Remove mounting screws (two IT M4x8 screws) from the ink catch pan and remove the pan.

Drain tube

View from underneath

Clear plastic sheet



Ink supply passages

15.Waste ink tank

(1) Open waste ink tank access door on the front bottom of the machine.

(2) Turn the knob screw and remove the waste ink tank cover.

(3) Remove the cap from the waste ink tank.* Turn the cap over and hang it on the waste ink tank holder.


* When reinstalling the waste ink tank, press down on the waste ink tank holder before setting the tankin place.

* The waste ink tank must be replaced periodically.

Waste ink tank cap

Waste ink tank cover Knob screw

Waste ink tank holder





Ink supply passages

17.Suction pump unit , pump fi l ter, pump sponge


(2) Remove the MTPF rear cover bracket (one M4x8 screw with washer).

(3) Disconnect the large black tube.

(4) Remove the two cable bands shown on the photograph below, and disconnect two connectors.


Base cover bracket

Cable bands

Large black tube

Suction pump unit


Base cover bracket

Connectors



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(5) Pull the suction pump unit forward to remove (two M4x8 screws with washers).

(6) Remove the suction pump cover (three M4x8 IT screws).

(7) Remove the pump filter.* When replacing filters, be sure to replace both the large and small filters as a set.

* Wearing a glove is recommended to prevent the hands from getting dirty.

(8) Remove the pump sponge from the suction pump cover.* The pump sponge must be replaced periodically.

Filter (large)

Pump sponge


Filter (small)

Suction Pump Unit

Suction pump unit

M4x8 IT screw

Suction pump cover



Ink supply passages

Adjustment

1.Adjustment after print head replacement

After replacing print heads, two types of parameters specific to each head must be set and imageadjustments made (physical head positions and print timing depending on combination of heads).

Make these adjustments according to the procedures described below.

1-1.Parameter setting

Enter the two types of parameters (voltage and AL type) specific to each print head for proper opera-

tion in this printer.

The parameter values are indicated on the print head and print head packaging.

Enter the indicated parameter values by following the procedure described after the photograph.

Entering parameters from the control panel

Using Test Mode [8.5.1.1 Voltage] and [8.5.1.3 AL type], select the replaced print head and

enter the values indicated on the print head, as shown above. Then press the Enter key to save

the new parameter settings in the NVRAM mounted on the ORIP PCB.

Download the saved parameters from the NVRAM onto the ORIP PCB as a backup by using

Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.].

207/211

AL2/3

Example of replacement of

C6 head

From machine rear side, the heads

are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Since the C6 head has been replaced,

enter data on the input screen for the

C61/C62 head. (The parameters to be

entered are indicated on the head and

package.)

< Voltage >

C6120.7V C6221.1V

<AL>

C61+2 C62+3

Check before installation and record as necessary.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-2.Preparation for the image adjustment

Arrange the tools and instruments required to make the adjustment.

Connect the notebook PC to the machine using the USB extension cable, and notebook PC to the

flatbed scanner using USB 2.0 cable.

* Use USB 2.0 cable. USB 1.1 cable will not work properly.

1-3. Connection of USB cable from the HC printer to Laptop PC.

(1) Disconnect Controller from the machine (disconnect all the connections).(2) Connect USB extension cable to the USB cord from the ORIP PCB and pug to PC.

Head angle jig

Reference chart for scanner calibration

Notebook PC (commercially available) runningimage adjustment utility software

USB 2.0 x2 equipment is necessity.

Flatbed scanner (commercially available)

Recommended scanner: Canon CanoScan

LiDE 35, 40, 50 and 60.

One USB extension cable and one USB 2.0 cable, both com-

mercially available.

* The USB extension cable is to use between the USB cablefrom the ORIP PCB and PC.

* The USB cable is for connection of Canon LiDE scanner to thePC.

Loupe (magnifier) to check the printed image quality.

Paper for image adjustment Approximately 20 sheets of A4

coated paper, and A3 coated paper. Paper for print test

Approximately 20 sheets of A4 plain paper.



Ink supply passages

1-4.Installation method of the USB driver

Installing special HC USB driver in a PC is necessary to use the image adjustment software.

Install the USB driver beforehand in the following procedures.

From CD-R etc. supplied, save following two files in one folder in the laptop PC.

olytest.sys

olytest.inf

(1) Turn ON the HC printer.

(2) Connect the extended USB cable from the ORIP PCB to the laptop PC.

(3) The wizard of installation of the USB driver starts. Operate the laptop PC according to the wiz-ard.

(4) Choose “olytest.inf” which was saved in a folder in laptop PC.

(5) Complete installation according to the wizard.

1-5.Set up method of auto image adjustment software

From CD-R etc. supplied, copy the folder on the laptop PC in which the auto image adjustment soft-

ware is contained. (The software is compatible for both HC5500 and HC5000).When using the program, double click the execution file (ImageProcess_***.exe) in this holder, and

select the correct scanner when the scanner selection dialog box appears on the PC display.

* If the property of the saved holder is displayed as [reading only], when copied from CD-R, cancel the prop-erty of [reading only]. When write-in operation is carried out into this holder during program operation, if itis [reading only], the image adjustment operation ends in error.

* The USB driver, described previously on item 1-4 above, must be pre-installed to continue with the imageadjustment.

* Use the fresh set of software for each image adjustment by downloading the software each time from theCD-R, etc.

1-6.Set up method of Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner driver.Set up the scanner driver by following the instruction supplied with the scanner. Make sure to con-

firm the operation of the scanner in prior to the image adjustment.

1-7.Set up method of manual image adjustment software

From CD-R etc. supplied, copy the folder on the laptop PC in which the auto image adjustment soft-

ware is contained. (The software is compatible for both HC5500 and HC5000).

When using the program, double click the execution file (orToolbox_***_olytest.exe) in this holder.

* If the property of the saved holder is displayed as [reading only], when copied from CD-R, cancel the prop-erty of [reading only]. When write-in operation is carried out into this holder during program operation, if it

is [reading only], the image adjustment operation ends in error.* The USB driver, described previously on item 1-4 above, must be pre-installed to continue with the image

adjustment.

1-8.Auto image adjustment procedure

(1) Make sure that the Controller is completely disconnected from the HC printer.

(2) Turn machine power ON and check that the panel displays, [Waiting for data].

(3) Warm-up the machine by following the procedure given on item 1-9 on next page.

(4) Operate normal cleaning of the print heads to ensure no misfire exists.

(5) Connect PC to the HC printer and also to the CanoScan scanner.

(6) Start the PC used for adjustment and launch the auto image adjustment software.

(7) Input Test Mode [8.5.6.1. Save Adj. Config.] to save the present adjustment setting as a backup just in case the adjustment ends in failure. Test Mode [8.5.6.2 Restore Adj. Config.] will allowthe backed up data to revive



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(8) Start the auto image adjustment software and make adjustments by following the instructions onthe PC display.

Following menus are available in the automatic image adjustment software.

* Excluding the adjustments (1), (2) and (3), one specific required adjustment can be selected.

(9) The adjustment result is automatically saved on the removable NVRAM mounted on the ORIPPCB as the adjustment proceeds.

(10) Do not input Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config.] right after the adjustment ends.

(11) Print image check test pattern image from the image adjustment software.

(12) If and only if the result of the adjustment is satisfactory, use Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Con-fig.] to save the newly adjusted values in the ORIP PCB as a backup. If the adjustment ended inerror, execute Test Mode [8.5.6.2 Restore Adj. Config.] to revive the image adjustment parame-ters of before the image adjustment.

1-9.Warm-up operation for the transfer belt

Before image adjustment, perform a warm-up operation for the transfer belt according to the proce-dures described below to ensure stable transport operations.

(1) Confirm that the machine is in normal operating condition, mechanically well adjusted.

(2) Make sure that the machine is levelled good on the floor.

(3) Operate the Test Mode in the following sequence.

Using Test Mode 8.5.1, slide the ink pan to the right.

Raise the transfer unit all the way up to the printing position by Test Mode 8.1.4.2

Select BP Spacer position to either Normal, Card or Envelope (does not matter which isselected).

Lower the transfer belt lift arms down using Test Mode 8.1.4.2

Run the transfer belt for one minute at speed of 300x7 drops.

* Do not run the belt in transfer belt other than the printing position, as that will cause the belt to shift toone side.

(4) After one minute of warm-up operation, stop the belt and go out of the test mode menu.

1-10.Setting adjustment patterns on the flatbed scanner

When placing the calibration reference chart, coarse adjustment pattern, density adjustment pattern,

or any other adjustment pattern on the flatbed scanner, make sure to place them accurately on the

scanner glass, as explained on the next page.

Caution Before Adjustment (0)

Rough Adjustment (1)

Print Head Angle Adjustment (2) Fine Adjustment (3)

Density Adjustment (4)

Top and Back End Margin Adjustment (5)

Center Line Adjustment (6)

Side Margin Adjustment (7)

Print Head Edge Density Adjustment (8)

Caution After Adjustment (9)

Should open and read before adjustment.

These three adjustments are in one package.

The adjustments in given order of (1), (2) and (3)must be executed in given order.

Independent adjustment.





Read through the caution, but activate Test Mode8.5.6.1 only after confirming that the adjustmentfinished successfully.



Ink supply passages

1-11.Placing the Matte Papers correctly on the feed tray

Place clean sheets of A4 or A3 Matte Papers (coated paper) on the Standard paper feed tray of HC

printer. Make sure that the side guides on the tray is positioned flat against the side of the papers.

The paper size and the direction of the paper to place on the standard paper feed tray will be

instructed for each adjustment on the PC display.

Chart placed face down.

Set at the top corner of the chart on the corner of the glass.

CanoScan LiDE 35, 40, 50 or 60 for HC5500.

* This is the same for HC5000 when the same auto image adjustment software is used.

If after scanning, the error display on thePC says, “Cannot detect image pattern”,the chart needs to be trimmed (cut)0.5mm or more so on the correct side ofthe chart, so the scanner can scan the full A4 size image of the charts.

(This may occur only in scanning the Cali-bration Chart.)

This corner of the chart is placed on the top corner of the scanner.

TOP

BOTTOM

The thick line is the bottom of the chart.

Calibration chart



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-12.Preparation of the Canon CanoScan LiDE scanner.

Scanner driver

Install the scanner driver in the PC prior to the image adjustment.

Follow the downloading instruction given in the instructions book which came with the scanner.

Make sure to confirm that the scanner is operational via PC in prior to the image adjustment.

The image adjustment will end in error if the scanner does not operate correctly.

Following LiDE Scanner series can be used in making the image adjustment with this auto image

adjustment software (for both HC5500 and HC5000).

Canon CanoScan LiDE 35, 40, 50 and 60.

The image adjustment may end in error if the scanner setting is incorrectly selected.

The scanner setting which must be confirmed are following five items.

Unsharp Mask select to OFF

Descreen select to ON

Output Resolution image adjustment software automatically selects, but check each time. Automatically Execute Preview select to ON

Color Setting select to NONE

The display on the PC screen will differ according to the scanner driver (according to which LiDE

scanner model is used.)

The three screen shots to follow are those of LiDE 60 as samples. LiDE 35, 40 and 50 will show dif-

ferent screen on the PC, as these screen relies on the scanner driver.

Select the equivallent settings on LiDE 35, 40 and 50.

Differs for eachselected adjust-ment.

Important

[ LiDE 60 ]



Ink supply passages

Select to ON to execute preview scanningeach time before making the actual scanning.

[ LiDE 60 ]

Select the color settings to None.

[ LiDE 60 ]



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Caution throughout the auto image adjustment in regard to the scanning area.

After each prescanning and before executing the actual scanning, check and make sure that the

cropping area (identified by the dotted rectangular marking) is to the maximum scanning area.

If this cropping area is not at A4 maximum size, the scanner will not read all the image to be

scanned. If the scanning area is not A4 maximum, the image adjustment will end in error.

INCORRECT

CORRECT

If the scanning area is not at

the A4 maximum position,drag the dotted lines out tothe maximum scanning area.

[ LiDE 60 ]

[ LiDE 60 ]

[ LiDE 60 ]

The scanning area is notselected to the maximum.



Ink supply passages

1-13.Executing the auto image adjustment.

Before starting the image adjustment, check the following machine settings.

1) Sleep Mode [5.8.1] must be selected to OFF, all through the image adjustment.* Return the setting to the original selection after the adjustment is finished.

2) Stand-by Mode [5.8.22] must be selected to OFF, all through the image adjustment.* Return the setting to the original selection after the adjustment is finished.

3) Print Area [4.10] must be selected to Maximum, all through the image adjustment.* Return the setting to the original selection after the adjustment is finished.

4) Clean the print heads by executing normal head cleaning and print nozzle check pattern bySE-Mode [9. Test Pattern Print]. Confirm that no misfire exists by checking the print. Ifany misfire exists and the print is not clean, repeat the normal head cleaning until no mis-fire is confirmed.

Open the folder in which is auto image adjustment software is stored, and double click the

ImageProcess_***_exe icon.

Select the LiDE scanner to use.

Confirm that no misfire exists by printingthe nozzle check pattern.

This number refers tothe version number of

the software.

Double click the icon.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Though explained on page 7-62 that specific adjustment can be selected from the list, the stan-

dard auto image adjustment procedure is to excute all the adjustment in the order given from (0)

to (9).

Explanation on each adjustment:

1. Caution Before Adjustment (0)

Following dialog is displayed to instuct the execution of SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config.] to

download the present image adjustment parameters in the removal NVRAM onto the ORIP PCB

as a backup. This is for in case the image adjustment ends in error.

2. Rough Adjustment(1)

* This rough adjustment sets the parameters on menu 8.5.1.7 Vertical Position.This Rough Adjustment(1) should be made with Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) and Fine

Adjustment(3) as a set.

1) Set A4 matte-papers side-ways (A4R) on the standard paper feed tray.

2) On a piece of paper, memo down the present parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Posi-tion Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment].

* After this adjustment is done, check these two menus and enter the parameter settings copied down.

3) Select Rough Adjustment(1) from the Auto Image Adjustment software.

After A4 matte-papers are seton the standard paper feed tray

is side-ways (A4R), click OK.



Ink supply passages

4) Rough adjustment pattern is printed.

5) After following message is displayed on the PC, set the printed rough adjustment patternon the LiDE scanner and press OK to scan.

* Before scanning, confirm the scanner setting according to the scanner preparation instructions previ-ousely described on pages from 7-64.

6) After the next dialog is displayed, press OK to end the Rough Adjustment(1)* Check the parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask Adjust-

ment], and input the original parameters copied down prior to the adjustment.

3. Print Head Angle Adjustment(2)

* This print head angle adjustment instructs how much to mechanically realign the print heads.

This Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) should be made with Rough Adjustment(1) and Fine

Adjustment(3) as a set.

1) Load A4 matte-papers side-ways (A4R) on the standard paper feed tray.

2) Select Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) from the Auto Image Adjustment software.

3) Place the calibration reference chart on the scanner.

The next step is to scan this printed pattern.

* Follow the instruction below.

Confirm that the scanning resolutionis set to 400 dpi.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4) Making sure that the chart is positioned correctly and the scanning resolution set to 400dpi, click [OK] on the display, shown below, on the PC.

5) Instuction is displayed on the PC to set A4 size matte papers on the standard paper feedtray in side-ways (A4R). Set the paper on the tray and click OK.

6) Following print head angle adjustment pattern sheet is printed.

7) Set the printed pattern sheet on the scanner and click OK on the dialog box, shown below,with the scanner resolution set at 400 dpi.

8) After the scanning, following print head angle adjustment instructions sheet is printed.

Adjustment is not required for theheads with the value under 1.0

The sheet gives the instuction of thedirection and the amount in which theprint heads need to be adjusted.

* 0.1 = 1/8 turn

* 0.2 = 1/4 turn

* 0.3 = 3/8 turn

* 0.4 = 1/2 turn

* 0.5 = 5/8 turn

* 0.6 = 3/4 turn* 0.7 = 7/8 turn

* 1 0 1 t



Ink supply passages

9) Following dialog box will be displayed on the PC to instruct the adjust the print head anglesuntil all the heads are under the value of 1.0.

10) Follow the instuction below in making the print head angle adjustment.

Using [Safely Remove Hardware] on the PC, disconnect HC from the PC, and turn of theHC power by first pressing the soft-switch and then shut the HC main power switch OFF.Keep the PC power ON.

* If the heads do not require to be adjusted in their angle, press [Next] and jump to the step (11).

Referring to the section on the print head removal [page 7-42], access to the mountingscrews of the print head.

Print head mounting screws

Do not loosen this screw

Adjustment screw

Loosen the two mounting screws com-

pletely from the head to be adjusted.

Rotate the head adjustment screw using

the head angle jig (box wrench) in the

amount instructed on the print head angleadjustment instruction sheet printed out.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

* The top of the machine can be left opened until the image adjustment is completely finished.

* Make sure to keep the duplex unit detached from the machine to prevent damaging of the print headribbon cables.

Turn the HC power ON and wait until the machine status becomes [Ready]. If the printmode is OFF, press the green Start button to change the display message to [Ready] sta-

tus. Execute [5.5.5 Normal Cleaning] once, and print nozzle check pattern to confirm that nomisfire exits.

Start up the auto image adjustment software.

Repeat the Print Head Angle Adjustment(2) from the start.

If the newly print head angle adjustment instructions sheet still shows values over 1.0,repeat the print head angle adjustment until all the heads show values under 1.0.

After all the values become under 1.0, end the adjustment by turning the HC power OFFand mount all the covers back on the machine. Make sure that the inner top covers areclosed before putting back the duplex unit or otherwise the print head flexible may getcaught on the duplex unit.

Proceed to Fine Adjustment(3).

Adjustment screwbeing rotated by thehead angle jig.

One of the two mountingscrews to be loosenedcompletely.

The screw which shouldnever be loosened.

* The photograph shows the print headangle being adjusted

* After adjusting the angle of each head,

tighten the two mounting screws on theprint heads before going onto the next printhead to adjust.

* Torque screw driver should be used to

tighten these print head mounting

screws to the specified torque power.

Refer to the section on the print head

removal for the details.

Sample imageof the torquedriver.

* Refer to top of page 7-44 for the caution

on the amount of torque to use in tight-

ening the print head screws. Wrong

torque setting will damage the screw

and print head, and may also cause inkleakage and image problem.



Ink supply passages

4. Fine Adjustment(3)

* This fine adjustment sets the parameters on menus [8.5.1.4 Horizontal Offset], [8.5.1.5 Horizontal Overlap]and [8.5.1.7 Vertical Position].

This Fine Adjustment(3) should be made with Rough Adjustment(1) and Print Head Angle

Adjustment(2) sas a set.


2) On a piece of paper, memo down the present parameter settings of [8.5.3 Top Edge Posi-tion Adjustment] and [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment].* After this adjustment is done, check these two menus and enter the parameter settings copied down.

3) Select Fine Adjustment(3) on the auto image adjustment software.

4) When following dialog box apear on the PC display, unput [ 5 ] in the box.* Numbers from 1 to 10 can be input, but normally 5 is input.

5) Instuction is displayed on the PC to set A4 size matte papers on the standard paper feedtray in side-ways (A4R). Set the paper on the tray and click OK.

6) Fine adjustment pattern prints are printed out in the quantity specified.





Ink supply passages

5. Density Adjustment(4)

* This adjustment sets the parameters on menu [8.5.1.2 Corrective Power Supply].

1) Select Density Adjustment(4) on the auto image adjustment software.

2) Set A4 matte-papers side-ways (A4R) on the standard paper feed tray, and click OK whenfollowing instruction displays on PC.

3) The density adjustment pattern is printed.

The auto image adjustment software automatically calculates how many times to scan thedensity adjustment pattern. The maximum times it may ask is 10 times. The print is num-bered from 0 to maximum 9.

* For instance, if the software decides to scan 6 times, it will print 6 adjustment patterns which are num-bered from 0 to 5. Each print is printed after scanning the previous print.

4) Set the density adjustment pattern on the scanner and click OK on the following display to

scan.* The scanning resolution should be set to 300 dpi.

* Make sure that the Unsharp Mask setting on the scanner is selected to OFF and Descreen isselected to ON. [Selecting the Descreen setting to ON is the most important setting on thisadjustment.]

The printing and scanningof the density adjustmentpattern is repeated for maxi-mum of 10 times.

How many times is auto-matically calculated by the

image adjustment software.The prints are numberedfrom 0 to maximum of 9.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5) The following display may appear on the PC display after each scanning.* The listed items on the display should reduce after one scanning to the next.

6) After the automatically specified number of prints are scanned, the adjustment ends withthe following display. Click OK to end the [Density Adjustment(4)].

Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [6. Top and Back End Margin Adjustment(5)]

* If only the [Density Adjustment(4)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by going to [10.Caution After Adjustment(9)]. But is recommended that [9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)] bealso done after completing this [Density Adjustment(4)].

* The [9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)] is available for HC5500 only and does not exist whenadjusting the image on HC5000.



Ink supply passages

6. Top and Back End Margin Adjustment(5)

* This adjustment sets the parameters on following menu.

HC5500* Menu [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment], [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment], [8.5.7.1 Top Edge Sensor

Top Timing] & [8.5.7.2 Top Edge Sensor Bottom Timing].

HC5500* Menu [8.5.3 Top Edge Position Adjustment], [8.5.4 End Mask Adjustment].

CAUTION:

Once this adjustment is activated, finish the adjustment completely. Do not cancel or end

the adjustment prematurely.


2) Select Density Adjustment(4) on the auto image adjustment software.

3) Following dialog box appears on the PC display.

This [Top Edge Sensor] adjust-ment at the top should be finishedin full before making the [Top EdgeSensor 2] adjustment on the bot-tom.

This [Top Edge Sensor 2] adjust-ment on the bottom should bedone only after completing the [Top

Edge Sensor] adjustment at thetop.

8.5.3

8.5.4

8.5.7.1

8.5.7.2

The [Top Edge Sensor] adjustmentsets the parameters for menus8.5.3 and 8.5.4 for Top Edge Sen-sor 2 on HC5500.

On HC5000, the parameters forthese two menus for Top EdgeSensor is set.

The [Top Edge Sensor 2] adjust-ment sets the parameters formenus 8.5.7.1 and 8.5.7.2 for TopEdge Sensor 1 on HC5500.

When the adjustment software isused on HC5000, this bottom por-tion of the dialog box is grayed outand becomes inactive.These two phrases should be referred as [Top Edge Sensor

Adjustment 1] and [Top Edge Sensor Adjustment 2]. These twophrases do not represent the part name of the top edge sensors,i.e. Top Edge Sensor 1 or Top Edge Sensor 2.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4) Click the [Print 1] button on the display.

5) The top edger sensor adjustment pattern for adjustment 1 is printed.

6) Measure the Top Edge and Bottom Mask position on the print and input the necessarynumber on the display.

Click [Print 1] button.

5 mm

Top edge of paper

Bottom edge of paper

Horizontal line

0.5 mm

Measure above two spaces.

The Top Edge distance should be measured fromthe top edge of the paper to the horizontal line onthe print. The distance should be 5 mm. If thedistance is not 5 mm, imput the amount in millime-ters to adjust.

(+ ) number widens the space.

( - ) number narrows the space.

The Bottom Mask distance should be measuredfrom the bottom edge of the paper to the bottom ofthe four-color lines on the print. The distance(gap) should be 0.5 mm. If the distance is not 0.5

mm, imput the amount in millimeters to adjust.(+ ) number widens the space.

( - ) number narrows the space



Ink supply passages

7) After entering necessary amount of distance to adjust, click the [Print 1] button again tomake a new print.

* If the four-colored lines on the Bottom Mask adjustment is printed to the bottom edge of the paperand no gap available, or if the four-colored lines are out of the printing area and not printed, input (+)numbers to bring the four-colored lines well above the bottom edge of the paper, and then input (-)numbers to bring the four-colored lines down to adjust the gap to 0.5 mm.

8) Measure the distances again.

9) If the measurements still need to be adjusted, repeat the above process.10) If correct measurements are achieved, do the same for the adjustment titled, [Top Edge

Sensor 2] by clicking the [Print 2] button to print the adjustment pattern.* HC5000 does not have this adjustment.

11) After the [Top Edge Sensor 2] adjustment is completed, click the OK button on the dialogbox shown on the previous page to download the new parameter setting.

12) A new dialog box, given below, is displayed. Click OK button to end the adjustment.

Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [7. Center Line Adjustment(6)]

If only the [Top and Back End Margin Adjustment(5)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by

going to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].

This column is added on the print to indicate that

the printout is for the [Top Edge Sensor 2]adjustment.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

7. Center Line Adjustment(6)

* This adjustment sets the parameter on menu [8.5.2.6 Image Center Adjustment].

* This adjustment is available only for HC5500, and not available for HC5000.


2) Select [Center Line Adjustment(6)] on the auto image adjustment software.

3) The following dialog box is displayed on PC. Select [1] and click OK button.

4) After the following dialog box is displayed on the PC, look into SE-Mode No. [8.5.2.3 SideRegistration Offset] on HC5500, and enter the parameter setting displayed on the machineoperation panel. Then click OK button.

5) A new dialog box, shown below, is displayed on PC. Click [Print] button to print an adjust-ment pattern sheet, shown on the next page.

Always select [1. CCD Mode] toadjust the CCD to automaticallydetect the center of all papersizes.

* Do not select 2, 3 or 4when making this adjust-ment.

Enter the parameter setting dis-played on the HC5500 opera-tion panel for the SE-Mode No.8.5.2.3 Side Registration Offset,and click OK button.This number is a sample.

The number entered on the previous dialog box appears.

Press the [Print] button to print center-line adjustment patternsheet.



Ink supply passages

6) After the following center-line adjustment pattern sheet is printed, fold the sheet in half atthe center of the sheet. Measure the distance from the center-fold of the paper to the lineprinted on the sheet. Bring the line to the center of the paper by adding or subtracting therequired distance from the number in the dialog box shown on the previous page. Adding(+) a number will move the line to the right. Subtracting a number (-) will move the line tothe left.

7) Press the [Print] button gain to make a new center-line adjustment pattern sheet.

8) Measure the distance between the center fold of the sheet and the printed line.

9) If the printed line is still not on the center of the sheet, repeat the adjustment.

10) If the printed line lands on the center of the sheet, click [OK] button on the dialog boxshown on the previous page.

11) Following dialog box is displayed. Click OK to end the adjustment.

Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [8. Side Margin Adjustment(7)]

* If only the [Center Line Adjustment(6)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by goingto [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8. Side Margin Adjustment(7)

* This adjustment sets the parameter on menu [8.5.2.1 Adjusting the CCD Position].

1) Set A4 or Letter size matte-papers side-ways (A4R/LetterR) on the standard paper feedtray.

2) Select [Side Margin Adjustment(7)] on the auto image adjustment software.

3) The following dialog box is displayed on PC. Select the size of the paper on the standardpaper feed tray and click OK.

4) When following dialog box is displayed, click OK to print the side margin adjustment patternsheet.

5) The side margin adjustment patter sheet, shown below, is printed. For each of the fourcolors, on the left and right, measure the distance from the edge of the paper.

Select [1] if A4 size paper is used. Select [2] if A4 size paper is used.

Measure the distance for each color.



Ink supply passages

6) Enter the measurements in the dialog box below, and click OK.

7) Click OK on the following dialog box to end the adjustment.

Continue the auto image adjustment by going to [9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)]* If only the [Side Margin Adjustment(8)] was needed to be adjusted, complete the adjustment by going

to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].

These are sample measurements.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

9. Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)

* This adjustment does not exit in SE-Mode menu. This adjustment, to set the edge density parameter foreach print head, is possible by this auto image adjustment software only.

* This adjustment is available only for HC5500 and does not exist for HC5000.

1) It is recommended that [Print Head Overlap Adjustment] is done using the Manual Image Adjustment Software prior to this adjustment.

* The Manual Image Adjustment Software can be started up while this Auto Image Adjustment Soft-ware is active.


3) Select [Print Head Edge Density Adjustment(8)] on the auto image adjustment software.

4) On HC5500, go into SE-Mode [8.5.2.3 Side Registration Offset] and input its setting in thedialog box which appears on the PC display. Click OK on the dialog box.

5) Click OK in the following dialog box to make three prints. One print is in Cyan, the othertwo are in Magenta and Black.

6) Sample of the Cyan Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheet.

Read the parameter setting of

SE-Mode No. 8.5.2.3 on theHC5500 panel display andinput the parameter setting inthe dialog box displayed onthe PC.

This is a sample number.



Ink supply passages

7) Sample of the Magenta Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheet.

8) Sample of the Black Print Head Edge Density Adjustment pattern sheet.

9) Make check marks, using black color ink pen, in the square boxes on the left and right ofeach column of colors for all three prints. The check mark should be dark and solid.Choose where the best overlap between the heads is found.

If the overlap between the printheads are not complete in any of thechoices (white line frome the top tothe bottom of the column) or too

much overlap on all the choices,Manual Image Adjustment softwareneeds to be started up, and [PrintHead Overlap Adjustment] must bemade. Then come back to thisadjustment.

If the overlap between the printheads are not complete in any of thechoices (white line frome the top tothe bottom of the column) or too

much overlap on all the choices,Manual Image Adjustment softwareneeds to be started up, and [PrintHead Overlap Adjustment] must bemade. Then come back to thisadjustment.





Ink supply passages

15) The adjustment is competed after all three colors are scanned.

End the auto image adjustment by going to [10. Caution After Adjustment(9)].

10. Caution After Adjustment(9)

This is the last step in completing the auto imag adjustment.

Read the following before selecting the [Caution After Adjustment(9)] on the auto image adjustment

software.

(1) When this last step is selected on the auto image adjustment software, a dialog box displayedon the PC will instruct the SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to be activated.

(2) Do not activate SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] yet.

(3) Using either the [OR_PRINT] or [Manual Image Adjustment] software, print SE_PatternA3_2A,and make print.

(4) Check the test pattern image print to confirm that the image adjustment ended in success.

(5) If the print result of the test pattern print is not better than the image adjustment parametersbacked up prior to the adjustment, repeat the Auto Image Adjustment or activate [8.5.6.2Restore Adj. Config.] to restore the original backup data from the ORIP PCB to the removableNVRAM.

(6) If the test pattern print image after the adjustment is better than that of before the adjustment,follow the instruction given by [Caution After Adjustment(9)], and activate the SE-Mode [8.5.6.1Store Adj. Config.] to copy the newly adjustment parameters entered on the removal NVRAMonto the ORIP PCB as a backup data.

(7) After understanding the above explanation, select [Caution After Adjustment(9)] on the autoimage adjustment software.

(8) Following instruction is displayed on the PC.

Check the solid color area for the density and overlaps.

Check the horizontal and vertical lines.

Check the circles and the lines within.The circles and the lines within the circlesshould print out as composed black in color.

The image adjustment is very good if no othercolors are mixed in the circle images.

How to check the SE_PatterA3_2A test pattern image.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(9) The display instructs to perform SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.]. Click OK to close thedialog box.

* Clicking OK does not automatically active SE-Mode 8.5.6.1 The dialog box is making the instruc-tion only. The SE-Mode 8.5.6.1 must be activated manually on the HC operation panel key.

(10) Perform Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to download the newly adjusted adjustmentparameter saved on the removal NVRAM onto the PRIP PCB as a backup data.

This ends the Auto Image Adjustment.

Note:

Return the following three settings back to the original setting before the image adjustment.

1) Sleep Mode [5.8.1].

2) Stand-by Mode [5.8.22].

3) Print Area [4.10].



Ink supply passages

1-14.Execution of Manual Image Adjustment

If the machine image quality is not as bad as to use the Auto Image Adjustment, but may still require

minor improvements. In these cases, Manual Image Adjustment, instead of the Auto Image Adjust-

ment, can be used. Though limited in the adjustments the Manual Image Adjustment, compared the

Automatic Image Adjustment, require much less time to perform.

Follow the steps given below to perform the Manual Image Adjustment.

(1) Place A3 size Matte (coated) paper on the standard paper feed tray.

(2) Connect the Laptop PC to HC5000 using USB 2.0 cable in the same way as for the Auto Image Adjustment procedure.

* The USB drive for the HC5000 must also be downloaded in the PC, as it was for the Auto Image Adjust-ment procedure, for the PC to recognize HC5000.

(3) From CD-R, etc., download the Manual Image Adjustment software [orTool Box] folder on PCand double click [orToolbox_...._olytest.exe] Icon to start the software.

(4) Following window will be displayed.

(5) Above adjustment 1 is the X (horizontal) Position adjustment.* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.4 Horizontal offset].

(6) Above adjustment 2 is the Y (vertical) Position adjustment.* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.7 Vertical offset].

(7) Above adjustment 3 is the Print Head Overlap adjustment.* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.5 Horizontal overlap].

(8) Above adjustment 4 is the Print Head Density adjustment.* This is equivalent to Test Mode [8.5.1.2 Voltage correction].

(9) Above 5 is the [Print] button to print the image to adjust.

(10) Above 6 is the [Adjust] button to jump to the adjustment display.

(11) Above 7 is the [Save] button to save the new parameter setting into PC.* The parameter setting can be saved in the software folder in the PC for future recall of that setting. This

button is to save the parameter data into the PC. No need to use if not saving the data in PC.

(12) Above 8 is the [Load] button to save the new parameter setting into NVRAM on ORIP PCB.* The past parameter setting can be downloaded into HC5000 by clicking this button and recalling the

parameter setting saved in PC during past adjustments (these past data exist only if they were saved in PCduring the past adjustments).

(13) Above 9 is the [Save] button to save the new parameter settings for 1 to 4 into PC all at once.* Clicking this button after completing adjustments 1 through 4 will save the new parameter settings into

the PC. It is equivalent to clicking 7 for each adjustments 1 though 4 . Do only if needed.

(14) Above 10 is the [Load] button to save the new parameter settings for 1 to 4 into NVRAM onORIP PCB all at once.

* The past parameter settings can be downloaded into HC5000 by clicking this button and recalling theparameter setting saved in PC during past adjustments (these past data exist only if they were saved in PCduring the past adjustments). It is equivalent to clicking 8 for each adjustments 1 though 4 . Do only if

needed.(15) Above 11 is the [Sample Print] button to select and print test patterns included in the ManualImage Adjustment software.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

X (Horizontal) Posit ion Adjustment

(1) Click [Print] button. The image shown below is printed out.

(2) Click [Adjust] button to access to the dialog box screen.

(3) For each C, M, Y color for each print heads 1 through 6 (1 is on the drive side and 6 is on theoperator’s side of the machine), if the color has to move one dot to the right against the K, input

[+1]. Input [-1] if the color has to move one dot to the left of the K. Input the required numberfor each box on the display.

(4) Click [OK] after desired numbers are filled in the boxes. Click [Cancel] to abort the adjustment.* Clicking [OK] button will automatically load the new parameter setting into NVRAM on the ORIP PCB.

(5) After clicking the [OK] button above, the display returns back to the original display shown on theprevious page.

(6) Click [Print] button on the original display to make a new print to check the result of the adjust-ment. If the result is not satisfactory, repeat the adjustment using the new printout as a guid-ance.

(7) After the adjustment is completed, if wanted, click [Save] on the original display and save theparameter setting in PC for future use. Omit this procedure if the data is not needed to besaved in the PC.

(8) On the original display, if the [Load] button is clicked, past parameter data (if saved in PC) canbe selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Horizontal position adjustment, ifwanted

< Enlarged image from the print on the left >

If the setting is not good, the K/C, K/M and K/Y thin line doesnot overlap one on top of the other, and gap (white line)between the solid C, M, Y colors and solid black, or overlapagainst the solid black color may appear. Looking at the thinK/C, K/M and K/Y lines, make adjustments so each make oneline by landing on top of each other. K (black) is stationary.



Ink supply passages

Y (Vertical) Posit ion Adjustment



(3) Changing the parameter setting to larger number brings the print position down. Make the num-ber smaller to raise the print position up.





(8) On the original display, if the [Load] button is clicked, past parameter data (if saved in PC) canbe selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Vertical position adjustment, if

wanted.

Enlarged image of the print on the right.If the setting is not good, the K,K/C, K/M and K/Y thin lines donot print in overlapped straighthorizontal lines. In that case, the

solid block prints may overlap orhave gap (white line) running inhorizontal direction.

Using the adjustment display,adjust the vertical print positionof each print head, 1 though 6,so all the heads print at samevertical position, making straightlines across the paper. The leftis head No.1 and far right ishead No.6.

The best way to adjust is tochoose the 3rd or 4th head andalign the thin K color lines in onehorizontal line first. Then adjustthe C, M and Y color thin lines tooverlap with the K color line.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Print Head Overlap Adjustment



(3) Changing the parameter value to larger number will decrease the overlap. Making the numbersmall will increase the overlap.





(8) On the original display, if the [Load] button is clicked, past parameter data (if saved in PC) canbe selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Print Head Overlap adjustment, ifwanted

If the adjustment is not good, the overlapprint area between the print heads (total 5

places per color) becomes too much or tooless.

If the overlap is too much the color at theoverlap becomes too dark.

If the overlap is not enough, white verticalline will appear on the printout.

Adjust the overlap area referring to theprintout.



Ink supply passages

Print Head Density Adjustment

(1) Click [K], [C], [M] and [Y] buttons. The image shown below will be printed out. The one shownbelow is of K color as an example.


(3) Changing the parameter value to larger number will increase the darkness. Make the numbersmaller to decrease the darkness.



(6) Click [K], [C], [M] and [Y] buttons on the original display to make new prints to check the result ofthe adjustment. If the result is not satisfactory, repeat the adjustment using the new printoutsas guidance.


(8) On the original display, if the [Load] button is clicked, past parameter data (if saved in PC) canbe selected and rewrite that parameter on HC5000 for the Print Head Density adjustment, ifwanted.

If the adjustment is not good, the printdensity across the image is not constant.

Looking at the printout, adjust the printhead which does not match with theother print heads in the print density.

If there are more than one print headwhich needs to be adjusted for a color, itis very difficult to make the adjustment bythis Manual Image Adjustment software.

In those cases, it is recommended that Auto Image Adjustment software is used.

Use either of these two areas to make

the judgement.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Closing the Manual Image Adjustment So ftware

(1) Before ending the Manual Image Adjustment software by clicking the [Exit] button, click the[Sample Print and select “SE_PatternA3_2A” from the sample test pattern folder containingmany test image patterns, and make print.

(2) Checking the printed out test pattern image confirm that the image is good.

(3) If the print result of the test pattern print is not good, repeat the Manual Image Adjustment or if judged not good enough to make the correction by the Manual Image Adjustment, do the Auto

Image Adjustment.(4) To end the Manual Image Adjustment software, click the [Exit] button.

(5) After above display is closed, the new display shown below is displayed.

(6) The display instructs to perform Test Mode menu [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.].

(7) Perform Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to download the backup data onto the PRIP PCBif the Manual Adjustment went well.

(8) If the adjustment did not go well, do not perform Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.]

(9) Click [OK] to close above display.



Ink supply passages

2.Adjustments on the Cleaning Unit.

This adjustment may become necessary if the cleaning heads on the cleaning unit are not cleaning

the print heads correctly due to incorrect parameter settings of the cleaning head positions during the

print head cleaning.

Make visual check of the present distances by operating Normal Cleaning.

If the distances are out of the setting as specified on the sketch below, that could be the cause for the

improper head cleaning. In that case, make the required adjustment.

* There are total of three adjustments.

(1) The three adjustments should be made in one set, in the given order.

(2) After all three adjustments are completed, activate SE-Mode [8.5.6.1 Store Adj. Config.] to copythe new parameter settings saved in the NVRAM onto the ORIP PCB as backup data.

2-1.Cleaning start position

Refer to the following sketch and make an adjustment.

(1) Remove the center inner cover and plug two connector jigs into the connector plug.

(2) Turn ON the machine power.

(3) Activate SE-Mode and select [8.6.2 Nozzle Suck Pos.] and input the parameter setting of13.0mm and enter.

(4) Activate 5.5.5 (Normal Cleaning), and while standing on the operators side of the machine,watch and confirm that the most front rubber Wiper Blade is 0.5mm to 1.0mm away from the

Print Head for each color (K,C,M,Y) when the cleaning starts.(5) If the measurement is not within 0.5mm to 1.0mm, change the setting on SE Mode No.8.6.2

* Increasing the parameter setting by SE-Mode No.8.6.2 decreases the distance, and decreasing the param-eter setting increases the distance.

* If the wiper blade is too much away (too much space), the cleaning head will miss the print headwhen the cleaning unit is raised. If that happens, the cleaning head will break off from the cleaningunit when the leading edge of the cleaning head hits the print head at the start of the cleaning action.This will damage both the cleaning unit and print head.

* The adjustment value is same for both HC5500 and HC5000 on this adjustment.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-2.Cleaning position

Refer to the following photograph and make an adjustment.


(2) Activate SE-Mode and select [8.6.5 Cleaning Position] and make the parameter setting to

0.0mm and enter. (For HC5000, make the parameter setting to 0.5mm and enter.)(3) Activate 5.5.5 (Normal Cleaning), and while standing on the operator’s side of the machine,

watch and confirm that during the head cleaning action, the space between the plastic bracketand the shaft of the cleaning head is between 1.0mm and 1.5mm

* The space should be 1.0mm for HC5000.

(4) If the measurement is not approximately 1.0mm, change the setting on SE Mode No.8.6.5* Increasing the parameter setting by SE-Mode No.8.6.5 increases the space, and decreasing the parameter

setting decreases the space.

* If the space is too little, the wiper blade will not wipe the ink off the print head nozzle surface properlyand causes misfires or cause ink blot to appear on the prints.

* If the space is too much, the cleaning head is pushing against the print head too strong and maydamage the print head. The cleaning head may break off from the cleaning unit.

Plastic bracket

Plastic shaft on the cleaning head

1.0 mm

The photograph shows the cleaning head beforetouching the print head, so 1.0mm to 1.5mm spacecannot be seen. But when the cleaning headtouches the print head for the cleaning action,there should be 1.0mm to 1.5mm space.

* The space is 1.0mm for HC5000.

1.0 to 1.5 mm

HC5000

HC5500



Ink supply passages

2-3.Cleaning finish position

Refer to the following sketch and make an adjustment.

(1) The first two adjustments on the cleaning unit, described on the previous two pages, must becompleted before doing this adjustment.


(3) Turn ON the machine power.

(4) Activate SE-Mode and select [8.6.3 Nozzle End Pos.] and input the parameter setting of88.5mm and enter. (For HC5000, input the parameter setting of 86.0mm and enter.)

(5) Activate 5.5.5 (Normal Cleaning), and while standing on the operators side of the machine,watch and confirm that the rubber Wiper Blade is about 1.0mm away from the Print Head foreach color (K,C,M,Y) when the cleaning movement finishes.

(6) If the measurement is not about 1.0mm, change the setting on SE Mode No.8.6.3* Increasing the parameter setting by SE-Mode No.8.6.3 increases the distance, and decreasing the param-

eter setting decreases the distance.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)



Troubleshooting

CHAPTER 8:Troubleshooting

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Troubleshooting for pr int ing problems

1.Causes of main printing problems and corrective mea-

sures

1-1.Procedure for responding to printing problems

(1) Check that the SE mode settings, mechanical settings and printer driver settings match with themedia which causes the error.

(2) Check whether the operating condition is within the specification.

(3) Activate SE mode, select the test pattern and printing mode necessary to examine the problem,and output the test pattern.

(4) If necessary, output the user data and other test charts brought with you.

(5) Take corrective measures by referring to the following troubleshooting chart.

(6) Refer to the contents of the technical manual for troubleshooting the misfire (MF).

Image problem Cause Corrective measure

Printing fails, large non-printed area

Print head tubes are bent, prevent-ing supply of ink.

Correct the bent tubes.

Head joint (sealing valve) is closed,preventing supply of ink.

Open the ink valve (sealing valve).

There is a problem in the printheads.

Replace the print heads.

Three is a problem in the Headdriver PCB or ORIP PCB.

Check and correct the connections for allconnectors of the PCBs indicated to theleft.

Replace the PCBs indicated to the left.

Defective vacuum operation due todisconnected suction tube (headmaintenance not possible)

Correct the disconnected or bent tube ofthe suction pump or suction chamber.

Ink problems Replace the ink if it appears defective. Since degraded ink remaining in the ink

passages may cause problems, replacethe main ink passage components, if nec-essary.

Defective Controller(PS7R) Correct the Controller(PS7R) problem.

White streaks The print heads do not eject ink cor-rectly.

Infrequently generated white streaksthat can be eliminated by headmaintenance is regarded as part ofnormal machine operations. It is notpossible to completely eliminate inthe inkjet system.

If the problem is due to misfire/non-per-pendicular ejection, perform a normalcleaning.

If the normal cleaning does not correct theproblem, select the misfiring color, andperform a thorough cleaning.

Clean the ejection nozzles using a wipestick.

Replace the print heads.

The conditions of the operating envi-ronment are unsuitable.

Confirm that room temperature andhumidity are within the permissibleranges. 10 to 30 degrees Celsius 40% to 70% RH

Ink problems Replace the ink if it appears defective.

Since degraded ink remaining in the inkpassages may cause problems, replacethe main ink passage components, if nec-



Troubleshooting

The printed color is toodark, or the ink runs.

Paper with low ink absorption isused in a print mode involving alarge number of drops.ÇÈ

Use the appropriate media/print mode.

Prints are made on the wrong side ofthe paper, due to incorrectly setpaper (especially when using coated

paper).

Set the paper correctly.

The paper being used is unsuitable. Use the appropriate media/print mode.

The print density setting is too high. Reduce print density.



The color is too light oruneven.

The paper being used is unsuitable. Use the appropriate media/print mode.

The conditions of the operating envi-ronment are unsuitable.

Confirm that room temperature andhumidity are within the permissibleranges.

10 to 30 degrees Celsius 40% to 70% RH

Paper (such as coated paper) with ahigh ink absorption rate is used in aprint mode that produces a smallnumber of drops.

Set the print mode suitable for the type ofpaper in use.

The print density setting is too low. Increase print density.



Vertical lines are notstraight.

Incorrect adjustment Perform image adjustment.(For more information, refer to section 2 inthis chapter.)

Transfer belt skew Adjust the belt tension. Replace the transfer belt. Replace the transfer unit.

Machine alignment is slightly dis-torted due to an uneven installationsurface.

Adjust the adjustment screw on the frontside.

Set up the machine on a flat surface, andperform image adjustment if necessary.

Horizontal lines are notstraight.

Incorrect adjustment Perform image adjustment. (For more information, refer to section 2 in

this chapter.)

Defective belt encoder (locatedinside the transfer belt unit)

Correct installation conditions for the beltencoder.

Replace the belt encoder.

Printing irregularities Incorrect adjustment Perform image adjustment. (For more information, refer to section 2 in

this chapter.)

Analog ink remains in the ink pas-sage.

Perform a thorough cleaning. Replace the reservoirs. Replace the ID units.






HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Color mismatching/abnor-malities

Printing results differ from the colorsdisplayed on the monitor.

Due to differences between the RGB andCMYK color systems, printed colors maynot be identical to the colors displayed onthe monitor. Adjust the application andRIP settings to achieve optimum colormatching.

Analog ink remains in the ink pas-sage.

Perform a thorough cleaning. Replace the reservoirs. Replace the ID units.



Contaminated printed sur-faces (in single-side print-ing)

Contaminated paper transport pathfor single-side printing.

Contaminated registration rollers Clean Contaminated cleaning roller (periodic

replacement after 250,000 prints) -




Troubleshooting

2.Explanation of automatic image adjustment and adjusted

image quality

2-1.Overview of automatic image adjustment

Automatic image adjustment for the printer involves scanning of the test pattern printed by the printer

using the image adjustment software and a scanner, and adjustment of parameters based on theresults of automatic measurement of the images. Through this process, the printer determines and

sets the optimum parameters automatically.

Of the image adjustment items, only the head angles need to be set manually. Except for the follow-

ing two items, image adjustment items are automatically set by the printer by exchange of information

with the image adjustment software.

When print heads are replaced during maintenance, the parameters for the recommended head drive

voltage and head drive AL must be changed before head angle adjustment. These two items must be

set manually on the Control panel and saved.

* For information on the image adjustment method, refer to [Adjustment after print head replacement] in [Ink

supply passages].

2-2.Overview of test patterns for i mage adjustment

Use the following test patterns for automatic measurement and setting of parameters.

(1) Scanner calibration test chart

Compensating for geometrical distortion of the scanner

(2) Coarse adjustment pattern

Head angle parameter Print timing of two heads in each print head

(3) Density adjustment pattern

Recommended drive voltage correction

(4) Fine adjustment pattern

Print timing of print head

Overlap amount

Top edge registration

Execution of fine adjustment of relative positions of colors and other settings

2-3.Parameters and image quality

Described below are the characteristics of image affected by parameter settings. If the image defects

described in a later section appear, the parameter settings may be unsuitable for the printer condi-

tions. If so, repeating automatic image adjustment will correct the problem. The original device condi-

tions will tend to drift over time, and automatic image adjustment may need to be repeated.

If the characteristics of the actual image differs from those described, image quality will not improve

even if automatic adjustment is performed. This is because such defective image conditions arise

from the mechanical instability of the paper transport system or other factors rather than parametersettings. In these cases, you must locate and correct the cause of the problem.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Image defects caused by defective parameter settings are characterized by uniform deviation of dots.

On the other hand, mechanical defects result in irregular and uneven deviations. The occurrence of

the defect will also be unpredictable.

2-4.Image defects caused by erroneous image adjustment performed by

service personnel

< Head drive parameter 1 >

1) Voltage: After replacing a print head, enter the recommended drive voltage printed on thenew print head. If this recommended parameter value is not entered, image defects mayoccur due to incorrect drive parameters (menus [8.5.1.1], [8.5.1.3]).

2) Characteristic of image defects: Image defects appear as a continuous difference in lateralprint head density. See the above diagram.

3) Corrective measure: Check the voltage value and AL type settings on the Control panel(service mode) to see if they correspond to the values indicated on the label. If not, enterthe correct values according to the procedure described in [Adjustment after print head

replacement, 1-1Parameter setting]. Then perform image adjustment.

* Changing voltage values affects print timing. Be sure to perform image adjustment and to correctother parameters.

Paper transport direction

Applicable print head width



Troubleshooting

< Head drive parameter 2 >

1) AL type: After replacing a print head, enter the recommended head drive AL type printedon the new print head. If this recommended parameter value is not entered, image defectsmay occur due to an incorrect defective drive parameter. (8.5.1.3)

2) Characteristic of image defects: When the printed image is positioned so that the papertransport direction is vertical, as wide as the print head (see the left diagram), continuous

vertical print density differences are visible or misfires are seen due to ink ejection prob-lems for the replaced head (see the right diagram).

3) Corrective measure: Check the AL type setting in the service mode on the Control panel tosee if it corresponds to the type indicated on the label. If not, enter the correct type accord-ing to the procedure described in [Adjustment after print head replacement, 1-1Parametersetting]. Then perform image adjustment.

* Changes in the AL type will affect print timing. Be sure to perform image adjustment and correct otherparameters.


Applicable print head width Applicable print head width




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< Defective head angle adjustment >

1) Head angle adjustment: After replacing a head, perform head angle adjustment.Refer to[Adjustment after print head replacement, 1-5 Execution of image adjustment]. If this man-ual setting of the head angle is performed incorrectly, image defects may arise.

2) Characteristic of image defects due to defective head angle adjustment 1. Deviation ofhorizontal single-color lines

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, the

defect appears in the horizontal lines of a single color. An abnormality is seen in horizontal

lines of a single color of K, C, M, or Y printed by the defective head. The horizontal lines of

a single color printed by the misaligned head are slightly displaced. If there is more than

one misaligned head, the horizontal lines of a single color will appear irregular. This defect

is produced continuously from the top of the page to the bottom. This defect appears inevery print. See the above diagram.

3) Characteristic of image defects due to defective head angle adjustment 2. Deviation ofhorizontal multiple-color lines

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, thedefect appears in horizontal multiple-color lines. Multicolor horizontal lines show a color

shift within the width of the misaligned head This defect is produced continuously from the

Deviation of horizontal single-

color lines

Example of defective printing

caused by misaligned K head

Deviation of horizontal multi-

ple-color lines

Example of defective printing

caused by misaligned K head



Troubleshooting

top of the page to the bottom within the width of the applicable head. In some images, the

defect appears cyclically. This defect appears in every print. See the above diagram.

4) Corrective measure: Perform image adjustment, referring to [Adjustment after print headreplacement, 1-5 Execution of image adjustment].

2-5.Effects of parameters and image characteristics

Described below are image characteristics and the parameters that affect them. Note that defects

caused by parameters tend to generate uniform symptoms (such as constant deviations).

In the case of deviation of vertical multiple-color lines, for example, if the amounts of K and C devia-

tions are uniform from the top to the bottom, the defect is due to improper parameters. This defect

can be corrected by repeating image adjustment.

If the extent of the deviation gradually increases farther down the printed page, the defect is most

likely due to a paper transport problem such as paper skew. If so, remove the cause of the paper

skew.

< Print density differences among single-color heads

Characteristics

Differences in print density with the adjacent head occurs within the head width. The den-

sity difference is continuous in the paper transport direction within the width of the print

head.

Parameters that may lead to this problem

The recommended drive voltage (Voltage) entered is incorrect or inappropriate.

The recommended AL type entered is incorrect or inappropriate.

Corrective measure Check the recommended drive voltage (Voltage) on the Control panel and correct the set-ting.





HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Perform image adjustment, referring to [Adjustment after print head replacement, 1-5 Exe-cution of image adjustment].

Replace the defective print head (determine the defective print head by checking the colorand position).

< Frequent misfires of certain print heads

Characteristics

Certain print heads cause frequent misfires.


The recommended AL type entered is incorrect or inappropriate.

The print head is incorrect.

Corrective measure

Check the recommended AL type on the Control panel and correct the setting.


Replace the defective print head (determine the defective print head by checking the color

and position).





Troubleshooting

< Deviat ion of horizontal single-color l ines >

Characteristics

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, a

defect is visible in the horizontal lines of a single color of K, C, M, or Y printed by the defec-

tive head. The horizontal single-color lines printed by the misaligned head are slightly dis-

placed. This defect is produced continuously from the top of the page to the bottom and

appears in every print.

Parameters that may lead to this problem Defective head angle adjustment or deviation of adjustment

The vertical position parameter setting of the defective head on the Control panel does notmatch printer conditions.

Corrective measure



Deviation of horizontal sin-

gle-color lines



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< Deviat ion of dots on single-color horizontal l ines

Characteristics

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, a

defect is visible in the horizontal single-color lines of K, C, M, or Y printed by the defective

head. When observed under a magnifying glass, the single-color horizontal lines printed by

the defective head consist of separate, distinguishable dots.


Defective print timing in the paper transport direction

The ink ejection timing parameters for the two heads in the defective head are incorrect.

Corrective measure



Deviation of horizon-

tal single-color lines



Troubleshooting

< Deviat ion of horizontal mult iple-color l ines

Characteristics

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, there

is a 1-PEL multiple-color shift in horizontal lines composed of two colors from K, C, M, and

Y. This appears as a color irregularity in multiple-color horizontal lines.

When observed under a magnifying glass, the multiple-color horizontal lines printed by the

defective heads show displaced dots. This color shift occurs uniformly within the width of

the print head.


Defective head angle adjustment or deviation of adjustment

Defective print timing in the paper transport direction. The vertical position parameter set-ting of the defective head on the Control panel does not match printer conditions.

Corrective measure



Deviation of horizontal multiple-

color lines



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

< Deviat ion of vert ical mult iple-color l ines

Characteristics

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, there

is a 1-PEL multiple-color shift in vertical lines composed of two colors from K, C, M, and Y.

This appears as a color irregularity in multiple-color vertical lines.

When observed under a magnifying glass, the multiple-color vertical lines printed by the

defective heads show displaced dots. This color shift occurs uniformly within the width of

the print head.


Lateral print timing problems relative to the paper transport direction. The horizontal posi-

tion parameter setting of the defective head on the Control panel does not match printer

conditions.

Corrective measure



Deviation of vertical multiple-color lines



Troubleshooting

< Visible print density discontinuit ies at head joints in half- tone print ing

Characteristics

When the printed image is positioned so that the paper transport direction is vertical, print

density discontinuities are visible at the head joints in half-tone printing.

Vertical lines may have higher or lower density compared to surrounding areas. The defect

also appears as vertical white streaks.


An overlap occurs at the joint between two adjacent heads. Image adjustment performsimage processing to make this overlapping section less conspicuous. The overlap parame-

ter does not match printer conditions.

Corrective measure


Replace one of the problem-causing print heads (determine the defective print head bychecking the color and position).

Several types of

multiple-color half-tones



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)




CHAPTER 9: Paper receiving sect ion

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanisms

1.Basic mechanism

1-1.Overview of mechanism

After printing, paper is discharged into the V-shaped exit tray. The paper exit section features the fol-

lowing mechanisms for the neat stacking of discharged sheets.

Paper receiving tray fence

Two side fences and one end fence aligns the papers on the paper receiving tray.

These three paper fences feature an automatic slide function to adjust their positions to matchthe size of the paper in use.

The cushion on the end fence keeps discharged paper from bouncing back. The cushion plate ismanually adjustable on is vertical position on the end fence.

Paper-sett l ing f laps The side fences are provided with a total of four paper setting flaps. These flaps move slightly

due to the weight of discharged paper, giving the paper a slight upward curl so that they stackneatly in the exit tray.

The paper-settling flaps can be stowed away by pulling the flap knobs up.

Paper fence HP button

Pressing the paper fence HP button moves the exit paper fences to their preset positions.

If there is no printed paper in the paper receiving tray, the three fences retract to their stowagepositions. If printed paper is found in the tray, the stopper and guides move to the paper retriev-ing position set by user menu 4.8.4 (shifting guide).

The user menu 4.8.4 (shifting guide) allows the user to select either only the side fences to

move or only the end fence to move, or all three fence to move when the button is pressed.Paper detection sensor

The sensor checks whether any paper printed in the previous print job remains in the exit tray. According to the sensor detection status, the fence position is determined at the start of newprinting job.

End fence cushion

Side fencePaper stopper

Paper-settling flaps

Paper-settling flap knob

Paper guides HP button





Damper mechanism

Since the paper receiving tray is heavy, the tray support sections on both sides are providedwith dampers to open the tray slowly and minimize the impact when the tray is opened from thestowed condition.

Paper guide base SW

The paper guide base switches are provided to detect the folded state of the three fences. Thefences slide only when all switches are activated (the fences are in upright condition).

If any one of the fence is folded, the switch disables the fence from sliding and error message isdisplayed.

Damper

Paper guide base SW for the end fence

When the fence moves to the upright position, the whiteplate descends and presses on the actuator plate, activatingthe switch.

Plate

Actuator

When the fence is in the upright

position, the switch is activated.

Paper guide base SW for the side fence

Plate



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2. Fence sliding mechanism

2-1.Fence sliding mechanism

Side fence sl iding mechanism

The following mechanisms are provided for side fence sliding operations.

1) Side fence pulse motor: Drive power for sliding operations.2) Side fence HP sensor: Detects the widest opened position.

3) Side fence limit sensor: Detects the narrowest position. Prevents overruns due to malfunc-tions.

The two side fences are operated by linked gears and belts the synchronized movement.

Side fence pulse motor

Side fence on the machine drive side

Side fence limit sensor

Side fence HP sensor

Side fence on the operator side




Back stopper fence sl iding mechanism

The following mechanisms are provided for the paper stopper sliding operation.

1) End fence pulse motor: Drive power for the sliding operation.

2) End fence HP sensor: Detects the widest position.

3) End fence limit sensor: Detects the narrowest position. Prevents overruns due to malfunc-tions.

End fence

End fence limit sensor

End HP sensor End fence pulse motor

(HC5000)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-2.Sliding operations at the beginning of the print operation

Basic operations

The auto paper receiving tray section is electrically connected to the HC Control PCB on theHC5000. The three fences move to the appropriate positions according to the paper size at thebeginning of a print operation.

First, all three fences slide to the widest position detected by the HP sensors.

The three fences then slides inward to accommodate the paper size detected by the paperguide fences on the paper feed tray of the HC5000.

When there is a paper left on the receiving tray at start of new print ing job

If there is a paper still detected on the paper receiving tray from the last printing job at the start ofa new printing job, the fences on the paper receiving tray stays at present position if the papersize detected for the new print job is equal or smaller in size than the last printing job. If thepaper size for the new print job is detected to be larger in size than the last printing job, the threefences on the paper receiving tray are widened in position to receive the larger paper size for thenew print job.

When using nonstandard-size paper

For nonstandard paper sizes (custom sized papers), the side fences on the paper receiving trayslides to the paper width detected by the paper guides on the paper feed tray. The end fence onthe paper receiving tray stops either of the two positions - fully wide position or half-wide posi-tion.

When using postcard-size paper

For receiving postcard size papers, the end fence moves in first before the side fences to pre-vent the side fences from blocking the inward movement of the end fence.

2-3.Other

Fine adjustment of fence stop positions can be performed from the user menu.

When thin paper, standard, thick paper, or custom paper is selected in the paper information

setting, the fences stop at the preset positions for the each paper registered. (The positionsmust be preset by the test mode 5.9.1.60 and 5.9.1.61 by the serviceman.)

If the machine fails to operate due to a problem in the auto paper receiving tray, the HC5000 stillcan be operated by disconnecting the connecting cable between HC5000 and the receiving tray.




Disassembly

1.Paper receiving tray

1-1.Removing the paper receiving tray < disassembly >

(1) Disconnect the electrical cord between the tray and HC5000.

(2) Remove one mounting screw each from the flanges on the damper units left and right.

(3) Holding the paper receiving tray so that it does not fall, remove the flanges.

(4) After the flanges are removed, the paper receiving tray can be lifted off from the machine.

Flange



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.The parts in the paper receiving tray

2-1.Removing of the side fence belt

< Pre-removal >


(2) Remove the bottom cover (seven M4x8 binding screws).

< Removal >

(1) Detach the idler spring and loosen the tensioner.

(2) Remove the belt clamp (one M3x8 binding screw).

(3) Detach the clip and flange from the pulley and remove the belt.


The two side fences are mechanically linked when they slide, so where the belt clamp isattached during the assembly is important. With the sliders of both fences moved all the way toward the center, place a mark on the belt toindicate the installation position of the belt clamp, and then mount the belt clamp.

Bottom cover

Idler spring

Belt clamp

Remove clip and flange from this pulley.





2-2.Removing the side fence pulse motor

< Pre-removal >



< Removal >

(1) Dismount the reuse band and disconnect the motor connector.(2) Detach the retaining ring and flange from the pulley and remove the pulley. (Be careful to avoiddropping the pin located inside the pulley.)

(3) Dismount the motor (three M4x8 RS-tight screws).

Reuse band

Connector Side fence pulse motor

Detach this flange from the pulley




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-3.Removing the end fence belt

< Pre-removal >



< Removal >

(1) Detach the retaining ring and flange from the pulley and remove the end fence belt from the pul-ley.

(2) Remove the belt clamp (one M3x8 binding screw).

(3) Remove the end fence belt.

End fence belt

Belt clampRemove clip and flange from this pulley.




2-4.Removing the end fence pulse motor

< Pre-removal >



< Removal >

(1) Disconnect the paper detection sensor and end fence limit sensor together with thebracket.(Two M4x8 RS-tight screws)

(2) Dismount the reuse band and disconnect the connector to the pulse motor and remove thepulse motor (three M4x8 RS-tight screws).

Reuse bandConnector

End fence pulse motor


Connector



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

MEMO



Control ler & power supply unit

CHAPTER 10: Control ler & power supply uni t

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Specif icat ion

1.PS7R-9000




2.HC3R-5000



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanism

1.Control ler (PS7R-9000 & HC3R-5000)

1-1.Front panel of the controller

Turning the power ON and OFF

* In the following articles, in HC5500, Soft-SW means the sleep key on the operation panel and the statewhere Soft-SW is turned OFF means the sleep state.

When operating HC5500/HC5000, prevent the crash on the controller by not turning OFF themain power switch of HC5500/HC5000 directly.

Turn the machine off by pressing the Soft-Switch on the operation panel first. Turning themachine off by the Soft-Switch gives the signal to controller to shut down and let the software ofthe controller to shut down in the correct way, like normal computers.

If the main power switch on HC5500/HC5000 needs to be turned OFF, turn off the machineusing the Soft-Switch first. After controller shuts down completely then turn OFF the mainpower switch on the machine.

In normal operating condition of the machine, the power ON and OFF is done by the operatorsusing the Soft-Switch. The main power switch is normally left turned ON.

USB Dongle

The controller except HC3R-5000 has a USB Dongle which is a hardware key.

On HC5500, it is mounted inside the controller. On HC5000, since it is connected to one of the USB ports on the back panel of the controller,caution should be paid not to misplace the USB Dongle.

Instal lat ion location of the control ler

Though the controller is installed outside the machine, under the paper receiving tray for

Power SW

LEDs

This figure shows the front panel of PS7R9000.




LEDs display

The controller allows the execution of a print job, use of the touch panel (option), scanning of anoriginal on the scanner (option), or updating of the firmware.

The controller is connected to the ORIP PCB on the main unit via a USB cable, to the touchpanel via a serial cable, and to the touch panel LCD via a VGA cable.

The status of the controller can be checked with the three LEDs located on its front panel.

If the controller does not start up, disconnect the two connectors from the hard disk drive, thencheck to see if the BIOS starts up. If the BIOS does not start up, replace the power supply unit or motherboard of the controller. If the BIOS starts up normally, replace the hard disk drive.

<< Caution >>

The controller has a built-in hard disk drive. Do not disconnect the power cord or turn off themain power supply when it is operating.

The hard disk drive is easily damaged by impact or vibration. Handle carefully during disassem-bly and reassembly. (Handle it as carefully as a PC.)

Handle the controller carefully, since it contains settings entered by the network administrator atthe customer’s site.

The controller uses a USB connection to the ORIP PCB. In normal operation, do not connectORIP PCB directly to a PC using this USB connection.

Before removing or reinstalling the memory module or other components within the controller,ground yourself by touching the metal frame to prevent damages by the static electricity.

ERROR

(red)

READY

(green)

DATA (yel-

low)

1 x x x Power OFF

2 lit lit lit BIOS starting up

3 blinking blinking blinking LINUX starting up/shutting down

4 blinking / x blinking / x blinking / x RIP starting up (Three LEDs blink in order. )

5 x lit x In standby

6 x lit blinking RIP, WRAPPER in processing operation

7 x lit lit Awaiting output

8 lit lit x / lit / blink-

ing

Controller error (RIP-related error)

9 blinking lit x / lit /blink-ing

Controller error (system-related error)

10 blinking blinking blinking Test, Reset button pressed

11 x blinking blinking Under farm upgrade

12 blinking blinking x Under HCC check



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-2. Back panel of the controller

Power cable

VGA cable(touch panel LCD)

Power control cable

UTP cable (LAN)

No connection

USB cable

(scanner, Firmware download)

USB Dongle

USB cable (ORIP PCB)

< PS7R for HC5000>

Power cable

RS232C cable

(touch panel LCD)

VGA cable(touch panel LCD)

USB cable(Connection fo scanner andORIP PCB, and for firmware

downloading.)

UTP cable (LAN)

Power control cable

Test SW

Reset SW< PS7R - 9000 >

< HC3R - 5000 >




Switches on the rear of the control ler

(1) TEST switch

Keep pressing the TEST switch until a buzzer sound is heard will print out a system datapage and allow to see the system setting of the controller.

For this print to come out, the machine must be in Print Ready condtion. Press the printbutton on the HC5000/HC5500 if the green LED is not lit.

The printout is equivallent to the one printed out by using 5.6.1. menu on HC5000/HC5500operation panel.

(2) RESET switch

By keep pressing the RESET switch for one second will clear the network setting to thedefault condition. The three addresses will be initialized to 0.0.0.0 This new defaultsetting becomes effective once the controller power is turned OFF and turned back ON.

Also the scanner functions and touch-panel calibration will be initialized.

This RESET switch should not be pressed by mistake. Otherwise all the data, which areinitialized, need to be input again.

* By keep pressing the RESET switch for three seconds, there is a beep sound twice. And then keep pressing the RESET switch for one second again, after that, HDD is initialized and it

will be in a factory - default state.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Disassembly

1.PS7R for HC5000

Removing PS7R from HC5000 and disassemby

(1) Perform the shutdown procedure on HC5000 by first pressing the Soft-Switch, and then themain power switch after the PS7R shuts down, unplug the power cord from HC5000.

(2) Remove the four screws and detach the right cover from the base of HC5000.

(3) Detach controller support bracket from HC5000 by removing one screw.

(4) Disconnect the power cord connected between the controller (PS7R) and the power supply unitof HC5000.

(5) Disconnect the UTP cable, USB dongle, USB cable (connected to ORIP PCB), USB cable (con-nected to scanner), VGA cable (touch panel LCD), and serial cable (touch panel) from PS7Rand remove the PS7R from HC5000.

Disassembly and reassembly of control ler (PS7R)

(1) Dismount the controller (PS7R).

(2) Remove the two screws from the back panel and dismount the cover.

Removing the hard disk drive

Remove one screw, disconnect the two connectors, and dismount the hard disk drive. (Keep a record

of the serial number of the hard disk drive.)




Removing the memory module

After touching the frame to release static electricity, release the locks on both sides of the DIMM and

dismount the DIMM.

Removing the motherboard

Disconnect the DIMM, power supply connector, HDD connector, panel connector, speaker connector,

and case fan connector, then remove the six screws to dismount the motherboard.

2.PS7R-9000, PS7R-9000(G2) & HC3R-5000

Detaching PS7R-9000 from HC5000 and PS7R-9000(G2) or HC3R-5000 from

HC5500 & disassembly

(1) Perform the shutdown procedure on HC5000/HC5500 by first pressing the Soft-Switch, and thenthe main power switch after the controller shuts down. Unplug the power cord from HC5000/

HC5500.(2) Disconnect the cables from the back panel of the controller.

(3) Remove the two screws on the back panel of the controller and detach the cover.

(4) Remove the CPU fan duct.

CPU fan duct

HDD

DIMM

PCI SW PCB

( USB dongle)

HDD cable

Motherboard

Power unit



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

3.Power supply unit

(1) Remove the rear right cover from the MTPF.


(3) Remove the suction pump unit.* Note: 3. Refer to the section on the suction pump unit.

(4) Remove the cable clamps.* Note: When removing the power supply unit, be careful of cable clamp interference.

(5) Disconnect the Power cable to the controller.

(6) Disconnect the connectors as shown on the photographs bellow.

(7) Remove the screws (two M4x8 screws with washers on the rear, and four M4x8 screws withwashers on the side).

Cable clamps


Suction pump unit

Connectors

Connector




(8) Pull out the power supply unit from the machine.

Power supply unitConnector

M4x8 screws with washer

M4x8 screws with washer



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

MEMO



Test mode

CHAPTER 11:Test mode



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Test mode (SE-Mode)

1.Operation method

1-1.Startup and shutdown of the Test mode

< Start ing method >

(1) In normal mode (Print mode turned OFF), press the Menu key, (Up) key, and Enter key simulta-neously for three or more seconds to display the password input screen.

(2) Enter the password.

(3) Test mode is added to the menu to allow operations in Test mode.

The Normal mode and Test mode menus are active at the same time.

When Test mode is active, the normal menu can also be used to enter settings.

< Shutdown method >

(1) Press the Menu key, (Up) key, and Enter key simultaneously for three or more seconds to dis-play the password input screen.

(2) If incorrect password is entered, the machine will close the Test mode and enter Normal modestandby status (Print mode turned OFF).

1-2.Operations in Test mode

< Test mode menu >

When Test mode is active, the following test items are added to the menu:

Menu 4 Configuration

Menu 5 Administration

Menu 8 Check/Setting/Adjustment

Menu 9 Test Pattern Menu 12 (Menu No. input)

From the hierarchical menu, select and run a test item.

Menu 12 is a check no. input menu for direct selection of a test item. The No. of each hierarchi-cal menu layer with test items is shown as a check no.

< Types of Test modes >

Test mode offers the following specific test types (modes).

Individual unit check mode(Sensor and switch check)

S This mode is used to check the ON/OFF status ofsensors and switches.

Buzzer activation is determined by the ON/OFFstatus.

Individual unit check mode(Motor and solenoid check)

M This mode allows ON and OFF operation of anindividual unit such as a motor.

Group unit check mode U This mode activates operation for a group of units(group unit operation).

Data check mode C This mode displays the values entered as data.

Settings mode D This mode enables changes in system status andtiming adjustments.

Values can be entered directly. However, notethat entered values are not checked for appropri-ateness, and that input of an incorrect value may

result in abnormal operations.



Test mode

2.List of menu items

2-1.Menu items in Normal SE mode

The following shows the menu items.

Items indicated against a color background in the table are added to the menu at the time of Test

mode startup. Items indicated against a red background are data setting menu items used for adjustment.

Menu item Type Description 55 50

1. Print Position Adj This function is used to adjust paper printing positions. Positions can be adjusted up to 20.0 mm from the top, bottom,

right, and left margins in 0.5-mm increments.

0 0

2. Test Print This function outputs an image temporarily stored in the mainunits memory.

The number of test print sheets does not affect the number ofpages to be printed set from the PC.

0 0

3. Temp Data Retrieve This function is used to retrieve temporarily stored data and toset the number of pages to be printed in addition to the basevalue.

0 0

4. Configuration4.1 Standard Feed Tray

4.1.1 Paper Size This function is used to set the size of paper placed in the feedtray.

Select auto, standard size paper, or paper size registered forpaper size.

The standard paper sizes are A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R andpostcard for the millimeter size selection. For inch size selec-tion, they are Ledger, Legal, Letter and Statement.

0 0

4.1.2 Paper Type This function is used to set the type of paper placed in the feedtray.

(When the setting described in 5.8.14 is Japan mode):Select from HC normal paper, HC matte-coated paper, normalpaper, post card (IJ), post card, one of the registered paper

types 1 to 5, envelope, card stock, card stock (IJ). [Post card(IJ), post card, envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock are notavailable for Trays 1 & 2.]

(When the setting described in 5.8.14 is overseas mode): Select from ordinary paper 1, high quality paper 1, high qualitypaper 2, one of the registered paper types 1 to 5, envelope,card stock (IJ) and card stock. [Envelope, card stock (IJ) andcard stock are not available for Trays 1 & 2.]

0 0

4.1.3 Double Feed Check This function is used to enable or disable multiple feed detec-tion.

0 0

4.2 Feed Tray 14.2.1 Paper Size ->4.1.1 0 0

4.2.2 Paper Type ->4.1.2 0 04.2.3 Double Feed Check ->4.1.3 0 0

4.2.4 Double Feed Check(Multi-tray paper feed multiple feed) D Select the method of detection when [Multiple feed detection]is turned ON in the function setting screen. May be set to perform detection from first print (evaluation

based on absolute value of transmitted light) or from the sec-ond print (evaluation based on relative value (comparison withprevious print)).

Setting item: From 1st print/From second print (no detectionconducted for first sheet)

Default: From 2nd print

0 0

4.2.5 Dragged Feed Check(Multi-tray paper feed dragged multiple feed)

D Normally, the multiple feed and dragged multiple feed functionsare turned ON/OFF in concert, but it is possible to enable onlythe dragged multiple feed function. Dragged feed check can beenabled or disabled when [No multiple feed detection] is set onthe panel of the main unit (printer).

Setting item: ON/OFF

Default: OFF

0 0

4.3 Feed Tray 2

4.3.1 Paper Size ->4.1.1 0 0



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

4.3.3 Double Feed Check ->4.1.3 0 04.3.4 Double Feed Check timing D ->4.2.4 0 04.3.5 Dragged Feed Check D ->4.2.5 0 0

4.4 Feed Tray Relay When two or more feed trays contain paper of the same sizeand same type positioned in the same feed direction, this func-tion automatically switches feed trays for continuous printing.

When 5.8.17 auto-tray selection rule is for [size and type], the

printing continues between the trays with the same size andtype papers. When 5.8.17 auto-tray selection rule is for [size] only, the print-

ing continues between the trays with the same size papers. HC5000 does not have menu 5.8.17 auto-tray selection rule.

HC5000 is fixed with [size and type].

0 0

4.5 Triple-Tray Source When the feed tray selection is set to auto, this setting is usedto include or exclude the standard paper feed tray as a papersource.

0 0

4.6 Job Separation This function inserts separation paper at each break in printing(between jobs, booklets, or pages).

0 0

4.7 Print Density Allows manual adjustment of print density. Print density can be adjusted to one of five levels.

0 0

4.8 Paper Ejection4.8.1 Eject Wing This is used to set the exit wing position to auto or special.

The special position is set by service personnel using Testmode No 4.8.1.

0 0

4.8.2 Stack Guide This is used to select the auto exit paper fence adjustment orfine adjustment from the panel.

0 0

4.8.3 Stack Guide Adjust This is for fine adjustment of the exit paper fence terminal posi-tions.

0 0

4.8.4 Shifting Guide This allows selection of the exit paper fence terminal positionswhen the exit paper open button is pressed.

0 0

4.9 Temp Data Clear This function deletes data remaining in the main unit’s tempo-rary memory after a print job is completed.

0 0

4.10 Print area This function selects the margin around the printing paper to3mm when Normal printing area is selected, and for Maximumprinting area selection, the margin is reduced to 1mm.

0 0

4.11 Cover Sheet Tray Selection

4.11.1 Paper Size This function is to set the size of the paper for the Cover SheetTray on the HC-Finisher.

0 0

4.11.2 Paper Type This function is to set the type of the paper for the Cover SheetTray on the HC-Finisher.

0 0

5. Management Information

5.1 Paper Size Entry5.1.1 Paper Size 1 This function allows registration of nonstandard paper sizes as

Paper Size 1 to Paper Size 5 to allow such paper sizes to behandled in the same way as standard size papers.

0 0

5.1.2 Paper Size 25.1.3 Paper Size 35.1.4 Paper Size 4

5.1.5 Paper Size 55.2 Paper Type Entry

5.2.1 Paper Type 1 This function allows registration of selected paper as PaperType 1 by setting the paper type and paper feed parameters.

The following settings are made: Paper type indication: ON/OFF Paper type (when the setting described in 5.8.14 is Japan

mode):HC normal paper, HC matte-coated paper, ordinary paper, postcard (IJ), post card, envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock.

Paper type (When the setting described in 5.8.14 is overseasmode): Normal paper 1, high quality paper 1, high quality paper 2,envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock.

Paper feed setting: Standard, thick paper, thin paper, custompaper, envelope, postcard, etc.

Envelope, card stock (IJ) and card stock cannot be selected onHC5000.

0 05.2.1.1 Registration5.2.1.2 Paper Type

5.2.1.3 Paper Feed Control

5.2.2 Paper Type 2 -> Same as 5.2.1 0 05.2.3 Paper Type 3

5.2.4 Paper Type 45 2 5 Paper Type 5




Test mode

5.2.6 HC Ordinary Paper -> Same as 5.2.1. However, only the Paper Feed Control set-ting is available.

0 05.2.7 HC Matte-coated Paper 0 05.2.8 Ordinary Paper 0 0

5.2.9 Post Card (IJ) 0 05.2.10 Post Card 0 05.2.11 Envelope 0 x

5.2.12 Card Stock 0 x

5.2.13 Card Stock (IJ) 0 x5.2.21 Normal 1 When 5.8.14 is selected to Overseas [same as 5.2.1, but for

paper feeding only.]0 0

5.2.22 High Quality 15.2.23 High quality 2

5.3 Separation Paper Specify the feed tray loaded with separation paper to beinserted in print breaks.

0 0

5.4 Count Management5.4.1 Copy Count This displays the number of copies printed of a single page

regardless of paper size or orientation. These copies are dis-charged to the exit tray.

In duplex printing, each side is counted as one copy.

0 0

5.4.3 Count Pattern This displays the number of printed sheets counted based onpreset conditions.

The print paper size, single-side/duplex printing, and color/

black-and-white are set as counting conditions. (28 differentcombinations are possible.)

0 0

5.4.4 Maintenance Count This function displays a maintenance call prompt on the panelwhen the counter (adding counter) reaches a preset value (tar-get value).

This function can be disabled by setting the target count to 0.

0 0

5.4.4.1 Maintenance Count Entry(Maintenance print count setting)

D This is used to set the number of prints (Total Count) output bythe machine before a maintenance call prompt LED lights. Setting range: 0 to 9999000 sheets Input value: 0 to 9999 Setting increment: 1 (1000 sheets) Default: 0 (0 sheet): No maintenance call indication.

0 0

5.4.4.2 Maintenance Count Clear (Clear maintenance count (print))

D This clears the indication (confirmation) of the current count fora maintenance call prompt, and resets the counter to zero.

0 0

5.4.5 Head Cleaning Counter 5.4.5.1 Start-Up Cleaning C This displays the number of cleaning operations conducted for

each head.0 0

5.4.5.2 Hyper-Cleaning C5.4.5.3 Normal-Cleaning C This indicates the number of normal cleaning operations per-

formed.0 0

5.4.5.4 Extra-Cleaning C This indicates the number of cleaning operations for eachhead.

0 0

5.4.5.5 Flush-Cleaning C5.4.5.6 Head Recovery C

5.4.6 Tray Counter

5.4.6.1 Standard feed tray C This displays the counter indication for each feed tray. 0 05.4.6.2 Feed tray 1 C5.4.6.3 Feed tray 2 C

5.4.6.4 Duplex C5.4.7 Head Drop Count C Displays the ink drop total number for each head. 0 x

5.4.8 Finisher Count5.4.8.1 Interposer roller C 0 05.4.8.2 Stacker Sub-paddle C

5.4.8.3 Stacker paddle C 5.4.8.4 booklet paddle C

5.5 Head Maintenance5.5.1 Start-UP Cleaning

5.5.1.1 K U Press the Enter key to perform startup cleaning. (Yellow headdoes one each of the start-up cleaning and flush-cleaning.)

5.5.1.5 KCMY does the cleaning 3 times on all 4 colors and atthe end one Flush Cleaning on Yellow head.

0 0

5.5.1.2 C U5.5.1.3 M U

5.5.1.4 Y U5.5.1.5 KCMY U

5.5.2 Flush Cleaning

5.5.2.1 K U Press the Enter key to perform flush cleaning. (Yellow head

does the flush cleaning in the given times set by SE-Mode[5.5.8 Flushing Times].)

0 0

5.5.2.2 C U5.5.2.3 M U

5 5 2 4 Y U




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.5.3 Extra Cleaning5.5.3.1 K U Press the Enter key to perform extra cleaning. 0 05.5.3.2 C U

5.5.3.3 M U5.5.3.4 Y U

5.5.4 Hyper Cleaning

5.5.4.1 K Press the Enter key to perform hyper cleaning. 0 0

5.5.4.2 C5.5.4.3 M

5.5.4.4 Y5.5.5 Normal Cleaning The normal cleaning operation is designed to prevent misfires

in the ink heads. Normal cleaning can be programmed to acti-vate automatically after a preset number of prints have beenoutput.

The heads of all four colors are cleaned at one time in thismode.

0 05.5.6 Cleaning Cycle

5.5.7 Recovery Cleaning According to neglect time, automatic cleaning is performedbefore a printing start.

x 0

5.5.7 Recovery Cleaning 0 x5.5.7.1 8 Hours D 1 Normal cleaning is automatically made after 24 hours has

passed from the previous head cleaning.

The timing for the head cleaning is according to the selectionmade by Menu No. 5.5.7.5 [Execute timing]. Selection : ON / OFF Default : ON

0 x

5.5.7.2 24 Hours D 1 Normal cleaning is automatically made after 24 hours haspassed from the previous head cleaning.

The timing for the head cleaning is according to the selectionmade by Menu No. 5.5.7.5 [Execute timing].

Selection : ON / OFF Default : ON

0 x

5.5.7.3 7 Days D 3 Normal cleaning are automatically made after 7 days haspassed from the previous head cleaning.


Selection : ON / OFF

Default : ON

0 x

5.5.7.4 20 Days D 1 Strong cleaning is automatically made for each color, and 1Flush cleaning for Y color us made after 20 days has passedfrom the previous head cleaning.

The strong cleaning counter (KCMY) and flush cleaningcounter (Y) are renewed.


Selection : ON / OFF Default : ON

0 x

5.5.7.5 Execute timing D Recovery cleaning execute timing is set. Selection : At the start of printing / When turned back ON from

sleep. Default : When turned back ON from sleep.

0 x

5.5.8 Flushing Times D Sets the number of times the flush cleaning is performed.One flush cleaning is 30 sec. Setting values: 1 to 3 times Default: 2 times

0 x

5.6 Config Info Print5.6.1 System Information This function outputs the controller (PS7R) settings in list form.

The list can be used as a test print to determine whether themachine operates normally after settings in the main machinehave been changed.

0 0

5.6.2 Menu Settings Prints out the user menu settings. 0 x5.6.4 Count Pattern U The following counts are printed out.

Detailed count lists. Finisher function count list Head cleaning count list Count list for the maintenance.

0 x




Test mode

5.6.5 SE Config Print U Following SE-Mode lists are printed out with the parameter set-ting information for each SE-Mode number. All SE-Modes,including those not changed (default setting) are also printed out.For those not changed from the default setting, [NO CHANGE] isindicated. Parameter setting SE-Modes. SE-Modes with selectable default settings.

0 x

5.6.6 Charge Management U Selects whether the charge count is displayed on the menu. selection ON (displays) / OFF (does not display) Default : OFF (does not display)

0 x

5.7 Network Config This function is used to set and register the DHCP, IP address,subnet mask, and default Flipper gateway.

After registration, reset power to enter the set values into thecontroller.

Use the PC for settings other than the above network settings.

0 0

5.8 Initial Setting

5.8.1 Sleep This is used to turn the sleep function ON or OFF. 0 05.8.2 Waiting Time This function is used to set the sleep activation time. (01 to 99

min.)0 0

5.8.3 Beep Sound Key This is used to turn ON or OFF the buzzer function that pro-duces a beep when a key input is detected.

0 0

5.8.4 Beep Sound -Status This is used to turn ON or OFF the machine status buzzer

function that produces a beep when a job is generated or anoperation is completed.

0 0

5.8.5 Beep Sound Error This is used to turn the error buzzer ON or OFF. 0 05.8.6 TempData Retention This is used to see the setting made on the Console whether to

retain or purge the data for the last print job held in temporarymemory when the job is complete.

The setting can be changed via Console.

0 0

5.8.7 Displayed Language This is used to change the display language. Select a display language from seven choices: Japanese, Brit-

ish English, American English, French, German, Italian, andSpanish. Test mode indications are displayed only in Japaneseor English.

0 0

5.8.8 Metric/Inch Switch This is used to switch the measurement unit (mm/inch) dis-played on the panel.

Only mm is shown for Test mode.

0 0

5.8.10 Date/Time 2 D This is used to see the setting made on the Console for the cal-endar year, date, and time registered on the machine. The data isused as a time stamp in the error log and the information storedin ink tags. Values: year, month, date (YY/MM/DD), time (HH:MM) The Date/Time setting can be changed via Console.

0 0

5.8.11Page Count D This toggles the print counter between additive and subtractivemodes during normal printing operation. Setting: Subtracting counter/adding counter Default: Adding counter

0 0

5.8.12 FULL-tank Display D This is used to set a cleaning tank overflow error as a serviceerror or user error. Setting item: Service error/user error Default: Service error

0 0

5.8.13 Ink Temp Adjust (HC5500: While in Standby mode) (HC5000: While in Sleep mode)

D Switches ON/OFF for ink temperature adjustment in Standbymode on HC5500 and in Sleep mode for HC5000. Setting item: ON/OFF Default: OFF

0 0

5.8.14 Paper Type Switch over D Paper type category can be selected from among the Japanmode, overseas mode, and a mode combining settings from theboth modes. (The machine should be restarted after changing thesetting.)If the paper type selected is not available from the specifiedpaper type category, the default paper type is selected. Setting items: Japan mode / overseas mode / all Default: Japan mode for Japanese specification model

0 0

5.8.16 Serial No.(RISO) C Confirms the serial No. 0 05.8.17 Tray Selection Rule Sets the rule for the auto-tray selection.

Selection : Size only / Size and Type. Default : Size and Type

0 x




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.8.18 Print Mode Auto-ON Selection to enable or disable the automatic ON of the printmode. Selection : ON (enable) / OFF (disable) Default : ON

0 x

5.8.19 Print Mode Auto-ON Time Sets the time to automatically ON the print mode.Selection : 1 to 60 minutes Default : 5 Minutes

0 x

5.8.20 Menu Auto Shut OFF Selection to enable or disable the automatic switching of theMenu display to the Print mode [OFF] status. Selection : ON (enable) / OFF (disable) Default : ON

0 x

5.8.21 Menu Auto Shut OFF Time Sets the time to automatical ly switch the Menu display to the Printmode [OFF] display.Selection : 1 to 60 minutes Default : 5 Minutes

0 x

5.8.22 Stand-by Selection of whether to turn the machine to Stand-by mode afterthe set time the machine is not in use with power turned ON. Selection : ON (enable) / OFF (disable) Default : ON

0 x

5.8.23 Stand-by Period Sets the time to automatically switch the machine to the Sand-bymode.Selection : 1 to 99 minutes

Default : 5 Minutes

0 x

5.8.24 BP Idle Time D Sets the time for the Transfer unit to elevate down from the hang-ing (print) position. Selection : 0.5 minute to 10 minutes Range : In steps of 0.5 minute (30 seconds) Default : 5 minutes

0 x

5.8.25 Paper Ejection Wing HP Return Time

D Selects the time for the ejection wings to return back to the HPposition. Selection : 0 to 60 seconds Range : In steps of 10 seconds Default: 10 seconds

0 x

5.8.26 Envelope Margin D Sets the length of the envelope margin Selection : 12 to 72 mm Range : Insteps of 1 mm Default : 42 mm

0 x

5.8.50 Head Recovery Head recovery is activated by the operator. 0 0

5.9 Paper Feed Setting5.9.1 Standard

5.9.1.1 SPFT Upper Limit D This is used to change the elevator upper limit position setting. Setting range: Top/middle/bottom Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> MiddleThick paper (U1, U2) -> TopThin paper (U1, U2) -> MiddleCustom paper (U1, U2) -> BottomPostcard -> TopEnvelope -> Middle

0 0

5.9.1.2 SPFT Postfeed D Adjusting the postfeed amount Setting range: -20 to +20 mm

Setting increment: 1 mm Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> 0 mmEnvelope -> 0mm

0 0

5.9.1.3 SPFT Prefeed D Adjusting the feed start timing Setting range: 0 to 40 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> -5 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> -5 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mm

Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> -5 mmEnvelope -> -5mm

0 0




Test mode

5.9.1.4 SPFT Assist D Adjusting the amount of assist Setting range: 0 to 10 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 4 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mm

Postcard -> 4 mmEnvelope -> 0mm

0 0

5.9.1.5 SPFT Double Feed D Switching multiple feed detection ON/OFF Setting: ON (enables multiple feed detection)/OFF (disables

multiple feed detection) Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> ONThick paper (U1, U2) -> ONThin paper (U1, U2) -> ONCustom paper (U1, U2) -> ONPostcard -> ONEnvelope -> OFF

0 0

5.9.1.10 Tray1 Postfeed D Adjusting the postfeed amount. This item appears only if the stan-dard paper feed tray is mounted on the base.

Setting range: -5 to +10 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:


0 0

5.9.1.11 Tray1 Assist D Adjusting the amount of assist. This item appears only if the stan-dard paper feed tray is mounted on the base. Setting range: ON/OFF Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> ONThick paper (U1, U2) -> OFFThin paper (U1, U2) -> OFFCustom paper (U1, U2) -> OFF

0 0

5.9.1.20 Tray2 Postfeed D Adjusting the postfeed amount. This item appears only if the stan-dard paper feed tray is mounted on the base. Setting range: -5 to +10 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:


0 0

5.9.1.21 Tray2 Assist D Adjusting the amount of assist. This item appears only if the stan-dard paper feed tray is mounted on the base. Setting range: ON/OFF Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> OFFThick paper (U1, U2) -> OFF

Thin paper (U1, U2) -> OFFCustom paper (U1, U2) -> OFF

0 0

5.9.1.30 Simplex Page Gap D Adjusting the distance between paper (value at 7 drops) Setting range: 35 to 120 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:


0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.9.1.31 Duplex Page Gap D Adjusting the distance between paper (value at 7 drops) Setting range: 60 to 120 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:


Postcard -> 60 mm

0 0

5.9.1.32 P-Head Gap D Adjusts the distance between the print head and the paper * The envelope gap distance can be selected for envelope feed-ing only. The envelope feeding can have only the envelope gap. Setting : Normal / Card Default :

Standard (U1, U2) -> NormalThick paper (U1, U2) -> CardThin paper (U1, U2) -> NormalCustom paper (U1, U2) -> CardPostcard -> CardEnvelope -> Envelope (cannot change)

0 x

5.9.1.32 Head Gap D Adjusting the distance between paper and heads Setting range: 0 to 5 mm

Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default:Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 0.2 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 1.0 mmPostcard -> 0.2 mm

x 0

5.9.1.33 BP Speed Rate D Adjusting the speed ratio between registration rollers and belt Setting range: 95 to +102% Setting increment: 0.1% Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> 98.0%Thick paper (U1, U2) -> 100.0%Thin paper (U1, U2) -> 98.0%Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 100.8%

Postcard -> 100.0%Envelope -> 100.0%

0 0

5.9.1.34 Limited Max. Speed D If the print mode for 300-5 drops is selected by the PS7R control-ler while that for 300-7 has been specified, the 5 drop-image datareceived from the PS7R are output at the paper feed speed for 7drops. Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> 300-3Thick paper (U1, U2) -> 300-3Thin paper (U1, U2) -> 300-3Custom paper (U1, U2) -> 300-3Postcard -> 300-3Envelope -> 300-3

0 0

5.9.1.36 P rint Position 1 D Vertical print positioning adjustment (1) Adjustment : -20 Å`+20mm

Range : In steps of 1mm Default :

Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> 0 mmEnvelope -> 0 mm

0 x

5.9.1.37 P rint Position 2 D Vertical print positioning adjustment (1) Adjustment : -20 Å`+20mm Range : In steps of 1mm Default :

Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> 0 mmEnvelope -> 0 mm

0 x




Test mode

5.9.1.40 Wing Offset D Adjusting the wings Setting range: -50 to +50 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> 10 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 40 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 25 mm

Postcard -> 25 mmEnvelope -> 40mm

0 0

5.9.1.50 Re-feed Postfeed D Amount of re-feed postfeed Setting range: -10 to 10 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> 0 mm

0 0

5.9.1.51 Re-feed Assist D Amount of re-feed assist Setting range: 0 to 10 mm Setting increment: 1 mm

Default: Standard (U1, U2) -> 0 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 4 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> 4 mm

0 0

5.9.1.60 AS Side-fence Offset D Amount of paper guide offset Setting range: -20 to 40 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:

Standard (U1, U2) -> -4 mmThick paper (U1, U2) -> 25 mmThin paper (U1, U2) -> -4 mmCustom paper (U1, U2) -> 0 mmPostcard -> 25 mm

Envelope -> 25mm

0 0

5.9.1.61 AS End-fence Offset D Amount of paper stopper offset Setting range: -30 to 30 mm Setting increment: 1 mm Default:


0 0

5.9.1.70 Paper Selection D Display/hide registered paper types (Standard U1, Standard U2,...Custom U2) as options in [Paper feed setting]. Setting item: Display/Hide Default: Hide

0 0

5.9.2 Thick Paper D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.3 Thin/Light D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.4 Custom D Same as 5.9.1. 0 0

5.9.5 Standard U1 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.6 Thick Paper U1 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.7 Thin/Light U1 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 0

5.9.8 Custom U1 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.9 Standard U2 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.10 Thick Paper U2 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 0

5.9.11 Thin/Light U2 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.12 Custom U2 D Same as 5.9.1. 0 0

5.9.13 Card Stock D Same as 5.9.1. 0 05.9.14 Envelope D Same as 5.9.1. 0 x




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.10 Firmware Revision C Displays CPU version information. P2IP:ORIP PCB (PLIP on HC5000) P2MC:ORMC PCB (PLMC on HC5000) PLPR: HC Control PCB PTPL: FL Control PCB NOPL: HC Finisher (Only the machine equipped with finisher)

0 0

5.11 History5.11.1 Error Log C 5.11.1.1 to 64

Displays a list of errors (Type-S, X,W99,W44,W45) previouslygenerated in normal mode (64 max.).

Shows the date, error no., and total count.

0 0

5.11.2 Set SW History C 5.11.2.1 to 10 Displays set SW errors (Type-Z) that halted operations.

(10 max.) Shows the date, error no., and total count.

0 0

5.12 System Management5.12.1 Initialize Unit U Conducts an HP reset for unit initialization mechanisms. (BP,

wings, maintenance, etc.)0 0

5.12.2 Error Clear D Normally, when an error is generated, the cause of the errormust be eliminated by conducting the specified error reset pro-cedure. This setting allows the user to override this require-ment and reset internal parameters.

0 0

5.12.3 Clear User Area D Clears the data (function/administrator settings, etc.) in theuser area. (Restores default values.)

0 0

5.12.4 Clear Test Mode Area D Restores all settings entered in Test mode to their factory set-tings.

0 0

5.12.7 Factory Default D Set the Users area and Test mode area to the default setting. Buzzer sounds if the setting is not at default condition. The setting of menu [5.8.10 Date/Time 2] is not cleared. The data of menu [5.6 Config Info Print] is cleared. Turn OFF and turn ON the power. Unless the machine is

restarted, the actual setting in the controller differs from theprintout by menu [5.6 Config Info Print].

0 0

5.13 System Fitting

5.13.1 System Fitting D Checks the compatibility of [HC unit (MC PCB)] - [HC ControlPCB] - [Ink] in temporary entry and switches off the [Mainte-

nance call] indication if they are found to be compatible.

0 0

5.13.2 Cancel Fitting D Reset the confirmation of 5.13.1 Maintenance Call identification lights up if the test mode is acti-

vated while the machine is still tentatively registered.

0 0

5.13.3 Machine ID C Displays the machine type ID sent from the HC Control PCB. 0 0

6. Feed Tray Selection 0 07. Job Clear 0 08. Check/Setting/Adjustment

8.1 Drive Check8.1.1 SPFT Unit

8.1.1.1 Elevator motor U Activates the elevator ascending/descending operation. Alsodisplays the ON (light path blocked)/OFF status of the lowerlimit sensor and upper limit sensor A, B.

Pressing the right key raises the elevator in four steps. Press-

ing the left key lowers the elevator all the way to the lowermostposition.

0 0

8.1.1.2 Button LED U Elevator button LED operation check If the LED is not lit, pressing the right key turns it ON. If the LED is lit, pressing the left key turns it OFF.

0 0

8.1.1.3 Servo Action U Activates the elevator servo. This function is disabled when the standard paper feed tray is

empty. When the system is not operating, press the right key to acti-

vate the servo. Press the right key once again to halt the oper-ation.

0 0

8.1.2 MTF Feeder Unit




Test mode

8.1.2.1 FL Transfer motor M Checks the motor operations. Pressing the right key activates the operation. Pressing the

right key once again halts the operation.

0 08.1.2.2 Multi feed tray pickup motor 8.1.2.3 Feed tray 1 clutch

8.1.2.4 Feed tray 2 clutch8.1.2.5 Transfer clutch 18.1.2.6 Transfer clutch 2

8.1.2.7 Transfer clutch 3

8.1.2.8 Transfer clutch 48.1.2.9 Nip release solenoid 12 Checks the solenoid operation.

Pressing the right key starts the operation. The operation stopsautomatically after one second.

0 0

8.1.2.10 Nip release solenoid 34

8.1.3 BP Unit

8.1.3.1 Transfer motor U Activates the blower fans and belt motor. The right and left keys are used to adjust the speed.

(It can not be activated when the transfer unit is lower posi-tion.)

Displays speed converted from the belt motor-axis encoderand belt encoder outputs.

0 0

8.1.3.2 Paper feed motor U Checks main motor operations. The right and left keys are used to adjust the speed. Displays speed converted from the main motor encoder output.

0 0

8.1.3.3 Pickup clutch M Checks clutch operations. Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressingthe right key once again halts the operation.

0 08.1.3.4 Registration clutch8.1.3.5 Registration brake CL8.1.3.6 Registration roller operation M Activates the interlock function for the motor and clutch to turn

the registration rollers ON/OFF. Motor speed: 300 to 7 Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressing

the right key once again halts the operation.

0 0

8.1.3.7 Registrat ion roller n ip U Activates the inter lock function for the motor and clutch to con-trol the registration roller nip.

When nip condition and release condition cannot be detected,both are displayed at all times.

0 0

8.1.3.8 Blower fan 1 M Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressingthe right key once again halts the operation.

0 0

8.1.3.9 Blower fan 2 0 08.1.3.10 Blower fan 3 0 0

8.1.3.11 Blower fan 4 0 x8.1.3.12 Blower fan 5 0 x

8.1.3.13 Blower fan 6 0 x8.1.3.14 All blower fans 0 08.1.3.15 Gate solenoid(HC5000 : 8.1.3.12)

0 0

8.1.3.16 Duplex path CL(HC5000 : 8.1.3.13)

0 0

8.1.3.17 Duplex belt(HC5000 : 8.1.3.14)

M Drives the duplex belt. The right and left keys are used to adjust the speed. Setting display: OFF/600-7/600-6/···/300-3

0 0

8.1.3.18 Switchback CL(HC5000 : 8.1.3.15)

M Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressingthe right key once again halts the operation.

0 0

8.1.3.19 Switchback motor (HC5000 : 8.1.3.16)

U When the system is not operating, pressing the left key acti-vates the vacuum operation. Pressing the right key starts thedischarge operation.

Pressing the left key while the vacuum operation is underwayhalts the process. When the machine is discharging, pressingthe right key halts the operation.

0 0

8.1.3.20 Re-feed clutch(HC5000 : 8.1.3.17)

M Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressingthe right key once again halts the operation.

0 0

8.1.3.21 Re-feed brake(HC5000 : 8.1.3.18)

8.1.3.22 Re-feed roller (HC5000 : 8.1.3.19)

U Activates the interlock function for the motor and clutch to turnthe re-feed roller ON/OFF. The motor speed is 300-7.

Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressingthe right key once again halts the operation.

0 0

8.1.3.23 Exit motor(HC5000 : 8.1.3.20)

U Pressing the right key activates the drive operation. Pressingthe right key once again halts the operation.

Displays the rotation speed.

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8.1.3.24 Exit Wing(HC5000 : 8.1.3.21)

U When the exit wings are fully closed, pressing the right keyactivates the extending operation. If they are fully extended,pressing the left key activates the folding operation.

Displays the ON/OFF status of the wing HP sensor.

0 0

8.1.3.25 DF Sensor Light Intensity(HC5000 : 8.1.3.22)

U Sets the light intensity for multiple feed detection. Displays the DA value of the set light intensity. Displays the sensor AD value.

0 0

8.1.3.26 Cleaning Fan 1(HC5000 : 8.1.3.23)

M Checks the operations of the dust fan (main motor controlPCB).

0 0

8.1.3.27 Cleaning Fan 2(HC5000 : 8.1.3.24)

M Checks the operations of the dust fan (MC PCB). 0 0

8.1.4 Platen Elevation8.1.4.1 Elevator clutch M Elevator clutch (BP elevator clutch) 0 08.1.4.2 Elevation operation U When the platen is at the lower limit position, pressing the right

key raises it to the upper limit position through three steps. Displays the ON (light path blocked)/OFF status of the lower

limit, vacuum, and upper limit sensors. This function is disabled when the ink pan is retracted.

0 0

8.1.4.3 BP Spacer M BP spacer slides by the push of the left or right key to the HP,Envelope, Card or Normal position.

Activates only when the Transfer unit is at the maximum UP ormaximum DOWN position.

0 x

8.1.5 Head maintenance8.1.5.1 Ink pan U When the ink pan is at the operating position, pressing the left

key retracts it. Pressing the right key moves it to the operatingposition.

Displays the sensor status.

0 0

8.1.5.2 Suction nozzle U When the suction nozzle is at the home position, pressing theright key moves it toward the back. Pressing the left key movesit forward.

Displays the HP sensor status.

0 0

8.1.5.3 Pressure pump C With the KCMY pressurizing valves open, when the pressurepump is not operating, pressing the right key activates thepump. The pump stops automatically after one revolution.

When the pump is operating, pressing the right key halts theoperation. (Continuous revolution is not possible.)

0 0

8.1.5.4 K Pressure valve M Operations of the reservoir pressurizing valve When the valve is closed, pressing the right key opens it.Pressing the right key once again closes it.

0 08.1.5.5 C Pressure valve

8.1.5.6 M Pressure valve8.1.5.7 Y Pressure valve

8.1.5.8 Suction pump M When the system is not operating, pressing the right key acti-vates the drive operation. Pressing the right key once againhalts the operation.

0 0

8.1.6 Ink supply8.1.6.2 K Supply valve M Operations of the reservoir supplementary valve

Operable only when the ink cover is open. When the valve is closed, pressing the right key opens it. The

valve closes automatically after 1 sec.

0 0

8.1.6.3 C Supply valve8.1.6.4 M Supply valve8.1.6.5 Y Supply valve

8.1.6.6 KRSV Air valve M Operations of the reservoir air open valve When the valve is open, pressing the right key closes it. Press-

ing the right key once again opens it.

0 08.1.6.7 CRSV Air valve

8.1.6.8 MRSV Air valve8.1.6.9 YRSV Air valve8.1.6.10 KDST Air valve M Operations of the ID unit air open valve

When the valve is closed, pressing the right key opens it. Thevalve closes automatically after 1 sec.

0 08.1.6.11 CDST Air valve

8.1.6.12 MDST Air valve8.1.6.13 YDST Air valve

8.1.6.14 KCDST Heater M Operations of the ID unit heater When the heater is not operating, pressing the right key acti-

vates it. Pressing the right key once again halts the operation. Also displays the temperature.

0 08.1.6.15 MYDST Heater

8.1.6.16 Cooling fan 1 M When the system is not operating, pressing the right key acti-vates the drive operation. Pressing the right key once againhalts the operation.

0 08.1.6.17 Cooling fan 2

8.1.7 Auto fence

8.1.7.1 Paper guide U The right key moves the fences to their HP positions. The left key moves the fences to their limit positions. To exit, press the Cancel key.

0 08.1.7.2 Paper stopper




Test mode

8.1.7.3 AS1 Cycle U The following operations are performed:(1) Returns the exit fences to the HP.(2) Returns the stopper to the HP.(3) Moves the exit fences to the MIN positions and stops for 1sec.(4) Moves the exit fences to the HP.(5) Moves the stopper to the MIN positions and stops for 1 sec.(6) Returns the stopper to the HP.

0 0

8.1.8 Other 8.1.8.1 Paper counter U Each press of the right key increments the counter by one. 0 08.1.8.2 LCD operation U Pressing the right key turns on all the LCDs at certain intervals.

Pressing the right key once again turns off the LCDs.0 0

8.1.8.3 LED operation U Pressing the right key turns on all the LEDs at certain intervals.Pressing the right key once again turns off the LEDs.

0 0

8.1.8.4 Buzzer M Pressing the right key activates the buzzer. Pressing the rightkey once again stops the buzzer.

0 0

8.2 Sensor monitor 8.2.1 Cover

8.2.1.1 Cover, front r ight/front left S Displays the cover open/close status. When open: OPEN, when closed: CLOSE

0 0

8.2.1.2 Cover, switchback/flipper 8.2.1.3 Cover, ink cover/MTPF paperfeed (Jam release safety SW)

8.2.2 Standard paper feed tray8.2.2.1 Limit SW, upper side/lower side S SW ON (elevator motor operable)

SW OFF for interlocked operation.0 0

8.2.2.2 Lower/Upper Limit Sensors 1, 2Paper Feed Lower/Upper-limit Sensors

A, B

S U-shaped sensors. Displays the status of each sensor. Light axis blocked: ON

0 0

8.2.2.3 Elevator button Displays the ON/OFF status of elevator SW. 0 08.2.2.4 Remaining paper volume, upperside/lower side

S Displays the status of the tray volume sensors A/B. Light receiving condition: ON

0 0

8.2.2.5 No paper, paper length S Displays the status of the paper detection sensor and papersize detection sensor (reflective sensor).

Light receiving condition (Turns ON when paper is present)

0 0

8.2.2.6 Paper width S Displays the paper width A/D value. 0 08.2.2.7 Paper size S Displays the automatically detected paper size. 0 08.2.2.8 Paper feed lever S Displays the status of the paper feed pressure sensor (U-

shaped sensor). Light axis blocked by thick paper: ON, standard: OFF

0 0

8.2.3 Front feeder

8.2.3.1 Feed sensor 1 S Displays the status of each sensor. Turns ON when paper ispresent.

Only feed sensor 3 is a transmission type sensor; it activates(ON) when the light path is blocked. Other sensors are reflec-tive, activating (ON) when they receive light.

Pressing Enter activates buzzer notification mode, and thebuzzer indicates the sensor ON/OFF status with an audiblebuzzer signal. (ON: short beep, OFF: long beep)

0 08.2.3.2 Feed sensor28.2.3.3 Feed sensor3

8.2.3.4 Feed sensor48.2.3.5 Separation sensor

8.2.3.6 Feed FG sensor S Displays the sensor status of the FG sensor of the FL feedmotor.

U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.

0 0

8.2.3.7 Door safety SW S Cover switch for the MTPF left cover. SW ON (FL transfer motor operable) SW OFF for interlocked operation.

0 0

8.2.3.8 Feed tray 1Upper limit S Displays the sensor status. U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.

0 0

8.2.3.9 Feed tray 1 paper detection S Displays the sensor status. Reflection type sensor. Light receiving condition (turns ON

when paper is present)

0 08.2.3.10 Feed tray 1 paper length

8.2.3.11 Feed tray 1 paper width C Displays 8-bit data (raw data) after A/D conversion of thepower width VR and paper width (mm) after correction of paperwidth VR.

0 0

8.2.3.12 Feed tray 1 remaining paper vol-ume 1

S Displays the sensor status. If the light path is blocked (by the detection plate), the sensor

turns ON. The remaining paper volume is determined by the combinationof 1 and 2.

0 0

8.2.3.13 Feed tray 1remaining paper vol-ume 2

8 2 3 14 Feed tray 1 set SW S SW ON (Feed tray 1 is set) 0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8.2.3.15 Feed tray 2 upper limit Same as 8.2.3.8 to 8.2.3.14 0 08.2.3.16 Feed tray 2 paper detection8.2.3.17 Feed tray 2 paper length

8.2.3.18 Feed tray 2 paper width8.2.3.19 Feed tray 2 remaining paper vol-ume 18.2.3.20 Feed tray 2 remaining paper vol-

ume 28.2.3.21 Feed tray 2 set SW

8.2.3.22 cover SW C Cover switch for the left front cover (SW on the right side. Jamrelease safety SW for MTPF on the left side).

SW ON (cover is closed)

0 0

8.2.4 Paper feed path8.2.4.1 Registration sensor S Displays the status of each sensor. Turns ON when paper is

present. The registration sensor and top edge sensor are transmission

sensors. They turn ON when the light path is blocked. The paper emerge detection sensor is an U-shaped sensor.

They turn ON when the light path is blocked. Other sensors are reflective sensors. They turn ON when they

receive light. Pressing Enter activates buzzer notification mode, and the

buzzer indicates the sensor ON/OFF status with an audiblebuzzer signal. (ON: short beep, OFF: long beep)

0 0

8.2.4.2 Top edge sensor 1(HC5000 : 8.2.4.2 Top edge sensor)

0 0

8.2.4.3 Top edge sensor 2 0 x8.2.4.4 Paper emerge detection sensor (HC5000 : 8.2.4.3)

0 0

8.2.4.5 Exit sensor (HC5000 : 8.2.4.4)

0 0

8.2.4.6 Flipper sensor (HC5000 : 8.2.4.5) 0 0

8.2.4.7 Duplex belt front sensor (HC5000 : 8.2.4.6)

0 0

8.2.4.8 Duplex belt rear sensor (HC5000 : 8.2.4.7)

0 0

8.2.4.9 Switchback sensor (HC5000 : 8.2.4.8)

0 0

8.2.4.10 Pickup clutch(HC5000 : 8.2.4.9)

S Checks the status of the connector connection. Connected: ON, Disconnected: OFF

0 0

8.2.4.11 registration/brake(HC5000 : 8.2.4.10)

0 0

8.2.4.12 Fans 1, 2, 3(HC5000 : 8.2.4.11 Fans 1,2,3,4)

0 0

8.2.4.13 Fans 4,5,6 0 x8.2.4.14 Gate solenoid(HC5000 : 8.2.4.12)

0 0

8.2.4.15 Switchback clutch(HC5000 : 8.2.4.13)

0 0

8.2.4.16 Duplex path(HC5000 : 8.2.4.14)

0 0

8.2.4.17 Re-feed/brake(HC5000 : 8.2.4.15)

0 0

8.2.4.18 Cleaning fan 1(HC5000 : 8.2.4.16)

0 0

8.2.4.19 Cleaning fan 2(HC5000 : 8.2.4.17)

0 0

8.2.4.20 CCD (Edge)(HC5000 : 8.2.4.18)

C Displays the positional data for the paper edge detected by theCCD. (Position of the CCD elements)

0 0

8.2.4.21 CCD (A/D)(HC5000 : 8.2.4.19)

C Displays A/D values detected by the CCD. 0 0

8.2.5 Exit wing unit8.2.5.1 Wing home position S Displays the sensor status.

U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.0 0

8.2.5.2 Exit motor encoder

8.2.6 Belt platen8.2.6.1 Platen position S Displays the status of the lower limit, vacuum, and upper limit

sensors. U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.

0 0

8.2.6.2 Connector connection (elevationclutch)

S Checks the status of the connector connection. Connected: ON, Disconnected: OFF

0 0

8.2.6.3 BP spacer S Displays the status of the two sensor status: HP and Normal. 0 x

8.2.7 Head maintenance

8.2.7.1 Ink pan, right/left S Displays the sensor status. U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked. 0 08.2.7.2 Suction nozzle home position

8.2.7.3 Pressure pump home position




Test mode

8.2.7.4 Suction chamber (ink detection) S Displays the sensor status. ON: Ink detected, OFF: No ink

0 08.2.7.5 Overflow tank sensor 8.2.7.6 Waste f luid bott le, top/bottom S Displays the sensor status.

U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.0 0

8.2.7.7 Chamber sensor S Displays the sensor status. ON: Ink detected, OFF: No ink

0 0

8.2.7.8 Connector connection (overflow

tank)

S Checks the status of the connector connection.

Connected: ON, Disconnected: OFF

0 0

8.2.8 Ink supply8.2.8.1 Ink bottle S Checks whether RISO inks are set.

Simultaneous evaluation of four inks (KCMY). ON: Compatible ink set, OFF: No ink or incompatible ink

0 0

8.2.8.2 Ink supply passages S Displays the ink passage sensor status. U-shaped sensor. Turns ON when the light path is blocked.

x 0

8.2.8.3 Reservoir ink S Displays the reservoir ink sensor status (Hall element) Simultaneous evaluation of four inks (KCMY).

0 0

8.2.8.4 Distributor ink S Displays the ID unit ink sensor status. Simultaneous evaluationof four inks (KCMY).

ON: Ink detected, OFF: No ink

0 0

8.2.8.5 Distributor temperature S Displays the temperatures of the ID unit. Checks conditions for two colors (KC or MY) at a time.

0 0

8.2.8.6 Reservoir connection S Checks the connection conditions of the reservoirs for the fourcolor inks (KCMY). 0 0

8.2.8.7 Distributor connection S Checks the connection conditions of the ID units for two colors(KC or MY) at a time.

0 0

8.2.8.8 Distributor valve S Checks the connection conditions of the ID unit air open valvesfor the four color inks (KCMY).

0 0

8.2.8.9 Remaining ink volume C Checks the amount of remaining inks set in the machine. Displays the amounts of remaining ink in the 1% unit. Displayed ink volume: 100% to -50%

0 0

8.2.9 Head8.2.9.1 - 8.2.9.12 Head temperature C Displays the head temperature for each four blocks. 0 0

8.2.9.14 Connector connection (coolingfan)

C Checks the connection conditions of cooling fans 1 and 2. Connected: ON, Disconnected: OFF

0 0

8.2.10 Auto fence

8.2.10.1 Paper guide HP sensor S Displays the sensor status. Light axis blocked: ON

0 08.2.10.2 Paper guide limit sensor 8.2.10.3 Paper stopper limit sensor

8.2.10.4 Paper stopper HP sensor 8.2.10.5 Paper removing SW S Displays the switch condition.

SW pressed: ON0 0

8.2.10.6 Paper detection sensor S Displays the sensor status. Reflective sensor. Turns ON when light is received (paper detected).

0 0

8.2.11 Others8.2.11.1 Panel key S Checks keys. Displays the name of the pressed key. 0 0

8.2.11.2 Connector connection (papercounter)

S Checks the connection condition. Connected: ON, Disconnected: OFF

0 0

8.2.11.3 Connector connection (CN PCB,left)8.2.11.4 Option connection S Checks the connection of options.

Pressing the right/left key displays the names of the connectedoptions in sequence.

0 0

8.3 Motor speed adjustment

8.3.1 Belt motor speed adjustment U Counts the shaft encoder clock count at speed of 300-7 for 5seconds.

Compares the actual clock count and theoretical count andstores the ratio as compensating data in NVRAM.

Compensating data is activated in the belt motor drive speedduring printing.

0 0

8.3.2 Paper feed motor initial adjustment D Used to set the main feed motor initial value in the % unit. Setting range: 95% to 108% Setting increment: 0.1% Default: 100%

0 0

8.4 Paper width sensor adjustment, standardpaper feed tray




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8.4.1 Standard paper feed tray D Automatic adjustment of the paper width sensor Set paper of A3 width (297 mm) and A6 width (105 mm), and

register the paper sizes.

0 0

8.4.2 Feed tray 1 D Automatic adjustment of the paper width sensor Set paper of A3 width (297 mm) and B5 width (182 mm), and

register the paper sizes.

0 0

8.4.3 Feed tray 2

8.5 Image adjustment

8.5.1 Head adjustment8.5.1.1.11 - 48 Power supply D Used to set the head drive voltage. Setting range: 10.00 to 30.00 V Setting increment: 0.1 V Default: Set at the factory for each head.

0 0

8.5.1.2.1-48 Corrective power supply D Adjust the print density on each print head. Setting range: 10.00 to 30.00 V Setting increment: 0.1 V Default: Set at the factory for each head.

0 0

8.5.1.3.1-48 AL type D Used to set the AL type (acoustic length). Setting range: 0 to +5 Setting increment: 1 Default: Set at the factory for each head.

0 0

8.5.1.4.1-4 Horizontal offset D Used to set the horizontal offset for the CMY head with respect tothe K head.

Setting range: -1500 to +1500 Setting increment: 1 Default: Set at the factory for each head.

0 0

8.5.1.5.1-20 Horizontal overlap D Used to set the horizontal overlap for each head. Setting range: 0 to +2000 Setting increment: 1 Default: Set at the factory for each head.

0 0

8.5.1.7.1-48 Vertical position D Used to set the head vertical direction. Setting range: -1000 to +1000 Setting increment: 1 Default: Set at the factory for each head.

0 0

8.5.2 Side mask adjustment

8.5.2.1.1-8.5.2.1.8 Adjusting the CCD position

D Used to adjust the detection position of the CCD sensor for thepaper side edge detection and the ink ejection position.

Setting range: -100 to +100 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default:

K Right -> 0.5, K Left -> 0.5C Right -> 0.5, C Left -> 0.5M Right -> 0.5, M Left -> 0.5Y Right -> 0.5, Y Left -> 0.5

0 0

8.5.2.2.1-8.5.2.2.2 Adjusting the amount of mask

D Adjusts the masking amount. Setting range: 0 to 20.0 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default: 0.5 mm

0 0

8.5.2.3 Side registration offset D Adjusts the central positions of paper and image. Setting range: -20.0 to 20.0 mm Setting increment: 1.0 mm Default: 0.0 mm

0 0

8.5.2.4.1 CCD Gain Adjustment (left) D Adjusts gain of CCD output values. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting increment: 1 Default: 55

0 0

8.5.2.4.2 CCD Gain Adjustment (right) D Adjusts gain of CCD output values. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting increment: 1 Default: 80

0 0

8.5.2.5.1 CCD Offset Adjustment (left) D Offsets CCD output values. Setting range: 0 to 255 Setting increment: 1 Default: 0

0 0

8.5.2.5.2 CCD Offset Adjustment (right) D Offsets CCD output values. Setting range: 0 to 255

Setting increment: 1 Default: 0

0 0




Test mode

8.5.2.6.1 Image Center Adjustment(Standard Feed Tray)

D Adjusts the image center position on the paper when the Sideregistration CCD cannot detect the paper width (for the papersfrom standard feed tray).

Range : -10 to +10mm Setting increment: 0.1mm Default : 0.0mm

0 x

8.5.2.6.2 Image Center Adjustment(Tray 1)

D Adjusts the image center position on the paper when the Sideregistration CCD cannot detect the paper width (for the papersfrom Tray 1).


0 x

8.5.2.6.3 Image Center Adjustment(Tray 2)

D Adjusts the image center position on the paper when the Sideregistration CCD cannot detect the paper width (for the papersfrom Tray 2).


0 x

8.5.2.7.1 Image Mask Adj. LEFT D Adjusts the image printing side mask posit ion (left) when theSide registration CCD cannot detect the paper width.

Range : 0.0 mm to 25.5 mm Setting increment: 0.5mm

Default : 10.0mm

0 x

8.5.2.7.2 Image Mask Adj. RIGHT D Adjusts the image printing side mask position (right) when theSide registration CCD cannot detect the paper width.

Range : 0.0 mm to 25.5 mm Setting increment: 0.5mm Default : 10.0mm

0 x

8.5.3 Top edge position adjustment D Used to set the ink ejection start timing after the detection of theleading edge of the paper by the top edge sensor. Setting range: -80 to +20 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default: 0.5 mm

0 0

8.5.4 End mask adjustment Adjusts masking amount of the tail end of the paper This menu is to compensate the paper edge detection devia-

tion due to the change in the masking value in the trailing edgecaused by the change in the leading edge printing position.

Setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default: 0.0 mm

0 0

8.5.5 Image length adjustment D Use to set the image length. Setting length: 98.0% to 105.0% Setting increment: 0.1% Default: 100%

0 0

8.5.6 Adjustment management

8.5.6.1 Save Adj. Config. D Saves the adjustment parameters in the removable NVRAMonto the ORIP PCB as a backup.

0 0

8.5.6.2 Restore Adj. Config. D Rewrites the adjustment parameters in the removal NVRAMwith the backed-up data saved on the ORIP PCB.

0 0

8.5.7 Top edge sensor adjustment8.5.7.1 Top edge sensor top timing D Adjusts the top edge detection timing of top edge sensor 1 to

that of top edge sensor 2. Setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default: 0.0 mm

0 x

8.5.7.2 Top edge sensor bottom timing D Adjusts the bottom edge detection timing of top edge sensor 1to that of top edge sensor 2.

Setting range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default: 0.0 mm

0 x

8.5.7.3 Top edge sensor mode D Selection of the top edge sensors from 2 selections.One [Auto] is which the machine automatically chooses the datafrom either the top edge sensor 1 or 2.The other is [Top edge sensor 1 - fixed] in which the top edgesensor 1 becomes active. Setting : Auto / Top edge sensor 1

Default: Auto

0 x

8.6 Maintenance System Adjustment




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

8.6.2 Vacuum Scanning Start Position D Adjusts the vacuuming start position of the vacuum nozzle. Setting range: 6.0 to 16.0 mm Setting increment: 0.5 mm Default: 11.0 mm

0 0

8.6.3 Vacuum Scanning End Position D Adjusts the vacuuming end position of the vacuum nozzle. Setting range: 70.0 to 90.0 mm Setting increment: 0.5 mm Default: 80.0 mm

0 0

8.6.5 BP Vacuum Height Adjustment D Adjusts the position (height) of the BP during vacuum operations. Setting range: -2.0 to 3.0 mm Setting increment: 0.1 mm Default: 1.5 mm

0 0

8.7 Jam check 8.7.1 Registration IN jam detection D Change of the jam detection time of the registration sensor (IN)

Setting item: 0 mm/+5 mm/+10 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.7.2 Registration OUT jam detection D Change of the jam detection time of the registration sensor (OUT) Setting item: 0 mm/+5 mm/+10 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.7.3 Exit IN jam detection D Change of the jam detection time of the exit sensor (IN) Setting item: 0 mm/+5 mm/+10 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.7.4 Exit OUT jam detection D Change of the jam detection time of the exit sensor (OUT) Setting item: 0 mm/+5 mm/+10 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.8 MTF feeder unit8.8.1 CL3 OFF delay adjustment D Used to adjust the OFF delay time of transfer clutch 3.

Setting item: 0 ms, 16 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 35 ms, 40 ms Default: 30 ms

0 0

8.8.2 Multiple feed light intensity setting D Feed the specified paper, take out the paper, then press theright key to make the setting.

0 0

8.8.3 Light intensity check (plain paper) C Displays the standard output A/D value (8-bit data) of the multi-ple feed sensor and the currently set reference light intensity(D/A value) of the multiple feed sensor for confirmation.

0 0

8.8.4 Light intensity check (thick paper) C Displays the thick paper output A/D value (8-bit data) of themultiple feed sensor and the currently set reference light inten-

sity (D/A value) of the multiple feed sensor for confirmation.

0 0

8.9 Auto exit tray adjustment

8.9.1 Paper guide position correction D Used to set the offset amount of the exit fence HP position for theauto fence function. Setting range: 0 mm to +/– 5.0 mm (+ for extending) Setting increment: 1 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.9.2 Paper stopper position correction D Used to set the offset amount of the stopper HP position for theauto fence function. Setting range: 0 mm to +/– 5.0 mm (+ for extending) Setting increment: 1 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.9.3 Postcard paper guide position correc-tion

D Used to set the offset amount for moving the exit fences to thepostcard position in the auto fence function. Setting range: 0 mm to +/– 5.0 mm (+ for extending) Setting increment: 1 mm Default: 0 mm

0 0

8.9.4 Postcard paper stopper position cor-rection

D Used to set the offset amount for moving the stopper to the post-card position in the auto fence function. Setting range: 0 mm to +/– 5.0 mm (+ for extending) Setting increment: 1 mm

0 0

8.10 Finiser test8.10.1 Drive check The HC-Finisher test mode must be entered from here.

Menu 12 [Menu number input] cannot be used. Refer to the Finisher test mode list for details. After changing the data setting on the Finisher, the new setting

is not applied until the power is turned OFF and then ON.

0 08.10.2 Sensor / Motor

8.10.3 Data check8.10.4 Data setting

9. Test Pattern Print

9.1 Print U Reflects the setting entered in the same hierarchical level, and

conducts print test.




Test mode

9.2 Tray Selection D Setting for print test. 0 09.3 Feed tray Selection9.4 RES-DROPS

9.5 Simplex/Duplex9.6 Copy Number 9.7 Test Pattern Prints Finishing Mode

Selections :<0>: No finisher function / Top tray

1 : 2-punches / Top tray 2 : 4-punches / Top tray 3 : Staple on front 1 position / Stacker tray 4 : Staple on center 2 positions / Stacker tray 5 : Staple on rear 1 position / Stacker tray 6 : Booklet no stapling / Booklet tray 7 : Booklet with stapling / Booklet tray 8 : Two folding / Booklet tray 9 : Inner 3 fold / Folder tray (Option Unit)10 : Outer 3 fold / Folder tray (Option Unit)11 : Z-folding (Option Unit)

0 0

12. Menu no. input 0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-2.Menu items related to Finisher

Enter the test mode for the FINISHER from menu number 8.10 Finisher Test of the HC5000/HC5500

operation panel key in SE-Mode.

Drive checking-related

No. Menu item Type Description12-001 DEC TRANSPORT MOT ON/OFF M Drives the I/F Module Transport Roll .12-005 PUNCHER MOT 2HOLE HOME

MOVEM Moves the 2/4-hole Puncher to the home position.

12-006 PUNCHER MOT 3HOLE HOMEMOVE

M Moves the 3-hole Puncher to the home position.

12-007 PUNCHER MOT 2HOLE ON/OFF M Reciprocates the 2/4-hole Puncher.12-008 PUNCHER MOT 3HOLE ON/OFF M Reciprocates the 3-hole Puncher.12-009 PUNCHER MOVE MOT HIGH

FRONT ON/OFFM Moves the Puncher Unit to the front at high speed.

12-010 PUNCHER MOVE MOT HIGH REARON/OFF

M Moves the Puncher Unit to the rear at high speed.

12-011 PUNCHER MOVE MOT LOWFRONT ON/OFF

M Moves the Puncher Unit to the front at low speed.

12-012 PUNCHER MOVE MOT LOW REARON/OFF M Moves the Puncher Unit to the rear at low speed.

12-013 FIN TRANSPORT MOT HIGH FOR-WARD ON/OFF

M Drives the Fin Xport Roll at 100 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-014 FIN TRANSPORT MOT LOW FOR-WARD ON/OFF

M Drives the Fin Xport Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-015 FIN TRANSPORT MOT LOWREVERSE ON/OFF

M Drives the Fin Xport Roll at 385 mm/s in reverse rotation.

12-019 COMPILE EXIT MOT HIGH FOR-WARD ON/OFF

M Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 1000 mm/s in forwardrotation.

12-020 COMPILE EXIT MOT MID FOR-WARD ON/OFF


12-021 COMPILE EXIT MOT LOW FOR-WARD ON/OFF


12-022 COMPILE EXIT MOT HIGHREVERSE ON/OFF

M Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 1000 mm/s in reverserotation.

12-023 COMPILE EXIT MOT LOWREVERSE ON/OFF

M Drives the Compile Exit/Buffer Roll at 385 mm/s in reverserotation.

12-024 TRANSPORT GATE SOL PUSH M Switches the paper path to the buffer path.

12-025 TRANSPORT GATE SOL PULL M Switches the paper path to the Top Tray.12-026 PUNCHER MOVE CLUTCH ON/OFF M Switches between Puncher moving operation and Sensor

moving operations.12-027 PADDLE MOT ON/OFF M Drives the Compile Paddle/Sub Paddle.12-028 TAMPER MOT HIGH FRONT ON/

OFFM Drives the Tamper toward the front at 3000 pps.

12-029 TAMPER MOT LOW FRONT ON/OFF

M Drives the Tamper toward the front at 1000 pps.

12-030 TAMPER MOT HIGH REAR ON/OFF M Drives the Tamper toward the rear at 3000 pps.

12-031 TAMPER MOT LOW REAR ON/OFF M Drives the Tamper toward the rear at 1000 pps.12-032 END WALL MOT OPEN ON/OFF M Opens/closes the End Wall.12-034 EJECT MOT 1st FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-035 EJECT MOT 2nd FORWARD ON/OFF

M Drives the Eject Roll at 610 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-036 EJECT MOT 3rd FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 404 mm/s in forward rotation.12-037 EJECT MOT 4th FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 320 mm/s in forward rotation.12-038 EJECT MOT 5th FORWARD ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 285 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-039 EJECT MOT 1st REVERSE ON/OFF M Drives the Eject Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.12-040 EJECT CLAMP MOT UP M Drives the Eject Roll release operation.12-041 EJECT CLAMP MOT DOWN M Drives the Eject Roll Nip.

12-042 SHELF MOTOR EJECT M Extends the Shelf.12-043 SHELF MOTOR STORAGE M Retracts the Shelf.

12-046 STAPLE MOT HIGH FRONT ON/OFF M Moves the staple positions toward the front at 110 pps.

12-047 STAPLE MOT LOW FRONT ON/OFF M Moves the staple positions toward the front at 530 pps.12-048 STAPLE MOT HIGH REAR ON/OFF M Moves the staple positions toward the rear at 1000 pps.

12-049 STAPLE MOT LOW REAR ON/OFF M Moves the staple positions toward the rear at 530 pps.



Test mode

12-051 COMPILE PADDLE SOL DOWN M Lowers the Compile Paddle.12-052 SUB PADDLE SOL UP M Raises the Sub Paddle.12-053 SUB PADDLE SOL DOWN M Lowers the Sub Paddle.

12-054 STACKER FLAPPER MOT UP M Raises the Stacker Flapper.12-055 STACKER FLAPPER MOT DOWN M Lowers the Stacker Flapper.12-056 SET CLAMP SOL ON/OFF M Raises/lowers the Set Clamp.

12-058 PADDLE SUPPORT CLUTCH ON/

OFF

M Raises/lowers the Set Paddle.

12-059 ELEVATOR MOT UP M Raises the Stacker.12-060 ELEVATOR MOT DOWN M Lowers the Stacker.12-062 STACKER OFFSET MOT REAR M Drives the Stacker offset front/rear operation.

12-066 SCT EXIT MOT MID FORWARD ON/OFF

M Drives the SCT Exit Roll at 800 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-067 SCT EXIT MOT LOW FORWARDON/OFF


12-068 SCT EXIT MOT LOW REVERSE ON/OFF


12-069 ELEVATOR MOT UP 2 M Raises the Stacker until the Stack Height Sensor activates.12-070 ELEVATOR MOT DOWN 2 M Lowers the Stacker until the Stack Height Sensor activates.12-071 TAMPER MOT MID FRONT ON/OFF M Drives the Tamper toward the front at 2000 pps.

12-072 TAMPER MOT MID REAR ON/OFF M Drives the Tamper toward the rear at 2000 pps.

12-073 EJECT MOT Top Speed FORWARDON/OFF

M Drives the Eject Roll at 1000 mm/s in forward rotation.

12-074 EJECT MOT Top Speed REVERSEON/OFF

M Drives the Eject Roll at 1000 mm/s in reverse rotation.

13-001 INTERPOSER FEED MOT ON/OFF M Drives the Feed Roll .

13-002 INTERPOSER TRAY MOT UP M Raises the tray.13-003 INTERPOSER TRAY MOT DOWN M Lowers the tray.

13-004 INTERPOSER NUDGER SOL ON/OFF

M Lifts/lowers the Nudger Roll.

13-005 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT HION/OFF

M Drives the Booklet IN Roll at 800 mm/s.

13-006 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT MIDON/OFF


13-007 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOT LOW

ON/OFF


13-008 BOOKLET FOLDER ROLL MOTFORWARD ON/OFF

M Drives the Folder Roll in forward rotation.

13-009 BOOKLET FOLDER ROLL MOTREVERSE ON/OFF

M Drives the Folder Roll in reverse rotation.

13-010 BOOKLET KNIFE CLUTCH ON/OFF(This operates the Booklet KnifeFlapper Solenoid.)

M Turns the Knife Clutch ON/OFF (This operates the Booklet KnifeFlapper Solenoid.)

13-011 BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT LOWDOWN

M Drives the Booklet End Guide downward at 450 pps.

13-013 BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT HIDOWN

M Drives the Booklet End Guide downward at 1002 pps.

13-014 BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT LOWUP

M Drives the Booklet End Guide upward at 450 pps.

13-016 BOOKLET ENDGUIDE MOT HI UP M Drives the Booklet End Guide upward at 1102 pps.13-017 BOOKLET STAPLE ON M Executes stapling for the Booklet Staple F/R.

13-020 TRAY BELT DRIVE MOTOR ON/OFF M Drives the Tray Belt.13-021 BOOKLET PADDLE MOT ON/OFF M Rotates the Booklet Paddle.

13-024 BOOKLET GATE SOL PUSH M Switches the paper path to the booklet path.13-025 BOOKLET GATE SOL PULL M Switches the paper path to the stacker path.

13-026 FOLDER DRIVE MOT2 ON/OFF M Drives the Transport Roll and Folding Rol l.13-027 FOLDER DRIVE MOT1 ON/OFF M Drives the Folder internal transport.13-028 FOLDER ENTRANCE MOT HI ON/

OFFM Drives the Folder upper transport.

13-029 ENDGUIDE MOT 1 UP ON/OFF M Raises the first fold stopper position.13-030 ENDGUIDE MOT 1 DOWN ON/OFF M Lowers the second fold stopper posit ion.13-031 ENDGUIDE MOT 2 UP ON/OFF M Raises the second fold stopper position.

13-032 ENDGUIDE MOT 2 DOWN ON/OFF M Lowers the third fold stopper position.

13-033 FOLDER GATE SOL 1 PUSH M Switches the paper path to the top path.13-034 FOLDER GATE SOL 1 PULL M Switches the paper path to the folder path.

No. Menu item Type Description



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Sensor & Switch Monitor-related

13-035 FOLDER ENTRANCE MOT LOWON/OFF

M Drives the Folder upper transport.

13-036 FOLDER GATE SOL 2 PUSH M Switches the paper path to the Letter Tray.13-037 FOLDER GATE SOL 2 PULL M Switches the paper path to the folder path.13-040 INTERPOSER T/P ROLL CLUTCH

ON/OFFM Turns the Interposer Transport Roll Clutch ON/OFF.

13-043 ENV TRAY LED 1 M Turns the Envelope Tray LED 1 ON/OFF.

13-044 FOLDER C SOL ON/OFF M Turns the Folder Clamp Solenoid ON/OFF.13-045 ENV TRAY LOCK SOL OPEN M Opens the Envelope Tray Lock.

13-046 ENV TRAY LOCK SOL CLOSE M Closes the Envelope Tray Lock.13-047 NIP RELEASE SOL ON/OFF M Turns the Folder Nip Release Solenoid ON/OFF.13-048 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F REAR

ON/OFF 1M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the rear (tamping) at 985

pps.

13-049 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F REARON/OFF 2

M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the rear (tamping) at 645pps + F97s.


M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the rear (tamping) at 465pps.


M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the rear (tamping) at 235pps.

13-052 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F FRONTON/OFF 1

M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the front (tamping) at 985pps.

13-053 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F FRONTON/OFF 2 M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the front (tamping) at 645pps.13-054 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F FRONT

ON/OFF 3M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the front (tamping) at 465

pps.

13-055 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT F FRONTON/OFF 4

M Drives the Booklet Tamper F toward the front (tamping) at 235pps.

13-056 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT R FRONTON/OFF 1

M Drives the Booklet Tamper R toward the front (tamping) at 985pps.







13-060 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT R REARON/OFF 1 M Drives the Booklet Tamper R toward the rear (tamping) at 985pps.

13-061 BOOKLET TAMPER MOT R REARON/OFF 2

M Drives the Booklet Tamper R toward the rear (tamping) at 645pps.





310-001 HC TRANSFER UNIT TRANSPORTMOT ON/OFF

M Drives the Transport Motor of the HC Transfer Unit at 389 mm/s.

310-002 HC TRANSFER UNIT SUCTION FANON/OFF

M Drives the Suction Fan in the HC Transfer Unit.

311-001 TRANSFER MOTOR, PAPER EJEC-TION MOTOR & SUCTION FAN.

M Drives the motors and fan.

311-002 OFFSET MOTOR M Drives the motor for one movement.311-003 TRAY ELEVATOR MOTOR M Drives the motor to make one initial movement.

311-004 TRAY ELEVATOR MOTOR M Drives the motor to bring the offset tray all the way down.311-005 UNIT INITIAL MOVEMENT M Drives the motors to make one machine initial movement.

311-006 CONTINUOUS RUNNING MOVE-MENT

M Papers size: A4R (A4-LEF). Offset tray makes normal operation down-up movement for

every 2 sheets received. Offset tray makes one offset movement after every 10 sheets. The test mode stops after 50 sheets are received.


12-100 DEC IN SNR S Paper detection by the Dec IN Sensor

12-101 DEC OUT SNR S Paper detection by the Dec OUT Sensor 12-102 DEC HOME SNR S Detection of home position of Decurler 12-105 PUNCH OUT SNR S Paper detection by the Punch OUT Sensor




Test mode

12-107 TOP TRAY EXIT SNR S Paper detection by the Top Tray Exit Sensor 12-108 BUFFER PATH SNR S Paper detection by the Buffer Path Sensor 12-109 SIDE REGI SNR S Paper detection by the Side Regi. Sensor

12-110 PUNCH MOT. SNR S Detection of Punch Motor rotation12-111 PUNCH MOVE HOME SNR S Detection of home position of Puncher Move12-112 PUNCH MOVE HOME SNR(B5) S Detection of home position of Puncher Move (B5)

12-113 PUNCH MOVE HOME

SNR(3LETER)

S Detection of home position of Puncher Move (3 Letter)

12-114 PUNCH HOME SNR S Detection of Puncher home position12-115 PUNCH FRONT SNR S Detection of Puncher home position12-116 PUNCH HOLE SELECT SNR S Detection of Puncher home position

12-117 SIDE REGI HOME SNR S Detection of home position of Side Regi. Home Sensor 12-118 PUNCH BOX SET SNR S Detection of setting for Punch Box

12-119 TOP TRAY FULL SNR S Detection of full Top Tray12-121 COMPILE TRAY NO PAPER SNR S Paper detection by the Compile Tray NO Paper Sensor

12-123 SUB PADDLE HOME SNR S Detection of home position of Sub Paddle12-124 STAPLE 50PIN SNR S Detection of setting for the Staple 50 Pin12-125 TAMPER HOME SNR S Detection of Tamper home position

12-126 END WALL HOME SNR S Detection of End Wall home (close) position12-127 END WALL OPEN SNR S Detection of End Wall open position

12-128 SHELF HOME SNR S Detection of Shelf home (close) position12-130 STAPLE CENTER POSITION SNR S Detection of Stapler center position12-131 STAPLE MOVE HOME SNR S Detection of Stapler Move home position

12-132 STACK HEIGHT SNR 2 S Detection of paper base section by Stack Height Sensor 12-133 LOW STAPLE SNR S Detection of absence of staples12-134 SELF PRIMING SNR S Detection of Stapler feed ready status

12-135 STAPLE HOME SNR S Detection of home position of Stapler Head (Staple Open)12-136 MANUAL DEC SW 3 S Detection of pressure on Manual Dec SW312-137 EJECT UP SNR S Detection of Eject Unit raised position

12-138 EJECT SNR S Paper detection by the Eject Sensor 12-139 STACKER NO PAPER SNR S Paper detection by the Stacker NO Paper Sensor

12-140 STACKER HIGHT SNR S Detection of the top surface of stacked paper 12-141 TRAY HIGHT SNR LOWER S Detection of paper removal during print job12-142 MIX STACK SNR S Detection of mix position

12-143 HALF STACK SNR S Detection of half position12-144 FULL STACK SNR S Detection of full position12-145 STACK HEIGHT SNR 3 S Detection of presence of paper

12-146 STACKER REAR POSITION SNR S Detection of Stacker position12-148 LOWER LIMIT SWITCH S Detection of Stacker Tray lower-limit position

12-149 STACKER SAFTY SWITCH S Detection of obstructing items12-150 I/F MODULE FRONT DOOR SW S Detection of open condition

12-154 FINISHER FRONT DOOR SW S Detection of open condition12-155 FOLDER ENV TRAY OPEN SW S Detection of switch operation12-156 FOLDER ENV TRAY SW S Detection of presence/absence of tray

13-100 INTERPOSER TOP COVER SW S Detection of 24 V shutdown13-101 KNIFE HOME SNR S Detection of Booklet Knife home position

13-102 BOOKLET COMPILE NO PAPERSNR

S Paper detection by the Booklet Compile NO Sensor

13-103 BOOKLET FOLDER ROLL EXIT SNR S Paper detection by the Booklet Folder Roll Exit Sensor 13-104 BOOKLET DRAWER SET SNR S Detection of Booklet Drawer set status13-105 BOOKLET STAPLER READY S Detection of Booklet Stapler ready status

13-106 BOOKLET STAPLER ERROR S Detection of Booklet Stapler error status13-107 BOOKLET LOW STAPLE F SW S Detection of low booklet staple levels (Stapler on front side)13-108 BOOKLET LOW STAPLE R SW S Detection of low booklet staple levels (Stapler on rear side)

13-109 FEED OUT SNR S Paper detection by the Feed OUT Sensor 13-110 INTERPOSER PAPER SNR S Paper detection by the Interposer Paper Sensor 13-111 LEVEL UP SNR S Detection of Interposer raised position

13-112 BOOKLET TRAY BELT SW S Detection of switch operation13-114 LENGTH SNR S Paper detection

13-115 FOLDER ENTRANCE SNR C S Paper detection13-119 FOLDER PATH SNR 2 S Paper detection

13-120 FOLDER PATH SNR 3 S Paper detection13-121 ENDGUIDE HOME SNR 1 S Detection of home position13-122 ENDGUIDE HOME SNR 2 S Detection of home position




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Data checking-related

Data sett ing-related

13-125 FOLDER PATH SNR 1 S Paper detection13-126 FOLDER PATH SNR 4 S Paper detection13-130 PUNCHER 3 HOLE DETECT 3 S Detection of Puncher Unit connection

13-131 FOLDER DETECT S Detection of Folder Unit connection13-132 BOOKLET DETECT S Detection of Booklet Unit connection13-133 INTERPOSER DETECT S Detection of Interposer Unit connection

13-134 BOOKLET TAMPER HOME SNR F S Detection of home position

13-135 BOOKLET IN SNR S Paper detection by the Booklet IN Sensor 13-136 BOOKLET TAMPER HOME SNR R S Detection of home position

13-137 BOOKLET END GUIDE HOME SNR S Detection of home position13-139 BOOKLET NO PAPER SNR S Paper detection by the Booklet NO Paper Sensor 13-140 KNIFE FOLDING SNR S Detection of folding position of Booklet Knife

13-141 FOLDER EXIT SNR C S Paper detection310-101 HC TRANSFER UNIT IN SNR S Paper detection

310-102 HC TRANSFER UNIT OUT SNR S Paper detection310-103 HC TRANSFER UNIT SAFETY SW S Detection of Transfer Unit Cover open status311-101 PAPER IN SENSOR S Sensor check

311-102 PAPER OUT SENSOR S Sensor check311-103 OFFSET HP SENSOR S Sensor check

311-104 LOWER LIMIT SENSOR S Sensor check311-105 TOP PAPER DETECTION SENSOR S Sensor check

311-106 DOOR SWITCH S Switch check311-107 DOCKING SWITCH S Switch check311-108 DIP-SW 1 S Switch check

311-109 DIP-SW 2 S Switch check311-110 DIP-SW 3 S Switch check


13-113 SIZE SNR C Returns the value of the Paper Size Sensor (VR) of the CoverTray.

No. Menu item Type Description (default indicated in < >)

310-301 HC TRANSFER UNIT SPEED ADJUSTMENT

D Adjusts the speed of the HC Transfer Unit (setting of ratio toHC5000 transport speed). Setting range: 85% to 115% < 105 >

310-901 SFX FIN NV READ D Reads NV data of the Finisher and saves it to the HC Control PCBFRAM only if the parameter is set to "43534."* A read operation always returns a "0." Setting range: 0 to 65535 < 0 >

310-931 SFX FIN NVM INITIALIZE Initializes the NV data in the SFX Finisher only if the parameter isset to "05674."* A read operation always returns a "0." Setting range: 0 to 65535 < 0 >

310-951 SFX FIN NV WRITE D Writes NV data of the Finisher saved in the HC Control PCB

FRAM to the NV in the Finisher only if the parameter is set to"50315."* A write operation always returns a "0." Setting range: 0 to 65535 < 0 >

311-201 PAPER EJECTION MOTOR SPEED D Speed ratio between HC5500 and Auto Stacker. Adjustable range: 90% - 110% Default setting: 100%

763-201 THICK PAPER 1 UNSTAPLE SETEJECT LIMIT COUNT 1

D Sets the number of sheets for unstaple set eject for thick paper 1with length of 216 mm or less.Paper is automatically ejected when (1) the number of sheetsexceeds the maximum staple paper count (set in 763-245 or 763-353) or when (2) the number of sheets set with this menu item areoutput to the Compiler in a job not requiring stapling. Setting range: 2 to 25 < 10 >




Test mode

763-202 THICK PAPER 1 UNSTAPLE SETEJECT LIMIT COUNT 2

D Sets the number of sheets for unstaple set eject for thick paper 1with length of greater than 216 mm.Paper is automatically ejected when (1) the number of sheetsexceeds the maximum staple paper count (set in 763-245 or 763-353) or when (2) the number of sheets set with this menu item areoutput to the Compiler in a job not requiring stapling. Setting range: 2 to 25 < 10 >

763-207 SIZE SNR ANALOG MIN VALUE D Stores the size sensor analog minimum value of Interposer duringthe execution of 763-308.* This menu is for reference purpose only. Setting range: 0 to 512 < 125 >

763-208 SIZE SNR ANALOG MAX VALUE D Stores the size sensor analog maximum value of Interposer duringthe execution of 763-309.* This menu is for reference purpose only. Setting range: 0 to 512 < 125 >

763-211 UNSTAPLE SET EJECT LIMITCOUNT 1

D Sets the number of sheets for unstaple set eject for paper oflengths 216 mm or less.Output paper is automatically ejected when the number ofdischarged sheets exceeds the maximum staple count set in 763-245 or 763-353, or when paper sheets specified by the value(number of sheets) set with this menu item are output to theCompiler during a print job not requiring stapling.

Setting range: 2 to 50 < 25 >763-213 PUNCH SIDE REGI. ADJUSTMENT1

D Adjustment of punch hole position in the side regi. direction forpaper 297 mm wide.Increasing the value moves the punch position to the rear.Decreasing the value moves the punch position to the front. Setting range: 10 to 170 pulses (1 pulse = 0.125 mm) < 97 >

763-214 PUNCH SIDE REGI. ADJUSTMENT2

D Adjustment of punch hole position in the side regi. direction for thefollowing paper sizes:203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 285 mm in the case of 2/3-hole Puncher,and 216 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 285 mm in the case of 2/4-holePuncher.Increasing the value moves the punch position to the rear.Decreasing the value moves the punch position to the front. Setting range: 10 to 170 pulses (1 pulse = 0.125 mm) < 85 >

763-215 PUNCH SIDE REGI. ADJUSTMENT

3

D Adjustment of punch hole position in the side regi. direction for the

following paper size:203 mm < paper width ≤ 216 mm in the case of 2/4-hole Puncher.Increasing the value moves the punch position to the rear.Decreasing the value moves the punch position to the front. Setting range: 10 to 170 pulses (1 pulse = 0.125 mm) < 86 >

763-218 STACKER TRAY DESCENT ADJUSTMENT

D Enables/disables Stacker Tray descent immediately before theFinisher stops during Stacker eject. Setting range:

<0> : Enabled1 : Disabled

763-219 PUNCH REVERSE AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT 1

D Adjustment of amount of motor reverse skew correction loop inPunch mode for paper of lengths 216 mm or less.This function is not available for the following paper sizes:203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 223 mm in the case of 2/3-hole Puncher,and 216 mm < paper width ≤ 235 mm in the case of 2/4-holePuncher. Setting range: 8 to 68 pulses (1 pulse = 0.52 mm) < 42, or 38 in

the case of 3 holes >

763-220 PUNCH DUST FULL DETECTIONCOUNT

D Number of punch dust full detections. Setting range: 0 to 65535 < 10000 >

763-221 STAPLE LIMIT COUNT (100 sheets) D Limits the number of stapled sheets for a 100-sheet cartridge. Setting range: 50 to 150 sheets < 100 >

763-223 REAR STAPLE POSITION ADJUST-MENT

D Adjustment of rear stapling position (excluding A4 LEF and A3SEF). Setting range: 50 to 150 pulses (1 pulse = 0.157 mm) < 100 >

763-224 UNSTAPLE SET EJECT LIMITCOUNT 2

D Changes the unstaple set eject count for paper of lengths greaterthan 216 mm.Output paper is automatically ejected when the number of dis-charged sheets exceeds the maximum staple count set in 763-245

or 763-353, or when paper sheets specified by the value (numberof sheets) set with this menu item are output to the Compiler dur-ing a print job not requiring stapling.




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

763-225 TAMPING HOME POSITION ADJUSTMENT

D Adjustment of the home position of the Tamper for paperalignment. Reduce the value if the paper pressing force isexcessive during paper alignment. (The home position movestoward the rear.) Setting range: 0 to 52 < 26 >

763-227 Eject Select D Unstaple eject operation mode. Setting range:

<0> : Set eject1 : Sheet eject

763-229 REAR STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT (A4 LEF, A3 SEF)

D Adjustment of rear stapling position (A4 LEF, A3 SEF).Increasing the value moves the stapling position toward the rear.Decreasing the value moves the stapling position toward the front. Setting range: 50 to 150 sheets < 100 >

763-231 BOOKLET TRAY BELT AUTO FEEDOPERATION SETTING

D Sets the Booklet Tray Belt automatic feed operation during thecycle down. Setting range:

0 : Auto feed disabled<1> : Auto feed enabled

763-232 BOOKLET COMPILE POSITION → FOLD POSITION CORRECTION (B4

AND LARGER)

D Correction of amount of movement to the folding position in thelead direction of paper (when no stapling is performed) in compileposition → folding position (B4 and larger). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-233 BOOKLET COMPILE POSITION → FOLD POSITION CORRECTION(SMALLER THAN B4)

D Correction of amount of movement to the folding position in thelead direction of paper (when no stapling is performed) in compileposition → folding position (smaller than B4). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-236 COMPILE PADDLE UP SETTINGNUMBER

D Sets the number of sheets for the Compile Paddle lifting operation. Setting range: 10 to 90 sheets < 50 >

763-237 SUB PADDLE UP SETTINGNUMBER

D Sets the number of sheets for the Sub Paddle lifting operation. Setting range: 10 to 90 sheets < 50 >

763-238 SINGLE STAPLE STACK SET LIMITCOUNT

D Sets the maximum number of single stapled sets stackable on theStacker. When the number of stapled sets with single-locationstaples reaches the set number, a full status is signaled regardlessof the number of stapled sheets. Setting range: 1 to 255 sheets < 200 >

763-240 DUAL STAPLE STACK SET LIMITCOUNT

D Sets the maximum number of dual stapled sets stackable on theStacker. When the number of stapled sets with two-locationstaples reaches the set number, a full status is signaled regardlessof the number of stapled sheets. Setting range: 1 to 255 sheets < 200 >

763-242 PUNCH REVERSE AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT 2

D Adjustment of amount of motor reverse skew correction loop inPunch mode for paper of lengths greater than 216 mm.This function is not available for the following paper sizes:203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 223 mm in the case of 2/3-hole puncher,and 216 mm < paper width ≤ 235 mm in the case of 2/4-holepuncher. Setting range: 8 to 68 pulses (1 pulse = 0.52 mm) < 34, or 30 in

the case of 3 holes >763-244 BUFFER SHEET REVERSE

AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT (NONPUNCH MODE)

D Adjustment of overlap for buffer sheets and setting of value forReverse Pulse + NVM for each paper size. Setting range: 0 to 80 pulses (1 pulse = 0.52 mm) < 42 >

763-245 LARGE SIZE MAX STAPLING D Maximum number of stapled sheets for large paper sizes (paperlength > 216 mm and paper width > 216 mm, or paper length > 297mm). Setting range: 1 to 200 pulses < 65 >

763-246 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLE FOLDPOSITION ADJUSTMENT (B4S ANDLARGER)

D Adjustment of folding position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stablemode. (B4S and larger) Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-247 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLE FOLDPOSITION ADJUSTMENT(SMALLER THAN B4S)

D Adjustment of folding position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stablemode. (Smaller than B4S) Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-248 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT AMOUNT(B4S AND LARGER)

D Adjustment of stapling position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stablemode. (B4S and larger) Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-249 BOOKLET 2-SHEET STAPLEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT AMOUNT(SMALLER THAN B4S)

D Adjustment of stapling position in 2-sheet folding in Booklet Stablemode. (Smaller than B4S) Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-251 MAX BOOKLET STAPLING D Maximum number of folding stapled sheets in Booklet mode. Setting range: 2 to 25 sheets < 15 >




Test mode

763-252 MAX BOOKLET UNSTAPLING D Maximum number of folding unstapled sheets in Booklet mode. Setting range: 1 to 15 sheets < 5 >

763-253 BOOKLET COMPILE POSITION → FOLD POSITION SHEET COUNTCORRECTION VALUE 1

D Adjustment of correction value for amount of movement to thefolding position in the lead direction of paper (when no stapling isperformed) in compile position → folding position for specificnumber of sheets. Adjusts the correction value for two-sheetfolding. Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-254 BOOKLET COMPILE POSITION → FOLD POSITION SHEET COUNTCORRECTION VALUE 2

D Adjustment of correction value for amount of movement to thefolding position in the lead direction of paper (when no stapling isperformed) in compile position → folding position for specificnumber of sheets. Adjusts the correction value for three or more-sheet folding. Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-255 STACKER TRAY EJECT Z-FOLD A3S/17S PAPER REDUCTIONNUMBER

D Sets the number of sheets of other paper to be ejected in order tosubtract the number of Z-folded sheets of A3 SEF 11 x 17 SEFpaper discharged on the Stacker Tray. Setting range: 0 to 255 < 100 >

763-256 FOLDING TIMES D Number of forward-reversal operations of the Booklet Folder Rollwhen 10 or more sheets are folded.The number of operations is equal to the sum of the number ofordinary operations (1 time) and this setting value.

(Since this setting specifies the number of additional foldingoperations, setting a "1" results in two folding operations.) Setting range: 0 to 3 < 1 >

763-259 Z-FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT(A3)

D Adjustment of the first Folding Roll position in Z-fold and the paperleading-edge stop position. Setting range: 15 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 50 >

763-260 Z-FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT(11 x 17)


763-261 Z-FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT(B4)


763-264 Z-FOLD POSITION 2 ADJUSTMENT(A3)

D Adjustment of the second Folding Roll position in Z-fold and thepaper leading-edge stop position. Setting range: 15 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 50 >

763-265 Z-FOLD POSITION 2 ADJUSTMENT(11 x 17)


763-266 Z-FOLD POSITION 2 ADJUSTMENT(B4)


763-269 ENV-C FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)

D Adjustment of the Folding Roll position in Env-C fold and the paperleading-edge stop position. Setting range: 15 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.2 mm) < 50 >

763-270 ENV-C FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT (8.5 x 11 SEF)

D Adjustment of the Folding Roll position in Env-C fold and the paperleading-edge stop position. Setting range: 15 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 50 >

763-271 ENV-C FOLD POSITION 2 ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)

D Adjustment of the Folding Roll position in Env-C fold and the paperleading-edge stop position.

Setting range: 15 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 50 >763-272 ENV-C FOLD POSITION 2

ADJUSTMENT (8.5 x 11 SEF)D Adjustment of the Folding Roll position in Env-C fold and the paper

leading-edge stop position. Setting range: 15 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 50 >

763-273 PAPER FEED ADJUSTMENT AMOUNT

D Adjustment of the amount of paper feed (feed distance fromcontact with the end guide to motor stop). Setting range: 0 to 36 pulses (1 pulse = 0.5 mm) < 18 >

763-276 STACKER TRAY EJECT Z-FOLD B4SEF PAPER REDUCTION NUMBER

D Sets the number of sheets of other paper to be ejected in order tosubtract the number of Z-folded sheets of B4 SEF paperdischarged on the Stacker Tray. Setting range: 0 to 255 < 150 >

763-277 Z-FOLD EJECT COUNT LIMITSTACKER TRAY B4 SEF

D Maximum number of B4 SEF Z-folded sheets stackable on theStacker Tray.When the number of Z-folded B4 sheets (B5 landscape after fold-

ing) reaches the number set in this menu item, a full status is sig-naled whether or not paper sheets are stapled. Setting range: 0 to 255 < 20 >




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

763-280 Z-FOLD EJECT COUNT LIMITSTACKER TRAY A3/17 SEF

D Maximum number of B4 SEF Z-folded sheets stackable on theStacker Tray and maximum number of stackable A3 SEF 11 x 17SEF Z-folded sheets.When the number of Z-folded A3 or Ledger sheets (A4 landscapeor Letter-R after folding) reaches the number set in this menu item,a full status is signaled whether or not paper sheets are stapled. Setting range: 0 to 255 < 30 >

763-296 Z-FOLD (A3/11 x 17) PAPER CON-VERSION NUMBER

D Factor used to convert the number of A3/Ledge Z-folded sheets tothe number of unprocessed paper sheets. One sheet of Z-foldedpaper is equal to 10 (default) sheets of unprocessed paper. Setting range: 1 to 20 < 10 >

763-300 PUNCHING NUMBER D Recording of the number of punching operations for detection ofpunch full status. Setting range: 0 to 65535 < 0 >

763-306 AMOUNT OF BOOKLET END GUIDEUP/DOWN FOR MIS-REGI PREVEN-TION

D Sets the amount of extra up/down operation of the End Guide dur-ing output of small booklets to prevent misregistration. Setting range: 30 to 255 < 60 >

763-308 SIZE SNR MIN VALUE ADJUST-MENT

D Adjusts the Interposer size sensor analog minimum value (A4 LEFwidth) by writing a "1," then writes the value to [763-207: SIZESNR ANALOG MIN VALUE]. Be sure to set the Interposer paperguide for A4 LEF. The process takes 5 seconds.

763-309 SIZE SNR MAX VALUE ADJUST-

MENT

D Adjusts the Interposer size sensor analog maximum value (B5

LEF width) by writing a "1," then writes the value to [763-208: SIZESNR ANALOG MAX VALUE]. Be sure to set the Interposer paperguide for A4 LEF. The process takes 5 seconds.

763-314 STACKER EJECT SPEEDCONTROL PAPER LIMIT COUNT(PAPER WIDTH ≤ 216 mm)

D Maximum number of sheets (paper width ≤ 216 mm) for stackereject speed control. When the number set in this menu item isexceeded, the paper ejection speed is reduced to prevent shiftingof paper discharged from the Compiler to the Stacker Tray. Setting range: 1 to 255 < 60 >

763-315 STACKER EJECT SPEEDCONTROL PAPER LIMIT COUNT(PAPER LENGTH > 216 mm)

D Maximum number of sheets (paper width > 216 mm) for stackereject speed control. When the number set in this menu item isexceeded, the paper ejection speed is reduced to prevent shiftingof paper discharged from the Compiler to the Stacker Tray. Setting range: 1 to 255 < 30 >

763-316 ENV-Z FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)

D Correction of the paper leading-edge stop position of the FoldingRoll in Env-Z fold. Setting range: 10 to 90 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 50 >

763-317 ENV-Z FOLD POSITION 1 ADJUSTMENT (Letter SEF)


763-318 ENV-Z FOLD POSITION 2 ADJUSTMENT (A4 SEF)


763-319 ENV-Z FOLD POSITION 2 ADJUSTMENT (Letter SEF)


763-328 THIN PAPER COMPILE PADDLE UPSETTING NUMBER

D Condition: Thin paper, length of 182 mm or less in the feeddirection and 257 mm or less (B5 LEF or smaller) in the widthdirection, other than Z-fold.Sets the number of sheets for the Paddle Solenoid ON (Up

position movement) operation to be activated under the aboveconditions. Setting range: 10 to 50 < 30 >

763-329 THIN PAPER COMPILE PADDLEDOWN-UP OPERATION SETTING

D Sets the Paddle Solenoid ON/OFF operation to be activated every5 sheets after 60 sheets. Setting range:

< 0 >: Operates under all conditions.1: Operates only when paper is thin, B5 LEF or

smaller, and Z-folded.2: Operates only when paper is (thin or ordinary

paper), B5 LEF or smaller, and Z-folded.3: Disabled at all times.




Test mode

763-330 THIN PAPER TAMPING OPERATIONSETTING

D Changes tamping operation for paper of B5 LEF or smaller(excluding Z-fold). Setting range:

< 0 >: Operates under all conditions.1: Operates only when paper is thin, B5 LEF or

smaller, and Z-folded.2: Operates only when paper is (thin or ordinary

paper), B5 LEF or smaller, and Z-folded.

763-332 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOTSPEED REDUCTION SETTING FORINDIVIDUAL PAPER FEED TRAYS

D Sets the speed reduction for the Booklet Paper Path Motor forindividual feed trays; applied when the Booklet Compiler receivesthick paper.* Reducing the speed minimizes damage to paper when thickpaper is fed, but may increase motor noise. Setting range:

< 0 >: Reduces speed to 50 mm/s, 50 mm/s.1: Reduces speed to 50 mm/s, 250 mm/s.2: Reduces speed to 250 mm/s, 50 mm/s.3: Reduces speed to 250 mm/s, 250 mm/s.

The two figures in each line indicate the rate of paper feed fromtrays other than the Interposer Tray and the rate of paper feedfrom the Interposer Tray, respectively.

763-336 SINGLE STAPLE STACK SET LIMIT

(FLAPPER UP)

D Maximum number of single sets stackable on the Stacker when

the Stacker Tray flapper is lifted. Setting range: 1 to 255 < 100 >763-337 DUAL STAPLE STACK SET LIMIT

(FLAPPER UP)D Maximum number of dual sets stackable on the Stacker when the

Stacker Tray flapper is lifted. Setting range: 1 to 255 < 100 >

763-339 PUNCH REV AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT 4

D Adjustment of amount of motor reverse skew correction loop inPunch mode when paper length is greater than 216 mm and whenpaper size is as follows:203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 223 mm in the case of 2/3-hole puncher,and 216 mm < paper width ≤ 235 mm in the case of 2/4-holepuncher. Setting range: 8 to 68 pulses (1 pulse = 0.52 mm) < 39, or 35 in

the case of 3 holes >

763-344 Z-FOLD (B4/8-kai) PAPERCONVERSION NUMBER

D Factor used to convert the number of B4 Z-folded sheets to thenumber of unprocessed paper sheets. One sheet of Z-folded

paper is equal to 20 (default) sheets of unprocessed paper. Setting range: 1 to 20 < 20 >

763-347 FOLDER C SOL ON START TIME(A4 SEF) ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 in A4 SEF folder C fold. Setting range: 0 to 160 pulses (1 = 2.5 msec) < 86 >

763-348 FOLDER C SOL ON START TIME(LET SEF) ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 in LET SEF folder C fold. Setting range: 0 to 160 pulses (1 = 2.5 msec) < 86 >

763-349 FOLDER C SOL ON TIME ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time in inner 3-fold. Setting range: 60 to 160 pulses (1 = 2.5 msec) < 120 >

763-350 BOOKLET FULL DETECTION SETCOUNT SMALLER THAN B4

D Number of sets of paper of lengths less than B4S for booklet fulldetection (based on 15 sheets/set).Number of sets for detection of full status = Reference value + dif-ference of SE-Mode setting from the default number of 20.

[Reference value]1 to 5 sheets: 23 setsUp to 10 sheets: 19 setsUp to 15 sheets: 15 sets* Nonstandard paper size: 15 sets regardless of number of sheets Setting range: 10 to 100 < 20 >

763-351 BOOKLET FULL DETECTION SETCOUNT B4 AND LARGER

D Number of sets of paper of lengths B4S and larger for booklet fulldetection (based on 15 sheets/set).Number of sets for detection of full status = Reference value + dif-ference of SE-Mode setting from the default number of 20.[Reference value]1 to 5 sheets: 25 setsUp to 10 sheets: 21 setsUp to 15 sheets: 17 sets Setting range: 10 to 100 < 20 >

763-353 SMALL SIZE MAX STAPLING D Maximum number of stapled sheets when using small paper sizes(paper length ≤ 216 mm or paper width ≤ 216 mm and paperlength ≤ 297 mm)

S tti 1 t 200 100


Normally the booklet tray will receivemore booklets on the tray before theFULL message is displayed.

Normally the booklet tray will receivemore booklets on the tray before theFULL message is displayed.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

763-354 BOOKLET INTERPOSER PAPERSTAPLE HOLD AMOUNT

ADJUSTMENT

D Adjustment of the amount of Interposer paper held at the TamperRear during stapling. Setting range:

0: 3 mm tamping1: 2 mm tamping< 2 >: 1 mm tamping3: Without tamping4: 1 mm from paper

763-355 DUAL STAPLE - FRONT SIDEMOVEMENT AMOUNT

ADJUSTMENT

D Adjustment of the amount of movement to the front side duringdual stapling. Setting range: 0 to 40 pulses (1 = 0.157 mm) < 20 >

763-356 DUAL STAPLE - DUAL WIDTHMOVEMENT AMOUNT

ADJUSTMENT

D Adjustment of the amount of dual width movement during dualstapling. Setting range: 0 to 40 pulses (1 = 0.157 mm) < 20 >

763-359 BOOKLET FS DIRECTION STAPLEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT

D Adjustment of booklet stapling position in the FS direction(widthwise).When a value exceeding "30" is set, the stapling position isadjusted toward the front. Setting range: 0 to 50 pulses (1 pulse = 0.2618 mm) < 30 >

763-361 BUFFER SHEET REVERSE AMOUNT ADJUSTMENT (PUNCHMODE)

D Adjustment of the overlap for buffer sheets in Punch mode and thevalue of Reverse Pulse + NVM for each paper size. Setting range: 0 to 80 (1 = 0.52 mm) < 26, or 31 in the case of 3

holes >763-362 ENVELOPE FOLDER TRAY FULL

COUNT ENABLED Effective only when "1" is set in 763-362 for detection of full status

for the Envelope Folder Tray based on the number of dischargedsheets. Setting range:

< 0 >: Detection not based on discharged sheets(Disabled)

1: Detection based on discharged sheets(Enabled)

763-363 ENVELOPE FOLDER TRAY FULLCHECK NUM

D Setting of number of sheets for detection of full status for theEnvelope Folder Tray based on the number of discharged sheets.Effective when [NVM: Envelop Folder Tray Full Count Enabled] =1. Setting range: 10 to 40 sheets < 30 >

763-364 STACKER MISS REGI.

IMPROVEMENT ENABLE

D Adjusts the typing operation to prevent misregistration of the

Stacker compile. Setting range:

< 0 >: Enabled1: Disabled

763-365 INTERPOSER SHEET PUSH MISSREGI. IMPROVEMENT ENABLE

D Permits pressing of front/back cover paper (Sub Paddle loweringoperation) to prevent misregistration. Setting range:

0: Enabled< 1 >: Disabled

763-369 BOOKLET STAPLE PAPER COUNTFOLD POSITION FINE-

ADJUSTMENT VALUE 1 _S

D Fine-adjustment of fold position adjustment value for each sheetduring booklet stapling.

Adjustment value for 3 sheets (smaller than B4S). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-370 BOOKLET STAPLE PAPER COUNT

FOLD POSITION FINE- ADJUSTMENT VALUE 2 _S

D Fine-adjustment of fold position adjustment value for each sheet

during booklet stapling. Adjustment value for 4 sheets (smaller than B4S). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >




Adjustment value for 5 to 7 sheets (smaller than B4S). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >




Adjustment value for 8 sheets (smaller than B4S). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-373 BOOKLET 15-SHEET STAPLEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT AMOUNT(B4S AND LARGER)

D Automatic adjustment of stapling position according to number ofsheets based on the input stapling position deviation for 15-sheetfolding in Booklet Staple mode. (B4S and larger) Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >

763-374 BOOKLET 15-SHEET STAPLEPOSITION ADJUSTMENT AMOUNT(SMALLER THAN B4S)

D Automatic adjustment of stapling position according to number ofsheets based on the input stapling position deviation for 15-sheetfolding in Booklet Staple mode. (smaller than B4S)




Test mode

763-375 BOOKLET STAPLE PAPER COUNTSTAPLE POSITION FINE-

ADJUSTMENT 1

D Fine-adjustment of the automatic stapling position for each sheetin Booklet Staple mode.

Adjustment value for 3 sheets. Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >


ADJUSTMENT 2




ADJUSTMENT 3


Adjustment value for 5 to 7 sheets. Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >


ADJUSTMENT 4



763-380 REAR STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT (EXCLUDING A4LEF, A3 SEF) PAPER WIDTH OF 250mm OR LESS

D Adjustment of the rear stapling position for paper with width of 250mm or less (excluding A4 LEF, A3 SEF) Setting range: 50 to 150 < 100 >

763-383 PADDLE SUPPORT EXECUTINGPAPER WIDTH THRESHOLD VALUE

D Threshold value of paper width for which the paddle supportoperation is performed.

The paddle support operation is not executed for paper of widthsless than 235 mm. The threshold value for the Tamper operationcan be changed at the same time. Setting range: 204 to 254 mm < 235 >

763-384 THICK PAPER 1 SETTING D Operational setting for thick paper feed.The operation is not executed for paper of widths less than 235mm. The threshold value for the Tamper operation can be changedat the same time. Setting range:

< 0 >: Normal operation for Thick Paper 1 (withoutbuffer, without pushing prevention operation)

1: Thick Paper 1 is handled as Thick Paper 2 inoperation. (without buffer, with pushingprevention operation)

763-387 3-TIME TAMPING EXECUTING

PAPER COUNT THRESHOLDVALUE

D Changes the paper count for 3-time tamping in tamping operation

(6). In the default setting, 3-time tamping is conducted for 31st andsubsequent sheets.Effective when: 203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 235 mm and paper length≤ 298 mm Setting range: 1 to 100 sheets < 30 >

763-389 BOOKLET STAPLE COUNT FOLDPOSITION FINE-ADJUSTMENTVALUE 1 _L

D Fine-adjustment of the automatic folding position adjustmentamount for each sheet in Booklet Staple mode. Adjustmentamount for 3 sheets (B4S and larger). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >



763-391 BOOKLET STAPLE COUNT FOLD

POSITION FINE-ADJUSTMENTVALUE 3 _L

D Fine-adjustment of the automatic folding position adjustment

amount for each sheet in Booklet Staple mode. Adjustmentamount for 5 to 7 sheets (B4S and larger). Setting range: 0 to 200 pulses (1 pulse = 0.1 mm) < 100 >



763-394 INTERPOSER PAPER PADDLESUPPORT OPERATION SETTING

D Sets whether the paddle support operation 1 (support operation) isperformed for the back cover sheet with paper widths of less than235 mm ("235 mm" is set in 763-383) supplied from the Interposer. Setting range:

0: Disabled< 1 >: Enabled

763-396 INTERPOSER PAPER TAMPERPRESSING OPERATION SETTING

D Sets whether the Tamper pressing operation is performed for backcover paper supplied from the Interposer.

Setting range:0: Disabled< 1 >: Enabled




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

763-398 Z-FOLD PAPER TAMPERPRESSING OPERATION SETTING

D Sets whether the Tamper pressing operation is performed for Z-fold. Setting range:


763-399 ENV Z FOLDER C SOL ONSTARTING TIME (LEF SEF)

ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 ON in outer 3-fold for Letter size. Setting range: 0 to 160 < 80 >

763-400 ENV Z FOLDER C SOL ONSTARTING TIME (A4 SEF)

ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 ON in outer 3-fold for A4 size. Setting range: 0 to 160 < 80 >

763-401 ENV Z FOLDER C SOL ONSTARTING TIME (B4 SEF)

ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 ON in Z-fold for B4 size. Setting range: 0 to 160 < 80 >

763-404 ENV Z FOLDER C SOL ONSTARTING TIME (A3 SEF)

ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 ON in Z-fold for A3 size. Setting range: 0 to 160 < 80 >

763-405 ENV Z FOLDER C SOL ONSTARTING TIME (11 x 17 SEF)

ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON start time based on Folder PathSensor 2 ON in Z-fold for Ledger size. Setting range: 0 to 160 < 80 >

763-406 ENV Z/Z FOLDER C SOL ONSTARTING TIME ADJUSTMENT

D Setting of Folder C Solenoid ON time in outer 3-fold/Z-fold. Setting range: 0 to 160 < 60 >

763-409 IOT PAPER PUNCH SIDE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 1

D Adjustment of punch side position for IOT paper or Interposerpaper.

Adjusts the punch position toward the front.* Use 763-409 through 763-415 only when the punch position

deviation cannot be adjusted for Interposer paper using 763-416through 763-422.

Setting range: 0 to 24 pulses (1 pulse = 0.125 mm) < 0 > Adjustment 1: 2/4-hole puncher: 216 mm < paper width ≤ 230

mm

2/3-hole puncher: 203 mm ≤ paper width ≤ 223 mm Adjustment 2: 2/4-hole puncher: 230 mm < paper width ≤ 250

mm

2/3-hole puncher: 223 mm < paper width ≤ 241 mm Adjustment 3: 2/4-hole puncher: 250 mm < paper width ≤ 265

mm

2/3-hole puncher: 241 mm < paper width ≤ 275 mm Adjustment 4: 2/4-hole puncher: 265 mm < paper width ≤ 285

mm

2/3-hole puncher: 275 mm < paper width ≤ 285 mm Adjustment 5: 2/4-hole puncher: 285 mm < paper width < 297

mm

2/3-hole puncher: 285 mm < paper width < 297 mm Adjustment 6: 2/4-hole puncher: paper width = 297 mm

2/3-hole puncher: paper width = 297 mm Adjustment 7: 2/4-hole puncher: paper width ≤ 216 mm


D


D


D


D


D


D

763-416 I/P PAPER PUNCH SIDE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 1

D


D


D


D


D


D


D

763-423 THIN B5L SIZE COMPILER EXITSPEED REDUCTION SETTING D Sets the speed of paper ejection to the Compile Tray for single thinpaper sheets of length 182 mm or less in the feed direction and257 mm or less in the width direction (B5 LEF and smaller), otherthan Z-fold. Setting range:

1: 544 pps (285 mm/sec)2: 735 pps (384.8 mm/sec)3: 830 pps (434.6 mm/sec)< 4 >: 1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)

763-424 ORDINARY B5L SIZE COMPILEREXIT SPEED REDUCTION SETTING

D Sets the speed of paper ejection to the Compile Tray for singleordinary paper sheets of length 182 mm or less in the feeddirection and 257 mm or less in the width direction (B5 LEF andsmaller), other than Z-fold. Setting range:

1: 544 pps (285 mm/sec)

2: 735 pps (384.8 mm/sec)< 3 >: 830 pps (434.6 mm/sec)4: 1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)




Test mode

763-425 SETTING OF BOOKLET END GUIDEUP/DOWN OPERATION FORSMALL BOOKLETS FOR MIS-REGIPREVENTION

D Sets whether extra up/down operation of the End Guide isperformed to prevent misregistration during End Guide Staplepositioning in stapling for small booklets and in End Guidepositioning in unstapling/bi-fold jobs. Setting range:





HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1.List of HS2000 scanner menu items

1-1.Getting into and getting out o f the Test mode

< Gett ing into test mode >

(1) The test mode for HS2000 is operated only from the optional touch panel. The test mode for

HS2000 cannot be operated from HC5500 operation panel.(2) The test mode for HS2000 is accessed by following steps.

1) From the TOP window of the touch-panel, press the COnfiguration button and access tothe Password input window.

2) Push the CapsLock key to enable capital letter input.

3) Type in the 5-digit test mode access password A S T U ~ .

4) Push on the phrase Password input shown on the top of the touch panel screen.

5) Press the OK button at the bottom of the display.

(3) The test mode display on the touch panel screen shows the following information.

Scanner firmware version number.

Auto document feeder (AF) firmware version number.

HS2000 Scanner machine serial number.

< Executing and Pausing the test mode activation >

(1) Enter the test mode number and press [START] to activate the selected test mode.

[ In Action ] is displayed.

(2) Press [START] again to pause the test mode.

[In Standby Mode ] is displayed.

[ Stop ] is displayed when the test mode movement ends automatically or when manuallystopping the movement by pressing the [START] button again.

< Going to next test mode >

(1) After stopping one test mode by pressing the [START] button, explained above, press the[STOP] button to clear the previous test mode number selected on the test mode display.

(2) Enter the next test mode number to operate and press [START] to active the newly selected testmode number.

< Escaping out of the test mode display >

(1) Press the [TOP] button on the lower left corner on the touch panel display to escape out of theTest Mode.

(2) If the [TOP] button is not active, press the [STOP] button to while the test mode is in either [In

Standby Mode] or in [Stop] condition to make the [TOP] button active. mode number.

< Parameter Storage >

(1) The parameters set by the test mode are stored on the EEPROM on the FB PCB, but for thosetest mode parameters which apply only to the Auto Document Feeder (AF), the newly setparameters are stored on the EEPROM on the AF PCB.

The test modes which apply only for AF and saved on the AF EEPROM are No. 0483,0484, 1010, and 1011.



Test mode

1-2.Test Mode Menu List for HS2000 Scanner


System Test Mode

0140 Download Scanner Program U Downloads the Scanner (FB) firmware program. The LED in the front of the scanner unit blinks in green+red

color during the downloading. The LED changes to a solidgreen light when the downloading is completed.

The touch panel instructs to reboot the scanner. The new firm-

ware version number is displayed after rebooting the scanner.

0 x

0141 Download AF Program U Downloads the AF Unit firmare program. The LED in the front of the scanner unit blinks in green+red

color during the downloading. The LED changes to a solidgreen light when the downloading is completed.

The touch panel instructs to reboot the scanner. The new firm-ware version number is displayed after rebooting the scanner.

0 x

0154 Test Print (Gradation) U Prints a color graduation data. The print is made according to the setting made by test mode

No. 0180 and 0181.

0 x

0155 LED Check U LED1 / LED2 (0 = OFF / 1 = ON) Repeats from 0/0, 0/1, 1/0, 1/1 and 0/0.

0 x

0158 Out of range Data Output U Prints the test mode numbers and the set value for those whichthe parameters are out of the selectable range.

0 x

0159 Data Setting Output U Prints the test mode numbers and the set value for those whichare changed from the programmed default parameters.

0 x

0161 Clear Paper Jam Status * Clears the Jam error display. The cause for the Jam should be corrected before activating this

test mode to clear the Jam error on the touch panel display.

0 x

0168 Clear Out of Range Data * Returns the test mode parameter settings to the programmeddefault settings for those test modes with which the set valuesare out of the selectable range.

Caution: Following test modes are also included: 1000, 1001,1002, 1010 and 1011.

0 x

0169 Clear Data Setting * Returns all the test mode parameter settings to the programmeddefault settings.

Following test modes are not included: 1000, 1001, 1002, 1010and 1011.

0 x

0170 Error C Displays the error which caused the unit to stop the operation. The display also shows all the errors existing at that moment.

0 x

0175 Total Scanning Counter Display C Displays the total scanning counter which is saved in theEEPROM.

The counter count goes up in the timing when the scanning jobis finished.

0 x

0176 FB Counter Display C Displays the FB counter which is saved in the EEPROM. The counter goes up in the timing when the FB scanning job is

finished.

0 x

0177 AF Counter Display C Displays the AF counter which is saved in the EEPROM. The AF counter goes up after every 5 sheets scanning through

the AF unit, and also after the last original goes through andcomes out of the AF unit. Example: In scanning 8 originals, ifthe 7th original jams, the counter goes up by 5 only.

0 x

0178 Out of Range Data Display C Displays the test mode numbers and the set value for those

which the parameters are out of the selectable range.

0 x

0179 Data Setting Display C Displays the test mode numbers and the set value for thosewhich are changed from the programmed default parameters.

0 x



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

0180 Sequence Test Resolution set D Sets the resolution for Test Pattern Printing, Scanner 1-CycleOperation, and AF 1-Cycle Operation test modes.

Selectable range = 0 to 4 <default = 0>0 = 300dpi x 300dpi1 = 300dpi x 600dpi2 = 600dpi x 300dpi3 = 600dpi x 600dpi4 = 600dpi x 1200dpi

In operating test mode No. 0146 to 0153 [Test Pattern Print] withabove 2 to 3 selectable ranges are selected, the selected rangeis ignored and 300dpi x 300dpi will be used.

In operating test mode No. 0146 to 0153 [Test Pattern Print] withabove 2 to 3 selectable ranges are selected, following ink dropsare used.

0 = 5 drops1 = 4 drops2 = 4 drops3 = 5 drops4 = 5 drops

0 x

0181 Sequence Test Paper Size set D Sets the paper size for Test Pattern Printing, Scanner 1-CycleOperation, and AF 1-Cycle Operation test modes.

Selectable range = 0 to 13 <default = 0>

0 = A31 = B42 = A43 = A4R4 = B55 = B5R6 = A3 large (305mm x 435mm)7 = Foolscap8 = Ledger 9 = Legal10 = Letter 11 = Letter-R12 = Statement13 = Satement-R

If choice No.4 is selected in by previous test mode No.0180, the

selection made on this test mode number is ignored and auto-matically A4R is selected at the paper size.

0 x

0182 Sequence Test Scanning Speed set D Sets the speed for Test Pattern Printing, Scanner 1-Cycle Oper-ation, and AF 1-Cycle Operation test modes.

Selectable range = 50 to 200 (50% to 200%) <default = 100> This selection is active only when choice No.1 or No.3 is

selected in by previous test mode No.0180. If No.0, No.2 orNo.4 is selected by test mode No.0180, the selection made onthis test mode number is ignored and the speed is automaticallyset to 100 (100%).

0 x

Scanner Test Modes

0310 FB Original Det. Sensor S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x

0311 FB Original Size Sensor 1 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x0312 FB Original Size Sensor 2 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x

0313 FB Original Size Sensor 3 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x0314 FB Original Size Sensor 4 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x0315 FB Original Size Sensor 5 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x

0316 FB Original Size Sensor 6 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x0317 FB Original Size Sensor 7 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (Original not detected) 0 x0318 FB Stage Cover Angle Sensor S ON (Stage Cover closed) / OFF (Stage Cover opened) 0 x

0319 Stage Cover Angle Sensor S ON (Stage Cover closed) / OFF (Stage Cover opened) 0 x0320 HP Sensor S ON (Lamp Carriage is at HP) / OFF (Lamp Carriage not at HP) 0 x0330 Scanner Lamp M Turns ON the scanner lamp. 0 x

0340 Scanner Home Action U Moves the Lamp Carriage to the HP position. 0 x0341 Scanner Action U Makes 1-cycle scanning action (Lamp Carriage).

HP positioning - Shading - Scanning - HP positioning. The 1-cycle movement is made with the parameter setting made

by test modes 0180 through 0182.

0 x

0342 Continuous Scanning Action U Repeats the 1-cycle scanning action (Ref: test mode No.0341). Press START button to stop the movement. 0 x

0343 Scanner Lamp Replace Position U Moves the Lamp carriage to the lamp removal position. 0 x

0344 S Shi i P iti U Slid th L C i t th h i l l k iti 0




Test mode

0370 FB Original Size Display C Displays the size of the original on the stage glass. 0 x0380 FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment D Adjusts the horizontal position of original scanning on the stage

glass. Adjustable range = 81 to 175 (-2.0mm to +2.0mm from the

default position) [Larger number moves the image to the left]. Changing the setting by 1 moves the position by 0.04233mm. Default position is set by test mode No.1000

0 x

0381 FB Scan Start Position Adjustment D Adjusts the scanning start position of original scanning on thestage glass.

Adjustable range = 74 to 182 (-2.6mm to +2.6mm from thedefault position) [Larger number increases the scanning skipamount]

Changing the setting by 1 changes the position by 0.0486mm. Default position is set by test mode No.1001

0 x

0382 FB Scanning Speed Adjustment D Adjusts the image elongation & shrinkage of original scanningon the stage glass.

Adjusts the FB read pulse motor speed. Adjustable range = 123 to 133 (-0.5% to +0.5% from the default

position) [Larger number shrinks the image] Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1% Default setting is set by test mode No.1002.

0 x

0384 Prohibit Scanner Action D Software lock of the Lamp Carriage.

Selectable range = 0 or 1 0 = unlocks the lamp carriage software lock. 1 = activates the lanp carriage software lock = the carriage is

locked. Other scanner test modes are also disabled also when[1] is selected.

0 x

0385 Offset Adjustment (R0) C These test mode are only to view the present offset parametersetting.

No need to use this test mode in normal field maintenance. These test modes are for R&D use.

0 x0386 Offset Adjustment (G0) C 0 x

0387 Offset Adjustment (B0) C 0 x0388 Offset Adjustment (R1) C 0 x0389 Offset Adjustment (G1) C 0 x

0390 Offset Adjustment (B1) C 0 x0391 Gain Adjustment (R0) C These test mode are only to view the present gain parameter

setting. No need to use this test mode in normal field maintenance.

These test modes are for R&D use.

0 x

0392 Gain Adjustment (G0) C 0 x0393 Gain Adjustment (B0) C 0 x

0394 Gain Adjustment (R1) C 0 x0395 Gain Adjustment (G1) C 0 x0396 Gain Adjustment (B1) C 0 x

AF Test Modes

0410 AF Original Detection Sensor S ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original) 0 x0412 AF Registration Sensor S ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original) 0 x

0413 AF IN Sensor S ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original) 0 x0414 AF Reverse Sensor S ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original) 0 x0415 AF Cover Sensor S On (Cover closed) / OFF (Cover opened) 0 x

0416 AF Original Size Sensor 1 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original) 0 x0417 AF Original Size Sensor 2 S ON (Original detected) / OFF (No original)j 0 x

0420 AF Recognition S ON (AF unit connected) / OFF (AF unit not connected) 0 x0430 AF Read Pulse Motor (CW) M Activates the Read Pulse Motor in original feed (cw) direction 0 x

0431 AF Cooling Fan M Rotates the AF cooling fan. 0 x0441 AF Continuous Action U Makes lamp carriage movements and sends the originals

through the AF unit for the amount the originals placed on theorginal feed table.

The test mode ends when the original runs out from the originalfeed table.

Brings the lamp carriage to HP position - shading compensation- brings the lamp carriage to AF scanning position - feeds theoriginals.

The test mode activates with the settings made by test modesNo.0180 through 0182.

0 x

0442 AF Original Feed Action U Continuously sends the originals through the AF unit for theamount of the originals placed on the origianl feed table.

Originals are fed with the speed set by test mode No.0182.

0 x

0451 AF IN Sensor Adjustment U Used in adjusting the AF IN Sensor sensitivity. 0 x

0452 AF Guide-size VR Adjustment (100mm) U Used in adjusting the original feed tray guide potentiometer. 0 x0453 AF Guide-size VR Adjustment (297mm) U Used in adjusting the original feed tray guide potentiometer. 0 x0470 AF Original Size Display C Displays the original size set on the original feed tray. 0 x




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

0480 AF Horizontal Scan Position Adjustment D Adjusts the horizontal scanning position when scanning via AF. Adjustable range = 81 to 175 (-2.0mm to +2.0mm from the

default position) [Larger number moves the image to the left]. Changing the setting by 1 moves the position by 0.04233mm. Default position is set by test mode No.128

0 x

0481 AF Scan Start Position Adjustment (Front) D Adjusts the scanning start position of original scanning throughthe AF unit (original front surface).

Adjustable range = -40 to +40 (-4.0mm to +4.0mm from thedefault position) [Larger number increases the scanning skipamount]

Changing the setting by 1 changes the position by 0.1mm. Default = 0 (0mm)

0 x

0482 AF Scan Start Position Adjustment (Back) D Adjusts the scanning start position of original scanning throughthe AF unit (original rear surface).

Adjustable range = -40 to +40 (-4.0mm to +4.0mm from thedefault position) [Larger number increases the scanning skipamount]

Changing the setting by 1 changes the position by 0.1mm. Default = 0 (0mm)

0 x

0483 AF Scanning Speed Adjustment (Front) D Adjusts the image elongation & shrinkage of original scanningthrough the AF unit (original front surface).

Adjusts the AF read pulse motor speed.

Adjustable range = -20 to +20 (-2.0% to +2.0% from the defaultposition) [Larger number shrinks the image] Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1% Default setting is set by test mode No.1010.

0 x

0484 AF Scanning Speed Adjustment (Back) D Adjusts the image elongation & shrinkage of original scanningthrough the AF unit (original rear surface).

Adjusts the AF read pulse motor speed. Adjustable range = -20 to +20 (-2.0% to +2.0% from the default

position) [Larger number shrinks the image] Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1% Default setting is set by test mode No.1011.

0 x

0485 AF Mirror Position Adjustment D Adjusts the mirror carriage position when using AF unit to scan. Adjustable range = -20 to +20 (-2.0mm to +2.0mm from the

default position) [Larger number shifts the image to the top.] Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1mm

Default = 0 (0mm)

0 x

0489 AF Test Scanning Side Selection D Selects the surface of original to scan when using Test ModeNo.0441 [AF Continuous Action] and No.0442 [AF Original Feed

Action]. Selectable range = 0 or 1 0 = Simplex scanning (original front surface only). 1 = Duplex. Default = 0

0 x

Image Processing Test Mode0530

to0578

Default value of character recognition level.Default value of line edge stress level.Default value of moire elimination level.Default value of base color slice level.

D Sets the default settings for each image processing. Refer to the chart on next page for the details on this adjust-

ment. Adjustable range = 1 to 7

0 x

0585 Standard Scanning Level selection D Sets the standard scanning density level by offsetting the scan-

ning density table. Adjustable range = -2 to +2 <default = 0>

0 x




Test mode

Detailed chart for the Image Processing Test Modes from No.0530 to No.0578 on previous page.

No. Scanning

Mode

Color

Mode

Screening Items Default

Level

0530 Line Color --- Character Recognition 4

0531 Line Edge Stress 50532 Moire Elimination 1

0533Base Color Slice

40535 Monochrome --- Character Recognition 4

0536 Line Edge Stress 50537 Moire Elimination 10538 Base Color Slice 4

0540 Duo Color Error Diffusion Character Recognition 40541 Line Edge Stress 4

0542 Moire Elimination 10543 Base Color Slice 40545 Dot Screen Character Recognition 4

0546 Line Edge Stress 40547 Moire Elimination 60548 Base Color Slice 4

0550 Monochrome Error Diffusion Character Recognition 4

0551 Line Edge Stress 40552 Moire Elimination 1

0553 Base Color Slice 40555 Dot Screen Character Recognition 40556 Line Edge Stress 4

0557 Moire Elimination 60558 Base Color Slice 4

0560 Photo Color Error Diffusion Character Recognition 40561 Line Edge Stress 20562 Moire Elimination 2

0563 Base Color Slice 20565 Dot Screen Character Recognition 4

0566 Line Edge Stress 4

0567Moire Elimination

60568 Base Color Slice 4

0570 Monochrome Error Diffusion Character Recognition 40571 Line Edge Stress 4

0572 Moire Elimination 20573 Base Color Slice 4

0575 Dot Screen Character Recognition 40576 Line Edge Stress 40577 Moire Elimination 6

0578 Base Color Slice 4



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Menu item Type Description

Default Setting Test ModesThe parameter settings made on the test modes No.1000, 1001, 1002, 1010 and 1011 are applied as the default setting for thetest modes No.0380, 0381, 0382, 0483 and 0484.

These test mode No.1000, 1001, 1002, 1010 and 1011 are the Factory Adjustments. These test modes should not be changedin the field.

These 5 test modes are excluded from [Test Mode No.0169 Clear Data Setting], so the parameter settings on these 5 testmodes are not cleared when Test Mode No.0169 is activated.

These 5 test mode parameter settings are wrote down on a sticker during the scanner installation and pasted on the rear scan-ner cover by the serviceman.

1000 FB Horizontal Scan Position Default Setting Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0380 [FB Horizon-tal Scan Position Adjustment].

Adjustable range = 81 to 175 (-2.0mm to +2.0mm from thedefault position) [Larger number moves the image to the left].

Changing the setting by 1 moves the position by 0.04233mm. Default = 128

1001 FB Scan Start Posit ion Default Setting Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0381 [FB ScanStart Position Adjustment].

Adjustable range = 74 to 182 (-2.6mm to +2.6mm from the

default position) [Larger number increases the scanning skipamount] Changing the setting by 1 changes the position by 0.0486mm. Default = 128

1002 FB Scanning Speed Default Setting Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0382 [FB ScanningSpeed Adjustment].

Adjustable range = 123 to 133 (-0.5% to +0.5% from the defaultposition) [Larger number shrinks the image]

Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1% Default = 128

1010 AF Scanning Speed Default Setting (Front) Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0483 [AF ScanningSpeed Adjustment (Front)].

Adjustable range = -20 to +20 (-2.0% to +2.0% from the defaultposition) [Larger number shrinks the image]

Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1%

Default = 0 (0%) The parameter is saved on the EEPROM on the AF PCB.

1011 AF Scanning Speed Default Setting (Back) Sets the default parameter for test mode No.0484 [AF ScanningSpeed Adjustment (Back)].

Adjustable range = -20 to +20 (-2.0% to +2.0% from the defaultposition) [Larger number shrinks the image]

Changing the setting by 1 changes by 0.1% Default = 0 (0%) The parameter is saved on the EEPROM on the AF PCB.



Panel messages

CHAPTER 12: Panel messages



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Overview of panel messages

1.Overview of panel

The panel has an LCD display, LEDs, and keys as shown below. When an error is generated, theLCD and LEDs indicate information related to the generated error.

* Although the layout of a panel is the same at HC5500 and HC5000, some difference is in Key SW nameand a state name.

* HC5500 -> HC5000

* Sleep key -> Soft switch key

* Sleep -> Soft switch OFF

* Wake-up key (wake-up form Standby) -> Wake-up key (Wake-up from Sleep)

* Standby -> Sleep

2.Basic structure of panel

2-1.LED-1

Sleep key & LEDWake-up key & LED

Print mode key & LED

LCDData LED

Enter key

Cursor key

Menu keyCancel keyOut line diagram Error

Consumable information

Panel view

Warning LED

Name of LED Color Description

Print mode LED Green Lit : Print mode ON.

Not lit : Print mode OFF or Standby status.

Blinking : The current job is in pause.

Walk-up LED Green Lit : Standby status (only the power to HC5500 is cut off).

Sleep LED Green /Orange

No light : The main power switch on the main unit is OFF.

Green light : Ready status or standby status.

Orange light : Sleep status (power to both HC5500 & Controlleris OFF).

Data LED Green The processing state of the received data is displayed.

Warning LED Green The warning error is indicated.



Panel messages

2-2.Power key

The Power key on the panel is used for operation power ON/OFF. When the power is turned OFF by

this switch, the machine enters the standby status. The main power switch is provided separately on

the main unit.

The power supply conditions are described below.

2-3.Print mode key

The keys on the panel provide the following functions.

When the key repeat function is enabled, key repeat (continuous pressing) is activated when akey is held pressed for 0.7 or more seconds. During key repeat, the display is refreshed every0.2 seconds.

Power supplycondition

LED Status

Main power OFF OFF The main power switch on the main unit is turned OFF.

In this condition, the Power key on the panel is disabled.

Standby status Orange The main power switch is turned ON, but the operation power isturned Off.

In this condition, pressing the Power key on the panel turns onthe power and sets the machine in the ready status.

Ready status Green Power turned ON.

In this condition, pressing the Power key for more than 1 sec-ond turns the power OFF and sets the machine in the standby

status. However, the power cannot be turned OFF in the follow-ing cases.

When there is an unfinished job.

When a job is being received.

Sleep status Green Press the Walk-up key to set the machine in the ready status.

In this condition, pressing the Power key on the panel turns thepower OFF and sets the machine in the standby status.

Name of key Description

Print mode key Turns the print mode ON/OFF.

Menu key Turns the print mode OFF, and activates the menu.

Enter key Enters a setting, etc.

Cancel key Cancels a setting before it is entered.

Cursor key Moves the cursor to the next menu item, next function, or next settingitem in the menu screen. (Up/Down keys).

Moves the cursor to the right/left direction in the numerical input screen.

Increments or decrements the numerical value in the numerical inputscreen.

Used to adjust the top, bottom, right, and left printing positions.

Used for fine adjustment of the exit fences and stopper.

Walk-up key Wakes up the machine from the standby status (only HC5500 power).

Sleep key Turns ON/OFF sleep status (both HC5500 & Controller power).



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

3.Error indication by LEDs

3-1.Outline diagram

When an error is generated, numbered LEDs in the diagram light to indicate the location of theerror generated. This LED lighting condition provides the following information.

The color of the LEDs is red.

3-2.Consumable information

The LEDs in this area indicate the remaining volumes of ink and paper.

When the levels of K, C, M, and Y inks run low, the corresponding ink color LEDs (orange) lightsup.

When the remaining paper volume in the standard paper feed tray or the feed tray falls to verylow levels, the corresponding LED (orange) lights up.

When all the set inks are in correct operating condition, the [i-fit] LED (green) lights up.

3-3.Error types

When an error is generated, the LED (red) corresponding to the type of the generated errorlights up.

LED No. Description LED No. Description

1 Paper feed error 11 K ink error

2 Paper transfer error 12 C ink error

3 Exit error 13 M ink error

4 Duplex entry error 14 Y ink error

5 Duplex transfer error 15 Ink set cover error

6 Duplex switchbackentry error

16 Waste ink tank error

7 Duplex switchback

error

17 Feed tray 1 error

8 Duplex re-feed error 18 Feed tray 2 error

9 Main unit right covererror

19 Base left cover error

10 Main unit left covererror

20 Vertical path upper section error

21 Option error

Name of LED Description

Ink change This LED lights up when ink cartridges or the waste ink tank need to be replaced.

Setting check This LED lights up when a cover is out of position.Service call This LED lights up to indicate a service error.Paper jam This LED lights up to indicate a paper jam.Maintenance call This LED lights up when a scheduled maintenance call interval is approaching or the

waste ink tank is reaching full capacity.



Panel messages

4.Panel messages

4-1.Overview of messages

(1) Indication of error codes

Each error notification (error code) consists of an error type, categorized according to error reset

method or panel indication method, and the error point (assigned by a number), which indicatesthe time or location at which the error was generated. The error point number is a sequential

value assigned to a mechanical unit. For errors that can occur in individual color systems, such

as heads, a parameter (K, C1, MY, etc.) is added after the error point to indicate the error-gener-

ating color.

Examples of error notification: S01-201, X02-123, W02-321-K1

(2) Error type

(3) Error point

* [xx] indicates a sequential value assigned to an internal part of a unit.

Error type Description of error

S Service call This error cannot be reset by the user.

P Option device error

U Unit error X Jam error

Also includes errors that can be reset by the user to restore normal operating con-ditions.

Y Out of consumable (ink)Z Setting check (cover open)

If this error is generated during operations, the machine halts at the next appropri-ate point in time.

W Warning: Continuous operations (action) may generate malfunctions. Confirm thatit is safe to continue operations before doing so.

P Option error M Maintenance

Unit No. Error point Unit

0 0xx System (power supply, H/W, S/W, communication), panel1 1xx Paper discharge system2 2xx Belt platen, duplex transfer system3 3xx(-**) Heads and related parts4 4xx Multi-tray paper feed5 5xx Option6 6xx Finisher 7 7xx8 8xx



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.Types of err ors

5-1.Error type

When an error occurs, the print mode will go OFF once, but in the errors indicated by [o] underthe [auto-return] column on the following tables, print mode automatically returns back to ON

after the error is corrected.* The print mode automatic return function is not available on HC5000.

(1) Service call

* [ Error resetting method ]

* Reset power, or execute [Clear error] in Test mode.

* Some errors (such as PCB disconnection) may not be cleared by executing [Clear error].

* Even if an S error occurs, it may be possible to continue operations using another unit. Therefore,certain error types require a specific reset procedure (described in Error Point).

Type Name Indication Overview/reset method auto-

return

S01 BP motor lock Service callResetpower.

Or call a service engineer.

The main transport system cannot be controlled appropri-ately.

x

S02 Elevator motor lock The elevator cannot be controlled appropriately. xS03 Belt platen lock The belt platen elevation mechanism cannot be set prop-

erly.x

S04 Head maintenance error Head maintenance cannot be controlled appropriately.Including waste ink tank full condition.

x

S05 Head thermistor error Head temperature control is malfunctioning. xS06 Ink heating error Ink heating control is malfunctioning. xS07 Ink cooling error Ink cooling control is malfunctioning. x

S08 Controller (PS7R) error Communication with the controller (PS7R) cannot beachieved.Or an error notification has been received from the con-troller (PS7R).

x

S09 Exit option error A service error is generated in the exit option. xS10 Multi-tray paper feed error A service error is generated in the multi-tray paper feed. xS11 Paper feed motor lock The paper feed motor cannot be controlled appropriately. x

S12 Exit motor lock The exit motor cannot be controlled appropriately. xS13 Blower fan lock The blower fans cannot be controlled appropriately. x

S14 Waste ink tank error The waste ink tank is full. xS15 Ink distributor ink level down xS16 Auto fence error Error exists on the paper receiving tray auto-fence. x

S18 Connected unit error Transport Motor lock occurred in the connected unit. xS19 I/F Module error The Decurler cannot be controlled appropriately. x

S20 Puncher Unit error The puncher cannot be controlled appropriately. xS21 Stapler Unit error The Stapler Unit cannot be controlled appropriately. xS22 Cover Tray error The Interposer cannot be controlled appropriately. x

S23 3-fold Tray error The Folder section cannot be controlled appropriately. xS24 Top Tray error The Top Tray section cannot be controlled appropriately. xS25 Stacker Tray error The Stacker Tray section cannot be controlled appropri-

ately.x

S26 Booklet Tray error The Booklet section cannot be controlled appropriately. x

S27 Job information error An error occurred in the function combination or outputdestination.

x

S94 Download error (loader) Communication error or data error during downloading. xS95 Download error Communication error or data error during downloading. x

S96 PCB or hardware disconnec-tion

The PCB is not connected. x

S97 Power supply error There is a problem with the power supply. x

S98 Hardware error The hardware cannot be controlled appropriately. xS99 Software error For debugging x



Panel messages

(2) Unit error

* Unit errors resemble service call errors but are restricted to a certain area of the machine. The machinecan be operated as long as the malfunctioning area is not used.

* [Error cancellation method]

* Restart the unit or execute [Clear Error] in Test mode. Press the Cancel key on the panel.

(3) Jam error

* The HC5000/5500 series is not equipped with an LED to indicate paper jam locations in the Finisher.Instead, paper jam locations are indicated by the jam area code shown below on the LCD panel.

Type Name Indication Overview/reset method auto-

return

U01 Connected unit error Finisher error Restart the machineor contact theservice engineer.

x

U02 I/F Module error xU03 Puncher Unit error x

U04 Stapler Unit error xU05 Cover Tray error x

U06 3-fold Tray error xU07 Top Tray error xU08 Stacker Tray error x

U09 Booklet Tray error x

Type Name Indication Description/Reset method auto-

return

X01 Paper jam in paper feed sec-tion

No paper transportRemove the jammed paper.

Paper jammed between the first paper feed section andthe second paper feed section.Jammed paper must be removed from the standardpaper feed tray side.Open and close the main unit cover, or press the Cancelkey on the control panel.

x



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

X02 Paper jam in main papertransfer section

Jammed paper Remove the jammed paper.

Paper jammed at the registration rollers or belt platensection. Also covers multiple feeds.Remove all sheets from the paper transport path exceptfor the vertical transfer unit, then close the main unitcover.(This error is automatically cleared if there is no paper onthe paper transport path when the recovery operation isactivated by opening and closing the main unit cover.)

x

X03 Paper jam in exit unit Paper jammed near the exit unit outlet section.Same as X01.

x

X04 Paper jam in duplex entrysection

Paper jammed in the flipper section.Same as X01.

x

X05 Paper jam in duplex transfersection

Paper jammed in the duplex transfer section.Same as X01.

x

X06 Paper jam in duplex switch-back entry section.

Paper jammed in the duplex switchback entry section.Same as X01.

x

X07 Paper jam in switchback sec-tion.

Paper jammed in the switchback section.Same as X01.

x

X08 Paper jam in re-feed unit Paper jammed in the re-feed unit.Same as X01.

x

X09 Paper jam in feed tray 1 No paper transportRemove the jammed paper.

Paper jammed in feed tray 1Open and close feed tray 1.

x

X10 Paper jam in feed tray 2 Paper jammed in feed tray 2Open and close feed tray 2.

x

X11 Paper jam in vertical pathupper section

Jammed paper Remove the jammed paper.

Paper jammed in the upper section of the vertical path.(This error is cleared if FL feed sensors 1 through 4 areOFF when the door of the vertical transfer unit is openedand closed, or the jam release safety SW switches OFF/ON.)

x

X12 Paper jam in vertical pathlower section

Paper jammed in the lower section of the vertical pathSame as X11

x

X13 Paper jam in vertical pathupper and lower sections

X11 and X12 are generated simultaneously.Same as X11

x

X14 Main unit multiple feed Multiple feedRemove the

jammed paper.

Multiple paper feed occurred.Open and close the door of the vertical transfer unit, or

open and close the left front cover.(Turns the jam release cover safety SW OFF/ON.)

xX15 Multi-tray paper feed: multi-

ple feed

x

X16 Connected unit error Jammed paper (Fin-isher)Remove the jammedpaper.

Paper jammed in the connected unit.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X17 I/F Module error Paper jammed in the I/F Module.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X18 Puncher Unit error Paper jammed in the Puncher Unit or Buffer Unit.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X19 Stapler Unit error Paper jammed in the Stapler Unit.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X20 Cover Tray error Paper jammed in the Interposer section.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X21 3-fold Tray error Paper jammed in the Folder section.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X22 Top Tray error Paper jammed in the Top Tray section.Remove the jammed paper. x

X23 Stacker Tray error Paper jammed in the Stacker Tray section.Remove the jammed paper.

x

X24 Booklet Tray error Paper jammed in the Booklet section.Remove the jammed paper.

x


return



Panel messages

(4) Consumable error

(5) Setting check error


return

Y01 Ink cartridge change No inkChange ink cartridge(s).

No inkRemove the applicable ink cartridge.

0

Y02 Waste ink tank change Waste ink tank full.Replace

ink cartridge(s).

The waste ink tank is full.(The default message setting for the service error indica-

tion is [Service error: S14]. The setting can be changed inTest mode.)Remove the waste ink tank.(This error is cleared when the tank full sensor is acti-vated or deactivated (i.e., turned ON/OFF).)

0

Y03 Punch dust box almost full Punch dust box fullEmpty the punch dustbox.

Punch dust box almost fullDiscard the punch dust. Press the Cancel key. Clear theprint job.

0

Y04 Staple needle almost empty Staple needle emptyRefill the stapler.

Staple needle almost empty Add staple needles. Press the Cancel key. Clear the print job.

0

Y05 Booklet staple almost empty Staple needle empty(for saddle stitching)Replace the staplercartridge.

Booklet staple needle almost empty Add booklet staple needs. Press the Cancel key. Clearthe print job.

0


return

Z01 Ink cartridge not set No ink cartridgeSet ink cartridge(s).

Ink cartridge(s) not setSet ink cartridge(s).

0

Z02 Incompatible ink color Ink cartridge error Check ink cartridges.

Ink cartridges of the incorrect color are set.Remove the ink cartridges.

0

Z03 Incompatible ink cartridge An incorrect ink cartridge is set.Remove the ink cartridges.

0

Z04 Ink cover not set The cover is open.Close

the cover.

The ink bottle cover is open.Close the ink bottle cover.

0

Z05 Front cover not set (left/right) The front cover (left/right) is open.Close the front cover (left/right). 0

Z06 Transfer cover (left) not set The transfer cover (left) is open.Close the transfer cover (left).

0

Z07 Transfer cover (right) not set The transfer cover (right) is open.Close the transfer cover (right).

0

Z08 Vertical transfer unit door notset

The left door of the MTPF is open.Close the left door of the MTPF.

0

Z09 Feed tray 1 not set Feed tray openCheck feed tray.

Feed tray 1 is open.Close the applicable feed tray.This error is ignored while paper fed from the standardpaper feed tray is being printed.or during head maintenance.

0

Z10 Feed tray 2 not set Feed tray 2 is open.Close the applicable feed tray.This error is ignored while paper fed from the standardpaper feed tray is being printed. or during head maintenance.

0

Z11 Standard paper feed traycheck

Feed tray error Check paper feed tray.

The safety SW for the standard paper feed tray ispressed.Or both the Upper and Lower Limit Sensors are activated(too much paper on the tray).Deactivate the safety SW for the standard paper feedtray.Remove the overloaded paper from the standard paperfeed tray to release the Upper/Lower-Limit Sensor.

0

Z12 Waste ink tank not set

No waste ink tankCheck ink tank.

The waste ink tank is not set.Set the waste ink tank.

0

Z13 Ink passage opening failure The cover is open.

Close the cover.

The ink passage opening operation failed.

Open the ink bottle cover.

0



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(6) Warning

Z14 Jam release SW check The cover is open.Close the cover.

The jam release cover safety SW is OFF.Set the jam release cover safety SW to ON.(Normally, the SW is released when the left front cover isclosed.)

0

Z15 Connected Unit Jam ReleaseCover open

Finisher error Close the cover.

The Connected Unit Jam Release Cover SW is OFF.Set the Connected Unit Jam Release Cover SW to ON.

0

Z16 I/F Module Front Door Interlock open The I/F Module Front Door SW is OFF.Set the I/F Module Front Door SW to ON. 0

Z17 Booklet Drawer Set fail Finisher error Set the Booklet Unit.

The Booklet Drawer is not set.Set the Booklet Drawer.

0

Z18 Finisher Front Door interlockopen

Finisher error Close the cover.

The Finisher Front Door SW is OFF.Set the Finisher Front Door SW to ON.

0

Z19 Interposer Top Cover open The Interposer Top Cover SW is OFF.Set the Interposer Top Cover SW to ON.

0

Z20 3-fold Tray not set Finisher error Check the 3-fold Tray.

The 3-fold Tray is not set.Set the 3-fold Tray.Press the Cancel key on the panel.

0


return

Type Name Indication Description/Reset method auto-return

W01 Paper change No paper Set paper.

No paper (When any tray is empty)Set paper in one of the feed trays.

x

W02 No paper (Standard paperfeed tray)

No paper Set the appropriatepaper.

The standard paper feed tray is empty when paper feedis selected.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or load the applicable feed tray with paper.Or select another feed tray (Menu 6).Or clear the print job (Menu 7).Or turn power OFF and ON.Or clear the error.

x

W03 No paper (Feed tray 1) The feed tray 1 is empty when paper feed is selected.Same as W02

0

W04 No paper (Feed tray 2) The feed tray 2 is empty when paper feed is selected.Same as W02

0

W05 No paper (Auto) The auto feed tray selected is empty.Same as W02

0

W06 No separation sheetsinserted between print jobs

No paper is available when the sorting function isselected.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or load paper on the Sorting Tray.Or disable the sorting function.Or switch to another tray from the Sorting Tray (Menu5.3).Or clear the print job (Menu 7).Or clear the error.

Stan-dardfeed tray: x

MPFtray : 0

W07 Auto fence operation not pos-sible

Check paper receiving tray.

The auto fence function is invalid.Press the Cancel key on the panel.

Or disable the auto fence function (Menu 4.8.2).

x

W08 Controller HDD full Controller/HDD is full. The HDD of the controller is full.Delete unnecessary data from the HDD.Or the error is automatically cleared when free space isavailable on the HDD.*The error appears while processing a new job, but whenthe error occurs, the processing job is automaticallydeleted, so the error message also resets automatically.

x

W09 No paper in Cover Tray No paper (Finisher)Set the appropriatepaper in the CoverTray.

There is no paper in the Interposer.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or set paper on the Interposer.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

0

W10 Top Tray capacity limit Tray holding capacityexceeded.Remove paper from thePaper-receiving Tray.

The holding capacity of the tray has been exceeded.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or remove discharged paper from the tray.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

xW11 Stacker Tray capacity limit xW12 Booklet Tray capacity limit x

W13 3-fold Tray capacity limit x



Panel messages

W14 Stapler Unit not connected Finisher error Check the Stapler Unit.

An operational setting was made for a unit notconnected.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

x

W15 Puncher Unit not connected Finisher error Check the PuncherUnit.

x

W16 Top Tray not connected Finisher error

Check the Top Tray.

x

W17 Stacker Tray not connected Finisher error Check the StackerTray.

x

W18 Booklet Tray not connected Finisher error Check the BookletTray.

x

W19 3-fold Tray not connected Finisher error Check the 3-fold Tray.

x

W20 Cover Tray not connected Finisher error Check the Cover Tray.

x

W21 No paper of applicable size No paper (size)Set the appropriatepaper.

Paper of the specified size is not loaded in the selectedtray.Set the appropriate paper.Manually select the appropriate tray.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

x

W22 No applicable paper type No paper (type)Set the appropriatepaper.

Paper of the specified type is not loaded in the selectedtray.Manually select the appropriate tray.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).Or select [size] by auto-tray [tray selection rule: menuNo.5.8.17].Or place correct type and size paper on the tray.Or change the paper type input by menu No.4.x.2.Or undo the separation paper tray selection by menu

No.5.3 if the error is caused due to the separation paper.Or check by menu No.4.5 [triple tray source] to see thatstandard paper feed tray is included or excluded, when

the feed tray selection is selected to auto.

Menusettingchangesarerequired

W23 Specified paper not availablefor use

Original size error.The set original cannotbe printed.Clear the print job.

The specified paper size cannot be processed by theFinisher.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

x

W24 Stapler Unit not available foruse

Finisher error Restart the machine orcontact the serviceengineer.

An operational setting was made for a unit not availablefor use.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

x

W25 Puncher Unit not available foruse

x

W26 Top Tray not available for use xW27 Stacker Tray not available for

usex

W28 Booklet Tray not available foruse

x

W29 3-fold Tray not available foruse

x

W30 Cover Tray not available foruse

x

W31 Scratch sheets on Top Tray Finisher error Check the Top Tray.

Paper for which printing has not completed normally wasoutput to the specified tray.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

x

W32 Scratch sheets on StackerTray

Finisher error Check the StackerTray.

x

W33 Scratch sheets on BookletTray

Finisher error Check the Booklet

Tray.

x

W34 Scratch sheets on 3-fold Tray Finisher error Check the 3-fold Tray.

x


return



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(7) Maintenance

W35 Stacker Tray unable todescend

Finisher error Check the StackerTray.

The safety device for Stacker Tray descent preventionhas been activated.Cancel the safety switch to prevent Stacker Tray descent.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

x

W36 No cover paper on SortingTray No paper Set the appropriatepaper on the SortingTray.

The Sorting Tray set as the Cover Tray has run out ofcover paper. Add paper to the Sorting Tray set as the Cover Tray.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

same asW06

W37 No paper of applicable sizeon Cover Tray

No paper (size)Set the appropriatepaper on the CoverTray.

The Cover Tray lacks paper of the specified size or of apaper size that can be supplied to the Finisher.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

0

W38 No paper of applicable sizeon Sorting Tray

No paper (size)Set the appropriatepaper on the SortingTray.

The Sorting Tray lacks paper of the specified size or of apaper size that can be supplied to the Finisher.Press the Cancel key on the panel.Or clear the error.

Or clear the print job (Menu 7).

same asW06

W40 Envelope selection error Envelope selectionerror. Change thepaper feed selection or

clear the print job.

Printing for the tray on which the envelopes are stackedis selected to either duplex printing or face-down printing.Or on the auto-tray selection mode all the trays are regis-tered as envelopes when the printing is selected as eitherduplex or face-down printing.Press the cancel key to clear the error message, or clearthe printing job by menu No.7 on the machine or from theprinter driver console.Make necessary corrections and resend the print jobagain.If the error code is W40-129, change the Envelope mar-gin input parameter (menu No.5.8.26) so that the sum ofthe envelope margin and paper length by the paper sizeentry (menu No. 5.1) is under 488mm.

x

W41 Duplex printing error (mixedpaper sizes)

Duplex printing error(size) - This originalcannot be printed -

clear the print job.

In duplex printing job, the original size for the front andback of the print is different.Press the cancel key to clear the error message, or clearthe printing job by menu No.7 on the machine or from the

printer driver console.

x

W42 Paper size mix error Original of this sizecannot be printed -clear the print job.

One or more of the following selection is incorrect. * The paper size combination must be A4R&A3,

B5R&B4, Letter&Ledger. * Auto tray must be selected. * Z-folding must be selected for the larger of the paper. * Mixed paper size must be selected to ON.Press the cancel key to clear the error message, or clearthe printing job by menu No.7 on the machine or from theprinter driver console.

x

W99 Head maintenance Perform the cleaning. Confirming head maintenance executionPerform head maintenance (normal). x


return


return

M01 Maintenance call The print count has reached the scheduled maintenancevalue.Run Test mode [Clear error] (5.12.2).Or set the scheduled maintenance value to [0].Or clear the scheduled maintenance value.

0

M02 Waste ink tankNear full

The waste ink tankneeds to be replaced.

The waste ink tank needs to be replaced soon.Replace the waste ink tank.

(This error is cleared when the absence of a waste inktank is detected.)Or

0



Panel messages

5-2.Explanation of panel messages

M03 Operation in temporary regis-tration status

The machine is currently operating under temporary reg-istration.Run Test mode [Conformity check] (5.13.1) while tempo-rary registration status is in effect.It will clear automatically when the temporary registrationperiod expires.

0

M04 Incorrect ink version number Need to replace the inkinformation. No discharging parameter on the mounted ink cartridge.Upgrade the machine program version. 0

M99 Paper dust removal Fan 2Error

The paper dust removal fan 2 is not connected or itscable is cut off.

0


return

Point Type Error detection condition 55 50

001 S96 Power supply remote signal not connectedThe control signal cable for the ON/OFF control of the 24/38-VDC output is disconnected. The sig-nal wire grounded inside the power supply unit has been pulled up by the IP PCB to detect the

level.

0 0

003 S97 38-VDC power supply voltage error A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed by the IP PCB based on the signalresulting from dividing the 38-VDC resistance inside the power supply unit. The detection level isapproximately 18 VDC.Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a volt-age drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec). No detection is performed when theinterlock SW is open.

0 0

004 S97 24-VDC power supply voltage error A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed by the IP PCB based on the signalresulting from dividing the 24-VDC resistance inside the power supply unit. The detection level isapproximately 11 VDC.Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a volt-age drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec). No detection is performed when theinterlock SW is open.

0 0

006 S97 3.3-VDC power supply voltage error A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed in the 3.3-VDC power supply on the MIPside of the IP PCB.Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a volt-age drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec).

0 0

007 S97 1.8-VDC power supply voltage error A voltage drop is detected when a voltage drop is sensed in the 1.8-VDC power supply on the MIPside of the IP PCB.Voltage polling is conducted at 100-ms intervals by the IP-CPU. An error is detected when a volt-age drop is sensed 10 times in succession (approx. 1 sec).

0 0

008 S96 Control panel not connectedThe absence of the control panel unit to be connected to the MC PCB is detected. Since this con-figuration lacks this panel, this error indication will not be issued under normal operating circum-stances.

0 0

009 S96 Print counter not connectedThe absence of a print counter is detected. 0 0

011 S96 CIS PCB not connectedThe connection of the CIS PCB cannot be confirmed.

0 0

012 S96 IP PCB not connected (communication error)The IP PCB is not connected.Since the MC PCB receives i ts power from the IP PCB, this error indication will not be issuedunder normal operating circumstances.This error may be displayed when the connector is put aslant.

0 0

013 S96 K head driver PCB not connectedThe connection of the K color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detectionsignal.

0 0

014 S96 C head driver PCB not connectedThe connection of the C color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detectionsignal.

0 0

015 S96 M head driver PCB not connectedThe connection of the M color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detectionsignal.

0 0



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

016 S96 Y head driver PCB not connectedThe connection of the Y color head driver PCB cannot be confirmed with the connection detectionsignal.

0 0

017 S98 Control panel LCD error An error was detected in the panel LCD drive chip. Since the LCD driver will not operate when thiserror occurs, this error indication will not be issued under normal operating circumstances.

0 0

018 S98 K head driver PCB error

Head Driver PCB error is indicated when: A head driver PCB configuration error has occurred. A failure by the MIP to respond to a data request from the head driver PCB has been detected. A communication error between the head driver PCB and IP has been detected.

0 0

019 S98 C head driver PCB error Same as when detecting a K head driver PCB error.

0 0

020 S98 M head driver PCB error Same as when detecting a K head driver PCB error.

0 0

021 S98 Y head driver PCB error Same as when detecting a K head driver PCB error.

0 0

022 S98 MC PCB FPGA program error Improper operation of the FPGA program on the MC PCB was detected.

0 0

023 S98 IP PCB MIP program error.MIP configuration on the main PCB failed.

0 0

024 S98 IP PCB SPLD program error SPLD configuration on the main PCB failed.

0 0

025 S99 For debugging: A DC startup report does not arrive from the IP-CPU within the specified time.

0 0

026 S99 For debugging:The IP-CPU does not respond to the sensor monitor demand from the MC-CPU.

0 0

027 S99 For debugging:The IP-CPU does not respond to the SQR from the MC-CPU.

0 0

028 S96 ORCNL PCB on machine left side not connectedThe connection of the ORCNL PCB on the machine left side cannot be confirmed.

0 0

029 S98 HC Control PCB time-outThe Busy signal on the HC control PCB will not be deactivated upon the start of communicationfrom the MC PCB.

0 0

030 M01 Maintenance callMaintenance count reached the maximum at machine ON or at end of print job.

* The maintenance count is set by the Test Mode.

0 0

031 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 1Multi-tray paper feed power line error

0 0

032 S99 Multi-tray paper feed time-outThe machine status command transmitted from the paper feed device on the base was outsidethe specified range (phase error).Or the [Preparation complete] status command was not received within the specified interval afterreceiving the [Preparing] status command.

0 0

033 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 1The machine status command was not received from the paper feed device on the base within thespecified interval (when the paper feed device on the base does not respond).

0 0

034 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 2Base paper feed initialization information completion command was not received within the speci-fied time of 1 second after the base paper feed initialization command was issued.

0 0

035 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 3Test mode status information could not be transmitted during communications with the auto fencetest mode function within the specified interval.

0 0

036 S99 Auto fence communication error A Test mode status command was not received before the elapse of the specified interval after thetransmission of the Test mode execution command.

0 0

037 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 2Multi-tray paper feed communication transmission error

0 0

038 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 3Multi-tray paper feed communication reception break error

0 0

039 S99 Multi-tray paper feed communication error 4Multi-tray paper feed communication transmission buffer error

0 0

040 S98 R/W PCB failure 1Initial communication with the R/W PCB failed.

0 0

041 S98 R/W PCB failure 2Run signal time-out

0 0

042 S96 R/W PCB failure 3Connection signal time-out (The PCB is not connected )

0 0




Panel messages

043 S96 HC Control PCB not connectedThe connection of the HC Control PCB cannot be confirmed.(The HC Control PCB READY signal cannot be confirmed when the IP PCB is powered on.)

0 0

044 S99 HC Control PCB communication error (time-out error) A command from the HC Control PCB was not received during the HC Control-MC communica-tion within the specified interval.

0 0

045 S95 Download error (HC Control PCB detection)

An error was detected on the HC Control PCB during a download.

0 0

046 S95 or S94

Download error (IP PCB detection) An error was detected on the IP (Image Processing) PCB side during a download.

0 0

047 S95 Download error (MC PCB detection) An error was detected on the MC (Mechanical Control) PCB during a download.

0 0

048 S99 FRAM checksum error FRAM checksum error of the HC Control PCB

0 0

049 S99 FRAM read verify error The data does not match data read from the FRAM of the HC Control PCB.

0 0

050 S99 FRAM write verify error The data does not match data written to the FRAM of the HC Control PCB.

0 0

051 M03 Operation in temporary registration statusThe main unit is currently operating under temporary registration.

0 0

052 S98 Date/time setting error The date/time is not set correctly.The clock is set with a date predating the PLIP firmware release date.Or the clock is set with a date postdating the year 2030.

0 0

053 S99 FRAM access error The FRAM of the HC Control PCB could not be accessed normally.

0 0

054 S95 Error in the downloaded data.Error in the downloading data received.

0 0

055 S99 Machine information software error.Error detected by the HC Control PCB while processing the machine type data.

0 0

056 S99 Machine software error (debug error) 0 0

057 S99 Communication error between IP-MC PCBs.Error between IP-MC PCBs during communication.

0 0

058 S98 Error on NVRAM.Error with NVRAM on the machine.

0 0

061 S98 Option connection inappropriate (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker) Connected finisher type not defined. Both the Auto Fence and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker are connected concurrently.

0 0

062 S99 Incorrect IP-MC PCBs versionIP-MC PCBs version is incorrect.

0 x

063 S99 Error on Finisher resumption informationSince there is the error on Finisher resumption information from HC control PCB, IP can notrestart printing.

0 x

064 S98 Incorrect controller versionHC5500 is equipped with the controller for HC5000.

0 x

065 S98 Incorrect NVRAMIP PCB is equipped with the NVRAM for HC5000.

0 x

100 S12 Exit motor encoder error The encoder frequency input from the exit motor unit deviates from the theoretical value.

0 0

101 S98 Multiple feed sensor error A change in light intensity does not change the amount of light received at power ON or during initialization to reset a multiple feed error.* This error can be cleared by the panel setting [Multiple feed detection OFF].

0 0

102 S12 Wing motor time-outThe wings do not reach the HP when they are operated for a period of time corresponding to thedistance of travel.

0 0

103 S12 Wing motor time-outThe wing HP sensor does not detect the movement of the wings from the HP when they are oper-ated for the specified interval.

0 0

104 S02 Elevator motor time-outThe upper limit sensor fails to activate when the elevator rising operation is activated within thespecified interval.

0 0

105 X14 Standard paper feed tray multiple feed

A multiple feed was detected during transport of paper from the standard paper feed tray.

0 0

106 X01 Standard paper feed tray feed failure (no paper transport)The registration sensor fails to activate when the specified number of clock inputs is issued fromthe belt encoder after paper transport from the standard paper feed tray begins

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

107 X03 Exit sensor paper end exiting delayThe trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the exit sensor (sensor detecting the presenceof paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

108 X02 Jammed paper at registration sensor section when the cover is closedThe registration sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which thepaper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.

0 0

109 X03 Jammed paper at exit sensor section when the cover is closed

The exit sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which the papertransport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.

0 0

110 W02 No paper in standard paper feed trayThe standard paper feed tray is empty when it is selected as the feed tray.

0 0

111 Z11 Standard paper feed tray elevator upper limit SW detectionThe upper limit SW for the standard paper feed tray is turned ON.

0 0

112 Z11 Standard paper feed tray overfil ledThe upper limit sensor and lower limit sensor are turned ON simultaneously for more than 1 sec-ond.IN test mode operation, this error is detected only at power ON or during a standard paper feedtray moving operation.

0 0

113 S96 Pickup clutch not connectedThe connection of the pickup clutch cannot be confirmed.

0 0

114 S96 Registration clutch not connectedThe connection of the registration clutch cannot be confirmed.

0 0

115 S96 Registration brake not connectedThe connection of the registration brake cannot be confirmed.

0 0

116 W01 No paper All feed trays are empty.

0 0

117 W05 No paper (auto)None of the trays contain the required type of paper when auto feed tray is selected.

x 0

118 W06 No separation sheets inserted between print jobsThe separation paper feed tray has run out of paper during a sorting operation.Or the separation paper feed tray is empty at the beginning of a sorted printing operation.

0 0

119 S02 Elevator motor time-outThe lower limit sensor fails to activate during a standard paper feed tray lowering operation withinthe specified interval.

0 0

120 Z11 Standard paper feed tray elevator lower limit SW detectionThe lower limit SW for the standard paper feed tray is turned ON.

0 0

121 S96 Dust fan 1 not connectedConnection of dust fan 1 cannot be confirmed.

0 0

122 S96 Dust fan 2 not connectedConnection of dust fan 2 cannot be confirmed.

0 0

123 W21 Selected paper size does not exist.(The error message comes out when auto-tray selection is ON).

0 0

124 W22 Selected paper size does not exist.(The error message comes out when a tray is manually selected).

0 0

125 W23 The selected original size cannot be used. 0 0126 W40 Envelope duplex printing selection error.

Duplex or face-down printing is selected for the envelopes.Or duplex or face-down printing is selected with auto-tray selection selected to ON and all thetrays are registered as for envelopes.

0 x

127 W41 Duplex printing not allowed (mixed original sizes).

The original size for front and back of the print is different.

0 x

128 W42 Mixed paper size error.One or more of the following selection is incorrect. * The paper size combination must be A4R&A3,

B5R&B4, Letter&Ledger. * Auto tray must be selected. * Z-folding must be selected for the larger of the paper. * Mixed paper size must be selected to ON.

0 x

129 W40 In correct envelope size.With HC-Finisher connected in envelope printing, the total length of the paper registered, includingthe envelope margin is over 488mm. (Menu 5.1 + Menu 5.8.26).

0 x

130 W40 HC-Finisher paper ejection tray selection error with envelope printing.The [Top Tray] was not selected for the receiving tray for the envelopes.

0 x

200 S03 Transfer belt motor time-outThe motor shaft encoder of the transfer belt motor does not attain the specified pulse count withinthe specified time.The required movement does not complete even when the transfer belt motor operates for thespecified interval.

0 0




Panel messages

201 S03 Transfer belt unit sensor error The three sensors that determine the position of the belt platen produced an abnormal detectionresult.

0 0

202 S01 Transfer belt motor error An alarm signal from the DC servo motor was detected (detection of over-current during opera-tions).

0 0

203 S01 Transfer belt motion speed error

The clock frequency of the belt motor shaft encoder falls outside the specified range.

0 0

204 S01 Belt encoder error The frequency input from the belt encoder is below the specified value.

0 0

205 S96 Blower fan 1 disconnected/not connectedThe connector for blower fan 1 is disconnected, or there is a break in the winding.

0 0


0 0


0 0


0 0

209 X07 Duplex re-feed unit failureThe registration sensor fails to activate when the specified number of clock inputs is issued fromthe belt encoder after paper is re-fed for duplex printing.

0 0

210 X02 Registration sensor paper end exiting delayThe trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the registration sensor within the specifiedinterval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

211 X02 Top edge sensor paper leading edge arrival delayThe leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the top edge sensor (sensor does not detectthe presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

212 X02 Top edge sensor paper end exiting delayThe trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the top edge sensor (sensor detecting thepresence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

213 X02 Exit sensor paper leading edge arrival delayThe leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the exit sensor (sensor does not detect thepresence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

214 X04 Flipper sensor paper leading edge arrival delayThe leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the flipper sensor (sensor does not detect thepresence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

215 X04 Flipper sensor paper end exiting delayThe trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the flipper sensor (sensor detecting the pres-ence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

216 X04 Flipper sensor unknown paper detectionThe flipper sensor detects the presence of paper within the specified interval based on the beltencoder pulse count even though paper has been discharged to the exit tray.

0 0

217 X04 Duplex belt front sensor paper leading edge arrival delayThe leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the duplex belt front sensor (sensor does notdetect the presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

218 X04 Duplex belt front sensor paper end exiting delayThe trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the duplex belt front sensor (sensor detectingthe presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

219 X05 Duplex belt rear sensor paper leading edge arrival delayThe leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the duplex belt rear sensor (sensor does not

detect the presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

220 X05 Duplex belt rear sensor paper end exiting delayThe trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the duplex belt rear sensor (sensor detectingthe presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

221 X05 Switchback sensor paper leading edge arrival delay (in paper vacuum positioning operation)The leading edge of the paper sheet does not reach the switchback sensor (sensor does notdetect the presence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

222 X06 Switchback sensor paper end exiting delay (in paper vacuum positioning operation)The trailing edge of the paper sheet does not pass the switchback sensor (sensor detecting thepresence of paper) within the specified interval based on the belt encoder pulse count.

0 0

223 X02 Paper lift detectionThe paper emerge detection sensor at the transfer belt entrance section detected paper duringprinting.

0 0

224 X02 Jammed paper at top edge sensor section when the cover is closedThe top edge sensor detects the presence of paper when the cover is closed or during the interval

in which the paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.

0 0

225 X04 Jammed paper at flipper sensor section when the cover is closedThe flipper sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which the paper

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

X04 Jammed paper at duplex belt front sensor section when the cover is closedThe duplex belt front sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in whichthe paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.

0 0

227 X05 Jammed paper at duplex belt rear sensor section when the cover is closedThe duplex belt rear sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in whichthe paper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.

0 0

228 X06 Jammed paper at switchback sensor section when the cover is closed

The switchback sensor detects paper when the cover is closed or during the interval in which thepaper transport roller idling is controlled when the cover is closed.

0 0

229 Z07 Flipper cover not setThe flipper cover is not set.

0 0

230 Z06 Switchback unit not setThe switchback unit is not set.

0 0

231 S03 Belt platen operation error 1The HP position sensor fails to activate when the belt platen is operated.

0 0

232 S96 Belt platen elevator clutch not connectedThe connection of the belt platen elevator clutch cannot be confirmed.

0 0

233 S96 Gate solenoid not connectedThe connection of the gate solenoid cannot be confirmed.

0 0

234 S96 Duplex transport not connectedThe connection of the duplex transport unit cannot be confirmed.

0 0

235 S96 Re-feed pickup clutch not connectedThe connection of the re-feed pickup clutch cannot be confirmed.

0 0

236 S96 Re-feed brake not connectedThe connection of the re-feed brake cannot be confirmed.

0 0

237 Z05 Left front cover not setThe left front cover is detected as not set.

0 0

238 Z05 Right front cover not setThe right front cover is detected as not set.

0 0

239 S96 Switchback clutch not connectedThe connection of the switchback clutch cannot be confirmed.

0 0

240 S03 Belt platen operation error 2The HP position sensor fails to deactivate when the belt platen is operated.

0 0

241 S03 Belt platen operation error 3The lower limit position sensor fails to activate when the belt platen lowers.

0 0

242 S03 Belt platen operation error 4

The lower limit position sensor fails to deactivate when the belt platen rises.

0 0

243 S03 Belt platen operation error 5The vacuum positioning sensor fails to activate when the belt platen operates.

0 0

244 S03 Belt platen operation error 6The vacuum positioning sensor fails to deactivate when the belt platen operates.

0 0

245 S98 Error in Image AdjustmentPaper size used in Image Adjustment is out of the range.Or the scanned data by the CCD is wrong (out of the range).

0 0

246 S96 Wire not connected to suction fan No.5. 0 x247 S96 Wire not connected to suction fan No.6. 0 x

248 S03 BP spacer movement error 1The BP spacer HP sensor is OFF when the BP spacer should have moved to HP position.

0 x

249 S03 BP spacer movement error 2The BP spacer HP sensor is ON when the BP spacer should have moved out of HP position.

0 x

250 S03 BP spacer movement error 3When the BP spacer should have moved to the NORMAL paper position (moved to the left), thelimit sensor does not go ON.

0 x

251 S03 BP spacer movement error 4When the BP spacer should have moved out from the NORMAL paper position towards the HPposition (moved to the right), the limit sensor does not go OFF.

0 x

252 S03 BP spacer movement error 5The left and right BP spacer position detecting sensors are both ON at the same time.

0 x

300 S04 Ink pan motor time-outThe right or left sensor fails to activate within the specified interval.

0 0

301 S04 Ink pan sensor error The right and left sensors activate at the same time.

0 0

302 S04 Cleaning motor time-outThe cleaning motor dose not stop operation within the specified interval.

0 0

303 S04 Suction chamber fullThe suction chamber sensor is turned ON.

0 0

304 S96 Suction chamber sensor not connected 0 0




Panel messages

305 S04 Suction pump rotation speed error The rotation speed of the suction pump falls outside the specified range (checked by the encoderclock frequency for the specified time).

0 0

307 S04 Overflow tank fullInk is detected by the overflow sensor.

0 0

308 S96 Overflow tank not connectedThe connection of the overflow sensor cannot be confirmed.

0 0

309 S96 Cooling fan 1 not connected 0 0310 S96 Cooling fan 2 not connected 0 0311 S05 Disconnection in head thermistor

The head temperature could not be measured correctly.When the reading of the thermistor is -86.9 °C* Head identification information (K1 - Y6) is added after the error point.

0 0

312 S05 Head abnormally hotThe head temperature exceeded 80 °C.When the reading of the thermistor is 80.0 °C* Head identification information (K1 - Y6) is added after the error point.

0 0

313 S05 Head cooling time-outThe temperature remained above 45 °C for 10 minutes.When the monitored head temperature remains 45 °C or more for 10 minutes* Head identification information (K1 - Y6) is added after the error point.

0 0

314 S06 Ink heating time-outWhen the temperature of ink in the distributor meets the following conditions after being heated fora set time:1) & either 2), 3) 4), 5), 6) or 7)1) The temperature is less than 15 °C.2) It takes more than 360 seconds to raise the temperature by 1 °C after the heater has been

powered on.3) It takes more than 600 seconds to raise the temperature by 4 °C after the heater has been



powered on.6) It takes more than 1,320 seconds to raise the temperature by 13 °C after the heater has been

powered on.7) A temperature of less than 15 °C holds for more than 1,800 seconds.* Head identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

315 W99 ID unit low liquid levelLow liquid level is detected in the ID unit of each color ink.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

316 S96 Reservoir not connected* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

317 S96 ID unit air open valve not connected* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

318 S96 Distributor unit not connected* Unit identification information (KC, MY) is added after the error point.

0 0

319 S07 Ink cooling time-outThe temperature of ink being distributed remains 40 °C for five minutes.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

320 S98 Head voltage error

The difference of the head voltage set as DA and the head voltage acquired from AD is over 5V.* Head identification information (K1 - Y6) is added after the error point.

0 0

321 S04 Pressure pump motor time-outThe logic of the pressure pump sensor (detection at motor 180-degree intervals) does not changeeven when the pressure pump motor is driven for a certain time period.

0 0

322 S96(Z12)

Waste ink tank not installedThe waste ink tank is not installed.

0 0

323 S14(Y02)

Water ink tank fullThe waste ink tank is detected as full.

0 0

324 M02 Waste ink tank near-fullThe waste ink tank is almost full.

0 0

325 Z04 Ink bottle cover not setThe ink bottle cover is detected as not set.

0 0

326 Z13 Ink passage opening failure

The ink open sensor fails to activate when the ink fuse solenoid activates.The ink open sensor fails to activate after the ink fuse solenoid activates even after a full one sec-ond elapsed. After a retry, the ink open sensor fails to activate even after a full one second

l d

x 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

327 Y01 Ink cartridge change 1No ink has been detected during printing or maintenance operation.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

328 Y01 Ink cartridge change 2Ink sensor of the main unit reservoir fails to activate within the specified interval.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

329 Y01 Ink cartridge change 3

No ink has been detected at power ON or when the tag was read after cartridge replacement.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

330 Z01 Ink cartridge not setNo ink cartridge detected.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

331 Z02 Incompatible ink color Wrong ink color detected.* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

332 Z03 Incompatible ink cartridge* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

333 Z03 Ink tag communication error on R/W PCB side (ink check)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

334 Z03 Ink tag communication error on HC Control PCB side (ink check)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

335 Z03 Ink tag communication error, other 1 (ink check)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

336 Z01 Ink tag communication error on R/W PCB side (no tag)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

337 Z01 Ink tag communication error on HC Control PCB side (no tag)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

338 Z01 Ink tag communication error, other 1 (no tag)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

340 S99 Ink tag software error (For debugging)* Ink identification information (K, C, M, Y) is added after the error point.

0 0

341 Z13 Ink open sensor error The ink open sensor deactivates (passage closed) in standby or while printing.

x 0

343 M04 Incorrect ink versionNo discharging parameter on the mounted ink cartridge.

0 0

344 S04 Cleaning motor time-out 2HP sensor does not go ON even after the motor rotates for the specific time period to move thecleaning motor to the front retracting position.

0 0

345 S04 Error on the Cleaning Motor When the cleaning motor rotated, the pulse count was below the parameter after completion ofmoving.

0 0

346 S04 Cleaning motor time-out 3HP sensor does not go OFF even after the motor rotates for the specific time period to move thecleaning motor to the rear.

0 0

347 S98 Print head configuration error Error in setting the print head configuration.

0 0

348 S98 Head PCB power supply error Abnormal power supply is detected on the Head PCB.

0 0

400 S10 FL transfer motor lock (Detailed No. 1: time-out)

There was no input interrupt from the FL transfer motor FG sensor during FL transfer motor oper-ation, even after the specified time elapsed.

0 0

402 S10 Feed tray 1 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 1: time-out)The FL feed tray 1 upper limit sensor fails to activate after the FL feed tray 1 elevator motor turnsON, even after the specified time elapses.* This error can be cleared by opening feed tray 1.

0 0

403 S10 Feed tray 1 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 2: over-current) An over-current was detected in the FL feed tray 1 elevator motor.* This error can be cleared by opening feed tray 1.

0 0

404 S10 Feed tray 2 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 1: time-out)The FL feed tray 2 upper limit sensor fails to activate after the FL feed tray 2 elevator motor turnsON even after the specified time elapses.* This error can be cleared by opening feed tray 2.

0 0

405 S10 Feed tray 2 elevator motor lock (Detailed No. 2: over-current)Over-current was detected in the FL feed tray 2 elevator motor.* This error can be cleared by opening feed tray 2.

0 0




Panel messages

406 S10 Feed tray 1 paper width adjustment parameter error The correction value for the feed tray 1 paper width VR falls outside the specified range.* This error can be cleared by opening the feed tray or opening the cover of the vertical transferunit.

0 0

407 S10 Feed tray 2 paper width adjustment parameter error The correction value for the feed tray 2 paper width VR falls outside the specified range.* This error can be cleared by opening the feed tray or opening the cover of the vertical transferunit.

0 0

408 S10 Multi-tray paper feed multiple feed sensor light emitting intensity error The multiple feed sensor light emitting intensity falls outside the specified range.* This error can be cleared by opening the feed tray or opening the cover of the vertical transferunit.

0 0

409 S10 Multi-tray paper feed EEPROM error Data could not be written correctly to the EEPROM.Or an EEPROM checksum error occurred.* This error can be cleared by opening the feed tray or opening the cover of the vertical transferunit.

0 0

410 Z14 Jam release SW checkThe jam release cover safety SW is OFF.

0 0

411 Z08 Vertical transfer unit door not setThe door of the FL vertical transfer unit is open.

0 0

412 X15 Feed tray 1 multiple feed (transmission light intensity detection)

A multiple feed occurred during paper transport.

0 0

413 X15 Feed tray 1 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s))Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) occurred during paper transport.

0 0

414 X11 Feed tray 1 paper feed failureThe registration sensor fails to activate when the specified number of clock inputs is issued fromthe belt encoder after paper transport from feed tray 1 begins.

0 0

415 X11 Feed tray 2 paper feed failureThe registration sensor fails to activate when the specified number of clock inputs is issued fromthe belt encoder after paper transport from feed tray 2 begins.

0 0

416 X12 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 1: S1)FL transfer sensor 2 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specifiedpulse count after FL feed sensor 1 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensor 1remained activated.)Or

FL feed sensor 1 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

417 X12 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 2: S12)FL transfer sensor 3 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specifiedpulse count after FL feed sensor 2 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors 1and 2 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensors 1 and 2 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

418 X12 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 3: S123)FL transfer sensor 4 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specifiedpulse count after FL feed sensor 3 turned ON during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors 1,2, and 3 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensors 1, 2, and 3 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

419 X13 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 4: S1234)The registration sensor failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the spec-

ified pulse count after FL feed sensor 4 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors1 through 4 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensors 1 through 4 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

420 X13 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 5: S1234R)FL feed sensors 1 through 4 and the registration sensor remained activated in standby mode.

0 0

421 X13 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 6: S2)FL transfer sensor 3 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specifiedpulse count after FL feed sensor 2 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensor 1remained OFF, and FL feed sensor 2 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensor 2 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

422 X12 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 7: S23)FL transfer sensor 4 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specified

pulse count after FL feed sensor 3 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensor 1remained OFF, and FL feed sensors 2 and 3 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensors 2 and 3 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

423 X13 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 8: S234)The registration sensor failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the spec-ified pulse count after FL feed sensor 4 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensor 1remained OFF, and FL feed sensors 2 through 4 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensors 2 through 4 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

424 X13 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 9: S234R)Feed sensors 2 through 4, and the registration sensor remained activated at power ON or instandby mode.

0 0

425 X11 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 10: S3)FL transfer sensor 4 failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the specifiedpulse count after FL feed sensor 3 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors 1and 2 remained OFF, and FL feed sensor 3 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensor 3 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

426 X11 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 11: S34)The registration sensor failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the spec-ified pulse count after FL feed sensor 4 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors1 and 2 remained OFF, and FL feed sensors 3 and 4 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensors 3 and 4 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

427 X11 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 12: S34R)

Feed sensors 3 and 4, and the registration sensor remained activated at power ON or in standbymode.

0 0

428 X11 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 13: S4)The registration sensor failed to activate when the FL transfer motor FG sensor attained the spec-ified pulse count after FL feed sensor 4 activated during a paper feed operation. (FL feed sensors1 through 3 remained OFF, and FL feed sensor 4 remained activated.)Or FL feed sensor 4 remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

429 X11 Multi-tray paper feed jam (Detailed No. 14: S4R)Feed sensor 4 and the registration sensor remained activated at power ON or in standby mode.

0 0

430 X11 Feed tray 1 separation errorThe FL multi-tray pickup sensor activated at the feed tray 1 paper feed timing or on receiving afeed tray setting command.

0 0

431 X09 Feed tray 1 no paper transportFL feed sensor 3 did not turn on when FL feed tray 1 pickup clutch turned ON and the FL transfermotor FG sensor attained the specified pulse count while paper was being fed from feed tray 1.

0 0

432 X10 Feed tray 2 no paper transportFL feed sensor 1 failed to activate when FL feed tray 2 pickup clutch turned ON and the FL trans-fer motor FG sensor attained the specified pulse count while paper was being fed from feed tray 2.

0 0

433 W03 Feed tray 1 no paper Although selected as the current feed tray, feed tray 1 is currently empty.

0 0

434 W04 Feed tray 2 no paper Although selected as the current feed tray, feed tray 2 is currently empty.

0 0

435 Z09 Feed tray 1 is open.The feed tray 1 set SW is OFF (detection of feed tray open).

0 0

436 Z10 Feed tray 2 is open.The feed tray 2 set SW is OFF (detection of feed tray open).

0 0

437 X15 Feed tray 2 multiple feed (transmission light intensity detection) A multiple feed occurred during paper transport.

0 0

438 X15 Feed tray 2 multiple feed error (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s))Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) occurred during paper transport.

0 0

439 X15 Feed tray 1 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) 2)Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (sensor 4 failure) occurred during papertransport.

0 0

440 X15 Feed tray 1 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) 3)Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (abnormal A/D value when postfeed opera-tion is not operating) occurred during paper transport.

0 0

441 X15 Feed tray 2 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) 2)Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (sensor 4 failure) occurred during papertransport.

0 0

442 X15 Feed tray 2 multiple feed (detection of multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) 3)Multiple sheet feed involving dragged trailing sheet(s) (abnormal A/D value when postfeed opera-tion is not operating) occurred during paper transport.

0 0

443 X12 Feed tray 2 separation error The FL transfer sensor 1 activated at the feed tray 2 paper feed timing or on receiving a feed traysetting command.

0 0




Panel messages

444 X11 Release request command time-outRelease request command was not issued by the main unit within the specified interval after noti-fication of completion of paper feeding from a tray.

0 0

500 S09 Auto fence time-out (fence check)[Movement complete] was not received during the fence moving operation within the specifiedinterval.

0 0

501 W07 Paper guide HP reset time-out

The paper guide HP sensor fails to activate during a paper guide HP reset.

0 0

502 W07 Paper guide HP failure time-outThe paper guide HP sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper guide.

0 0

503 W07 Paper guide limit position movement time-outThe paper guide limit sensor fails to activate when the paper guides move to their limit positions.

0 0

504 W07 Paper guide limit position failure time-outThe paper guide limit sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper guide.

0 0

505 W07 Paper stopper HP reset time-outThe paper stopper HP sensor fails to activate during paper stopper HP reset.

0 0

506 W07 Paper stopper HP position failure time-outThe paper stopper HP sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper stopper.

0 0

507 W07 Paper stopper limit position failure time-outThe paper stopper limit sensor fails to activate when the paper stopper moves to its limit position.

0 0

508 W07 Paper stopper limit position failure time-outThe paper stopper limit sensor fails to deactivate during movement of paper stopper.

0 0

509 S16 Paper guide sensor error The paper guide HP sensor and limit sensor have activated simultaneously.

0 0

510 S16 Paper stopper sensor error The paper stopper HP sensor and limit sensor have activated simultaneously.

0 0

511 S08 Controller system error.the controller system is in abnormal condition.

0 0

512 S08 Controller HDD access error.Unable to access to the controller HDD.

0 0

513 W08 Controller HDD full.The controller HDD fully used.

0 0

660 S18 Connected unit Transport Motor lock Transport Motor lock occurred in the connected unit.

0 0

661 S19 Dec. 1Home SNR OFF fail Dec. 1Home SNR does not turn OFF within 300 msec after operation startup.

0 0

662 S19 Dec. 1Home SNR ON fail Dec. 2Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec after detection of Dec. 1Home SNR OFF. Dec. 2Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Dec. 1Home SNR ON.

0 0

663 S20 Punch Home SNR ON fail Punch Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec after operation startup.

0 0

664 S20 Punch Home SNR OFF fail Punch Home SNR does not turn OFF within 100 msec after operation startup.

0 0

665 S20 Puncher Move Home SNR OFF fail Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn OFF within 1000 (100*) msec after operation startup. Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Puncher

Move Home SNR OFF.

0 0

666 S20 Puncher Move Home SNR ON fail Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn ON within 400 (300*500**) msec after operation

startup.

Puncher Move Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following PuncherMove Home SNR ON.

0 0

667 S20 Side Regi. Home SNR OFF fail Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn OFF within 1000 msec after operation startup. Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Side Regi. Home

SNR OFF.

0 0

668 S20 Side Regi. Home SNR ON fail Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 or 300 msec after operation startup. Side Regi. Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Side Regi. Home

SNR ON.

0 0

669 S27 Function combination error Undefined function combination is specified.

0 0

670 S27 Paper output destination error A function that cannot discharge paper to the specified output destination has been selected.

0 0

681 S98 Finisher communication equipment error (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker) Parity, framing, overrun 0 0

682 S98 Adjustment setting failure (writ ing failure) Setting of Finisher adjustment value resulted in a failure

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

685-01 S99 Finisher communication error 1 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. Abnormality occurred in the command sequence. (command sequence error)

0 0

685-02 S99 685-02S99 Finisher communication error 2* Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC.* Undefined command was received. (undefined command reception)

0 0

685-03 S99 Finisher communication error 3

Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. The parameter of the received command does not conform to the standard. (commandparameter error)

0 0

685-04 S99 Finisher communication error 4 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. The length of the received command is abnormal. (command packet length error)

0 0

685-05 S99 Finisher communication error 5 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. The dummy data attached to the received command frame does not conform to the standard.

(command frame data error)

0 0

685-06 S99 Finisher communication error 6 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. The header information (PS, PE) of the received command frame does not conform to the

standard. (command frame header information error 1)

0 0


Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. The header information (EM) of the received emergency command frame does not conform to

the standard. (command frame header information error 2)

0 0

685-08 S99 Finisher communication error 8 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. The header information (other than PS, PE, EM) of the received command frame does not

conform to the standard. (command frame header information error 3)

0 0

685-09 S99 Finisher communication error 9 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. No free space in the receiving buffer when command frame was received. (command frame

receiving buffer full 1)

0 0

685-10 S99 Finisher communication error 10 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. No free space in the receiving buffer when command frame was received. (command frame


0 0

685-11 S99 Finisher communication error 11 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. No free space in the receiving buffer when command packet was received. (command packet


0 0

685-12 S99 Finisher communication error 12 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the PRH and HC. No free space in the receiving buffer when command packet was received. (command packet


0 0

686-01 S99 Finisher communication error 1 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher. Problem occurred in the command sequence. (command sequence error)HC Auto Stacker Break signal received and initial communication cannot be made when the power is turned ON.

Command was not received in correct sequence timing. No reply from HC Auto Stacker within 200ms after its power is turned ON. The firmware version number is not replied back within 200 ms. Ready reply is not replied back from HC Auto Stacker within 400ms after power is turned ON. Energy saving mode is not replied back from HC Auto Stacker within 500ms from power ON. No reply from HC Auto Stacker against the command given. Command sequence error. Large amount of data is received at one time (buffer full in data receiving). Large amount of data is sent at one time (buffer full in data sending).

0 0

686-02 S99 Finisher communication error 2 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker) Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker. Undefined command was received. (undefined command reception)

0 0

686-03 S99 Finisher communication error 3 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher No reply from HC Finisher within 40 ms for two consecutive tries.HC Auto Stacker No reply from HC Finisher within 100 ms for two consecutive tries.

0 0




Panel messages

686-04 S99 Finisher communication error 4 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker) Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker. No ACK was received within the specified interval after command transmission. (ACK reception

timeout)

0 0

686-05 S99 Finisher communication error 5 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher The sequence bit of the received ACK does not conform to the standard. (ACK sequence bit

error)HC Auto Stacker After confirming the HC Auto Stacker power ON, the first data frame identification received is

not odd number.

0 0

686-06 S99 Finisher communication error 6 Communication error occurred between the PRH and Finisher. The sequence bit of command received by the PRH does not conform to the standard.

(received command sequence bit error)

0 0

686-07 S99 Finisher communication error 7 Communication error occurred between the PRH and Finisher. The checksum of the command received by the PRH does not conform to the standard.

(command packet checksum error)

0 0

686-08 S99 Finisher communication error 8 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher The length of the command received by the HC Control PCB does not conform to the standard.

(command packet length error)HC Auto Stacker The length of the data frame received by the HC Control PCB does not conform to the standard.

0 0

686-09 S99 Finisher communication error 9 Communication error occurred between the PRH and Finisher. The packet structure of the synchronization sequence received by the PRH does not conform to

the standard. (syn packet error)

0 0

686-10 S99 Finisher communication error 10 Communication error occurred between the PRH and Finisher. No ACK was received within the specified interval following transmission by the PRH of the

synchronization sequence packet. (syn reception timeout)

0 0

686-11 S99 Finisher communication error 11 Communication error occurred between the PRH and Finisher. The Finisher ACK for the synchronization sequence packet transmitted by the PRH does not

conform to the standard. (syn sequence error)

0 0

686-12 S99 Finisher communication error 12 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker) Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker. No free space in the transmitting buffer when command was transmitted by the HC Control

PCB. (transmitting buffer full)

0 0

686-13 S99 Finisher communication error 13 (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker) Communication error occurred between the HC Control PCB and Finisher or HC Auto Stacker. No free space in the receiving buffer when command was received by the HC Control PCB.

(receiving buffer full)

0 0

687-01 S99 RH internal error 1 Error occurred inside the PRH control program.

0 0

688-01 S99 Finisher communication error 1 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Connected unit notification command (XH-90) reception timeout.

0 0


Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Unit configuration notification command (XH-91) reception timeout.

0 0

688-03 S99 Finisher communication error 3 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Cycle-down completion notification command (XH-BF) reception timeout.

0 0

688-04 S99 Finisher communication error 4 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Process interruption completion notification command (XH-BD) reception timeout.

0 0

688-05 S99 Finisher communication error 5 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Header information (PS, PE) for received command frame does not conform to the standard.

(command frame header information error)

0 0

688-06 S99 Finisher communication error 6 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH.

The length of the received command is invalid. (command packet length error)

0 0

688-07 S99 Finisher communication error 7 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. The parameter of the PRH information command (PH-B0) is invalid

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

688-08 S99 Finisher communication error 8 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Test mode notification command (XH-D0 through D3) reception timeout.

0 0

688-09 S99 Finisher communication error 9 Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Reset information notification command (XH-BC) reception timeout.

0 0


Error occurred in Finisher-related communications between the HC and PRH. Undefined command was received. (undefined command reception)

0 0

689-01 S99 Finisher error 1 The finisher's firmware download is required. The finisher can start only in firmware download mode.

0 x

689-02 S99 Finisher error 2 (HC Auto Stacker only) Inappropriate command data. HC Auto Stacker does not accept the action command given from HC5500.

600 U03 Side Regi. SNR OFF fail Side Regi. SNR does not turn OFF within 500 msec of start of operation. Side Regi. SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Side Regi. SNR OFF.

0 0

601 U04 Compile Stacker Tray offset fail Stacker Front Position SNR does not turn ON within 500 msec of start of operation. Stacker Front Position N SNR does not turn ON within 500 msec of start of operation.

0 0

602 U04 Tamper Home SNR OFF fail

Tamper Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Tamper Home SNROFF.

0 0

603 U04 Tamper Home SNR ON fail Tamper Home SNR does not turn ON within 800 msec of start of operation.

0 0

604 U04 End Wall Home SNR OFF fail End Wall Home SNR does not turn OFF within 100 msec of start of operation.

0 0

605 U04 End Wall Open SNR ON fail End Wall Open SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation.

0 0

606 U04 End Wall Home SNR ON fail End Wall Home SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation.

0 0

607 U04 End Wall Open SNR OFF fail End Wall Open SNR does not turn OFF within 100 msec of start of operation.

0 0

608 U04 Eject Clamp Up SNR OFF fail Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn OFF within 300 msec of start of operation.

Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Eject Clamp UpSNR OFF.

0 0

609 U04 Eject Clamp Up SNR ON fail Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation. Eject Clamp Up SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Eject Clamp Up

SNR ON.

0 0

610 U04 Shelf Home SNR OFF fail Shelf Home SNR does not turn OFF within 300 msec of start of operation. Shelf Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Shelf Home SNR

OFF.

0 0

611 U04 Shelf Home SNR ON fail Shelf Home SNR does not turn ON within 300 msec of start of operation. Shelf Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Shelf Home SNR ON.

0 0

612 U04 Stapler fail Stable Home SNR OFF → ON not detected within 450 msec of forward operation startup.

Stapler Head Home SNR does not turn ON at least once within 200 msec of Staple Mot reverserotation.

0 0

613 U04 Staple Move Home SNR OFF fail Staple Move Home SNR does not turn OFF within 150 msec of start of operation. Staple Move Home SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Staple Move

Home SNR OFF.

0 0

614 U04 Staple Move Home SNR ON fail Staple Move Home SNR does not turn ON within 3000 msec of start of operation. Staple Move Home SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Staple Move

Home SNR ON.

0 0

615 U04 Staple Center Position SNR ON fai l Staple Center Position SNR does not turn ON within 3000 (200*) msec of start of operation. Staple Center Position SNR does not turn ON after operation termination following Staple

Center Position SNR ON.

0 0

616 U04 Staple Center Position SNR OFF fail Staple Center Position SNR does not turn OFF within 150 msec of start of operation. Staple Center Position SNR does not turn OFF after operation termination following Staple

0 0




Panel messages

617 U04 Sub Paddle Home SNR ON fail Sub Paddle Home SNR does not turn ON within 800 msec of detection of Sub Paddle Home

SNR OFF.

0 0

618 U04 Sub Paddle Home SNR OFF fail Sub Paddle Home SNR does not turn ON within 3000 msec of start of operation.

0 0

619 U05 Interposer Tray up fail Level Down SNR does not turn OFF within TBD msec of the start of the Interposer Tray U/D

MOT lifting operation.

0 0

620 U06 End Guide MOT1 start fail End Guide Home SNR1 does not turn OFF within 40 msec of End Guide MOT1 start operation

following movement of the End Guide1 from the home position.

0 0

621 U06 End Guide MOT2 start fail End Guide Home SNR2 does not turn OFF within 40 msec of End Guide MOT2 start operation


0 0

622 U06 End Guide MOT1 home fail End Guide Home SNR1 does not turn ON within TBD msec of End Guide MOT1 start operation


0 0

623 U06 End Guide MOT2 home fail End Guide Home SNR2 does not turn ON within TBD msec of End Guide MOT2 start operation


0 0

624 U06 Envelope Folder Tray broken Envelop Tray Interlock SW does not turn OFF within the preset interval following Tray Latch

Solenoid ON.

0 0

625 U08 Stacker Tray fail Stack Height SNR does not turn OFF within 500 msec of start of descent operation. Tray Height SNR Lower does not turn ON within 5000 msec of start of lifting operation.

0 0

626 U08 Stacker Tray upper limit fail Upper Limit SW ON detected after the Stacker Tray begins rising.

0 0

627 U08 Stacker Tray lower limit fail Upper Limit SW ON detected after the Stacker Tray begins lowering.

0 0

628 U09 Booklet Tamper F Home SNR ON fail Tamper F Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec of Mot ON when the Booklet Tamper

F returns to the home position.

0 0

629 U09 Booklet Tamper F Home SNR OFF fail Tamper F Home SNR does not turn OFF even when the Booklet Tamper F MOT outputs 75

pulses.

0 0

630 U09 Booklet End Guide Home SNR OFF fail Booklet End Guide Home SNR does not turn OFF even when 400 pulses are output after the

Booklet End Guide MOT starts.

0 0

631 U09 Booklet End Guide Home SNR ON fail Booklet End Guide Home SNR does not turn ON within 2000 msec of Mot ON when the Booklet

End Guide returns to the home position.

0 0

632 U09 Booklet Tamper R Home SNR ON fail Tamper R Home SNR does not turn ON within 1000 msec of Mot ON when the Booklet Tamper

R returns to the home position.

0 0

633 U09 Booklet Tamper R Home SNR OFF fail Tamper R Home SNR does not turn OFF even when the Booklet Tamper R MOT outputs 75

pulses.

0 0

634 U09 Booklet Knife Folding SNR fail Booklet Folding SNR does not turn ON within 520 msec of Flapper SOL ON when the Booklet

Knife is engaged in a folding operation.

0 0

635 U09 Booklet Drawer broken fail Booklet Drawer SNR OPEN detected when Finisher Front Door interlock is closed.

0 0

636 U09 Booklet Knife Home SNR ON fail Home SNR does not turn ON within 900 msec of Flapper SOL ON when the Booklet Knife

returns to the home position. Knife Home SNR is OFF while the Knife is engaged in a folding operation for a booklet.

0 0

637 U09 Booklet Knife Home SNR OFF fail Home SNR does not turn OFF within 150 msec of Flapper SOL ON when the Booklet Knife is

moving away from the position.

0 0

638 U09 Booklet Stapler fail Stapler Ready signal does not change to Not Ready within the preset interval after Booklet

Staple Start signal ON. (= Stapler does not operate) Error signal ON or Ready signal OFF from Stapler detected during Stapler power ON check

processing in power ON or interlock close.

Ready signal remains at Not Ready status within the specified interval after detection of StaplerNG, or Error signal turns ON.

Error signal turns ON immediately before a Staple command is issued.

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

690 Z15 The Paper Jam Release Cover of the connected unit is open. Detection of open status for Paper Jam Release Cover of the connected unit

0 0

691 Z16 Door interlock open (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher I/F Module front door interlock open.HC Auto Stacker Door open detected on HC Auto Stacker.

0 0

692 Z17 Booklet Drawer set fail Detection of open status for Booklet Drawer. 0 0

693 Z18 Finisher Front Door interlock open Detection of open status for the Finisher Front Door SW Finisher Front Door SW OFF.

0 0

694 Z19 Interposer Top Cover open Detection of open status for the Interposer Top Cover SW 24V.

0 0

695 Z20 3-fold Tray not set he 3-fold Tray is not set.

0 0

696 Z21 HC Auto Stacker docking released (HC Auto Stacker only) HC Auto Stacker is not docked onto HC5500.

700 X16 Paper not arriving to the connected unit (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher The Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher does not detect paper from HC

printer within the given time.

HC Auto Stacker The Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker does not detect paper from HC5500 within the

give time.

0 0

701 X16 Paper jam before connected unit sensor 2 0 0

702 X17 Dec. In SNR ON jam Dec. In SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

703 X17 Dec. Out SNR ON jam Dec. Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

704 X18 Punch Out SNR ON jam Punch Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

705 X18 Punch Out SNR OFF jam Punch Out SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

706 X18 Buffer Path SNR ON jam Buffer Path SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

707 X18 Buffer Path SNR OFF jam Buffer Path SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

708 X19 Compile Exit SNR ON jam Compile Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

709 X19 Compile Exit SNR OFF jam Compile Exit SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

710 X19 Set Eject jam Compile Paper SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

711 X19 Eject SNR ON jam Eject SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

712 X19 Eject SNR OFF jam Eject SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

713 X20 Interposer Feed Out SNR ON jam Interposer Feed Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

714 X20 Interposer Exit (Dec. Out SNR) ON jam When using Interposer, Dec. Out SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

715 X20 Interposer Feed Out SNR OFF jam Interposer Feed Out SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

716 X21 Folder Ent SNR ON jam Folder Ent SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

717 X21 Folder Ent SNR OFF jam Folder Ent SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

718 X21 Folder Exit SNR ON jam Folder Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

719 X21 Folder Path SNR-2 ON jam Folder Path SNR-2 does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

720 X21 Folder Path SNR-3 ON jam Folder Path SNR-3 does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

721 X21 Folder Path SNR-3 OFF jam Folder Path SNR-3 does not turn OFF within the specified interval. 0 0

722 X21 Folder Path SNR-4 ON jamF ld P th SNR 4 d t t ON ithi th ifi d i t l

0 0




Panel messages

723 X22 Top Tray Exit SNR ON jam Top Tray Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

724 X22 Top Tray Exit SNR OFF jam Top Tray Exit SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

725 X24 Booklet In SNR ON jam Booklet In SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

726 X24 Booklet In SNR OFF jam 1

Booklet In SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval. Booklet In SNR OFF detected for the first sheet of the next booklet before the Booklet Exit SNRturns OFF for the previous set. (reverse rotation prevention measure)

0 0

727 X24 Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR ON jam Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR does not turn ON within the specified interval.

0 0

728 X24 Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR OFF jam Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR does not turn OFF within the specified interval.

0 0

730 X16 Paper jam detected on the connected unit (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher The paper detected by the Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher stays

detected by the sensor even after a given time has passed. The Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher keeps detecting the paper even

after the paper transfer is finished. The Paper IN Sensor of the transfer unit on the HC Finisher detected a paper when its top cover

is opened.

HC Auto Stacker The paper detected by the Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker stays detected by the sen-

sor even after a given time has passed. The Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker keeps detecting the paper even after the paper

transfer is finished. The Paper IN Sensor of the HC Auto Stacker detected a paper when its top cover is opened.

0 0

731 X16 Paper is detected on Connected Unit SNR 2. 0 0732 X17 Paper remain at Dec. In SNR

Paper detected by the Dec. In SNR.0 0

733 X17 Paper remain at Dec. Out SNR Paper detected by the Dec. Out SNR.

0 0

734 X18 Paper remain at Punch Out SNR Paper detected by the Punch Out SNR.

0 0

735 X18 Paper remain at Buffer Path SNR

Paper detected by the Buffer Path SNR.

0 0

736 X19 Paper remain at Compile Exit SNR Paper detected by the Compile Exit SNR.

0 0

737 X19 Paper remain at Set Compile Tray No Paper SNR Paper detected by the Set Compile Tray No Paper SNR.

0 0

738 X19 Paper remain at Eject SNR Paper detected by the Eject SNR.

0 0

739 X20 Paper remain at Interposer exit (Dec. Out SNR) When using Interposer, paper detected by the Dec. Out SNR.

0 0

740 X20 Paper remain at Interposer Feed Out SNR Paper detected by the Interposer Feed Out SNR.

0 0

741 X21 Paper remain at Folder Ent SNR Paper detected by the Folder Ent SNR.

0 0

742 X21 Paper remain at Folder Exit SNR

Paper detected by the Folder Exit SNR.

0 0

743 X21 Paper remain at Folder Path SNR-1 Paper detected by the Folder Path SNR-1.

0 0


0 0


0 0


0 0

747 X22 Paper remain at Top Tray Exit SNR Paper detected by the Top Tray Exit SNR.

0 0

748 X24 Paper remain at Booklet Compile No Paper SNR Paper detected by the Booklet Compile No Paper SNR.

0 0

749 X24 Paper remain at Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR Paper detected by the Booklet Folder Roll Exit SNR.

0 0

760-01 Y03 The punch dust box is almost full. Every 10,000 sheets processed by puncher.

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

760-02 Y03 The punch dust box is almost full. The status of consumables in the Puncher Unit information display produces a "Discard punch

dust" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode is ON.

0 0

761-01 Y04 Staple holder almost empty Low staple levels detected by Low Staple Sensor. (around 20 staples remain)

0 0

761-02 Y04 Staple holder almost empty The status of consumables in the Stapler Unit information display produces a "Replace staples

(replenish)" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode is ON.

0 0

762-01 Y05 Booklet staple holder almost empty (front side) Low staple levels detected by Stapler Low Stable F Switch.

0 0

762-02 Y05 Booklet staple holder almost empty (front side) The status of consumables in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Replace staples

on the front side (replenish)" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print modeis ON.

0 0

763-01 Y05 Booklet staple holder almost empty (rear side) Low staple levels detected by Stapler Low Stable R Switch.

0 0

763-02 Y05 Booklet staple holder almost empty (rear side) The status of consumables in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Replace staples

on the rear side (replenish)" prompt when the current job is completed or when the print mode isON.

0 0

770-01 W09 No paper on Cover Tray No paper is detected by the Interposer No Paper Sensor when cover paper is inserted.

0 0

770-02 W09 No paper on Cover Tray The amount of ejected paper in the Cover Tray information display produces a "Add paper (no

paper)" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or whenoperations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

771-01 W10 Top Tray loading capacity l imit Full status detected by Top Tray Full SNR. Approximately 500 sheets have been output to the Top Tray. (The actual amount will vary with

paper type.)

0 0

771-02 W10 Top Tray loading capacity l imit The amount of ejected paper in the Top Tray information display produces a "Remove paper"

prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operationsresume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

772-01 W11 Loading capacity limit on the tray during normal paper ejection (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)HC Finisher

Approximately 2000 sheets of A4 LEF size or approximately 1500 of A3 SEF size have beenoutput to the Stacker Tray. (The actual amount will vary with paper type.)HC Auto Stacker The offset tray of the HC Auto Stacker is detected to be full.

0 0

772-02 W11 Loading capacity limit on the tray before printing job (HC Finisher & HC Auto Stacker)The stacker tray on HC Finisher or offset tray on HC Auto Stacker is detected full at start of a print-ing job. When a printing job is sent to HC. When the print mode button is pressed ON on HC. When automatic head cleaning is finished on HC. When warming up is finished on HC. When cooling down is finished on HC.

0 0

773-01 W11 Stacker Tray loading capacity limit (stapled paper discharge) More than 200 sets of stapled paper have been output to the Stacker Tray.

0 0

773-02 W11 Stacker Tray loading capacity limit (stapled paper discharge)

The amount of stapled paper in the Stacker Tray information display produces a "Removepaper" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or whenoperations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

774-01 W12 Booklet Tray loading capacity limit More than 30 sets of booklet have been output to the Booklet Tray. (The actual amount will vary

with paper type and number of sheets per set.)

0 0

774-02 W12 Booklet Tray loading capacity limit The amount of ejected paper in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Remove

paper" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or whenoperations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

775-01 W13 3-fold Tray loading capacity limit Full status detected by the Envelop Tray Full SNR

Roughly more than 50 sheets have been output to the 3-fold Tray. (The actual amount will varywith paper type.)

0 0

775-02 W13 3-fold Tray loading capacity limit The amount of ejected paper in the 3-fold Tray information display produces a "Remove paper"prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operationsresume after the specified processing (auto cleaning warm up cool down)

0 0




Panel messages

776 W14 Stapler Unit not connected The unit status in the Stapler Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the

current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after thespecified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

777 W15 Puncher Unit not connected The unit status in the Puncher Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the


0 0

778 W16 Top Tray not connected The unit status in the Top Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the


0 0

779 W17 Stacker Tray not connected The unit status in the Stacker Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when

the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after thespecified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

780 W18 Booklet Tray not connected The unit status in the Booklet Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when

the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after thespecified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

781 W19 3-fold Tray not connected The unit status in the 3-fold Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the


0 0

782 W20 Cover Tray not connected The unit status in the Cover Tray Unit information display produces a "No unit" prompt when the


0 0

783 W24 Stapler Unit not avai lable for use The unit status in the Stapler Unit information display produces a "Unit present: non-

operational" or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print modeis ON, or when operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

784 W25 Puncher Unit not available for use The unit status in the Puncher Unit information display produces a "Unit present: non-


0 0

785 W26 Top Tray not available for use The unit status in the Top Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-operational" or

"Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or whenoperations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

786 W27 Stacker Tray not avai lable for use The unit status in the Stacker Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-


0 0

787 W28 Booklet Tray not available for use The unit status in the Booklet Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-

operational" or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print modeis ON, or when operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-

down).

0 0

788 W29 3-fold Tray not available for use The unit status in the 3-fold Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-operational"

or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, orwhen operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

789 W30 Cover Tray not available for use The unit status in the Cover Tray information display produces a "Unit present: non-operational"

or "Unit unknown" prompt when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, orwhen operations resume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

790 W31 Scratch sheet on Top Tray Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX-

3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the Cover Tray. Eject notification from the Finisher to the Top Tray received.

0 0

791 W32 Scratch sheet on Stacker Tray Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX-

3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the Stacker Tray.

0 0




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

792 W33 Scratch sheet on Booklet Tray Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX-

3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the Booklet Tray.

0 0

793 W34 Scratch sheet on 3-fold Tray Paper after the last output paper specified by the processing interrupt request command (HX-

3D) issued by the HC was discharged to the 3-fold Tray.

0 0

794-01 W35 Stacker Tray lowering not possible

Stacker Safety Switch has activated.

0 0

794-02 W35 Stacker Tray lowering not possible The Stacker Tray safety device for tray descent prevention in the Stacker Tray information

display produces a "Activated (tray cannot descend)" prompt when the current job is completed,when the print mode is ON, or when operations resume after the specified processing (autocleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

795 W36 No cover paper on Sorting Tray There is no paper in the Sorting Tray set as the Cover Tray when the current job is completed,

when the print mode is ON, when operations resume after the specified processing (autocleaning, warm-up, cool-down), or during printing.

0 0

796 W37 No paper of appropriate size on Cover Tray The Cover Tray lacks paper of the specified size or paper size that can be supplied to the

Finisher when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operationsresume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

x 0

796-01 W37 No paper of appropriate size on Cover Tray

The Cover Tray lacks paper of the specified size or paper size that can be supplied to theFinisher when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operationsresume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 x

796-02 W37 No paper of appropriate size on Cover Tray The Cover Tray lacks paper of the specified size or paper size that can be supplied to the

Finisher .

0 x

797 W38 No paper of appropriate size on Sorting Tray The Sorting Tray lacks paper of the specified size or paper size that can be supplied to the

Finisher when the current job is completed, when the print mode is ON, or when operationsresume after the specified processing (auto cleaning, warm-up, cool-down).

0 0

798 W39 Sorting Tray is un-sett ing up.(cover feeding) Although current job concludes the cover feeding from the sorting tray, the sorting tray is un-set-

ting up.

0 x

800 X23 Paper not arriving at Paper OUT Sensor - paper jam (HC Auto Stacker only)

Paper passing out through the Paper IN Sensor does not arrive at the Paper OUT Sensor.830 X23 Paper jammed at Paper OUT Sensor - paper jam (HC Auto Stacker only) Paper detected by the Paper OUT Sensor stays detected during printing job. Paper is detected by the Paper OUT Sensor after the printing job is completed.Paper is detected by the Paper OUT Sensor when the top cover is either opened or closed.

860 S25 Offset motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only) Offset HP Sensor status does not change even after a given time from the activation of the Off-

set motor, and it is judged that the correction is not possible.

861 S25 Tray elevator motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)Either of the following two conditions exists, and it is judged that the correction is not possible. With the Top Paper Detection Sensor detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to go down, but

the Top Paper Detection Sensor keeps detecting the paper. With the Top Paper Detection Sensor not detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to elevate up,

but the Top Paper Detection Sensor still does not detect the top paper.871 W44 Offset motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)

Offset HP Sensor status does not change even after a given time from the activation of the Off-set motor, but the correction is judged to be possible.

872 W45 Tray elevator motor abnormal condition (HC Auto Stacker only)Either of the following two conditions exists, but it is judged that the correction is possible. With the Top Paper Detection Sensor detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to go down, but

the Top Paper Detection Sensor keeps detecting the paper. With the Top Paper Detection Sensor not detecting the paper, the offset tray tries to elevate up,

but the Top Paper Detection Sensor still does not detect the top paper.

999 M99 Paper dust removal fan 2 error The paper dust removal fan 2 is not connected or its cable is cut off.

0 x




Panel messages

6.Panel messages for FB and AF area

6-1.Overview of messages

* FB and AF are optional items for HC5500 and cannot be connected to HC5000. Therefore, thepanel messages related to the FB and AF are displayed only with HC5500.

* The following error messages are displayed on the optional Touch Panel and not on theHC5500 operation panel.

(1) When an error occurs, it indicates the contents of the error on the touch panel and LED (red) onthe panel of FB is blinked. But under the error of R98-170,180 R13-200,201, it may not be able to perform communicationto a controller and only LED (red) is blinked in that case.

(2) Indication of error codes

Each error notification (error code) consists of an error type, categorized according to error reset

method or panel indication method, and the error point (assigned by a number), which indicates

the time or location at which the error was generated. The error point number is a sequential

value assigned to a mechanical unit.Examples of error notification: R10-101, R98-190

(3) Error type

(4) Error point

* [xx] indicates a sequential value assigned to an internal part of a unit.

6-2.Error type

Error type Description of error

R1x,R9x Service call This error cannot be reset by the user.

R2x Jam error Also includes errors that can be reset by the user to restore normal operating con-

ditions.R3x Setting check (cover open)

If this error is generated during operations, the machine halts at the next appropri-ate point in time.

R4x Warning: Continuous operations (action) may generate malfunctions. Confirm thatit is safe to continue operations before doing so.

Unit No. Error point Unit

1,9 1xx,9xx System (power supply, H/W, S/W)2 2xx Communication with the controller 3 3xx Scanner 4 4xx AF

Type Name Indication OverviewR10 Download error Service call Error during downloading.

R11 File system error Error about the file system.R12 USB connection error Error about the USB connection.

R13 Controller communicationerror

Communication with the controller cannot be achieved.

R14 Scanner error Error about the scanner.R15 AF error Error about the AF unit.

R16 AF communication error Communication between the scanner and AF cannot beachieved.

R17 Auto-canceled error The error which is automatically canceled after generat-ing and which can be operated

R96 Data error Error about data storage.R98 Hardware error The hardware cannot be controlled appropriately.

(Error on the EEPROM, Flash memory and DIMM)R99 Software error For debugging

R20 AF jam error Jam error Paper feeding jam from AF.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

6-3.Error reset method

6-4.Explanation of panel messages

Type Error Point Indication Error reset method

R10 - - - Download error Turn power OFF and ON.R11 - - - File system error

R12 - - - USB connection error R13 - - - Controller communication error R14 - - - Scanner error

R15 - - - AF error Touch CONFIRMATION button on the touch panel.R16 - - - AF communication error Turn power OFF and ON.

R17 - - - Auto-canceled error Touch CONFIRMATION button on the touch panel.R96 131,132 Data error Perform the test mode No.0168 [Out-range setting value

clear] or No.0169 [Test mode setting data clear].The error is not cancelled right after being reset by thetest mode. The error cancellation is made after themachine power is turned OFF and turned back ON. Thenew data saved in the EEPROM is reconfirmed after themachine power is turned ON and that is when the errorcancellation is made.

others Turn power OFF and ON.R98 Hardware error Turn power OFF and ON.

R99 Software error

R20 AF jam error Remove the jammed paper from the paper feed path,and open and close the AF original feed cover. Thentouch CONFIRMATION button on the touch panel.

R30 AF setting error Open the AF original feed cover.

500 to 510 Device open error Touch CONFIRMATION button on the touch panel.


100 R10 Scanner download error. Check-sum error.

Program file error.

0 x

101 R10 AF download error. The program cannot be written on AF-EEPROM.

0 x

102 R10 AF download error : Communication between the scanner and AF. The ordinary mode command is received under the program download mode.

0 x

103 R10 AF download error : Communication between the scanner and AF. The communication sequence error (control signal error) occurred under the program download

mode.

0 x

104 R10 AF download error. Check-sum error.

0 x

105 R10 Scanner download error. The program cannot be written on the flash memory.

0 x

120 R12 Not HS-USB Connection error. USB connection is full, but not in high speed.

0 x

130 R96 The serial number saved in EEPROM is not set up. 0 x131 R96 The test mode data saved in EEPROM is out of range. 0 x

132 R96 The default value of image processing saved in EEPROM is out of range. 0 x140 R98 EEPROM is not proper. 0 x

141 R98 Cannot read/write data on EEPROM. EEPROM cannot be accessed.

0 x

142 R98 EEPROM CRC error. Data in EEPROM is not correct.

0 x

143 R98 The model code in the EEPROM is incorrect. 0 x150 R98 Data writing failure to the flash memory. 0 x160 R98 No DIMM memory. 0 x

170 R98 No CS-SUB-PCB. 0 x180 R98 FPGA configuration failure in the CS-SUB-PCB. 0 x

- - - R99 Software error.

For debugging.

0 x

200 R13 Communication error between the scanner and controller. Image data transmission cannot be carried out.

0 x



Panel messages

201 R13 Communication error between the scanner and controller. The scanning start command is not sent from the controller under the state of being next origi-

nals.

0 x

300 R14 Scanner operation is not completed within the set time. 0 x301 R14 The carriage HP sensor does not turn OFF within the set t ime. 0 x

302 R14 The carriage HP sensor does not turn ON within the set t ime. 0 x310 R14 Scanner : Time-out during the black shading completion.

The black compensation is not completed within the set time. The shading completion signal is not given out by shading LSI.

0 x

311 R14 Scanner : Time-out during the white shading completion. The white compensation is not completed within the set time. The shading completion signal is not given out by shading LSI.

0 x

320 R14 Scanner : Time-out during the off-set adjustment. When the pixel data of the black level are read during the off-set adjustment, the completion

signal is not sent out from the scanner GA within the set time.

0 x

321 R14 Scanner : Time-out during the Gain adjustment. When the pixel data of the white level are read during the Gain adjustment, the completion sig-

nal is not sent out from the scanner GA within the set time.

0 x

340 R98 Scanner : CCD PCB error The error occurred during the memory check.

0 x

341 R98 Scanner : Time-out during the interruption command of SSI communication.(The CPU did not receive the interruption command from FORCE within 100msec)SSI communication timing : Data transmission to the A/D converter. (writing) Data transmission to the CCD PCB. (writing) Data reception from the CCD PCB. (reading) Shading LSI dose not use SSI-Communication.

0 x

400 R30 AF cover is not set. 0 x

410 R20 Original pulled out. After the registration sensor turned ON during the original feeding, the sensor turned OFF

before the original scanning started.

0 x

411 R20 AF registration sensor original remaining jam (long-original error) . Simplex scanning: The original is still detected by the registration sensor after the original IN

sensor turned ON. Duplex scanning :The original is still detected by the registration sensor after the duplex original

feeding started.

0 x

412 R20 AF original IN sensor original remaining jam (long-original error) . The original is still detected by the original IN sensor after the registration sensor turned OFF.

0 x

413 R20 AF original OUT sensor original remaining jam (long-original error) . Simplex scanning: The original is still detected by the original OUT sensor after original IN sen-

sor turned OFF. Duplex scanning :The original is still detected by the original OUT sensor after the registration

sensor turned OFF.

0 x

414 R20 Original not arriving at the AF Registration sensor. The registration sensor dose not turn ON after the original feeding started.

0 x

415 R20 Original not arriving at the AF Original IN sensor. The original IN sensor dose not turn ON after the original scanning started.

0 x

416 R20 Original not arriving at the AF Original OUT sensor. Simplex scanning: The original OUT sensor dose not turn ON after the registration sensor

turned ON. Duplex scanning : The original OUT sensor dose not turn ON after the original feeding started.

0 x

420 R15 AF is not connected. 0 x

430 R15 AF firmware does not exist. 0 x440 R15 AF The original IN sensor adjustment error. 0 x

441 R15 AF fan motor error. 0 x450 R16 Communication error between the scanner and AF.

In the 24V power OFF state of AF, the operation demand command is sent from the scanner.0 x

460 R17 Communication error between the scanner and AF. The communication error with AF occurred 3 times consecutively. The initialization of the AF is

tried and succeeded.

0 x

461 R16 Communication error between the scanner and AF.The communication error with AF occurred 3 times consecutively. The initialization of the AF istried but ended unsuccessfully.

0 x

462 R16 Communication error between the scanner and AF. Scanner cannot complete transmitting.

0 x

463 R16 Communication error between the scanner and AF. Communication sequence error (control signal error)

0 x




HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

500 Communication error between the scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000). The scanner is not detected. The scanner is detected but the initial communication is not completed.

0 x

501 Parameter file error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] Error caused by an internal parameter file during the scanning action.

0 x

502 System error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] System error during the scanning action.

0 x

503 Pipe error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] Error caused by an internal pipe during the scanning action. 0 x

504 Scanner data receiving error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] Scanned image data does not arrive from the scanner after the scanning command is given.

0 x

505 Scanner image processing error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 orHC3R5000)] The image data transmission is interrupted while receiving the image data from the scanner.

0 x

506 Abnormal command error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] Abnormal command is returned back from the scanner.

0 x

507 Scanner action error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] Data error received from the scanner when the scanner cannot make the action commanded.

0 x

508 CF Card mounting error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] CF Card mounting error on the controller, such as when downloading firmware on the scanner.

0 x

509 AF original feeding time-out error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 orHC3R5000)] Original detection (second original and after) command is not received from AF within given

time.

0 x

510 HDD [FULL] error. [Error between scanner and controller (PS7R9000 or HC3R5000)] Controller HDD became full during scanning action.

0 x





CHAPTER 13: PCBs and Schemat ic diagrams

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1.Role of PCB

Role of PCB

Rear side 1

P C B Role

Power supply Power supply

Control panel Control of the panel display, Key input

ORIP PCB Image data processing and control of the print head

ORMC PCB Drive and control of the mechanism

HC control PCB Control of the ink cartridge section, I/F between FL unit.

RD/WR PCB I/F between Ink Tag of the Ink cartridge

ORCNR PCB Exit side relay PCB

ORCNL PCB Paper feed side relay PCB

Transfer motor control PCB Drive and control of the Transfer motor

Main motor control PCB Drive and control of the Main motor

Head drive PCB Drive and control of the Print head (KCMY)

CIS PCB Control the CCD sensor

AF Control PCB Drive and control the Exit paper fence

FL Power supply Power supply of FL unit

FL Control PCB Drive and control of the FL section

Power supply

AF Control PCB

Control panel

Head drive PCB

(K)(C)

(M)(Y)

CIS PCB

RD/WR PCB

ORCNR PCB

Transfer motor control PCB




Rear side 2

FL Power supply

FL Control PCB

ORIP PCB

ORCNL PCB

Main motor control PCBORMC PCB

HC Control PCB



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2.Power Supply Unit

Power Supply Unit

Fuse

Fuse No. Voltage Connection

F11250V 6.3A

+24V ORMC PCB

F12

250V 6.3A

+24V ORMC PCB

F13250V 6.3A

+24V ORIP PCB

F15250V 5A

+38V Main motor

F16250V 5A

+38V Transfer belt motor

F17250V 5A

+38V Head drive PCB (K)

F18250V 5A

+38V Head drive PCB (C)

F19250V 5A

+38V Head drive PCB (M)

F20250V 5A

+38V Head drive PCB (Y)




3.Notes at the t ime of ORIP PCB exchange

The parameter of head adjustment etc. is recorded on the NVRAM installed on the ORIP PCB. The

printing operation is based on the parameter recorded within the NVRAM.

It is possible to save the same parameter for backup in another memory (flash memory mounted on

the ORIP PCB).

When the parameter is changed through adjustment, it should be saved for backup in this

memory.

When a failure occurs on the NVRAM, such as parameter loss, a much time is needed to re-do all the

adjustments. If a backup of the parameter is saved on the ORIP PCB, the lost parameter on the

NVRAM can be re-written in matter of seconds.

Follow the instruction given below in replacing the ORIP PCB and NVRAM.

CAUTION:

NVRAM on the ORIP PCB includes a battery.

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.

* When exchanging the ORIP PCB or NVRAM, wear a hand strap to remove the static electricity to preventdamaging of these electric parts by the static electricity.

< Exchanging ORIP PCB >

(1) Remove the existing ORIP PCB from the machine.

(2) Remove the NVRAM, which is shown by the yellow colored arrow mark on the photographabove, from the existing ORIP PCB, carefully not to damage the connecting legs.

(3) Attach the removed NVRAM on the new ORIP PCB.

(4) Attach the new ORIP PCB on the machine.

(5) Power ON the machine and go into SE-Mode (Test Mode).

(6) Select the Test Mode [8.5.6.1 Adjustment value storage] and activate. This will store the param-eter on the NVRAM into the new ORIP PCB as a backup.

< Exchanging NVRAM >

This process will not work unless the parameter recorded in the NVRAM was backed up on the ORIP

PCB before the NVRAM broke.(1) Remove the existing NVRAM from the ORIP PCB.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

(3) Power ON the machine and go into SE-Mode (Test Mode).

(4) Select the test mode [8.5.6.2 Adjustment value loading] and activate. This will write the backedup parameter on the ORIP PCB onto the new NVRAM.




4.Downloading/Upgrading the machine program firmware

Preparation

Following items are required to upgrade HC5000 and PS7R / PS7R9000 firmware.

Laptop PC

512MB Compact Flash Card (CF Card) CF Card Reader with USB2.0 port.

(1) Upgrading HC5000 Firmware

1) Turn OFF the HC5000 power by pressing the soft-switch, and then the main power switch.

2) Disconnect Touch Panel and Scanner from PS7R / PS7R9000 if these optional units areconnected.

3) Make sure that HC5000 is correctly connected to the PS7R / PS7R9000.

4) Copy new Firmware program (PLALL***.dl2) to an empty CF Card. Do not place any otherdata in the CF Card.

5) Set the CF Card in CF Card Reader.

6) Plug the CF Card Reader to USB Port No.1 on PS7R.

* If PS7R9000 is used, the USB Port number does no matter - use any available USB port.7) Turn ON the main power switch of HC5000.

8) Turn ON the soft-switch on the HC5000 operation panel.* Make sure not to turn OFF the power until the firmware upgrading is completed.

9) The HC5000 operation panel will ask [Update Firmware ?]. Press O.K. Key.

10) When the firmware upgrading is finished, the message [Downloading Completed RestartPrinter] will be shown on the panel display.

11) Confirming that the PS7R / PS7R9000 power is OFF, turn OFF the HC5000 main powerswitch.

12) Disconnect CF Card Reader from PS7R / PS7R9000.

(2) Upgrading PS7R / PS7R9000

1) Confirm that PS7R / PS7R9000 power and HC5000 main power is OFF.2) Disconnect PS7R / PS7R9000 completely free from HC5000. Only the power cable toPS7R / PS7R9000 should be connected and plugged to an independent power supplysocket.

3) Copy new Firmware program (ps7r***.tgz) to an empty CF card. Do not place any otherdata in the CF Card.

4) Set the CF Card in CF Card Reader.

5) Plug the CF Card Reader to USB Port No.1 on PS7R.* If PS7R9000 is used, the USB Port number does no matter - use any available USB port.

6) Turn ON the PS7R / PS7R9000 by pressing the power button on the unit.* Make sure not to turn OFF the power until the firmware upgrading is completed.

7) The LED buttons on the unit starts to flash and the firmware downloading starts.

8) The firmware downloading is finished when the LED flashing ends and only the Ready LED(green) lights up.

9) Press the power button PS7R / PS7R9000 to shut OFF the power.

10) Disconnect CF Card Reader from PS7R / PS7R9000.

(3) Confirming the firmware download

1) With the HC5000 and PS7R / PS7R9000 power OFF, correctly connect HC5000 and PS7R/ PS7R9000.

2) Turn ON the HC5000 main power switch, and then press the soft-switch on the HC5000.

3) After the machine starts up completely, use menu No. [5.6.1 Config Info Print - SystemInformation] to print the Status List Page.

4) Check and confirm that the printout indicates the new upgraded firmware versions on boththe System and Main program columns of the printout.

5) If the optional Touch-Panel and Scanner are to be connected, turn OFF the machine cor-



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

5.Exchange of ORMC (mechanical control) PCB


(2) Remove the PCB box cover.* Wear a hand strap to avoid damaging the PCB by static electricity.

(3) Disconnect the connectors from the ORMC PCB.

(4) Remove six screws.

(5) Slide the ORMC PCB to the left to disconnect it from the HC control PCB joint connector.




(6) Install the new ORMC PCB on the PCB box, being careful not to scratch the rear surface of thePCB against the PCB box frame.

* When mounting the ORMC PCB onto the PCB box, be careful not to scratch the rear surface of the PCBagainst the sharp edges on the PCB box, be careful especially with the extended edges on the PCB boxframe. If the back of the PCB is scraped against the sharp edges, the IC chips on the reverse side of thePCB will be damaged. If the IC chips on the reverse side is damaged, the PCB becomes a waste.

Be careful of the edges.

IC chips on the reverse side of the PCB



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

6.Schematic

O

P551

P552

P561

P562

P563

P564

P852

ORIP PCB

Schematic

CIS L(CCD)

CIS R(CCD)

POWER SUPPLY

PS7RController

USB

HC control PCB

ID unit air open valve (K)

ID unit air open valve (C)

ID unit ink sensor (C)

HC5000:KID unit ink sensor (K)

HC5000:C

Head Cooling fan(KC)

ID unit air open valve (M)

ID unit air open valve (Y)

ID unit ink sensor (M)

ID unit ink sensor (Y)

Head Cooling fan(MY)

Ink heater 1

Ink heater 2

Ink fuse solenoid

Ink open sensor

MF paper feed

Option

Head driver PCB C(HC5000:K)

HEAD * 12

Head driver PCB M

Head driver PCB Y

J53

Distributor aria

26

J51 Pow

J65

PRHI/F

32J64

IP PCBI/F

Front door L SW

Front door R SW

J62

Power control

J15

USBI/F

J16

CISI/F

J12

Powercontrol

Distributor thermistor 1

J10

Heater Thermistor

J3

HDR I/F

J4

HDR I/F

J5

HDR I/F

J6

HDR I/F J7

Power supply

J14

MCI/F

5V 24V 38V

22

10

80

80

40

32

P851

6

6

CIS PCB

P151

8

P122

P122

P122

P122

P807

P806

P805

P804

P801 P802 P803

Flipper cover SW

Scraper cover SW

P501

P502

P503

P504

P505

P506

P507

P508

R/W PCB

P812

P153P152

P162P161

Ink cover sensor

P821

P823

P824

P544

P540

P541

P545

P546

P547

P825

P826

P827

P828

J17

Elevator motor P580P581

P154

P155

J151

J153J155

J154

J152

Paper emergedetectionsensor

P625

From P206

P853

P854

ReceiverPCB

Thermistor

Thermistor P123

P123

24V(pump)

P810

P813

MF door safety SW

P814

P815

P822 P829

P817

MF paperfeed

P816

HEAD * 12Head driver PCB K

(HC5000:C)

80

80

HEAD * 12

HEAD * 12

F

P586

P181

P830


A1 block

A2 block

A3 block

B1 block

G1 block

G2 block

C1 block

D1 block

D2 block

HC5000:P154

HC5000:P155

Control panel

Transfer motor controlPCB

Main motor control PCB

Transfer motor

Main motor

J54

Mainmotor

J61

BP motor

12

14

40 J52

Panel

P509

P808

P533

P809

P512

P513

P510

P511

P516

P517

P514

P515

signal

PWR

signal

PWR

P500

C Ink fuse solenoid J66

Ink fuse solen

P589

K Ink fuse solenoid P588

M Ink fuse solenoid P590

Y Ink fuse solenoid P591

(HC5500 only)

(HC5000 only)

(HC5000 only)




ORMC PCB

ORCNL PCB

P705

P707

P708

P709

P710

P711

P712

P713

P714

P715

P716

P254

P255

P717

P722P256

P727P257

P718

P720

P721

P723

P724

P725

P726

P728

P729

P730

P731

P732

P202 P601

P203 P602

P204 P603

P205 P607

P206 P608

P611

P612

P620

P614

P615P616

P702

P703

P704

ORCNR PCB

Pickup clutch

Registration clutch

Registration brake

Dust fan 2(HC5000 only)

Registration sensor

Top edge LED

Elevator LED



Remaining paper volume A

Remaining paper volume B

Elevator lower limit sensor

Switchback motor

Duplex belt OUT sensor

Switchback sensor

Platen elevator clutch

Duplex clutch

Re-pickup clutch

Re-pickup brake

Transfer motor-axisencoder

Ink fuse valve(C)(HC5500 : not exist)Pressure valve(C)

(HC5500 : K) Air open valve (C)

(HC5500 : K)Ink sensor(C)(HC5500 : K)

J53

Distributor aria

J51 Power supply

J65

PRHI/F

J64

IP PCBI/F

Paper width sensor

Top edge sensor

Multiple Feed sensor (send)

Multiple Feed sensor(receive)

J57CNL PCBI/F

J55

Paper feedDuplex

Pressure

32

J58

J59

J60

28

20

24

Ink fuse valve(K)(HC5500 : not exist)Pressure valve(K)

(HC5500 : C) Air open valve (K)

(HC5500 : C)Ink sensor(K)(HC5500 : C)

Ink fuse valve(M)(HC5500 : not exist)

Pressure valve(M)

Air open valve (M)

Ink sensor(M)

Ink fuse valve(Y)(HC5500 : not exist)

Pressure valve(Y)

Air open valve (Y)

Ink sensor(Y)

J56

axis-encoder

J62

Power control

5

Suction nozzle sensor

Blower fan 1

Exit motor

Counter

Wing motor

Exit sensor

Wing HP sensor

Flipper gate solenoid

Flipper sensor

Duplex belt IN sensor

Ink pan motor

Ink pan sensor 1

Ink pan sensor 2

Cleaning motor

Suction chamber sensor

Blower fan 2

Blower fan 3

Blower fan 4

Waste ink sensor U

Suction pump

Suction pump troubledetection


Exit motor encoder

Waste ink sensor L

P582

P519

P520

P521

P522

P525

P532

P201

P251

P252

P253

P258P701

J254

J255

J256

J257

J258

J251

J252

J253

J201J202

J203

J204

J205

J206 P617

P570

P571

P572

Switchback clutch

Dust fan 1

24

Paper feed tray uppersafety SW

Paper feed tray lowersafety SW

J63

10

Elevator motor inter lock

P811

P737

P736

P735

P734

Transfer unit suctionposition sensor

Pressure pump

Pressure pump sensor

Transfer unit lower positionsensor

Transfer unit upper positionsensor

J207

P518

P531

P583

P584

P585

P610

P613

P623

P624

P621

P622

to CIS PCB

P630

P207

P625

FW6702

P831

P832

P833

P626

P586

P587

P634

P631

P632

P633

P634Feed tray button

Paper feed pressure sensor

Elevator upper limit sensor A

Elevator upper limit sensorB

Reservoir

Reservoir

Reservoir

Reservoir

D1 block

F1 block

F2 block

E1 block

CNR PCBI/F

J54Mainmotor

J61

BP motor

12

0 J52

Panel

J66

Ink fuse solenoid



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Distributor thermistor

1

CIS L

(CCD)

CIS R

(CCD)CIS PCB

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

25262728293031

3233343536

37383940

+3.3VMIP+3.3VMIP

GNDGNDDISD0DISD1DISD2DISD3DISD4DISD5DISD6DISD7GND ADCLKP ADCLKNSHDPSHDNSHPPSHPNCISSDIP

CISSDINCISSCKPCISSCKN

CISSIPCISSIN

CISCLKPCISCLKNGND

LEDEBLX

OUTEBXINPCLP

CLPOBCISA0CISA1CISWRTCISRDO

VCC_24VGNDGND

12345678

AOUT

+24V

GND+3.3V

CISSICISCLKLEDG

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

25262728293031

3233343536

37383940

12

34567

8

12

3456

+24VINKHEAT1

DISTTH1INKHEAT2

DISTTH2

+24V

GND

GND

1234567

1234567

1234567

AOUTGND+3.3VCISSICISCLKLEDG+24V

CN CHECK P16P151

P152PHR-7

P161

P153PHR-8

P162

P10P853Ink heater 1

P 8 5 1

P 8 5 1

654321

HEATERHEATER

THMTHM

P 8 5 2

123456

Paperemerge

detectionsensor

1234

+5V

PATASNSXGND

123

PHR-4P625P154

12

E1E2


P854Ink heater 2

P 8 5 2

654321

HEATERHEATERTHMTHM

12

E1E2




ORIP PCB

12345678910

1112131415

1617181920

21222324

25262728293031323334353637383940

1234

5678

+24VINKHEAT1

DISTTH1

INKHEAT2

DISTTH2

+24V

GND

GND

123456789

1011121314

1516171819

20212223

242526272829303132

A1/3

CN CHECKGNDMCTXDP

MCSCKP

MCTXDN

MCSCKNGNDGNDMCRXDP

MCRXDN

MCSRQNMCSRQP

ENC600PENC600NPSTRGPPSTRGNGNDGNDPRHTXDOPRHRXDIMCRSV1WKLEDXMCLATO

SLPLED1XSLPLED2XPOWERINTXWAKEUPINTXIP-RDYPRH-RDYGND

P16

P10

P14

ORMC PCBP64

(D1/2)

GNDGND

PS7RController

123456

123456

ZWKUP

COM

P181P17



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

ORIP PCB

A1 A2 A3 A4

A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

A16 A17 A18 A19 A20

A21 A22 A23 A24 A25

A26

A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10

B11B12B13B14B15

B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28

B29B30B31B32B33

B34B35B36B37B38

B39B40

Head driver PCB K

A40 A39 A38 A37

A36 A35 A34 A33 A32 A31 A30 A29 A28 A27 A26

A25 A24 A23 A22 A21

A20 A19 A18 A17 A16

A15

A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

B40B39B38B37B36B35B34B33B32B31B30B29B28B27B26

B25B24B23B22B21B20B19B18B17B16B15B14B13

B12B11B10B9B8

B7B6B5B4B3B2B1

1

2

+38V

GND

POWER SUPPLYP803(C1/1)

P3P122P804

Thermistor E1E2

P123PHR-2

12

HDRTH1

HDRTH2




Head driver PCB CORIP PCB

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18

A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27

A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36

A37 A38 A39 A40

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21

B22B23B24B25B26

B27B28B29B30B31

B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40

A40 A39 A38 A37 A36 A35 A34 A33 A32 A31 A30 A29 A28

A27 A26 A25 A24 A23

A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14

A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5

A4 A3 A2 A1

B40B39B38B37B36B35B34B33B32B31B30B29B28B27B26B25B24B23B22B21B20

B19B18B17B16B15

B14B13B12B11B10

B9B8B7B6B5B4B3B2B1

A2/3

1

2

+38V

GND

P4 P122 P805

POWER SUPPLYP803(C1/1)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

ORIP PCB

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11

A12 A13 A14 A15 A16

A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25

A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37

A38 A39 A40

B1

B2B3B4B5B6

B7B8B9B10B11B12B13B14

B15B16B17

B18B19B20B21B22

B23B24B25B26B27

B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40

Head driver PCB M

A40 A39 A38 A37 A36 A35 A34 A33 A32 A31 A30

A29 A28 A27 A26 A25

A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16

A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4

A3 A2 A1

B40

B39B38B37B36B35

B34B33B32B31B30B29B28B27

B26B25B24

B23B22B21B20B19

B18B17B16B15B14

B13B12B11B10B9B8B7B6B5B4B3B2B1

1

2

+38V

GND

P5P122P806POWERSUPPLY

P803(C1/1)




Head driver PCB YORIP PCB

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18

A19 A20 A21 A22 A23

A24 A25 A26

A27 A28

A29 A30 A31 A32 A33

A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40

B1B2B3

B4B5B6B7B8

B9B10B11B12B13

B14B15

B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40

A40 A39 A38 A37 A36 A35 A34 A33 A32 A31 A30 A29 A28 A27 A26 A25 A24 A23

A22 A21 A20 A19 A18

A17 A16 A15

A14 A13

A12 A11 A10 A9 A8

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

B40B39B38

B37B36B35B34B33

B32B31B30B29B28

B27B26

B25B24B23B22B21B20B19B18B17B16B15B14B13B12B11B10B9B8B7B6B5B4B3B2B1

A3/3

1

2

+38V

GND

P6 P122 P807 POWER

SUPPLY

P803(C1/1)

Thermistor

E1

E2

P123 1

2

HDRTH1

HDRTH2



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Ink fusesolenoid

Ink cover sensor

Ink open sensor

12

123

123456

7

81

23

P552+24VGND

P562

P563

P564

12

34567

8

87

65432

1

P551

P561

R/W PCB

+5VSIGNALGND

+5VSIGNALGND

HC controlPCB

CNTCHKRUN

STOPRSTTXDRXDGND

VCC

ORMC PCB

Only HC5000 is equipped

Only HC5000 is equipped




B1/1

ORMC PCB



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

P812 P12

ORIP_PCB

P7

POWER SUPPLY

P804

P805

P806

P807

P808

P809

Head driver PCB K

Head driver PCB C

Head driver PCB M

Head driver PCB Y

Main motorcontrol PCB

Transfer motorcontrol PCB

1

2

LIVE

NEUTRAL

P810

1234

5

LIVE

NEUTRAL

FG

P813

E1

POWERSUPPLY

MFpape

r feed

P814123

P 8 1 5

123

P 8 1 5

321

P 8 1 6

21

P 8 1 6

2

121

P817

MF door safety SW

1 2

GND+24V

12

P811

P801

Suctionpump

ILPET

ILPET

12

3456789101112

12

345678

1234

PWCNTXPWFANX

PW24VXPW38VXPWACXPW24CHKXPW38CHKXGND

PWRRLY

GND

GND+5VGND+24V

P802-6P802-14P802-4P802-12

P802-5P802-12P802-3P802-10

( HC5500 )( HC5000 )

P808-2P809-2P804-2P805-2P806-2

P807-2P808-1P809-1P804-1P805-1

P806-1P807-1

12345

678910

11121314

12345

678910

1112

P802

P803

+24V

+38V

GNDGNDGNDGNDGND

GNDGND+24V+24V+24V

+5V+5V+5V+5V

GNDGNDGNDGNDGND

GND+38V+38V+38V+38V

+38V+38V

12

34567

8910111213141516

P802

+24V

GNDGND

GNDGNDGNDGNDGND

GND+24V+24V+24V+24V+5V+5V+5V+5V

( HC5500 )

( HC5000 )

P51-4P51-8P51-2P802-3P51-6P802-1

P808-6P809-6P51-3P51-7P51-1P802-4P51-5P802-2P808-5P809-5

P51-3P51-4P807-3P51-6P807-1P808-6P809-6P51-1P51-2P807-4P51-5P807-2P808-5P809-5

123456

123456

12

12

12

12

+38VGND

+38VGND

+38VGND

+38V

GND

+38VGND

+5VGND

+38VGND

+5VGND

P803-9

P803-3

P803-10P803-4

P803-11P803-5

P803-12P803-6

P803-7P803-1

P802-15P802-7

P803-8P803-2

P802-16

P802-8

P803-7P803-1

P802-13P802-6

P803-8P803-2

P802-14P802-7

( HC5500 )( HC5000 )

( HC5500 )( HC5000 )

HC5000: K ORHD

HC5000: C ORHD




C1/1

P6212

345678

910111213

141516171819202122

ORMC_PCB

12

12

12

3

1

23

river PCB K

river PCB C

river PCB M

river PCB Y

motorol PCB

fer motortrol PCB

P 8 2 1

P 8 2 2

P 8 2 3

Front door R SW

Front door L SW

Flipper cover SW

Scraper cover SW

ILCVRL

ILCVRLILCVRR

ILCVRRILFR

ILFRILSB

ILSBPWRRLY

GND

1234

ILFR

ILFR

ILSB

ILSB

P 8 2 9

P 8 2 9

ILCVRL

ILCVRLILCVRRILCVRR

4

321

P827

P828

P 8 2 1

P 8 2 2

12

12

P825

P826

12

12

P830

P830

1 2 3 54 6

1235 46

P 8 2 4

HC5000: K ORHDR_PCB

HC5000: C ORHDR_PCB

P51123

4567

8

+24VGND+24V

GND+5VGND+24V

GND

P51123456

+24V+24VGNDGND+5VGND

P802-11P802-3P802-9P802-1P802-13P802-5P802-10

P802-2

( HC5500 )

( HC5000 )P802-8P802-9

P802-1P802-2P802-11P802-14



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

ORMC PCB

123456

7891011

1213141516

17181920212223242526

P 5

0 5

P 5 0 6

P 5 4 0

P 5 4 1

12345

12

34

12345

12

123

12

123

123

45

123456789

101112131415161718192021

2223242526

2728293031

32

CN CHECKGNDMCTXDP

MCSCKPMCTXDN

MCSCKNGNDGNDMCRXDP

MCRXDN

MCSRQN

MCSRQP

ENC600PENC600NPSTRGPPSTRGN

GNDGNDPRHTXDOPRHRXDIMCRSV1

WKLEDXMCLATOSLPLED1XSLPLED2XPOWERI

NTXWAKEUPIN

TXIP_RDYPRH_RDYGND

123456789

101112131415161718192021

2223242526

2728293031

32

1234

56789

1011121314

15161718192021222324

12345

ORIP PCB

P14(A1/3)

P 5

0 5

54321

P 5 4 4

1234

ID unit ink

sensor (K)

P 5 0 6

54321

P 5 4 6

1234

P 5 4 5

12

34 P

5 4 0

43

21

P 5 4 7

1234 P

5 4 1

4321

1234

P64 P57

P55

P56

ID unit air open valve (K)

ID unit air open valve (C)

ID unit air open valve (M)

ID unit air open valve (Y)

Head Cooling

fan(KC)

P53

GNDGND

DISTKCCNTXKDISTFLXGNDCDISTFLXGNDGND

DISTMYCNTXMDISTFLXGNDYDISTFLXGND

GNDKDISTSOL+24VCDISTSOL+24V

MDISTSOL+24VYDISTSOL+24VHDFAN1+24VHDFAN2+24VELVMTR1ELVMTR2

123Elevator motor

12345678910

PX

PXPX

PX

P63

Head Coolingfan(MY)

12

12

543

21

321

12

ID unit inksensor (Y)

ID unit inksensor (M)

ID unit inksensor (C)

(HC5000 : K)

(HC5000 : C)




RMC PCB

123456789

1011121314

1516171819

2021222324

2526272829303132

PFCNTXELVLED_PWRELEVLEDXPFPRESSXPFUPAXPFUPBXELEVSWPWVR1PFSIZESNSX

PFEXISTSNSXPFNAEMPPFEMPPFLOXDFLED

PATASNSXTOPLEDMNTPOSSNSREVBLTSNSXSBSNSX

REGSNSX A_DFSNS1TOPSNSBPHPSNSBPLIMSNS

ROTCHKPUMPGND+24VGND+5VGND+5V

1

234567

89101112131415161718192021222324

P 5 2 2

P 5 3 1

1

2

12345

678910

11

1234

56

12

12

12

12

12

FDCL

+24VREGCL+24VREGBKCL+24VBPMVCL

+24VDUPCL+24VDUPFDCL+24VDUPBKCL+24VSWBCL+24VDSTFAN1+24VDSTFAN2+24VSWBKP1SWBKDIS1SWBKP2SWBKDIS2

12345

1

23456

+5VENCAENCBENCZGNDGND

D 1/2

ORNCL PCBP201(E1/1)

P 5 2 2

654321

21

2

1

21

Re-pickupbrake

Re-pickup

clutch

DUPCL+24VDUPFDCL+24VDUPBKCL+24V

P57

P55

P56

Platen elevatorclutch

Dust fan 2

Switchback motor

Pickup clutch

Registration clutch

Registration brake

12

Switchbackclutch

12345678910

PFUPLIMX

PFUPLIMXPFLOLIMX

PFLOLIMX

P63

P 5

8 4

12

34

1234

P585

Paper feed tray uppersafety SW

Paper feed tray lowersafety SW

P 5

8 4

43

21

P586PFUPLIMX

PFUPLIMX

12

3

P 5 3 2

P 5 3 2

P587123456

123456

Transfer motor-axisencoder

Dust fan 1

This is in case of HC5000.This Fan of HC5500 is connected to

P58 (D 2/2 area).



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Main motor control PCB

OR

123456789101112

123456789101112

BMCLKMBFGMBM0MBM1RESET OUTMBRDYXMBDOUTMBEMGMBSCKMBEBLMBSDATGND

H+

H-Hv-Hv+Hu-Hu+Hw-Hw+FGFG

WV

U

1

2345678910

1

2345678910

12

3

12

3

Transfer motor control

PCB

1234567891011121314

123456789101112

DUPCLKDUPFGDUPM0DUPM1RESET OUTDUPRDYXDUPDOUTDUPEMGDUPSCKDUPEBLDUPSDATGND

H+H-Hv-Hv+Hu-Hu+Hw-Hw+FGFG

WV

U

12345678910

12345678910

123

123

P54P509

P510

P511

Main motorcontrol

Main motorpower supply

P512

P513

P61P533P514

P515

P516

P517

Transfer motorcontrol

Transfer motor

power supply U

ORPNL_PCB

1-40 P52P500 1-40

12345678

P66KSUPSOL+24VCSUPSOL

+24VMSUPSOL+24VYSUPSOL+24V

21

P589

21

P588

21

P590

2

1

P591

This is in case of HC5500.These parts of HC5000 are connected to

ORCNR PCB P258.

Ink fuse valve(C)

Ink fuse valve(K)

Ink fuse valve(M)

Ink fuse valve(Y)




ORMC PCB

1

23456789101112

12345

6

78910

11121314

P54

P61

-40 P52

1234

5678

P66

123

4567

89101112131415161718192021222324252627282930

1234567

89101112

1314151617

181920

12

34567

89101112

131415161718192021222324

+24V+24V+24V

+24V+24V+24V+5V

+5V+5V+5VGNDGNDGNDGNDBLTCALENCEXITSNSXFLOTSNSXFLOUTSNSXDUPGTSOLWEISTBTLSUCPUMP1SUCPUMPCHK1CMBFLXCMBCNTXKSUCSELSOLWEISTNFSTOFSNSXSTOFCNTXCOUNTCOUNTCNTX

BPFAN1BPFAN2BPFAN3BPFAN4INKPSNS1INKPSNS2INK1

INK2NZP1NZDIS1NZP2NZDIS2

NZHPSNSWINGHPWINGP1WINGDIS1WINGP2

WINGDIS2EXITMTREXITENC

KSUPSOLKPURSOL

KRSVOPSOLKSTNKFLXSTNKKCNTXGNDCSUPSOL

CPURSOLCRSVOPSOLCSTNKFLXSTNKCCNTXGND

MSUPSOLMPURSOLMRSVOPSOLMSTNKFLXSTNKMCNTXGNDYSUPSOLYPURSOLYRSVOPSOLYSTNKFLXSTNKYCNTXGND

ORCNR PCB

P251

(F1/2)

D 2/2

P58

P59

P60

ORCNR PCBP252(F1/2)

ORCNR PCB

P253

(F1/2)

123

4567

89101112131415161718192021222324

25262728

+24V+24V+24V

+5V+5V+5V+5V

GNDGNDGNDGNDGNDEXITSNSXFLOTSNSXFLOUTSNSXDUPGTSOLWEISTBTLSUCPUMP1SUCPUMPCHK1CMBFLXCMBCNTXWEISTNFSTOFSNSXSTOFCNTX

COUNTCOUNTCNTXDSTFAN2+24V

12

(HC5500) (HC5000)

1

2345

678910

11121314151617181920212223242526

27282930

BPFAN1

BPFAN2BPFAN3BPFAN4BPFAN5

BPFAN6+24V FAN+24V FAN+24V FAN+24V FAN

GNDBPTOPLEDBPTOPTRINKPSNS1INKPSNS2INK1INK2NZP1NZDIS1NZP2NZDIS2NZHPSNSWINGHPWINGP1WINGDIS1WINGP2

WINGDIS2EXITENC+24V EXITEXITMTR

P59

123456789

1011121314

1516171819

2021222324252627

2829303132

KSUPSOLKPURSOLKRSVOPSOLKSTNKFLXSTNKKCNTX+24V VALCSUPSOLCPURSOLCRSVOPSOL

CSTNKFLXSTNKCCNTX+24V VALMSUPSOLMPURSOL

MRSVOPSOLMSTNKFLXSTNKMCNTX+24V VALYSUPSOL

YPURSOLYRSVOPSOLYSTNKFLXSTNKYCNTXGNDGNDGNDFSPSNS1

RSPSNS1SP2P1SP2DIS1SP2P2SP2DIS2

P60

(HC5500) (HC5000)

(HC5500) (HC5000)

Dust fan 2This is in case of HC5500.This Fan of HC5000 is connected to P55.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

P202

P203

P204

P205

ORCNL_PCB

1

23456789101112131415161718192021222324

21

Multiple Feedsensor(send)

P610

321

P155

(Paper emerge detection sensor)

21Top edge LED

P612

321

Transfer unitsuction position

sensor

P620

3

21

Duplex belt OUTsensor

P615

321

P206DFLEDVCCGNDPATASNSXVCCGNDTOPLED

GNDBPLIMSNSVCCGNDREVBLTSNSXVCCGNDSBSNSXVCCGNDREGSNSXVCCGNDDFSNSVCC

1234

56789

1011121314

151617181920212223242526272829303132

ORMC PCBP57

(D1/2)

P201PFCNTXELVLED_PWRELEVLEDXPFPRESSXPFUPAXPFUPBXELEVSWPWVR1PFSIZESNSXPFEXISTSNSXPFNAEMPPFEMPPFLOXDFLED

PATASNSXTOPLEDMNTPOSSNSREVBLTSNSXSBSNSX

REGSNSX A_DFSNS1TOPSNSBPHPSNSBPLIMSNSROTCHKPUMPGND+24VGND+5VGND+5V

1

23456

7

P 6 0 8

7

65432

1

P 6 0 8

321

Registrationsensor

P617

3

21

Multiple Feed

sensor(receive)

P611

GNDREGSNSXVCC

GNDDFSNSVCC

321

Switchbacksensor

P625 123

321

12

P207

CIS PCB

P 6 2 6

P 6 2 63

21

123

ORCIS PCB

P154

(A1/1)

(HC5500) (HC5000)




E1/1

P202 12

12

Elevator LED

P634

12345678

910111213

1415

P203

ELVLED

GNDPFPRESSXVCCGNDPFUPAX

VCCGNDPFUPBXVCCGND

ELEVSW

12345678910

1098765432

1

P 6 0 3

P204GNDPP_WIDTHVCCGNDPP_LNGTHVCCGNDPP_EXIST

VCC

123

45678

9

P205123

45678

9

P 6 0 7

ORCNL_PCB

VCCPFLOXGND

VCCPFEMPGNDVCCPFNAEMP

GND

12345678

910111213

1415161718

1920212223

24

P206

123

456789101112131415161718

1920212223

2425262728

29303132

P201

21

1234

12345678

91011121314

15

15141312111098

76543

21

Paper feedpressure sensor

P631

Elevator upper limitsensor A

P632

Elevator upper limitsensor B

P633321

32

1

321

1234567891011121314

+24VPUMPGNDROTCHKVCCGNDBPLIMSNSVCCGNDBPHPSNSVCC

TOPSNSVCC

P207 P613

P623

P624321

321

21

P 6

3 0

123

45

P 6

3 0

543

21

GNDBPHPSNSVCC

TOPSNSVCC

P621

321

P622

3

21

Pressure pump

Pressure pumpsensor

Transfer unit lowerposition sensor

Top edgesensor

ELVLED

ELEVSWGND

GND

PFPRESSXVCC

GNDPFUPAX

VCC

GND

PFUPBXVCC

12345

678910

Paper width sensor

Paper sizedetection sensor

Paper detection

sensor

9876

54321

Elevator lower limit

sensor

Remaining paper

volume B

Remaining papervolume A

Transfer unit upperposition sensor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

ORCNR PCB

12

34567891011121314151617181920212223242526

2728293031

32

33343536

37383940

KSUPSOL+24V

KPURSOL+24VKRSVOPSOL+24VKSTNKFLXGNDSTNKKCNTXGNDCSUPSOL+24VCPURSOL+24VCRSVOPSOL+24VCSTNKFLXGNDSTNKCCNTXGNDMSUPSOL+24VMPURSOL+24VMRSVOPSOL+24V

MSTNKFLXGNDSTNKMCNTXGNDYSUPSOL

+24V

YPURSOL+24VYRSVOPSOL+24V

YSTNKFLXGNDSTNKYCNTXGND

P258

P258

12345

6789101112131415161718192021222324252627

282930

1234567891011121314

1516171819

20

1234567891011121314151617

18192021222324

+24V+24V+24V+24V+24V

+24V+5V+5V+5V+5VGNDGNDGNDGNDBLTCALENCEXITSNSXFLOTSNSXFLOUTSNSXDUPGTSOLWEISTBTLSUCPUMP1SUCPUMPCHK1CMBFLXCMBCNTXKSUCSELSOLWEISTNFSTOFSNSX

STOFCNTXCOUNTCOUNTCNTX

BPFAN1BPFAN2BPFAN3BPFAN4INKPSNS1INKPSNS2INK1INK2NZP1NZDIS1NZP2NZDIS2NZHPSNSWINGHP

WINGP1WINGDIS1WINGP2WINGDIS2EXITMTR

EXITENC

KSUPSOLKPURSOLKRSVOPSOLKSTNKFLXSTNKKCNTXGNDCSUPSOLCPURSOLCRSVOPSOLCSTNKFLXSTNKCCNTXGNDMSUPSOLMPURSOLMRSVOPSOLMSTNKFLXSTNKMCNTX

GNDYSUPSOLYPURSOLYRSVOPSOLYSTNKFLXSTNKYCNTXGND

ORMC PCB

P58(D2/2)

P251

P252

P253

ORMC PCBP59

(D2/2)

ORMC PCB

P60(D2/2)

12345

6789101112

1314151617

1819202122

23242526

P251+24V+24V

+24V+5V+5V

+5V+5V

GNDGNDGNDGNDGND

EXITSNSXFLOTSNSXFLOUTSNSXDUPGTSOLWEISTBTLSUCPUMP1SUCPUMPCHK1CMBFLXCMBCNTXWEISTNFSTOFSNSX

STOFCNTXCOUNTCOUNTCNTX

1234567891011121314151617181920

2122232425

2627282930

P252BPFAN1BPFAN2BPFAN3BPFAN4BPFAN5

BPFAN6+24V FAN+24V FAN+24V FAN+24V FAN

GNDBPTOPLEDBPTOPTRINKPSNS1INKPSNS2

INK1INK2NZP1NZDIS1NZP2NZDIS2NZHPSNSWINGHPWINGP1WINGDIS1WINGP2

WINGDIS2EXITENC+24V EXITEXITMTR

12

34567

8910111213141516171819202122232425

26272829303132

P253KSUPSOLKPURSOLKRSVOPSOLKSTNKFLXSTNKKCNTX+24V VALCSUPSOLCPURSOLCRSVOPSOLCSTNKFLXSTNKCCNTX+24V VALMSUPSOLMPURSOLMRSVOPSOLMSTNKFLXSTNKMCNTX+24V VALYSUPSOLYPURSOLYRSVOPSOLYSTNKFLXSTNKYCNTXGNDGNDGND

FSPSNS1RSPSNS1SP2P1SP2DIS1SP2P2

SP2DIS2

(HC5500)(HC5000)

(HC5500)(HC5000)

(HC5500)(HC5000)




1234

56789101112131415

161718192021222324252627282930313233

3435363738

3940

21

4321

21

2

11098

7654321

1234

5678910

12345678910

12

345678910

12345

6789

10

10987654321

10

987654321

10987

6543

21

KSUPSOL+24VKPURSOL+24V

KRSVOPSOL+24VKSTNKFLXGNDSTNKKCNTXGNDCSUPSOL+24VCPURSOL+24VCRSVOPSOL

+24VCSTNKFLXGNDSTNKCCNTXGNDMSUPSOL+24VMPURSOL+24VMRSVOPSOL+24VMSTNKFLXGNDSTNKMCNTXGNDYSUPSOL+24VYPURSOL

+24VYRSVOPSOL+24VYSTNKFLXGND

STNKYCNTXGND

KSUPSOL+24VKPURSOL+24V

KRSVOPSOL+24VKSTNKFLXGNDSTNKKCNTXGND

Ink fuse valve(K)

CSUPSOL+24VCPURSOL+24VCRSVOPSOL+24VCSTNKFLXGNDSTNKCCNTXGND

F 1/2

P701 P701

P702 P702

P703 P703

P704 P704

P734

K CN

C CN

M CN

Y CN

MSUPSOL+24V

MPURSOL+24VMRSVOPSOL+24VMSTNKFLXGNDSTNKMCNTXGND

YSUPSOL+24VYPURSOL+24VYRSVOPSOL

+24VYSTNKFLXGNDSTNKYCNTX

GND

P735

P736

P737

21

4321

21

2

1

21

4321

2

1

21

21

4321

21

21

Pressure valve(K)

Air open valve (K)

Ink sensor(K)

Ink fuse valve(C)

Pressure valve(C)

Air open valve (C)

Ink sensor(C)

Ink fuse valve(M)

Pressure valve(M)

Air open valve (M)

Ink sensor(M)

Ink fuse valve(Y)

Pressure valve(Y)

Air open valve (Y)

Ink sensor(Y)

In case of HC5500, these partsare not for K but for C.

In case of HC5500, these partsare not for C but for K.

In case of HC5500, these Ink fuse valves

are not connected in this area.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

ORCNR PCB

Ink pan sensor 1

Ink pan sensor 2

Ink pan motor

Cleaning motor

Suction nozzlesensor

123

45

678910

1112131415

1617181920

GNDINKPANSNS1+5V

GNDINKPANSNS2

+5VINK1INK2NZP1NZDIS1

NZP2NZDIS2GNDNZHPSNS+5V

BPTOPLEDGND+5VBPTOPTR

P257

Top edge sensor 2

HC5000 is not equipped withthis sensor.

Blower fan 2

Blower fan 3

Blower fan 4

Blower fan 1123

4567891011

12

123

4567891011

12

12

12

12

12

123

4567891011

12

BPFAN1+24VBPFAN2

+24VBPFAN3+24VBPFAN4+24VBPFAN5+24VBPFAN6

+24V

P256P722P722

P723

P724

P725

P726

Blower fan 6

BP spacersensor

LIM

BP spacer HP

sensor

Blower fan 512

12

12

12

P741

P742

P751

P754

BP spacer motor

432

1

P758

13

1415161718

1920

1

23456

78

1

23456

78

GND

FSPSNS1GNDRSPSNS1SP2P1SP2DIS1

SP2P2SP2DIS2

P750P750

(HC5000 is not equiped.)




ORCNR PCB

F2/2

7

6

Wing motor

Exit motor

Exit sensor

Flipper sensor

Duplex belt IN

sensor

Wing HP sensor

12345678910

1112131415

1617181920

2122232425262728

123

1234

12

12

3

123

123

123

12

GNDWINGHP+5VWINGP1WINGDIS1WINGP2WINGDIS2EXITMTR+24VGND

EXITENC+5VGNDEXITSNSX+5V

GNDFLCTSNSX+5VGNDFLOUTSNSX

+5VDUPGTSOL+24VCOUNT+24VCOUNTCNTXGND

Flipper gatesolenoid

P255 P709

P710

P711

P712

Exit motorencoder

P713

P714

P715

P716

P 8 3 1

P 8 3

2

P 8 3 3

P 8 3 1

P 8 3

2

P 8 3 3

1234

1234

123

4

4321

4321

432

1

Counter P 7 0

81234 P

7 0

81234

M1

(In case of HC5000, this counter isconnected to P254 11-14.)

Suction chamber sensor


STOFSNSXGNDSTOFCNTXGND

CMBFLXGNDCMBCNTX

GND

SUCPUMP1GNDSUCPUMPCHK1GNDGNDWEISTBTL+5VGNDWEISTNF+5V

123

456

78910111213141516171819202122

123

4

1234

P254 P705

P707

Waste ink sensor L

Waste ink sensor U

123

45678

910

123

12

3

P 7 1 8

123

1098

76543

21

SUCPUMP1GNDSUCPUMPCHK1

GNDGNDWEISTBTL+5VGND

WEISTNF+5V

P717P717

P721

P720

P 7 1 8

123

P S

P811

12 B1/1+24

V

GND

Suction pump

(In case of HC5000, these parts areconnected to P255 24-33.)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

FL Power supply

FL control PCB

123

45

6

12345678910111213141516171819

2021222324

A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

B8B9B10

A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1B1B2B3B4B5B6B7

B8B9

B10

VOUTGNDVOUTGND

VOUTGNDVOUTGNDV

OUTGND

CN1

CN2

1

234

5

LIVE

NEUTR AL

FG

P813

E1

to Power supplyP810

CN

tray 1

Paper detectionsensor

tray 1Paper size detection

sensor

tray 1Tray volume sensor

1


2

tray 1Paper width sensor

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9B10

A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10

VOUTGNDVOUTGND

VOUTGNDVOUTGNDVOUTGND

CN3

CN

tray 2Paper detection

sensor

tray 2

Paper size detectionsensor


1


2

tray 2Paper width sensor

tray 1FL feed tray Elevator

motor tray 2

FL feed tray Elevatormotor

12345

CN4

Nip release solenoid(FL front)

Nip release solenoid(FL rear)

1234

CN5

1

23456

789101112

1314

CN6FL multi-tray 1pickup sensor

FL feed sensor 1

FL feed sensor 2

FL feed sensor 3 (receive)

FL feed sensor 3 (send)




FL control PCB

G1/2

12

345

6

CN7

tray 1 Upper limit sensor

tray 2 Upper limit sensor

123

FL Transfer motor

FG sensor

CN8

12345678910

CN9Transfer clutch 1

Transfer clutch 2

Transfer clutch 3

Tray 2 Pickup clutch

Tray 1 Pickup clutch

CN10FL left cover SW

12

34

12345678

CN12 tray 1

Setup confirmation switch

tray 2Setup confirmation switch

P814123

P 8 1 5

123

P 8 1 5

321

P 8 1 6

21

P 8 1 6

21

21

P817

MF door safety SWILPET

ILPET

CN13

118

1920212223242526

2728293031

3233343536

Nip release solenoid(transfer)

CN14 to PRH PCB CN7


(transfer)

Transfer clutch 4

FL feed sensor 4

CN15FL transfer motor

CN16

FL multi feed tray pickup

motor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

AF control PCB

C

Exit tray paper detection

sensor

CN11234

5

Paper guide base SW(paper guide F)

CN212

Paper guide base SW(paper guide F)

CN3123

12

345

67

8

CN4Paper guide HP sensor

Paper guide limit sensor

Paper guide base SW

(paper guide R)

Paper stopper pulse motor

CN51234

Paper guide pulse motor

CN61

234

Paper stopper HP button

CN712

1234

5

CN8Paper stopper HP sensor

Paper guide base SW

(paper stopper)




AF control PCB

G2/2

CN6

to HC control PCBCN7



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)



Scanner

CHAPTER 14: Scanner

CONTENTS



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Mechanism

1.RISO Scanner HS2000

1-1.Specification



Scanner

2.FB Unit

2-1.Original Set Section

Sett ing the original

Place the original on the stage glass and close the stage cover.

Unlike the AF unit in which the original is placed on the center of the unit, the original isplaced flat against the top corner of the stage glass.

If the original is set on both the AF unit and stage glass, the original on the AF unit isscanned first.

The detection of the original on the FB stage glass is done by the original detection sensor.

The stage cover open status is detected by two separate sensors.

The stage cover sensor detects whether the stage cover is fully closed or not.

The stage cover angle sensor detects the stage cover at a half opened (closed) position,and the original size is checked when this sensor is triggered.

Original size detection

The six original size detection sensors looks at the original on the stage glass and check theoriginal size when the stage cover angle sensor is triggered.

The combination of the detection status of these six sensors determine the original size, asshown on the table given below.

Original Size / Sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6

A5 O

A5R O

A4R O O O O

A4 O O O

A3 O O O O O O

B5R O O

B5 O O

B4 O O O O O

Originaldetectionsensor

Original sizedetectionsensors

1

2 3

4 5

6



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-2.Original Scanning

Mechanism

The lamp carriage consists of original illuminating lamp, Mirror-1 and lamp-inverter.

The mirror carriage consists of Mirror-2 and Mirror-3.

The original image illuminated by the lamp is reflected by the Mirrors 1, 2 and 3. The reflectedimage is then caught by the lens on the CCD assembly and focused on the CCD.

Cooling fan is equipped to cool down the heat created by the lamp and power supply unit. At the start of the scanning job, the cooling fan activates.

The cooling fan stops after 180 seconds from the completion of the scanning job.

Carriage movement

The CCD assembly is fixed in its position.

The read pulse motor drives both the lamp carriage and mirror carriage. When the lamp car-riage slides one certain amount, the mirror carriage slides only half of that amount. This systemis called the full-half-rate-mirror-scanning.

With this system, the distance between the original and the CCD stays the same as the readpulse motor drives the lamp carriage and mirror carriage.

Inverter Lamp

Mirror-2

Mirror-1

CCD assembly

Mirror-3

Mirror carriage

Lamp carriage

CCDLens

Read pulse motor



Scanner

2-3.Functional positions of the scanner

The carriage HP (home position) is detected by the scanner HP sensor, and all the scannermovement is calculated from this HP position.

(1) HP position

This is the carriage standby position. As shown on the sketch below, this is the position 20mmto the left from the edge of the carriage HP sensor.

(2) Offset/Gain adjustment position The Offset/Gain adjustment is equivalent to the sensitivity adjustment of the CCD.

The Offset adjustment adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD in reading the black color image. The Gain adjustment adjusts the sensitivity of the CCD in reading the images between the blackand white in color.

The Offset/Gain adjustment is made only once on each power ON of the scanner unit.

The Offset/Gain adjustment is made in the following sequence.

1) The carriage is moved to the shading plate.

2) The lamp is turned OFF and the Offset adjustment is made.

3) The lamp is turned ON and the Gain adjustment is made. (The Offset adjustment resultshifts a little bit after the Gain adjustment is made.)

4) The lamp is turned OFF to make the Offset adjustment for the second time.5) The carriage is returned back t the HP position.

(3) ABC (Auto Base Control)

The scanner is equipped with original background color erasing function. Therefore ABC adjust-ment is not performed.

(4) Shading compensation position

The shading compensation is to adjust and level out the sensitivity differences between the CCDelements aligned side by side. As with the Offset/Gain adjustment, the shading compensation isadjusted with black color and then white.

The shading compensation is performed for each original scanning. The adjustment is made infollowing sequence.

1) With the carriage at its HP position, the lamp is turned OFF and black color calibration ismade.

2) The lamp is turned ON and the carriage is moved to the shading plate. Depending onwhether the AF or the FB is used, the white-color shading compensation is performed whilemoving the carriage towards the AF or the FB scanning start position.

3) When the carriage arrives to either the AF or FB scanning start position, the actual originalimage scanning action starts.

(5) Carriage fixing position

This is the position in which the carriage is fixed for the transportation purpose.

To prevent the carriage from a mechanical jam caused by turning ON the power and operatingthe scanner unit before mechanically unlocking the carriage from the fixed position, a softwarelock prevents the read pulse motor from activating. During the installation of the scanner unit,

after unlocking the carriage mechanically from the fixed position, test mode No.384 must be per-formed [selecting 0 on the test mode] to unlock the software lock.

2 20mm 9.5 5 5 3.5 292mm 143mm 20mm6mm

Carriage maximum movement area

HP sensor Shading plate

Lampreplacement position

Maximumscanning lengthOriginal guide plateCarriage fix position

FB scanning positionOffset/Gains adjustment

Shading compensation (White)

AF scanning

position

HP position

Shading compensation (Black)



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

3.AF Unit

3-1.Original Set Section

Sett ing the original

Place the original on the original feed tray and slide the original fence against the original.

Compared to the FB unit in which the original is placed on the top edge of the stage glass,the original is placed on the center for the AF unit.

If original is set on both the FB and AF, the original from the AF is scanned first.

The original detection on the AF unit is made by AF original detection sensor.

Two sensors, the stage cover sensor and stage cover angle sensor, looks at the stage coverstatus of the FB unit. Of the two sensors, the sensor which detects whether the stage cover (AFunit) is closed or opened is the stage cover sensor. If the stage cover sensor does not detectthe stage cover (AF unit) closed, the AF operation is disabled.

Original size detection

The size of the original on the AF unit original feed tray is determined by the combination of two AF tray sensors (sensor 1 and sensor 2) and AF tray VR sensor.

Original feed cover and other mechanism

Whether the original feed cover is set in position or not is checked by AF original feed cover setswitch.

A cooling fan is equipped on the AF unit to prevent heat build-up within the AF unit.

The cooling fan activates with the start of the AF scanning job.

The cooling fan deactivates 180 seconds after the scanning job is finished.

AF cover set switch

AF Tray sensor 2 AF tray sensor 1

AF tray VR sensor

Actuator of the AF original detection sensor



Scanner

3-2.Original Path

Simplex scanning

(1) The original is transferred to the registration roller by the pickup roller, feed roller and separationroller.

The drive for these rollers is taken from the feed motor.

The registration sensor detects the original arriving at the registration roller.

The registration roller is still stationary. The leading edge of the original hits against theregistration roller and makes a buckle to compensate any skew, and waits.

(2) The registration roller then starts its rotation and feeds the original to the transfer roller 1. Thetransfer roller 1, white roller, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller then starts the rotation and ejectsthe original onto the original receiving tray.

The registration motor drives the registration roller.

The read motor drives the transfer roller 1, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller.

The original IN sensor and original OUT sensor checks the original transfer status.

The original is scanned at the white roller by the CCD located within the FB unit.

Pickup roller

Feed roller

Read motor

Registration roller

Feed motor

Registration sensor

Transfer roller 1

White roller

Transfer roller 2

Ejection roller

Original receiving tray

Separation roller

Registration motor

Original IN sensor

Original OUT sensor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Duplex scanning

(1) Of the duplex scanning, the scanning of the first side is done the same way as the simplex scan-ning. Before starting the scanning of the second side of the original, the original is stopped, justbefore the original escapes out from the ejection roller.

(2) The read motor then rotates in the reverse direction to feed the original back to the registrationroller with the original flipped the other way.

With the function of the switchback flap, the original, instead of going back towards the

transfer rollers 2 and 1, it is guided directly towards the registration roller. The registration sensor detects the original arriving to the registration roller.

The registration roller is still stationary. The leading edge of the original hits against theregistration roller and makes a buckle to compensate any skew, and waits.

(3) From that point, the original takes the same path from the step (2) of the simplex scanning until just before the original escapes out from the ejection roller.

(4) After the second side of the original is scanned and just before the trailing edge of the originalescapes out from the ejection roller, the ejection roller stops.

(5) The original then takes the same path back into the AF unit via the switchback flap through theregistration roller, white roller, etc., but without scanning this time and land on the original receiv-ing tray with the original surface flipped the other way.

This last movement is necessary to eject the original onto the original receiving tray to pilethe ejected originals in the same page order as they were stacked on the original feed tray.

Read motor

Registration roller

Registration sensor

Ejection roller

Original receiving tray

Registration motor

Switchback flap



Scanner

3-3.Roller Rotations

Rotation of each rol ler

The feed roller is driven by the feed motor.

The pickup roller is driven by the feed motor via the feed roller.

The separation roller rotates by the friction against the feed roller.

Up-and-Down movement of the pickup rol ler

The pickup roller makes up-and-down movement with the feed roller shaft as a pivot.

The pickup roller needs to be raised up when setting the originals on the original feed tray. Forthis reason, the pickup roller is raised up when the power is turned ON or when the original feedcover is opened and closed.

The downward movement of the pickup roller takes place when the original starts to feed. Whenthe last original feeds into the AF unit, the pickup roller raises up once again.

The pickup roller moves down in following manner.

A torque limiter is equipped on the feed roller shaft mounted on the arm of the pickup roller.

When the feed motor rotates, the rotation of the feed roller shaft swings the pickup rollerdown on top of the original stacked on the original feed tray. After that the pickup rollerstarts to rotate.

The pickup roller is raised up by rotating the feed motor in the reverse direction.

Original stopper

When the originals are stacked on the original feed tray, the leading edge of the originals restshitting against the original stopper.

The original stopper is locked in down position when the pickup roller is in the raised position.

In the contrary at the same time the pickup roller swings down to start the original feeding action,the original stopper is designed to lift up to allow the originals to feed into the AF unit.

Pickup roller

Feed roller

Feed motor

Separation roller

Original stopper

In the condition as shown on the photo-graph, with the original feed coveropened, the original stopper is in the

lifted position.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Separation rol ler

An original is pinched between the separation roller and feed roller and pushed towards the reg-istration roller.

The separation roller is equipped with a torque limiter to allow the roller to rotate together withthe feed roller in the normal condition when only one sheet of original is pinched between theseparation roller and feed roller.

If more than one sheet of originals happens to feed in between the separation roller and feed

roller, the separation roller is prevented from rotating by the function of the torque limiter. In thiscase the separation roller stays still and acts as a stripper pad to hold the rest of the originals toallow only the top original to feed into the AF unit.

Rotation of the other rol lers

The registration roller is driven by the registration motor

The transfer roller 1, white roller, transfer roller 2 and ejection roller are all driven by the readmotor.

All these four rollers rotate when the read motor rotates in the forward direction.

When the read motor rotates in the reverse direction for the duplex scanning, one-wayclutches equipped on the rollers other than the ejection roller allows only the ejection rollerto rotate in the reverse direction. Other three rollers stay stationary.

Nip solenoid of the ejection rol ler

In order to allow easy removal of a jammed original, the nip solenoid of the ejection roller isswitched OFF to release the nip of the ejection roller when the AF unit is in standby mode.

During the second side scanning in duplex scanning, the nip solenoid is switched OFF to

release the nip of the ejection roller once the original feeds back into the AF unit. This isbecause depending on the length of the original, the ejection roller may grab the leading edgeand the tail edge of one same original. Releasing the nip prevents this from happening.

Separation roller

Feed roller

Ejection roller Registration roller

Read motor Registration motor

Transfer roller 1

White roller

Transfer roller 2

Nip solenoid



Scanner

Disassembly

1.FB unit

1-1.Covers

Turn OFF the power and remove the covers listed below.

(1) Left cover

Remove 4 screws, and slide the Left cover to the left to remove.

(2) Right cover

Remove 3 screw to detach the stage glass support on the right.

Remove 2 screws, lifting the top edge of the Right cover a little bit, and slide the cover off.

(3) Front cover

Remove the Left and Right covers first.

Remove 4 screws to detach the Front cover.

* The 2 screws on the top are special shoulder-screws.(4) Rear cover

Remove the AF unit and the 2 shoulder-screws used in mounting the AF unit.

Remove the Left and Right covers first.

Remove 6 screws, push the stage cover sensor actuator down, and then slide the cover off.* The 2 screws on the top are special shoulder-screws.

Left cover

Right cover

Stage glass supportFront cover

Rear cover

Shoulder-screw for AF unit mounting

Actuator of the stage cover sensor



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-2.Stage Glass

(1) Turn OFF the power and remove following two covers.

Stage glass support on the right.

Left cover

(2) Remove 2 screws and lift the stage glass off the unit together with the plastic original stopperattached.

* Caution should be paid not to break off the plastic original stopper from the stage glass.

1-3.Original Detection Sensor and Original Size Detection Sensors

(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the stage glass.

(2) Remove 11 screws and detach CCD cover.

(3) Remove 8 screws, lift the sensor cover and turn it up-side-down.

(4) Remove the sensors by disconnecting the connectors.

Stage glass

Original stopper

CCD Cover

Sensor cover



Scanner

1-4.Lamp

(1) Activate test mode No.0343 (Scanner Lamp Replacement Position Movement) and switch OFFthe power after the lamp carriage moves to the replacement position.

(2) Remove the stage glass.

(3) Carefully lift the clear plastic films located over the scanner lamp removal cutout on the FBframe. Remove lamp socket mounting screws, one each from left and right.

* In mounting back the scanner lamp, make sure not to tighten the lamp socket mounting screws withthe lamp socket not firmly fit in position, or the lamp socket may hit and jam against the stay on theFB unit when the lamp carriage slides.

(4) Turn over the black inverter cover.

(5) Remove 2 mounting screws of the inverter PCB. Disconnect the connector from the scannerlamp by turning the inverter PCB around.

(6) Remove the scanner lamp.

1-5.CCD Unit

(1) Switch OFF the power and remove following 2 parts.

Stage glass

CCD cover

(2) Disconnect the 3 connectors from the CCD PCB.

(3) Remove 3 screws and detach the CCD unit.* Do not loosen or remove the screws which are painted red.

Lamp socket mounting screws

Inverter PCBBlack inverter cover

Remove these 3 screws



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

1-6.Cooling Fan

(1) Switch OFF the power and remove the rear cover.

(2) Disconnect the connector of the cooling fan, remove 2 screws and detach the cooling fan fromthe unit with bracket attached.

1-7.Stage Cover Sensor and Stage Cover Angle Sensor


(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the two sensors and the actuator as an assembly from the unit.

(3) Remove each sensor from the assembly by unplugging the connector and undoing the hooks.

1-8.Read Motor


(2) Remove the tension spring.

(3) Disconnect the connector from the read pulse motor.

(4) Remove 4 screws and take off the motor with the bracket attached.* In mounting the motor back, make sure that the timing belt is correctly hooked onto the motor pulley

Cooling fan

Read motor

Tension spring



Scanner

2.AF Unit

2-1.Stripper Area

Stripper unit

(1) Open the original feed cover.

(2) Pinch the hooks on both sides and remove the stripper unit by rotating it up.

Separation rol ler

(1) Remove the stripper unit.

(2) Remove the separation roller, as an unit, by rotating it for approximately 90 decrees.* In mounting the separation roller, make sure to attach the spring on the pins at the top and bottom.

Stripper unit

Separation roller

Spring



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

2-2.Parts around the Feed Roller

Feed rol ler unit


(2) Remove 4 screws and take off the black colored cover. The bottom portion has 2 hooks.

(3) Remove the feed roller unit.

1) Remove the black clip on the front and remove black colored metal from the shaft.

2) Remove the black clip on the rear and push gold colored metal out from the frame andremove the metal from the shaft.

* The 2 metals removed are not compatible. The gold colored one is an oilless metal used on the rear.The black colored one is used against plastic, and it is used on the front.

Remove this black colored cover

Remove these two black clips

REARFRONT



Scanner

Feed rol lers

* Small parts used on the feed roller unit are different between the front and rear. Also the location ofthe parts are complicated. It is best to work on the front first, disassembly and assembly. Then aftercompleting the front, disassemble and assemble the rear. While working on the front, look at therear as a reference, and look at the front as a reference when working on the rear.

(1) Take off the feed roller unit from the AF main unit.

(2) Remove two white clips from the front of the feed roller unit. Remove the arm and a pin.

(3) Remove stopper lever from the front of the unit.(4) Remove the guide.

* Remove the guide from the pickup roller shaft first. Then remove the guide from the feed roller shaft.

(5) Remove the 2 white clips holding the 2 rollers. Slide the rollers and pulleys just a little bit toremove pin. Slide the pulleys and rollers out from the shafts.

* Black colored pulley goes back on feed roller shaft. White colored pulley goes back on the pickuproller shaft. Do not mount these two pulleys on the wrong shaft.

* In mounting the feed roller unit back on the AF Unit, pay caution not to damage the plastic actuatorplate of the original detection sensor, and of other fragile parts.

ArmStopper Lever

Guide

Feed roller

Pickup roller

Actuator of the Originaldetection sensor

Tip of the Stopper is ontop of the Arm

Arm is positionedabove the Stopper

Stopper is positionedabove the projection fromthe Original feed cover

Stopper lever

Arm

Stopper

Projection from theOriginal feed cover.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

AF Original detection sensor

(1) Remove the original detection sensor after disconnecting the connector.

2-3.Parts on the Original Feed Tray


(2) Flip open the original feed tray after removing 1 screw from the original feed tray stopper.

(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the bottom cover of the original feed tray.* In mounting the bottom cover of the original feed tray, pay caution not to pinch the electrical wires.

AF tray sensors 1 & 2

(1) Disconnect the connectors from the sensors and unhook the hooks to remove the sensors.

AF tray VR sensor

(1) Remove 2 mounting screws and detach the VR sensor assembly.

(2) Remove the mounting nut, disconnect the connector and remove the VR sensor

* In mounting the VR sensor, match the triangle marks on the round gear and the flat gear.* After the VR sensor is assembled back, perform the volume adjustment of the sensor by test mode.

AF Original detection sensor

REARFRONT

Original feed tray stopper

Bottom cover of the original feed tray

AF tray sensors

AF tray VR sensor



Scanner

2-4. Parts on the AF Drive Area

(1) Open the Original feed cover.

(2) Remove the front cover of the AF unit by removing 2 screws.

(3) Remove the rear cover of the AF unit by removing 3 screws.

(4) From the PCB, disconnect 7 connectors of the wires leading to the drive area, detach the groundwire, and free the wires from the wire saddle.

(5) From the front of the unit, remove the solenoid spring, solenoid and lever.* Watch out with the pin falling.

(6) Remove 1 screw of the original feed cover.

(7) Remove 7 mounting screws and detach the AF drive unit.* When taking off the AF drive unit, the base portion tends to spring upward. To prevent this, it is best

to tape down the front portion of the AF unit onto the FB unit using strong adhesive tape.

Solenoid spring

Solenoid

Lever



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Motors and Cooling fan assembly (detaching from the AF unit)

(1) Disconnect 1 ground wire, 1 sensor connector and 1 reusable wire harness band.

(2) Remove 2 mounting screws.

(3) Disconnect one connector and free the wires.

Ejection rol ler

(1) Loosen the tension on the tensioner located on the rear of the AF unit.

(2) Remove 1 E-ring and take off 1 pulley on the bottom. (refer to above photograph)

(3) Free the hook on the top pulley and remove the pulley. (refer to above photograph)

(4) Remove clip and metal.

(5) Detach the ejection roller by removing 1 white clip and metal in the front of the unit.

Remove these 2 mounting screwsRemove the ground wire and connector

located in this area.

Disconnect the reusable wire harness andconnector from this area.

Tensioner

Remove the two pulleys and timing belt.

Ejection roller



Scanner

White rol ler and nearby parts

(1) Loosen the tension on the 2 tensioners on the rear of the AF unit.

(2) Remove 2 E-rings and detach the pulleys. (refer to above photograph)

(3) Remove 3 E-rings and 2 bearings.

(4) From the front of the AF unit, remove 3 metal clips, 2 gears and 2 bearings from the two shaftsshown on the photograph below. (Small gear will also come off when taking the bearing out.)

(5) Remove 3 E-rings and 2 bearings.

(6) Remove the three rollers attached together.* Watch out not to lose the springs from both ends of the assembly.

Tensioners

Remove the parts on these two shafts.

Remove parts attached onto these two shafts. Small gear



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

3 . A F & FB Fi rm wa re Do wn lo ad in g

[ Normal f i rmware downloading method using USB connection]

Getting Ready

(1) Connect the controller, touch-panel, scanner and AF unit to the HC5500.

(2) Turn ON the power of all the devices connected.(3) Insert one CF card in USB adopter, containing the firmware for the AF and FB unit, into any ofthe USB port on the rear of the controller.

(4) Using the touch-panel, access into test mode.

From the TOP window of the touch-panel, press the Configuration button and access to thePassword Input window.

Push the CapsLock key to enable capital letter input.

Type in the 5-digit test mode access password A S T U ~ .

Push on the phrase Password input shown on the top of the screen.

Press the OK button at the bottom of the display.

AF unit firmware downloading

(5) Input test mode No.0141 (AF Download) and press START key. The LED lamp on the front cover of the scanner unit lights in red and green color.

A message In Action is displayed on the touch-panel window.

(6) The touch-panel display will inform when the downloading is ended. Press the STOP button onthe touch-panel window when the downloading ends. Downloading takes about 2 minutes.

FB unit firmware downloading

(7) Input test mode No.0140 (Download) and press START key.

The LED lamp on the front cover of the scanner unit lights in red and green color.

A message In Action is displayed on the touch-panel window.

(8) The touch-panel display will inform when the downloading is ended. Press the STOP button onthe touch-panel window when the downloading ends. Downloading takes about 20 seconds.

Ending the firmware downloading job(9) Disconnect the CF card adopter from the USB port of the controller.

(10) Turn OFF the power of the Scanner Unit and then turn ON the Scanner Unit power again.

(11) Confirm the downloading of the new firmware by checking the firmware version numbers on thetouch-panel display. The firmware version numbers are displayed when accessed into testmode.

* Both the AF and FB firmware can be on the CF card at same time.

* When downloading both the AF and FB unit firmware, download the AF firmware first. Then download theFB firmware. Make sure to turn OFF and turn ON the scanner power once the downloading is finished.

* The version number display on the touch-panel is refreshed only after the scanner unit is powered OFF and

powered ON after the downloading.

[Another downloading method]

For any reason if the firmware downloading cannot be done through USB connection, there isan alternate way to download.

The limitation on this alternate method is that only the FB unit firmware can be downloaded. AFunit firmware downloading cannot be made by this alternate method.

(1) Copy only the FB unit firmware on CF card. Do not include any other data on the CF card.

(2) Turn OFF the scanner power. Remove the scanner rear cover and insert the CF card into theCF card slot on the Scanner PCB.

(3) Turn ON the scanner power. When correct FB unit firmware is copied onto the CF card, the firmware downloading startswhen the scanner power is turned ON. The LED lamp on the front cover of the scanner



Scanner

(4) When the downloading finishes, the LED changes to a solid GREEN light.

(5) Turn OFF the scanner power and remove the CF card from the scanner PCB. Mount back thescanner rear cover and turn ON the scanner power to complete the procedure.



HC5500 2006/9 (Rev 2.1)

Adjustment

1.Adjustments on the AF Unit

1-1.AF Tray VR Sensor

Make this adjustment after replacing the VR sensor or when the sensor is not correctly detectingthe original size.

To check whether correct original size detection is being made or not can be checked byaccessing into test mode No.0470 (AF Original Size) from the touch-panel.

Adjustment

(1) Open the original guides to 100mm width and activate test mode No.0452 from the touch-panel.

(2) Then open the original guides to 297mm width and activate test mode No.0453 from the touch-panel.

(3) To check whether correct adjustment is made or not, place a standard size original on the origi-

nal feed tray and activate test mode No.0470. Correct original size will display on the touch-panel if the VR sensor is detecting the original width correctly.

1-2.AF Original IN Sensor

Sensitivity adjustment on the AF Original IN Sensor needs to be made after replacing the sensoror if the sensor is giving false original jam message due to an incorrect sensitivity setting. Theerror messages shown by the sensor are the following two.

R20-412 [Original jam at the Original IN Sensor]

R20-415 [Original not arriving to the Original IN Sensor]

Adjustment

(1) The adjustment is made with no original on the original feed tray. Make sure all the covers andtray are set correctly and the unit is operational.

(2) Activate test mode No.0451 (AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment) from the touch-panel. The adjustment ends automatically.

1-3.Other Adjustments

Refer to the separate instructions sheet contained with the product for the adjustments listed below.

AF Unit position adjustment

Distorted image correction

Horizontal (left & right) image position adjustment Vertical (top & bottom) image position adjustment.



HC5000

SPARE PARTS LIST

(VERSION: 1.1 as September 2004)

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION

manuals4you.com



Contents

1000 JIGs1001 Flipper Unit1002 Drain Ink Tank, Power Supply and Suction Pump

1003 Standard Feed Tray1004 Ink Bottle Section1005 Covers1006 Duplex Transfer Unit1007 Side Registration Section1008 Vertical Transfer Section1009 Duplex IN Section1010 Exit Unit1011 Registration Section1012 Reservoir Section

1013 Print Head Section1014 Maintenance Unit1015 BP Transfer Section1016 PCBs1017 Drive Section1018 System Controller PS7R

manuals4you.com


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/14912842-rhdcpsrm-riso-hc5500-digital-color-printer-service-repair-manualdesbloqueado 455/496manuals4you.com



1000

№ Part Number Part Name Qty

* 033-19321-003 INTLOCK JIG3 1* 033-19322-000 INTLOCK JIG4 1* 033-19318-002 SUPPORT STAND 1

* Reference Pages 1-5 to 1-7 for Jigs

manuals4you.com



A

A

B

Front

3

5

4

3

1

6

2

Fig1001 Flipper Unit

018-0147-1001-0

manuals4you.com



1001


1 033-19244-009 FLIPPER UNIT 1 FW92442 033-19245-005 FLIPPER GATE 1 FW9245

4 033-19247-008 FL ROLLER U 1 FW92475 033-19248-004 FL ROLLER L 1 FW92486 033-19301-002 COUNTER 1 FW9301

manuals4you.com



A

A

Front

8

7

1

1

9

018-0147-1002-0

g 1002 Drain Ink Tank, Po

manuals4you.com



1002


1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 2 FW92252 033-19233-007 SUCTION CHAMBER 1 FW92333 033-19234-003 SUCTION PUMP UNIT 1 FW9234

4 033-19235-000 SUCTION TUBE 1 FW92355 033-19236-006 PUMP FILTER 1 FW92366 033-19302-009 POWER SUPPLY 1 FW93027 033-19303-005 FUSE1 6 FW93038 033-19304-001 FUSE2 3 FW93049 033-19316-000 DRAIN INK TANK 1 FW9316

488-00054-004 Power Cable; PS7R

manuals4you.com



A

A

Front

018-0147-1003-0

Fig 1003 Standard Paper Feed Tray

5

7

15

19

2

26

25

24

23

22

21 20

18

17

14

16

13

12

11

10

9

8

6

4

3

1

27

28

29

30

6

7

16

2122

23

24

25

manuals4you.com



1003


P.-F.-T.Unit:SU 11 030-14102-107 *Bottom Cover; P.-F.-T. 12 033-12257-008 *Paper Feed Board 1

3 030-14113-109 *Support Plate R; P.-F.-T. 14 030-14114-105 *Support Plate F; P.-F.-T. 15 030-14136-001 *Guide; Harness 16 030-14134-106 *Stopper Roller 27 634-06030-000 *COLLAR; 6x3 28 612-11104-006 *GEAR; M0.8X18X6 19 030-14132-006 *Bracket; P.-W. Potentiometer 1

10 030-51093-002 *P.-W. Potentiometer Ass'y II 111 030-51023-403 *Junction Harness; P.-F.-T. 112 444-33000-002 *SENSOR; GP2A200LCS 213 030-14123-007 *Fence Cover 114 030-14116-108 *Guide F; P.-F.-T. 115 030-14115-101 *Guide R; P.-F-.T. 1

16 030-14131-10 * ock Lever; Paper Guide 217 030-14117-00 uide Shaft; Paper Guide 118 612-12103-00 EAR; M1X16X3.2 119 030-14126-00 lider F; Paper Guide 120 030-14124-00 lider R; Paper Guide 121 030-14129-00 ock A; Paper Guide 222 030-14130-00 ock B; Paper Guide 223 030-14119-00 lide Rack; P.-F.-T. 224 030-14133-00 ollar; Slide Rack; P.-F.-T. 225 030-04001-10 eal ; P-Feed Tray 126 030-14137-00 lide Sheet P.-F.-T. 427 030-14138-10 over F; P.-F.-T. Damper 128 030-14139-108 Cover R; P.-F.-T. Damper 1

29 610-10006-006 OWH 10-2.2NLW 130 610-10007-002 OWH 10-2.2NRW 1

manuals4you.com



VIEW A

A

BC

D

A

D

C

BA

Front

8

5

4

3

2

6

1

1

1

1

018-0147-1004-0

g 1004 Ink Bottle Section

manuals4you.com



1004


1 033-19218-008 INK HOLDER 4 FW92182 033-19219-004 BOTTLE JOINT K 1 FW92193 033-19220-002 BOTTLE JOINT C 1 FW9220

4 033-19221-009 BOTTLE JOINT M 1 FW92215 033-19222-005 BOTTLE JOINT Y 1 FW92226 033-19223-001 INFUSE SOLENOID 1 FW92237 033-19224-008 IB COVER SWITCH 1 FW92248 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 1 FW9225

manuals4you.com



Front

11

12

5

8

9

3

2

10

018-0147-1005-0

Fig 1005 Covers

manuals4you.com



1005


1 CONTROL PANEL 1 FW92952 033-19306-004 TOP COVER 1 FW93063 033-19307-000 INK COVER 1 FW9307

4 033-19308-007 RIGHT COVER 1 FW93085 033-19309-003 LEFT COVER 1 FW93096 033-19310-001 REAR COVER 1 FW93107 033-19311-008 FRONT DOOR R 1 FW93118 033-19312-004 FRONT DOOR L 1 FW93129 033-19313-000 INNER COVER 1 1 FW9313

10 033-19314-007 INNER COVER 2 1 FW931411 033-19315-003 INNER COVER 3 1 FW931512 033-19317-006 SUPPORT BAR 1 FW9317

manuals4you.com



Front

B

A

1

4

3

018-0147-1006-0

g 1006 Duplex Transfer Unit

manuals4you.com



1006


1 033-19255-000 DUPLEX UNIT 1 FW92552 033-19256-007 DUPLEX BELT U 1 FW92563 033-19257-003 DUPLEX BELT L 1 FW9257

4 033-19258-000 DPX UNIT GEAR 2 FW9258

manuals4you.com



2

2

3

018-0147-1007-0

g 1007 Side Registration S

manuals4you.com



1007


1 033-19267-009 CCD UNIT 1 FW92672 033-19268-005 CCD SENSOR 2 FW92683 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 1 FW9225

4 033-19292-003 CCD AD CONV PCB 1 FW9292

manuals4you.com



A

A

B

B

018-0147-1008-0

g 1008 Vertical Transfer S

manuals4you.com



1008


manuals4you.com



B

A

B

4

2

3

018-0147-1009-0

g 1009 Duplex IN Section

manuals4you.com



1009


1 033-19249-000 STAR WHEEL DPX 1 FW92492 033-19250-009 PHOTOREFLECT B 1 FW92503 033-19251-005 PHOTOREFLECTOR 2 FW9251

4 033-19252-001 DPX ROLLER 1 FW92525 033-19253-008 NIP ROLLER 2 FW9253

manuals4you.com



Front

7

8

6

3

1

4

018-0147-1010-0

g 1010 Exit Unit

manuals4you.com



1010


1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 2 FW92252 033-19237-002 EXIT UNIT 1 FW92373 033-19238-009 EXIT MOTOR UNIT 1 FW9238

4 033-19239-005 WING MOTOR UNIT 1 FW92395 033-19240-003 TIMING BELT 1 FW92406 033-19241-000 SPONGE ROLLER 1 FW92417 033-19242-006 WING FRONT 1 FW92428 033-19243-002 WING REAR 1 FW9243

manuals4you.com



Front

1

1

7

4

9

10

2

8

12

11

3

018-0147-1011-0

Fig 1011Reg strat on ect on

manuals4you.com



1011


1 033-19251-005 PHOTOREFLECTOR 2 FW92512 033-19254-004 MICRO SWITCH 1 FW92543 033-19271-006 RESIST ROLLER L 1 FW9271

4 033-19272-002 RESIST ROLLER U 1 FW92725 033-19285-007 SWBACK UNIT U 1 FW92856 033-19286-003 SWBACK UNIT L 1 FW92867 033-19287-000 SWBACK DRV ROLL 1 FW92878 033-19288-006 SWBACK DOOR UNIT 1 FW92889 033-19289-002 TOP EDGE SENSOR 1 FW9289

10 033-19290-000 TOP EDGE LED 1 FW929011 033-19299-008 DOUBLE FEED LED 1 FW929912 033-19300-006 DBL FEED SENSOR 1 FW9300

manuals4you.com



Front

4

5

3

2

1

018-0147-1012-0

g 1012 Reservoir Section

manuals4you.com



1012


1 033-19209-009 RESERVOIR K 1 FW92092 033-19210-007 RESERVOIR C 1 FW92103 033-19211-003 RESERVOIR M 1 FW9211

4 033-19212-000 RESERVOIR Y 1 FW92125 033-19214-002 OVERFLOW TANK 1 FW92146 033-19215-009 PRESS CHAMBER 1 FW92157 033-19216-005 PRESSURE PUMP 1 FW92168 033-19217-001 PHOTOINTERRUPT 1 FW9217

manuals4you.com



A

B

Front

2

4

3

3

5

5

7

6

6

7

1

018-0147-1013-0

g 1013 Print Head Section

manuals4you.com



1013


1 033-19202-004 PRINT HEAD 24 FW92022 033-19203-000 HEAD DRIVER PCB 4 FW92033 033-19204-007 RIBBON CABLE 48 FW9204

4 033-19205-003 HEAD JOINT 24 FW92055 033-19206-000 ID UNIT 2 FW92066 033-19207-006 VALVE 1 2 FW92077 033-19208-002 VALVE 2 2 FW9208

manuals4you.com



A

A

B

BC

C

8

3

5

6

4

2

1

1

1

1

018-0147-1014-0

g 1014 a ntenance Unit

manuals4you.com



1014


1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 4 FW92252 033-19226-000 CLEANING UNIT 1 FW92263 033-19227-007 INK PAN MOTOR 1 FW9227

4 033-19228-003 CLEANING MOTOR 1 FW92285 033-19229-000 SUCTION HEAD 24 FW92296 033-19230-008 ＣＡＰ 24 FW92307 033-19231-004 STAR WHEEL UNIT 1 FW92318 033-19232-000 TORQUELIMITER 2 FW9232

manuals4you.com



6

7

6

3

4

6

018-0147-1015-0

g 1015 BP Transfer Sectio

manuals4you.com



1015


1 033-19259-006 TRANSFER UNIT 1 FW92592 033-19260-004 TRANSFER BELT 1 FW92603 033-19261-000 BELT ENCODER 1 FW9261

4 033-19262-007 TRANSFER MOTOR 1 FW92625 033-19263-003 CLEANING ROLLER 1 FW92636 033-19264-000 BLOWER FAN 4 FW92647 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 1 FW9225

manuals4you.com



Front

7

3

4

2

1

5

3

6

6

018-0147-1016-1

Fig1016 PCBs

8

manuals4you.com



1016


1 033-19293-000 ORIP PCB 1 FW92932 033-19294-006 ORMC PCB 1 FW92943 033-19296-009 MOTOR DRV PCB 2 FW9296

4 033-19297-005 ORCNL PCB 1 FW92975 033-19298-001 ORCNR PCB 1 FW92986 033-19305-008 FUSE3 2 FW93057 033-19277-004 DUST FAN 1 1 FW92778 033-19278-000 DUST FAN 2 1

manuals4you.com



Front

8

4

2

13

7

1

3

16

17

018-0147-1017-0

Fig 1017 D

manuals4you.com



1017


1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT 1 FW92252 033-19251-005 PHOTOREFLECTOR 1 FW92513 033-19265-006 LIFT GEAR UNIT 1 FW9265

4 033-19266-002 LIFT WORM GEAR 1 FW92665 033-19269-001 MAIN MOTOR 1 FW92696 033-19270-000 SWBACK MOTOR 1 FW92707 033-19273-009 RESIST CLUTCH 2 FW92738 033-19274-005 PICKUP CLUTCH 2 FW92749 033-19275-001 DPX CLUTCH 1 FW9275

10 033-19276-008 DPX DRIVE GEAR 1 FW927611 033-19279-007 IDLER P 1 FW927912 033-19280-005 TIMING BELT R-P 1 FW928013 033-19281-001 TIMING BELT M-R 1 FW928114 033-19282-008 TIMING BELT M-C 1 FW928215 033-19283-004 TIMING BELT C-D 1 FW928316 033-19284-000 TIMING BELT DPX 1 FW9284

17 033-19254-0 ICRO SWITCH 1 FW9254

manuals4you.com



Fig 1018 PS7R

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

manuals4you.com



1018


1 101-51035-006 USB Cable; PS7R 12 101-52511-308 CD-ROM1.20;PS7R 13 101-52517-004 Dongle; PS7R(G) 1

4 490-40002-005 109P0412H358 15 101-50506-005 Joint PCB; PS7R 16 101-50504-002 Mainboad; PS7R 17 101-50505-009 Power Supply Unit; PS7R 18 101-53000-005 Power Switch Assy; PS7R 19 101-52001-008 DIMM168P128MB;PS7R 1

10 101-52513-009 HDD Unit; PS7R(G) 111 101-51036-002 HDD Harness; PS7R 112 101-11003-004 Bracket; HDD; PS7R 1

488-00054-004 Power Cable; PS7R 1 Attached in MPF Tray P

manuals4you.com


http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/14912842-rhdcpsrm-riso-hc5500-digital-color-printer-service-repair-manualdesbloqueado 493/496manuals4you.com



INDEX OF PARTS

manuals4you.com



Fig № Part Number Part Name

1003 25 030-04001-108 *Seal ; P-Feed Tray1003 1 030-14102-107 *Bottom Cover; P.-F.-T.1003 3 030-14113-109 *Support Plate R; P.-F.-T.1003 4 030-14114-105 *Support Plate F; P.-F.-T.1003 15 030-14115-101 *Guide R; P.-F-.T.1003 14 030-14116-108 *Guide F; P.-F.-T.

1003 17 030-14117-007 *Guide Shaft; Paper Guide1003 23 030-14119-000 *Slide Rack; P.-F.-T.1003 13 030-14123-007 *Fence Cover 1003 20 030-14124-003 *Slider R; Paper Guide1003 19 030-14126-006 *Slider F; Paper Guide1003 21 030-14129-005 *Lock A; Paper Guide1003 22 030-14130-003 *Lock B; Paper Guide1003 16 030-14131-107 *Lock Lever; Paper Guide1003 9 030-14132-006 *Bracket; P.-W. Potentiometer 1003 24 030-14133-002 *Collar; Slide Rack; P.-F.-T.1003 6 030-14134-106 *Stopper Roller 1003 5 030-14136-001 *Guide; Harness1003 26 030-14137-008 *Slide Sheet P.-F.-T.1003 27 030-14138-101 Cover F; P.-F.-T. Damper 1003 28 030-14139-108 Cover R; P.-F.-T. Damper

1003 11 030-51023-403 *Junction Harness; P.-F.-T.1003 10 030-51093-002 *P.-W. Potentiometer Ass'y II1003 2 033-12257-008 *Paper Feed Board1013 1 033-19202-004 PRINT HEAD1013 2 033-19203-000 HEAD DRIVER PCB1013 3 033-19204-007 RIBBON CABLE1013 4 033-19205-003 HEAD JOINT1013 5 033-19206-000 ID UNIT1013 6 033-19207-006 VALVE 11013 7 033-19208-002 VALVE 21012 1 033-19209-009 RESERVOIR K1012 2 033-19210-007 RESERVOIR C1012 3 033-19211-003 RESERVOIR M1012 4 033-19212-000 RESERVOIR Y

1012 5 033-19214-002 OVERFLOW TANK1012 6 033-19215-009 PRESS CHAMBER

1012 7 033-19216-005 PRESSURE PUMP

1012 8 033-19217-001 PHOTOINTERRUPT1004 1 033-19218-008 INK HOLDER1004 2 033-19219-004 BOTTLE JOINT K1004 3 033-19220-002 BOTTLE JOINT C1004 4 033-19221-009 BOTTLE JOINT M1004 5 033-19222-005 BOTTLE JOINT Y1004 6 033-19223-001 INFUSE SOLENOID1004 7 033-19224-008 IB COVER SWITCH1002 1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT1004 8 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT1007 3 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT1010 1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT

1014 1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT1015 7 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT1017 1 033-19225-004 PHOTOINTERRUPT1014 2 033-19226-000 CLEANING UNIT1014 3 033-19227-007 INK PAN MOTOR1014 4 033-19228-003 CLEANING MOTOR1014 5 033-19229-000 SUCTION HEAD1014 6 033-19230-008 ＣＡＰ

1014 7 033-19231-004 STAR WHEEL UNIT

manuals4you.com



Fig № Part Number Part Name

1014 8 033-19232-000 TORQUELIMITER1002 2 033-19233-007 SUCTION CHAMBER

1002 3 033-19234-003 SUCTION PUMP UNIT1002 4 033-19235-000 SUCTION TUBE1002 5 033-19236-006 PUMP FILTER1010 2 033-19237-002 EXIT UNIT

1010 3 033-19238-009 EXIT MOTOR UNIT1010 4 033-19239-005 WING MOTOR UNIT1010 5 033-19240-003 TIMING BELT1010 6 033-19241-000 SPONGE ROLLER1010 7 033-19242-006 WING FRONT1010 8 033-19243-002 WING REAR1001 1 033-19244-009 FLIPPER UNIT1001 2 033-19245-005 FLIPPER GATE1001 4 033-19247-008 FL ROLLER U1001 5 033-19248-004 FL ROLLER L1009 1 033-19249-000 STAR WHEEL DPX1009 2 033-19250-009 PHOTOREFLECT B1009 3 033-19251-005 PHOTOREFLECTOR1011 1 033-19251-005 PHOTOREFLECTOR1017 2 033-19251-005 PHOTOREFLECTOR

1009 4 033-19252-001 DPX ROLLER1009 5 033-19253-008 NIP ROLLER1011 2 033-19254-004 MICRO SWITCH1017 17 033-19254-004 MICRO SWITCH1006 1 033-19255-000 DUPLEX UNIT1006 2 033-19256-007 DUPLEX BELT U

14912842-RHDCPSRM-Riso Hc5500 Digital Color Printer Service Repair Manual.desbloqueado (1)

Documents